SM 3262i 4062i ENG Rev20 PDF

Service
Manual
Monochrome Copy
3262i
4062i
AK-740
DF-791 / DF-7120
DP-7100 / DP-7110 / DP-7120
DT-730(B)
MT-730(B)
PH-7A / PH-7C / PH-7D
PF-791 / PF-810
Fax System 12
Rev.: 2.0
Date: 25-04-2018
2V6SM062
>
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for
details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux
de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual

For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4 and black and white modes.
3262i : 32 ppm model

4062i : 40 ppm model
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Revision history
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 06/january/2018 page 2-48 Change: Contents of country code list
page 4-3 Correction: 302MV9406_ → 302V69411_

page 6-141 Correction: Face-up → Face-down
page 6-142
page 6-159 Change: Contents of country code list
2 22/March/2018 page 4-3 Change: Parts No of primary paper feed unit
page 5-3 Correction: USB folder structure

page 6-130 Correction: Description of setting of auto sleep
page 6-4 Correction: Delete the word "Duplex"
page 6-135
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety precautions
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

[CONFIDENTIAL]
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1 Specifications ................................................................................................ 1-1

1-1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
(1) Common functions .................................................................................................................................... 1-1
(2) Copy Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
(3) Printer Functions....................................................................................................................................... 1-3
(4) Scanner Functions .................................................................................................................................... 1-3
(5) Option ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
(5-1)Document Processor ........................................................................................................................ 1-4
(5-2)Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2) .......................................................................................................... 1-4
(5-3)Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet × 2) ........................................................................................ 1-4
(5-4)1,000-Sheet Finisher ........................................................................................................................ 1-5
(5-5)3,000-Sheet Finisher ........................................................................................................................ 1-5
(5-6)Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher option) ............................................................. 1-6
(5-7)Mailbox (3,000-Sheet Finisher option) ............................................................................................. 1-6
(5-8)FAX System (FAX System 12) ......................................................................................................... 1-7
1 - 2 Part Names ............................................................................................................................................... 1-9
(1) The main unit (Front side)......................................................................................................................... 1-9
(2) The main unit (Rear side) ....................................................................................................................... 1-11
(3) Operation Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1 - 3 Optional configuration ............................................................................................................................. 1-13
2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Environment.............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Unpacking and setting of the machine...................................................................................................... 2-2
(1) Default setting of the copy mode. ........................................................................................................... 2-12
(2) Optional unit installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-3 Installing the optional partst .................................................................................................................... 2-14
(1) SD/SDHC memory card.......................................................................................................................... 2-14
(2) Hard Disk (HD-12): Except 120 V in 32 ppm model ............................................................................... 2-15
(3) Installation of attaching Gigabit Ethernet extension kit ........................................................................... 2-18
(4) Wireless LAN interface installation ......................................................................................................... 2-18
(5) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) : Except 120 V model ............................................................................ 2-20
(6) Document table (DT-730(B)) .................................................................................................................. 2-22
(7) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110) .................................................................................................. 2-25
(8) USB keyboard (Except 100V model) ...................................................................................................... 2-28
(9) card reader installation .......................................................................................................................... 2-33
(10) Handset attaching ................................................................................................................................... 2-36
(10-1)When attaching the main unit directly .......................................................................................... 2-36
(10-2)In case installing the document table ........................................................................................... 2-40
2 - 4 About Optional Applications.................................................................................................................... 2-47
2 - 5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system ........................................................................... 2-48
3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view.................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2 Electrical parts layout................................................................................................................................ 3-2
(1) PWBs ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
(2) Switches and sensors ............................................................................................................................... 3-5
(3) Motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
(4) Others ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3 - 3 Paper feed/conveying section................................................................................................................. 3-11

(1) Cassette paper feed section ................................................................................................................... 3-11
(2) MP tray paper feed section ..................................................................................................................... 3-13
(3) Conveying section .................................................................................................................................. 3-14
3 - 4 Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3 - 5 Developing section ................................................................................................................................. 3-17
3 - 6 Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 3-19
(1) Image scanner section............................................................................................................................ 3-19
(2) Laser scanner section............................................................................................................................. 3-21
3 - 7 Transfer/Separation section.................................................................................................................... 3-22
3 - 8 Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3 - 9 Eject/Feedshift section............................................................................................................................ 3-25
3 - 10 Duplex conveying section ....................................................................................................................... 3-27
4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ............................................................................................................ 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container .................................................................................................................. 4-1
(4) How to tell a genuine toner container ......................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
(1) List of maintenance parts.......................................................................................................................... 4-3
(2) Maintenance kits ....................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Periodic maintenance procedures ............................................................................................................ 4-5
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................................ 4-7
(1) Paper feed section .................................................................................................................................... 4-7
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the primary paper feed unit ...................................................................... 4-7
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the MP paper feed roller and MP separation pad ..................................... 4-9
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the registration cleaner ........................................................................... 4-11
(2) Developer section ................................................................................................................................... 4-14
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit ................................................................................ 4-14
(3) Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 4-17
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit ....................................................................................... 4-17
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the charger roller unit ............................................................................. 4-20
(4) Transfer/Separation section.................................................................................................................... 4-21
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the transfer roller unit ............................................................................. 4-21
(5) Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 4-22
(5-1)Detaching and attaching the fuser unit ........................................................................................... 4-22
4 - 5 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures............................................................................................. 4-23
(1) Outer covers ........................................................................................................................................... 4-23
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the front cover ........................................................................................ 4-23
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the rear upper cover ............................................................................... 4-25
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the rear lower cover ................................................................................ 4-26
(1-4)Detaching and attaching the inner tray .......................................................................................... 4-27
(1-5)Detaching and attaching the front upper cover .............................................................................. 4-30
(1-6)Detaching and attaching the exit rear cover ................................................................................... 4-31
(1-7)Detaching and refitting the exit rear cover ..................................................................................... 4-32
(2) Drive section ........................................................................................................................................... 4-33
(2-1)Detaching and attaching the drive unit 1 ........................................................................................ 4-33
(2-2)Detaching and attaching the drive unit 2 ........................................................................................ 4-35
(2-3)Detaching and attaching the fuser press release motor assy ........................................................ 4-37
(3) Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 4-38
(3-1)Detaching and attaching the Laser Scanner Unit (LSU) ................................................................ 4-38
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the lens unit ............................................................................................ 4-42
(3-3)Detaching and attaching the lamp unit ........................................................................................... 4-45
(4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires......................................................................................... 4-48
(4-1)Detaching the scanner wires .......................................................................................................... 4-48
(4-2)Fitting the scanner wires ................................................................................................................ 4-59
(5) PWBs ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ..................................................................................... 4-63

(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB .................................................................................. 4-68
(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the low voltage power source PWB .................................................... 4-73
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB .......................................................................... 4-75
(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB 1 ................................................................. 4-79
(6) Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-86
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the SSD ............................................................................................... 4-86
(6-2)Detaching and attaching the MP tray ............................................................................................. 4-89
(6-3)Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit ............................................................................... 4-91
(6-4)Detaching and reattaching the conveying fan motor. ..................................................................... 4-94
(6-5)Detaching and attaching the LSU fan motor .................................................................................. 4-96
(6-6)Detaching and attaching the developer fan motor ......................................................................... 4-99
(6-7)Detaching and attaching the power souce fan motor ................................................................... 4-100
(7) Direction of installing the principal fan motors ...................................................................................... 4-101
5 Firmware ........................................................................................................ 5-1

5 - 1 Firmware update ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode ........................................................................................ 6-1

6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing the maintenance mode ............................................................................................................ 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ........................................................................................................................... 6-2
(3) Content of each maintenance mode ......................................................................................................... 6-6
7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 7-1

7 - 1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure .............................................................................................................. 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP,
or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP) .......................................................... 7-2
(2-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-2)Colored background ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-3)Black or color spots .......................................................................................................................... 7-5
(2-4)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................... 7-5
(2-5)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) .............................................................................................. 7-6
(2-6)Vertical streaks, band (white) ........................................................................................................... 7-7
(2-7)Missing entire image (White / Black) ................................................................................................ 7-7
(2-8)Blurred image ................................................................................................................................... 7-7
(2-9)Image is missing partly ..................................................................................................................... 7-8
(2-10)Entire image is light ........................................................................................................................ 7-8
(2-11)Mismatch between the original center line and output image center line (1st side) ....................... 7-9
(2-12)Mismatch between the original center line and output image center line (2nd side) ...................... 7-9
(2-13)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image (1st side) ........... 7-10
(2-14)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image (2nd side) .......... 7-10
(2-15)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-10
(2-16)Blurred characters ........................................................................................................................ 7-11
(2-17)Color shift ..................................................................................................................................... 7-12
(2-18)Moiré ............................................................................................................................................ 7-12
(2-19)Image is dark partly or light .......................................................................................................... 7-13
(3) Scanner Factors (When scanning the back side through DP) ................................................................ 7-14
(3-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................. 7-16
(3-2)Colored background ....................................................................................................................... 7-16
(3-3)Black or color spots ........................................................................................................................ 7-17
(3-4)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................. 7-17
(3-5)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) ............................................................................................ 7-18
(3-6)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................................................... 7-18
(3-7)Missing entire image (White / Black) .............................................................................................. 7-19
(3-8)Blurred image ................................................................................................................................. 7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3-9)Image is missing partly ................................................................................................................... 7-20

(3-10)Entire image is light ...................................................................................................................... 7-20
(3-11)Mismatch between the original center line and output image center line ..................................... 7-21
(3-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image ........................... 7-21
(3-13)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-21
(3-14)Color shift ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22
(3-15)Moiré ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22
(4) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass) ......................................................................... 7-24
(4-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................. 7-26
(4-2)Colored background ....................................................................................................................... 7-26
(4-3)Black dots ....................................................................................................................................... 7-26
(4-4)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................. 7-27
(4-5)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) ............................................................................................ 7-27
(4-6)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................................................... 7-28
(4-7)No image comes out (White or Black) ............................................................................................ 7-28
(4-8)Blurred image ................................................................................................................................. 7-28
(4-11)Center of the original and output image is inconsistent ............................................................... 7-30
(4-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image ........................... 7-30
(4-13)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-30
(4-15)Moiré ............................................................................................................................................ 7-31
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation) ........................................... 7-33
(5-1)Black dots (toner dirt) ..................................................................................................................... 7-34
(5-2)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black) ......................................................................................... 7-35
(5-3)Vertical streaks or bands ................................................................................................................ 7-35
(5-4)Blank image ................................................................................................................................... 7-36
(5-5)Blurred image ................................................................................................................................. 7-36
(5-6)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots) ........................................................................ 7-36
(5-8)Center of the original and output image is inconsistent ................................................................. 7-37
(5-9)Irregular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image
(paper leading edge timing variation) .................................................................................................... 7-37
(5-10)Paper skew at the trailing edge .................................................................................................... 7-37
(5-12)Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 7-38
(5-13)Uneven transfer ............................................................................................................................ 7-39
(5-14)Dirty reverse side ......................................................................................................................... 7-39
(5-15)Fusing failure ................................................................................................................................ 7-39
(5-16)Trailing image ............................................................................................................................... 7-40
(6) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)................................................................................................... 7-41
(6-1)Background image is foggy. ........................................................................................................... 7-43
(6-4)No image comes out (Black) .......................................................................................................... 7-44
(6-5)Blank image ................................................................................................................................... 7-44
(6-7)Blurred image ................................................................................................................................. 7-45
(6-11)Periodic toner dirt ......................................................................................................................... 7-46
(6-12)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black) ....................................................................................... 7-47
(6-13)Vertical streaks and bands (black) ............................................................................................... 7-47
(6-14)Vertical streaks, band (white) ....................................................................................................... 7-47
(6-15)Horizontal uneven density ............................................................................................................ 7-48
(6-16)Vertical uneven density ................................................................................................................ 7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6-17)Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 7-48

(6-18)Gradation reproducibility is low .................................................................................................... 7-49
(6-19)Trailing image ............................................................................................................................... 7-49
7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................................... 7-50
(1) Prior standard check items ..................................................................................................................... 7-50
(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ................................................................................... 7-50
(1-2)Paper jam from paper factor .......................................................................................................... 7-50
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl .......... 7-51
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide ............................................................................................................ 7-51
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette ..................................................... 7-51
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper ................................................................................................ 7-51
(1-7)Paper jam from the factor of conveying roller, motor or clutch ....................................................... 7-52
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor .......................................................................................................... 7-52
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure .............................................................................. 7-52
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity .......................................................................................... 7-53
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.) ..................................................................................... 7-53
(2) Paper misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................... 7-54
(2-1)Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 7-54
(3) Paper misfeed detection component ...................................................................................................... 7-55
7-3 Self Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................ 7-64
(1) Self diagnostic error codes ..................................................................................................................... 7-64
(1-1)Error codes list ............................................................................................................................... 7-64
(1-2)Content of Self Diagnostic .............................................................................................................. 7-67
(2) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline................................................................................................................ 7-123
(2-1)System Error code list .................................................................................................................. 7-123
(2-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ..................................................................................... 7-123
(2-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ....................................................................................................... 7-127
7-4 FAX Related Errors.............................................................................................................................. 7-135
(1) FAX....................................................................................................................................................... 7-135
(1-1)C0030: FAX PWB system error ................................................................................................... 7-135
(1-2)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ........................................................................... 7-135
(1-3)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error ................................................................ 7-135
(1-4)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ........................................................................... 7-136
(1-5)C0920: FAX file system error ....................................................................................................... 7-136
(1-6)The FAX cannot be sent .............................................................................................................. 7-136
(1-7)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished .......................................................... 7-137
(1-8)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted,
all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data ............................................................................................ 7-137
(2) FAX Error code ..................................................................................................................................... 7-138
7-5 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................................. 7-158
(1) Send ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-158
(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name
or the security software settings .......................................................................................................... 7-158
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear ....................................................................................... 7-158
(1-3)The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent .................................................. 7-158
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes) ............................................................................................................... 7-159
(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes ......................................................................................................... 7-159
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 7-163
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes ............................................................................................................ 7-167
7-6 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................... 7-169
(1) 'Check the document processor' is displayed ....................................................................................... 7-169
(2) 'Error occurred in cassette X' is displayed even after removing/inserting the cassette
and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit (Cassette 1, 2) ............................................ 7-170
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover ........................................................... 7-171
(6) The cover open message remains after closing the front cover ........................................................... 7-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(7) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray........................................ 7-172
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed ................... 7-172
7-7 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................................... 7-173
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)............................................................................................................ 7-173
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section ............................................................................ 7-174
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section ........................................................................................ 7-174
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor .................................................................................... 7-174
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section .................................................................................................. 7-175
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy .............................................................................................................. 7-175
(7) Abnormal sound from the paper feed section ....................................................................................... 7-175
(8) Abnormal sound from the MP feed section........................................................................................... 7-175
(9) Abnormal sound from the fuser exit section ......................................................................................... 7-176
(10) Abnormal sound from the fuser section ................................................................................................ 7-176
(11) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ............................................................................................ 7-176
(14) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit ................................................................................... 7-177
7-8 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 7-178
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed.................................................. 7-178
(2) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch .......................................................... 7-179
(3) No display in the operation panel ......................................................................................................... 7-179
(4) The operation panel remains displaying 'WELCOME' and does not change........................................ 7-179
(5) The login fails with other than the ID card ............................................................................................ 7-180
8 PWBs .............................................................................................................. 8-1

8 - 1 PWB description ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-1)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-2)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................................................. 8-2
(2) Engine PWB ............................................................................................................................................. 8-9
(2-1)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
(2-2)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-9
(2-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-10
(3) Operation panel PWB 1 .......................................................................................................................... 8-20
(3-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-20
(3-2)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-20
(3-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-21
(4) Power supply PWB ................................................................................................................................. 8-25
(4-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-25
(4-2)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-25
(4-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-26
9 Appendixes .................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-1
(1) Repetitive defects gauge .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2 Firmware environment commands ........................................................................................................... 9-2
9-3 Chart of image adjustment procedures..................................................................................................... 9-8
9-4 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9-5 Installation Guide .................................................................................................................................... 9-16
(1) DP-7100
(2) DP-7110
(3) DP-7120
(4) PF-791
(5) PF-810
(6) DF-791
(7) DF-7120
(8) AK-740
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(9) MT-730
(10) PH-7A/C/D
(11) FAX System 12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specifications > Specifications
1Specifications
1 - 1 Specifications
(1) Common functions
Items Specifications
32 ppm model 40 ppm model
Type Desktop
Printing Method Dry static electric transfer (laser)
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2
Multi Purpose 45 to 256 g/m2 (Less than A4/Letter), 209.5 g/m2(Postal card)
Tray 52 to 163 g/m2 (lager than A4/Letter)
Media type Cassette Plain, Thin, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, High Quality, Custom, (Duplex:Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Thin, Labels, Recycled,Preprinted, Bond,
Tray Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched,Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality,
Custom
Paper Size Cassette A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Multi Purpose A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger
Tray Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K,ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelop C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4(98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432 mm)
Printable Area The point 3±2.5 mm, The back point 3±2.5 mm,
left/right less than 4 mm or 5+1.5/-2mm (100V model A6R only)
Warm-up Time Power on 18 seconds or less
(23°C, 60%RH) Low Power 10 seconds or less
Sleep 15 seconds or less 12 seconds or less
2)
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m *1
500 sheets (80 g/m2) *1
Multi Purpose 100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(80 g/m2)
Tray 25 sheets (lager size than A4/Letter)(80 g/m2)
Output paper Inner Tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
tray Job separator 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Light source White LED

Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Image Write System Semiconductor laser system
Charging system AC+DC charger roller system
Developer system Monocomponent jumping developer system
Toner supply system: Automatic replenishing from the toner container
Transfer system Transfer roller system
Separation system Small diameter separation and separation needle (Impressing DC voltage)
Cleaning system Counter blade system
Charge erasing system Exposure by eraser (LED)
Fusing system Heat and pressure fusing with the heat roller and the press roller
Heat source: halogen heater
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
Memory 2.0GB
1-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Large capacity 120V model SSD 8GB + HDD 320GB SSD 8GB + HDD 320GB
storage Except 120V SSD 32GB/ (HDD 320GB: option)
Inter Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Interface Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
Option eKUIO: 2 *2
Fax: 2 *3
Wireless LAN: 1
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Environment Humidity 10 to 80%RH
Above the sea 3,500m/11,482 ft maximum
level
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimensions 594 × 696 × 683mm / 23.39” × 27.4” × 26.89”
Dimension (W × D × H)
Weight Approx. 58kg / 127.9 lb (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D) 873 × 696mm / 31.82" × 19.97" (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 100V AC, 50/60Hz,13.0A
AC110V, 60Hz,12.5A
120V AC, 60Hz,11.6A
220-240V AC, 50/60Hz, 6.3A
*1: *1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2: *2: When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*3: When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
(2) Copy Functions

Copy Speed A4/Letter 32 sheets/min 40 sheets/min
A4R/Letter R 23 sheets/min 29 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 17 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B4/Legal 17 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B5 32 sheets/min 40 sheets/min
B5R 20 sheets/min 23 sheets/min
A5R 15 sheets/min 18 sheets/min
*1 Less than 3.6 seconds *1
First Copy Time Less than 4.3 seconds
(The main unit cassette paper
feed, A4)
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%,
25%
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed
*1: Except the system safety time after the main power switches on
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Printer Functions

Printing Speed A4/Letter 32 sheets/min 40 sheets/min
A4R/Letter R 23 sheets/min 29 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 17 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B4/Legal 17 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B5 32 sheets/min 40 sheets/min
B5R 20 sheets/min 23 sheets/min
A5R 15 sheets/min 18 sheets/min
*1 Less than 4.2 seconds *1
First Print Time Less than 4.9 seconds
(The main unit cassette paper
feed, A4)
Resolution 600dpi, 1200dpi
Operating System Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows
Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016
Mac OS X v10.5 or more
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 302.3az supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL/PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open XPS
*1: Except the system safety time after the main power switches on
(4) Scanner Functions

Resolution 300 dpi × 300 dpi (Default), 200 dpi × 200 dpi, 200 dpi × 100 dpi
600 dpi × 600 dpi, 400 dpi × 400 dpi, 200 dpi × 400 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High compressive
PDF/OCR Text Recognition PDF(Option))
The consecutive originals 1-side: B/W 80 images/min, Color 80 Images/min
Reading velocity *1 2-sided: B/W 160 Images/min, Color 160 Images/min
(A4, 300 dpi, Image quality Text/
Photo mode)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Network protocol TCP/IP
Transmission Protocol SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN scanning)
*2 Available OS: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008, R2/Windows 7/
Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) Option
(5-1)Document Processor
Automatic 2-Sided dual scan
Type DP-7100 DP-7120 DP-7110
Document feed method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized: 297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: Minimum: Minimum:
A6-R/Statement-R A5-R/Statement-R A6-R/Statement-R
(105 × 148 mm) (140 × 182 mm) (105 × 148 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m²
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m²
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 50 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2)*1 (50 to 80 g/m2)*1 (50 to 80 g/m2)*1
Dimensions 593 × 531 × 138.5 mm / 600 × 502 × 128 mm / 600 × 513 × 170 mm /
Dimension (W × D × H) 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46" 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46" 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46"
Weight Approx. 9 kg /19.84 lb Approx. 7.3 kg /16.09 lb Approx. 14.5 kg /31.97 lb
(5-2)Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Paper Supply system Feed & reverse roller system
(Store Sheets: 550 sheets(64 g/m²)×2 cassettes / 500 sheets(80g/m²)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, Oficio II,Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick
Dimensions 590 × 589 × 332 mm /23.23” × 23.19” × 13.07”
Weight Approx. 20 kg /44.09 lb
(5-3)Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet × 2)

Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller system
(Store Sheets: 3,500 sheets(64 g/m²) / 3.000 sheets(80g/m²))
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick
Dimensions 590 × 626.9 × 332 mm /23.23” × 24.68” × 13.07”
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-4)1,000-Sheet Finisher
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size Finisher A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R
(80 g/m2) Tray Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
(When no A4-R, A4, B5, B6-R, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
stapling)
Paper thickness When stapling: 90 g/m² or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
sheets to limit Legal, Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom
Dimensions 548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm /21.57”× 24.35” × 41.34”
Weight Approx. 30 kg or less /66.14 lb or less
Machine space measure (W × D) 666 × 618.5 mm /26.22” × 24.35” (with the tray pulled out)
(5-5)3,000-Sheet Finisher
Number of Trays 2 tray
Paper Size Tray A A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R:
(80 g/m2) (Non-Stapling) 1,500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 3,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4. A5-R, A6, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter,
Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K,ISO B5, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432
mm): 200 sheets
Paper thickness When stapling: 90 g/m² or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340mm, Ledger, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
sheets to limit Legal, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R 2 cover sheet only (106 to 256 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 70 sheets (52 to 74 g/m²)
65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m²)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 256 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom
Dimensions 607.2 × 668.5 × 951.3 mm /23.91”× 26.32” × 37.45”
Weight Approx. 40 kg or less /88.18 lb or less
Machine space measure 725 × 668.5 mm /28.54” × 26.32” (with the tray pulled out)
(W × D)
1-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-6)Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher option)

Utilized possible paper size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Paper thickness 45 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
(5-7)Mailbox (3,000-Sheet Finisher option)

Number of Trays 7 trays
Paper Size(80 g/m²) A3, B4, Ledger, Legal: 50 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,
Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Dimensions 510 × 400 × 470 mm / 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"
(W × D × H)
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-8)FAX System (FAX System 12)

Item Specifications
Intercommunication G3
Applicable line Subscriber telephone line

Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/
7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original size Max. width: Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm/63"
Number of originals to auto Max. 270 sheets (with optional document processor)
feed
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
600 × 600 dpi
Print: 600 × 600 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 1000 keys
Broadcast TX Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of
100 stations for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Memory capacity for the image Standard memory (170MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
accumulation
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Option Hand set, Multi port, internet FAX kit
Network FAX functions

Item Specifications
Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer
Interface 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T
Operating system Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2016
TX resolution Ultra fine (400 × 400dpi), Fine (200 × 200dpi), Normal (100 × 200dpi), 600 ×
600dpi
Original size Letter, Legal, Ledger (11x17), Statement, A3, A4, A5, Folio, B4, B5(JIS)
Time specified TX Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)
Simultaneous output Possible output on the main unit at the same time as FAX TX
Sequential broadcast TX Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100
stations for i-Fax)
1-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Item Specifications
Job Accounting Register the login user name and password in the Network FAX driver setting
when [User] is set on the main unit.
Register the account ID in the Network FAX driver setting when [Job accounting]
is set on the main unit.
Cover Page It is possible to select format and create template in the Network FAX driver.
(The specification is to change for efficiency improvement without notice.)
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specifications > Part Names
1 - 2 Part Names
(1) The main unit (Front side)
9
8
3
1
10
11
5
6 4
2 2
1 Cassette 7 Inner Tray

2 Paper Width Guides 8 Operation Panel
3 Paper Length Guide 9 USB Memory Slot
4 MP Tray 10 Main Power Switch
5 MP sub tray 11 Power switch
6 MP Paper Width Guides
1-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23 21
20 22 25 24
19
13
13
17
18
14
15
16
12
12 Toner waste box 19 Fuser unit

13 Toner waste box (Spare) 20 Toner Container
14 Front Cover 21 Drum unit
15 Right Cover 1 22 Developer unit
16 Right Cover 2 23 Toner Container lever
17 Transfer roller 24 Developer Stopper
18 Diverge guide 25 Developer lever
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) The main unit (Rear side)
26
27
31
28 29 30
36
34 32
35
33
26 DP link connector cover 32 Option Interface Slot

Slot 1
27 Scanner lock cover
33 Network interface
28 Coin vendor connector
Connectors
29 Cassette heater switch
34 USB port
30 Inlet connector
35 USB Interface Connector
31 Option Interface
36 SD card slot
Slot 2
1-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Operation Panel
4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.
2 [Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.
3 Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be
registered.
4 [Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.
5 [Accessibility Display] key: Switches the touch panel display on the Copy screen and the Send screen to
a magnified view.
6 [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
7 [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.
8 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
9 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
10 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
11 [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
12 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user
(i.e. log out).
13 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
14 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
15 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory
(general purpose item).
16 [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
17 Touch Panel: Displays the icons here and configures machine settings.
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specifications > Optional configuration
1 - 3 Optional configuration
(1) DP-7110 (1) DP-7100 (1) DP-7120

(2) MT-730(B)
(1) PLATEN COVER

TYPE E
(3) DF-791
(8) NK-7100
NK-7110 *2
(4) DF-7120
(5) PH-7B
(6) PF-791 *1 (7) PF-810 *1
*1: In case of attaching the next option, it needs to attach the metal fitting of the fall prevention : PF-791, PF-810
*2: Only 120 V model: NK-7110
1-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specifications > Optional configuration
(9) Card Authentication kit (B)
(10) FAX System 12 (13) IB-35 *3 (15) DT-730(B)
(11) IB-50 (14) HD-12 *4
Software option
(16) Internet FAX Kit(A)
(17) Data Security Kit(E)
(18) UG-33
(12) IB-51
(19) UG-34
(20) Scan extension kit(A)
*3: Except 120 V model, *4: Except 120 V in 32 ppm model
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Environment
2Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1 Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5 °C)
2 Humidity: 15 to 80%RH
3 Usable power source: 100V AC 13.0A / 120V AC 11.6A / 220-240V AC 6.3A
4 Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
Avoid the place exposed direct sunlight and the strong lightning. Don't expose the photoreceptor to the direct sunlight
and the strong lightning in case of the paper jam.
Avoid the locations where high temperature and humidity, low temperature and humidity and the surrounding
temperature of the machine rapidly change or the locations where cool wind and hot wind expose directly.
Avoid the locations with dust and much vibration.
When setting on the stand, use the stand which can sufficiently endure in the machine weight.
Set the horizontal location. (Horizontal degree: Left and right front and rear are 5mm or less, Twisting is 3mm or less.)
Avoid the locations where the substances which can be transformed the machine and the photoreceptor (the gas and
the chlorine-based organic solvents that the vapor which the mercury, acid and alkali are, the inorganic gas, NOx and
SOx ) are drifting.
Select the good ventilated location.
Set the space which needed for the operation and the maintenance of the machine as following.
400 mm or more
300 mm or more 350 mm or more 1000 mm or more 100 mm or more
2-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Unpacking and setting of the machine
2 - 2 Unpacking and setting of the machine

Installation procedures
Start
Connect the power cord

Unpack
Execution of initial-setting operation

Install the optional paper feeder
Execution of mentenance item U952

Load paper
Set cassette heater control

Install the toner container (maintenance item U327)
Switch the cassette heater switch Setting the delivery date

(maintenance item U278)
Attaching the language label
(Excluding 240V AC) Output an own-status report
Install the other optional devices
Clearing the counter
Release the scanner lock
Exit maintenance mode
Print out the user setting list
Make test copies
Completion of the machine installation
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine unpacking
Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.
17
13
14
13 13
15 12
16 19 18
13
10
11
6 4
5
1
9 20
2
7 8 2 3
1 Skid 8 Plastic bag 15 Main unit

2 Hinge 9 Accessory box 16 Plastic bag
3 Bottom pad right front 10 Inner pad front left 17 Upper pad
4 Bottom pad right rear 11 Inner pad front right 18 Install guide etc.
5 Bottom pad left front 12 Inner pad rear 19 Plastic bag
6 Bottom pad left rear 13 Stay 20 Power cord
7 Bottom pad center 14 Outer case
Note: Make sure to install the main unit on a horizontal locations.
2-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Paper Feeder installment
1 In case of attaching the operational paper feed, install it.

Refer the setting procedure of paper feed if you want to see the detail.
Main body
Paper feeder
Loading Paper
1 Pull out the paper storage bag.
2 Hold the switch knob of the wide size, adjust the paper width guide on the paper width.
Paper
preservation bag
Paper width
adjusting tab
Cassette
Paper width guides
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Adjust the paper length guide on the paper length.
Paper length guide
4 Set the paper in the cassette
5 Insert the cassette size plate.
6 Push in quietly the cassette.
Paper
Cassette
Cassette
size plate
2-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Toner Container installment
1 Open the front cover.
2 Turn the toner container vertically, beat the upper section more than five times.
3 Reverse high and low, beat the upper section more than five times.
Toner container
4 Turn the toner container vertically, shake the upper section more than five times.
5 Reverse high and low, shake the upper section more than five times.
Toner container
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Shake the toner container in sideways five or six times.
Toner container
7 Push in the toner container along the guide of the main unit.
Push in the back till being locked.
CLICK!
Toner container
2-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The change of Cassette heater switch
1 Remove the cover of the cassette heater switch.
2 Change the cassette heater switch.

* In case of only using the cassette heater switch, switch ON.
3 Attach the removed switch cover.
Cassette heater switch

Switch cover
In case of changing the switch, execute the maintenance mode U0327 after inputing the power source.
1 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys and set the maintenance mode.
2 Input "327" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3 Select [On] or [Off] and press the [Start] key.
4 Press the [Stop] key.
Precaution for Loading Paper

• If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
The other optional equipment
In case of installing the other optional equipment (finisher, fax kit, etc), install respectively.
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The release of the scanner lock
1 Remove the scanner lock cover with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
2 Reinstall the cover in the opposite direction, so both arrows face each other.
• Release the lock of the scanner unit.
• If not releasing the lock, the error message (C3100) is displayed when inputting the power source.
Scanner lock
cover
Flat screw
driver
Scanner lock
cover
[Locked] [Released]
Connecting the Power Cord
1 Connect the power cord to the main unit and the outlet.
2 Fix the ground terminal of the power cord to the ground near the outlet by the screw.
Wall ooutlet
Power code
2-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The execution of toner installment
1 Turn the main power switch ON. The toner install is started.
• * It takes about ten minutes till the state which is to be able to copy in the initial power ON.
2 If the toner installation completes, the drive stops.
The execution of Maintenance mode U952
3 Select the [Execute] function.
4 Select [Full] and press the [Start] key.
• When executing this simulation, the execution history is recorded.

• Include the following clause in the maintenance mode U952 [SETUP].
If not executing the U952, set it in the following procedures.
[Cassette heater control setting(the execution of the maintenance mode U327)]
3 Select "On".
4 Press the [Start] key and determine the setting.
[Setting the machine delivery date (Execution of the maintenance mode U278)]
2 Select "Today".
3 Press the [Start] key and set the machine delivery date.
[Output the status report (Execution of the maintenance mode U000)]
2 Select [Maintenance], press the [Start] key and output the status report.
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Clearing the counts (Execution of the maintenance mode U927)]
2 Select the [Execute] function.
3 Press the [Start] key and clear the counts.
Release of the maintenance mode
Output each kind of setting report for user,
1 Select "report output" from the system menu and can output each setting report of the user.
The execution of the test copy.
1 Set the originals and test a copy.
Install completion of the main unit.
2-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1) Default setting of the copy mode.

The machine in case of the factory shipment is set as following.
The maintenance mode Contents Default setting in the

No. factory shipping
U250 The setting or the clear of the maintenance counts 600000
preset value 0
300000
300000
300000
300000
U251 The setting or the clear of the maintenance counts 0/0/0/0/0/0
value
U252 Destination setting Destination
U253 The setting of the double or the single counts DBL(A3/Ledger)
U260 Switch of the counts of the paper feeding or the Eject
paper ejection
U265 Destination setting -
U278 The setting of the delivery date -
U285 The setting of the service status page On
U286 Optional language setting 0/0/0/0/0
U287 Automatically function Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
U326 The setting of the black streaks clear display On/8
U327 Cassette heater control setting Off
U332 The size coefficient setting
Rate 1.0
U340 The application mode
Image 0
Copy 10
Printer -
U341 The setting of the exclusive printer cassette tray. Off/Off/Off/Off
U343 The dual prior mode setting Off
U345 Display setting of the close inspection 0
U346 The sleep operation setting On
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Optional unit installation

Install necessary optional units in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
Category Product name 40 ppm model 32 ppm model Page
DP DP-7100 / (Document processor) ○ ○ 9-16
DP-7110 / (Document processor) ○ ○ 9-17
DP-7120 / (Document processor) ○ ○ 9-18
PF PF-791 / (500 x 2 Paper feeder) ○ ○ 9-19
PF-810 / (3000-sheet deck) ○ ○ 9-20
DF DF-791 / (3000-sheet finisher) ○ ○ 9-21
DF-7120 / (1000-sheet finisher) ○ ○ 9-22
AK-740 / (Bridge unit) ○ ○ 9-23
MT-730 / (Mailbox) ○ ○ 9-24
PH-7A/C/D / (Punch unit) ○ ○ 9-25
FAX kit FAX System 12 ○ ○ 9-26
2-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional partst
2 - 3 Installing the optional partst

(1) SD/SDHC memory card
Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read into the main unit after turning the power on.
SD/SDHC memory card installation
1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
• Before inserting the memory card, make sure that the power switch is turned off.
2 Remove the screw (M3x8).
3 Release the hook in the direction of the arrow and then remove the SD card cover.
Hook
Screw
SD cover
4 Install an SD/SDHC memory card in the memory card slot.
Memory card slot
SD/SDHC
memory card
5 Reattach the covers.
Formatting an SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC card, you must first format it.
• Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card.
• If you have installed an application, do not format the SD card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD
card.
• Format it with a PC or Prescribe command in advance.
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Hard Disk (HD-12): Except 120 V in 32 ppm model
Installation of the hard disk requires the following parts.

Parts Number Parts number
Hard Disk (HD-12) 1 1503RS0UN0 (Product)
2 Detach three screws.
3 Open the upper section of the rear upper cover and detach in the direction of the arrow.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Important
Check two gaskets are affixed to the hard disk mounting plate before installing it.
Hard disk mounting plate
Gasket
Gasket
2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Connect two connectors of the cables to the hard disk.
5 Latch two hooks on the aperture and attach the hard disk with four screws (M3x8).
Hook
Screw
Screw
aperture
Screw Connectors
Screw
Hard disk
6 Connect two connectors of the hard disk to two connectors of the main PWB.
7 Fix the wire with three wire saddles.
Wire saddles
Connectors
Main PWB
8 Reattach the parts in the original position.

• When installing a new HDD, it is automatically formatted at the first start-up.
• The memory LED blinks when forming a preview image in an HDD after restart if data exists in the FAX box.
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Formatting a hard disk

• Please follow the procedure as necessary.
1 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
3 Select [Format].
4 Select [Full].
5 Select [Execute].
6 Press the [Start] key to initialize.
7 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
• When an optional HDD is inserted into the main unit for the first time, it must be formatted before use.
• Formatting will delete all existing data on the HDD.
2-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Installation of attaching Gigabit Ethernet extension kit
Giga Ethernet extention kit installation requires the following parts.

Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50) 1 1505JV0UN0 (Product)
(4) Wireless LAN interface installation

Wireless LAN interface installation requires the following parts.
Wireless LAN interface kit (IB-51) 1 1505J50UN0 (Product)
1 After checking to press the power source key, put out the power source lamp and memory lamp, turn the main
power switch OFF and unplug the power plug.
2 Detach two pins, remove the OPT2 slot cover.
Slot cover
Pin
OPT2
Pin
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Insert the kit PWB along the OPT2 gulf, fix to two pins which detached in step 2.
• Do not touch directly to the terminal of the kit PWB.
• In case of inserting the kit PWB, hold the top and bottom or the protuberance of the PWB.
Gigabit ethernet board
Pin
Pin
Gloove
4 Insert the LAN cable into the interface connctor.
LAN cable
2-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) : Except 120 V model
Wireless LAN interface installation requires the following parts.

Wireless LAN interface kit (IB-35) 1 1503RR0UN0 (Product)
Bundled parts of Wireless LAN interface

PWB unit 1 pc
Screw (M3x8) 1 pc
3 Open the upper section of the rear upper cover and detach in the direction of the arrow.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
4 Slide the controller box cover in sideways, remove it.
Controller box cover
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Insert the connector of WiFi PWB into the controller box.
6 Connect the WiFi PWB connector into the main PWB connector.
• Insert the connector while aligning the white part of the main PWB to the outer shape of the connector holder
WiFi PWB
Connector
Connector of main PWB

Connnector holder
White part
Connector of main PWB
7 Attach the WiFi PWB by using one screw.
8 Reattach the removed parts in the original position.
Screw
2-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6) Document table (DT-730(B))
Document table installation requires the following parts.

Document table (DT-730(B)) 1 1902LC0UN2 (Product)
Bundled parts of Document table

Tray stay 1 pc
Tray mounting plate 1 pc
Tray cover 1 pc
Tray lower cover 1 pc
Tray fixing plate 1 pc
Sheet 2 pc
Pin 2 pc
Nut M4 *1 2 pc
Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head)7 pc
Screw (M4x14 screw with the binding head)2 pc
*1: Not used in this model.
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Attach the tray stay by using two screws.
Tray stay
Screw
Screw
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Insert the mounting plate into the tray stay by using two screws.
Screw
Tray stay Tray mounting
Screw plate
4 Attach the tray cover to the tray stay by using four screws.
Screws
Screws
Tray cover
Tray stay
2-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Attach the tray lower cover.
6 Fix the tray lower cover by using two pins.
B
A
Tray lower cover B
Screw
Screw
7 Affix the two sheets on the document table.
Sheet
Sheet
A
A
B
B A
B
B
Document table
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110)
Numeric Keypad installation requires the following parts.

Numeric Keypad (NK-7100) *1 1 1903RT0UN0 (Product)
Numeric Keypad (NK-7110) *2 1 1903RT0US0 (Product)
*1: Except KDA, *2: KDA only
Bundled parts of Numeric Keypad

Numeric Keypad 1 pc
Numeric Keypad cover1 pc
Screw (M3x8) 2 pc
Label 1 pc
*:NK-7100 only
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove one screw from the operation unit.
3. Release two hooks, and then remove the operation unit lid in the direction of the arrow.
Hook
Screw
Operation unit
Hook Operation unit lid
2-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Connect the connector of the numeric keypad to the connector of the operation unit.
Operation unit connector
Connector Numeric keypad
2 Latch two hooks on the cut-out of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad by using two screws.
Hooks
Screw
Numeric keypad
Numeric keypad
Cut-out
Screw
3 Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks, and attach by using one screw which
removed in step 2.
Hook
Screw
Hook Cover Screw
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Affix the label on the numeric keypad. (Except 120v model)
Label
Numeric keypad
2-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8) USB keyboard (Except 100V model)
USB keyboard installation requires the following parts.

Keyboard holder 10 1 1709AN0UN0 (Product)
USB keyboard 1 -
Bundled parts of Keyboard holder 10

Upper keyboard mounting bracket ................ 1 pc
Lower keyboard mounting bracket ................ 1 pc
Upper keyboard cover ................................... 1 pc
Lower keyboard cover ................................... 1 pc
Upper lid ..................................... 1 pc
Lower lid ..................................... 1 pc
Hook-and-loop fastener................................. 2 pairs
Binding band ..................................... 1 pc
Screws (M3x8 S-tite)*1 .................................. 6 pcs
Screws (M3x8 S-tite Black) ........................... 2 pcs
Screws (M3x8 P-tite) ..................................... 2 pcs
Screws (M4x8 S-tite)*2 .................................. 4 pcs
Screws (M4x8 S-tite) ..................................... 2 pcs
*1: 4 pc is used for this model.
*2: Not used in this model.
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Attach the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket by using the four
screws.
• Align the location of the mark A and attach.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Upper keyboard
mounting bracket
Lower keyboard
mounting bracket
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Raise the operation panel.
4 Detach the screw and remove the operation panel lower cover.
Operation panel lower cover
Screw
5 Twist in front of the A section of the card reader cover, remove to pull in the left direction.
Card reader cover
6 Remove one screw, slide the keyboard cover in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Keyboard cover
Screw
2-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Latch two hooks of the lower keyboard mounting on two apertures.
8 Attach the lower keyboard mounting bracket by using two screws A(M4x8).
9 Fix the arms of the lower keyboard mounting bracket by using two screws B(M4x14).
Lower keyboard mounting bracket

Screw B Screw A
Screw A
Screw B
Apertures
Hooks
10Attach to latch two hooks of lower cover B in the aperture of the lower keyboard mounting bracket.
• Attach it while the hooks come to the punch mark B.
Lower keyboard
Apertures
mounting bracket
Lower cover B
Hooks
11Insert two protrusions of the lower cover C, two hooks A and three hooks B into the cut-out of the lower cover
B, the aperture and the protrusion of the upper keyboard mounting bracket.
Upper keyboard Lower cover B
mounting bracket
Lower cover C
Protrusions
Hook B
Hook A
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12Attach the lower cover C on the keyboard mounting bracket by using two screws.
Screw
Screw
Lower cover C
Upper keyboard mounting bracket
13Attach to latch the hook of the lower cover A in the hole of the keyboard mounting bracket by using one svrew.
• Attach it while the hooks come to the punch mark B.
Lower keyboard
Hook mounting bracket
Screw
Lower cover A
14Insert the upper keyboard cover into the upper keyboard mounting plate and attach it.
Upper keyboard cover
Upper keyboard mounting plate
2-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Put two hooks and the protrusion together and attach the upper cover to the lower keyboard mounting bracket.
16Fix the upper cover to the lower keyboard mounting bracket by using the one screw.
Upper cover Screw
Protrusion
Hooks
Lower keyboard
mounting bracket
17Affix a pair of two hook-and-loop fasteners to the concave of the upper keyboard cover.
hook-and-loop
fasteners
Concave
upper keyboard cover
18Place the keyboard on the hook-and-loop fastener and press it to fix.
19Connect the USB cable with the USB connector on the main unit.
USB cable
USB connector
Keyboard
hook-and-loop fasteners
20Reattach the removed card reader cover and the below operation panel cover in the original position.
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9) card reader installation
ID card reader installation requires the following parts.

Card label 1 302ND3423_
(Bundled main unit)
2 Detach the screw (b) and remove the operation panel lower cover.
Screw
3 Twist in front of the A section of the card reader cover, remove to pull in the left direction.
Card reader cover
2-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Insert the card reader into the card reader holder.
5 Wind the extra USB cable in the winding portion.
6 Connect the winding portion.
winding portion
winding portion
card reader
USB cable
card reader holder
7 Pull the card reader cover (a) in the right side and attach it.
8 Affix the card label (b).
9 Reattach the operation panel lower cover in the original position.
Card reader cover
Card label
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Activating Card Authentication
Important
Need the License Key in the introduction procedure. If access the designated website of your dealer or service
representative, and register the "Machine No." indicated on your machine and the "Product ID" indicated on the License
Certificate ,the License Key will be issued.
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Press th system menu key, and press the "System Key".

• If user login administration is invalidity, the user authentication screen is displayed.
3 Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login].

• Login with administrator privileges here.
4 Press "Next to" of "Optional function".
5 Select "CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT(B)" and press "Start-up".
6 The screen which enters the license key is displayed.

Enter the license key by using the numeric keyboard and press "Regular using".
7 Check the product name "CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT(B)" and press "Yes".
8 In case of using SSFC card, execute the maintenance mode U222 and set "SSFC".
• If enter the sleep mode of the power saving priority, IC card does not recognize. When you want to be
functioned the reader during the sleep, refer the instruction for use, set the sleep level to sleep terms.
• If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, the setting does not need.
2-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10) Handset attaching

(10-1)When attaching the main unit directly
Handset installation requires the following parts.

Handset 1 1909AG9JP0 (Product)
Bundled parts of handset

Handset ..................................... 1 pc
Handset holder ..................................... 1 pc
Handset mounting plate ................................ 1pc
Protection cover ..................................... 1pc
Pin ..................................... 2 pcs
Telephone wire ..................................... 1 pc
Modular cord ..................................... 1 pc
Nut M4 ..................................... 2pcs
2 Attach the handset mounting bracket to the right top of the main unit by using two pins.
• Use the lower screw holes of the handset mounting bracket.
Pins
Handset
mounting bracket
Pins
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Connect the connector of the telephone wire to the handset holder.
4 While stretch the telephone wire, insert it into the cable guide.
Handset holder
Cable guide
Telephone wire
Connector
5 Put two pins into the catches at the backside of the handset holder,slide it toward you and fix it.
Handset holder
Pin
Pin
2-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Attach the protection cover to the handset mounting plate.
Protection cover
Handset mounting plate
7 Connect the telephone wire to the handset.

• Insert the telephone wire into between the handset holder and main unit.
Telephone wire
Handset
Main unit Handset holder
Telephone wire
Handset holder
2-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Connect the modular code to the connector of the main unit left side .
Main unit
Modular code
Connector
9 Connect the modular cord to the another handset holder.
Modular code
Handset holder
2-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10-2)In case installing the document table
Handset installation requires the following parts.

Handset 1 1909AG9JP0 (Product)
Document table 1 1902LC0UN1 (Product)
Bundled parts of handset

Handset ..................................... 1 pc
Handset holder ..................................... 1 pc
Handset mounting plate ................................ 1pc
Protection cover ..................................... 1pc
Pin ..................................... 2 pcs A
Telephone wire ..................................... 1 pc B

A
Modular cord ..................................... 1 pc
Nut M4 ..................................... 2pcs
B
Bundled parts of Document table

Tray stay ..................................... 1 pc
Tray mounting bracket................................... 1pc
Tray cover ..................................... 1 pc
Tray lower cover ..................................... 1 pc
Tray fixing plate ..................................... 1 pc
Sheet ..................................... 2pcs
Pin ..................................... 1 pc
Nut M4 ..................................... 2pcs
Screw (M4x8) ..................................... 2 pcs
Nut M4 ..................................... 7pcs
Screw (M4x14) ..................................... 2 pcs
2 Attach the tray stay to the scanner right cover by using two screws (M4×14).
Scanner right cover
Tray stay
Screw
Screw
2-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Insert the tray mounting plate into the tray stay and attach by using two screws (M4×8).
Screw
Screw
Tray mounting plate

Tray stay
2-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Attach the tray cover to the tray stay with four screws (M4×8).
Screws
Screws
Tray cover
5 Remove two nuts and two pins from the handset mounting plate.
6 Attach two removed nuts and two pins to the mark A location of the tray mounting plate.
Pins
Handset mounting plate
Nuts
Pins
A
A
B
A
Tray mounting plate

Nuts
2-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Connect the modular code to the connector of the main unit left side .
Main unit
Modular code
Connector
8 Connect the modular cord to the another handset holder.
Modular code
Handset holder
2-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Put two pins into the catches at the backside of the handset holder,slide it toward you and fix it.
B
A
Handset holder
A
B
A
B
Pins
B
A
10Cut the separator cover of the tray lower cover by using the nipper, etc.
Separator cover
Tray lower cover
2-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Attach the tray lower cover.
12Fix the tray lower cover by using two pins.
B
A
Tray lower cover
B
A
B
A
Pin
Pin
2-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Affix the sheet on the left side of document table.
Document table
Sheet
B
A
B
A
14Connect the telephone wire to the handset holder.
Handset
Handset holder
B
A
Telephon wire
2-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
2 - 4 About Optional Applications

Application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
Card Authentication Kit*1 Emulation upgrade kit
ThinPrint Option*1
*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending
on the application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Use of an Application

Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function].
Note
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. Login with
administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name 32 ppm model 40ppm model

Login User Name 3200 4000
Login Password 3200 4000
2 Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

• You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] or [Details].
Item
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
3 Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 4.
• To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
Note
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of acti-
vated application are displayed in the Home screen.
2-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system
2 - 5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system

1 Connect the power plug of the main unit to the outlet and turn the power on.
2 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
4 Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
• Refer to the following country code list.
5 Select [Execute].
6 Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.

• Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
Country code list
Country Destination Country Destination
code code
000 Japan 181 North America *2
156 Asian nations *1 181 South America *3
254 Taiwan 253 European nations *4
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand *5
*1 Applied for Sales company competent Singapore, India, Thailand, Hong Kong.
*2 Applied for Sales company competent USA, Canada,Mexico.
*3 Applied for Sales company competent Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentina, Brazil.
*4 Applied for Sales company competent Italy,Germany,Spain,U.K.,Netherlands,Sweden,France,Austria,Switzerland,
Belgium,Denmark,Finland,Portugal,Ireland,Norway,Turkey,Russia,Saudi arabia.
*5 Change the country code when selling in New Zealand. The country code to input is 126.
7 After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
Important
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps of FAX
communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at V.34
communication in such a line.
Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off (See page 6-177)
U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed] (See page 6-172)
2-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical Configuration
3Machine Design
3 - 1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view
15
13
12
14
9
8
7
6
16 11 1 3 10 2 4
Light path Paper path Paper path (option)
1 Cassette 1 7 Transfer/ Separate section 13 Eject section

2 Cassette 1 paper feed section 8 Charger roller unit 14 Dual conveying section
3 Cassette 2 9 Drum unit 15 Image Scanner Unit
4 Cassette 2 paper feed section 10 Developer unit 16 Laser Scanner Unit
5 Multi Purpose paper feed 11 Toner Container
section
12 Fuser unit
6 Conveying section
3-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electrical parts layout
3 - 2 Electrical parts layout

(1) PWBs
18,19 9 7 15 16
17
20
1 3 2
5 6
21
11 10
8
4
12 13
14
Machine front Machine inner Machine rear
1.Main PWB Controls the software such as the print data processing and provides
the interface with computers.
2.Engine PWB Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output control,
paper conveying system control, and fuser temperature control, etc.
3.High voltage PWB Generates main charging, developing bias, transfer bias.
4.Low voltage power source PWB After full-wave rectification of AC power source input, switching for
converting to 24 V DC/5 V DC for output. Controls the fuser heater.
5.Operation panel PWB 1 Consists of the LCD, LED indicators and key switches.
6.Operation panel PWB 2 Consists of the LED indicators and key switches.
7.CCD PWB Reads the image of originals.
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8.APC PWB Generates and controls the laser beam.
9.NFC PWB Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
10.Drum PWB Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit.
Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
11.Drum relay PWB Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and the drum
unit.
12.Developing PWB Relays wirings from electrical components on the developing unit.
Developing individual information in EEPROM storage.
13.Developing relay PWB Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and the
developer unit and contain the temperature sensor inside the
machine.
14.RFID PWB Reads the container information.
15.Touch Panel Operation panel.
16.USB PWB USB PWB slot distribution.
17.LED drive PWB Control of scanning light source
18.LED-F PWB Side flood scan light source (front)
19.LED R PWB Side flood scan light source (rear)
20.Wi-Fi PWB Send and receive wireless data

21.Zener PWB Voltage potential control of fixing heat roller (countermeasure for offset)
List of correspondences of PWB names

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No.
1 Main PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302V69402_
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP 302V69403_
2 Engine PWB PATRS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 302V69404_
3 High voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE SP 602P19426_
4 Low voltage power source PWB PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 100 SP 302RH9422_
PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 200 SP 302RH9423_
5 Operation panel PWB 1 PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 302RH9404_
6 Operation panel PWB 2 PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 302RH9403_
7 CCD PWB - -
(PARTS IMAGE SCANNER ASSY SP) (302V69310_)
8 APC PWB - -
(LK-7106) (302RH9303_)
(LK-6115) (302P19308_)
9 NFC PWB PARTS PWB NFC ASSY SP 302RH9405_
10 Drum PWB - -
(DK-7125) (302V69302_)
11 Drum relay PWB PARTS PWB DRUM CONNECT ASSY SP 302K39408_
12 Developer PWB - -
(DV-7125) (302V69301_)
13 Developer relay PWB PARTS PWB DEVE CONNECT ASSY SP 302P19421_
14 RFID PWB PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP 302V69405_
3-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No.
15 Touch panel PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302RH9407_
(PARTS OPERATION UNIT SP) (302RH9414_)
16 USB PWB PARTS PWB USB HUB ASSY SP 302RH9402_
17 LED drive PWB - -
18 LED-F PWB (PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP) (302V69308_)
19 LED R PWB
20 Wi-Fi PWB PARTS WIFI UNIT SP 303RR9401_
21 Zener PWB PARTS PWB ZENER ASSY SP 302P19422_
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Switches and sensors
2
1
3 20
21 5
17
38
19
39 33
32
4
31
18
30 16
12
26 37 35
34
24 8
7 14
11 36
13
27
22
6
29 28 10
25 9 15
23
1.Home position sensor Detects the ISU in the home position.

2.Original size timing sensor Operates the original size sensor.
3.Original size sensor Detects the size of the original.
4.Front cover switch Detects the opening and closing of the front cover.
5.Right cover switch 1 Detects the opening and closing of the right cover 1.
6.Right cover switch 2 Detects the opening and closing of the right cover 2.
7.Paper sensor 1 Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 1.
3-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11.MP paper sensor Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray.

12.Lift sensor 1 Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate in the cassette 1.
13.Lift sensor 2 Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate in the cassette 2.
14.Conveying sensor 1 Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section.
15.Conveying sensor 2 Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section.
16.Registration sensor Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
17.Exit sensor Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser or eject section.
18.DU sensor Detects a paper jam in the duplex section.
19.Paper full sensor Detects the paper full in the inner tray.
20.Job paper full sensor Detects the paper full in the job separator tray.
21.Job eject papersensor Detects the presence of paper in the job separator.
22.Paper size width switch 1 Detects the width of paper in the cassette 1.
23.Paper size width switch 2 Detects the width of paper in the cassette 2.
24.Paper size length switch 1 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 1.
25.Paper size length switch 2 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 2.
26.Toner container lock sensor Detects the lock of toner in the toner container.
27.Main power switch Turns ON/OFF the AC power source.
28.Cassette heater switch Turns ON/OFF the cassette heater power source.
29.Temperature sensor Detects the temperature and absolute humidity outside the machine.
30.Toner sensor Detects the amount of toner remaining in the toner container.
31.Waste toner sensor Detects when the waste toner box is full.
32.Fuser pressure release sensor Detects the switching condition of the fuser pressure.
33.Fuser thermistor 2 Detects the heat roller temperature. (noncontact / center)

34.Toner container switch Detects the presence of toner container.
35.MP tray switch Detects the position of the MP sub tray.
36.MP paper width switch Detects the width of paper in the MP tray.
37.P paper length switch Detects the length of paper in the MP tray.
38.Power source switch Power source of Main PWB, engine PWB and Operation panel
PWB.
39.Thermopile Detects the surface temperature of the fuser roller.
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Motors
3
5
11
2
12
9
13
4
14
1
6
7
10
1.Main motor Drives the paper feed section and conveying section.
2.Fuser motor Drives the fuser unit.
3.Scanner motor Drives the scanner.
4.Polygon motor Drives the polygon mirror.
5.Eject motor Drives the fuser section and eject section.
6.Lift motor 1 Operates the bottom plate in the cassette 1.
7.Lift motor 2 Operates the bottom plate in the cassette 2.
8.Eject fan motor Cools the fuser and eject sections.
9.LSU fan motor Cools the LSU section.
10.Power source fan motor Cools the low voltage power source PWB and the laser scanner unit.
3-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11.Fuser pressure release motor Driving the fuser pressure release.

12.Developer motor Drives the developer unit.
13.Conveying fan motor Stabilize paper conveying after transfer.
14.Developer fan motor Cools the developer section.
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) Others
15
7
17
11,12 9,10
14 8
16
4
6
1
13
1.Paper feed clutch 1 Controls the primary paper feed from cassette 1.
2.Paper feed clutch 2 Controls the primary paper feed from cassette 2.
3.Registration clutch Controls the secondary paper feed.
4.DU clutch Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller.
5.Mid clutch Controls the paper conveying.
6.MP solenoid Controls the MP bottom plate.
7.Feedshift solenoid Operates the feedshift guide.
8.Eraser Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum.
9.Fuser heater 1 Heats the heat roller.
10.Fuser heater 2 Heats the heat roller.
3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11.Fuser thermostat 1 Prevents overheating of the heat roller.

12.Fuser thermostat 2 Prevents overheating of the heat roller.
13.Cassette heater Dehumidifies the cassette section.
14.Hard disk Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.
15.Speaker Generates an error sound.
16.Developer clutch Control drive of the developer unit.
17.LCD Displaying the operation screen.
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Paper feed/conveying section
3 - 3 Paper feed/conveying section

The paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP tray
paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray, and the paper conveying section that conveys the feed paper to the
transfer/separation section.
(1) Cassette paper feed section

The cassette can contain 500 sheets. The sheet from the cassette is pulled out by rotation of the pickup roller and sent
to the paper conveying section by rotation of the paper feed roller. Also the retard roller prevents multiple feeding of
paper.
1 3 2 4
6 11 7 10
13
9 5
8
1 3 2
6 12 7 4
10
9 5
8
14
1. Pickup roller 6. Paper length guide 11. Cassette 1

2. Feed roller 7. Lift plate 12. Cassette 2
3. Feed holder 8. Lift work plate 13. Acutuator
(conveying sensor 1)
4. Retard roller 9. Cassette base 14. Acutuator
(conveying sensor 2)
5. Retard holder 10. Actuator (paper sensor)
3-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Engine PWB
MMOTREM
YC38-3 3
MMOTCLK
YC38-4 4
MMOTRDY Main motor
YC38-5 5
YC38-6 MMOTDIR
6
FEED1CLREM Feed
YC13-1 clutch 1
Lift s
CAS1LIFTLIT ensor 1
YC17-B7
PAP1LSIZE1
YC14-13 Paper length
PAP1LSIZE2
YC14-15 switch 1
PAP1LSIZE3
YC14-16
PAP1WSIZE Paper width
YC14-17 switch 1
PAPEMP1 Paper
YC14-3 sensor 1
PAPEMP2 Paper
YC14-6 sensor 2
YC13-10 LMOT1REM1 Lift motor 1
FMOTREM
YC38-9 3
FMOTCLK
YC38-10 4
FMOTRDY Fuser motor
YC38-11 5
FMOTDIR
YC38-12 6
FEED2CLREM Feed
YC17-B4 clutch 2
FEED1SENS Conveying
YC15-11 sensor 1
CAS2_LIFT_UP Lift
YC17-B13 sensor 2
PAP2LSIZE3
YC14-19 Paper length
PAP2LSIZE2
YC14-21 switch 2
PAP2LSIZE1
YC14-22
PAP2WSIZE Paper width
YC14-23 switch 2
PAPEMP3 Paper
YC14-9 sensor 3
PAPEMP4 Paper
YC14-12 sensor 4
FEED2JAM Conveying
YC17-A9 sensor 2
YC17-A5 LMOT2REM2
YC17-A6 LMOT2REM1 Lift motor 2
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) MP tray paper feed section

The MP tray can contain 100 sheets. Feeding from the MP tray is performed by the rotation of the MP paper feed roller.
Also, function of the MP separation pad prevents paper from multiple feeding.
8
7 6
5
2 4 3
1. MP feed roller 4. Actuator(MP paper sensor) 7. MP paper width guide

2. MP separation pad 5. MP tray 8. Actuator
(MP paper length switch)
3. MP lift plate 6. MP tray extension
MMOTREM
YC38-3 3
MMOTCLK
YC38-4 4
MMOTRDY Main mptor
YC38-5 5
MMOTDIR
YC38-6 6
MPFSOLREM
YC13-8 MP solenoid
Engine PWB
MPFPAPSET MP paper
YC15-8 sensor
MPFTRAY MP tray
YC16-6 switch
MPFLSIZE MP paper
YC16-3 length switch
MPFWSIZE MP paper
YC16-2 width switch
3-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Conveying section

The conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cassette or MP tray,
or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the paper feed roller to the position where the
registration sensor is turned on, and then sent to the transfer/separation section by the right registration roller and left
registration roller.
1 2
1. Left registration roller 3. Registration sensor

2. Right registration roller 4. Registration cleaner
MMOTREM
YC38-3 3
MMOTCLK
YC38-4 4
MMOTRDY Main motor
YC38-5 5
MMOTDIR
YC38-6 6
YC13-3 RECLGREM Registration

clutch
YC17-B2 MIDCLREM Middle

clutch
Engine PWB
Registration
YC17-B9 REGSENS sensor
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Drum section
3 - 4 Drum section
The drum section consists of the drum, the charger roller unit, and the cleaning unit, and the drum surface is uniformly
charged in preparation for formation of residual image by laser beam.
After transfer is complete, toner remaining on the drum surface is chipped off with the cleaning blade and is collected to
the waste toner box with the drum screw. The eraser consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before
main charging.
10 9 5 8 7 6
4 3 2 1
1. Drum 5. Cleaning blade 9. Drum frame

2. MC roller 6. Cleaning roller 10. Eraser
3. MC cleaning roller 7. Scraper

4. MC case 8. Sweep roller
3-15
MCLK
CN1-3 YC19-12
MACCNT
CN1-4 YC19-11
MDCCNT
CN1-5 YC19-10
MISENS
CN1-6 YC19-9
Machine Design > Drum section
DCREM
CN1-7 YC19-8
High voltage PWB

DRUM_SDA
YC2-2 YC2-1
WT_SENS
YC2-1 YC2-2
WT_LED
YC2-3 YC2-4
EEPROM
DRUM_SCL
YC2-6 YC2-5
MC chager output
ERASE_REM
YC2-7 YC2-8
3-16
YC1-2 ERASE
YC12-8
ERASE3 YC3-4 WT_SENS
YC1-4 YC12-6
ERASE2 YC3-3 WT_LED
YC1-5 YC12-5
Eraser
ERASE1 YC3-2 DRUM_SCL
YC1-7 YC12-3
DRUM_SDA
YC1-8 YC12-2
WT_SENS
YC1-3
sensor
WT_LED
Waste toner
YC1-2
Drum PWB
Engine PWB
Drum relay PWB

[CONFIDENTIAL]
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Developing section
3 - 5 Developing section
The developing unit consists of the developing roller that forms the magnetic brush, the developing blade and the
developing screws that agitate the toner.Also, the toner sensor checks whether or not toner remains in the developing
unit.
8 7 4 5 1
3 2 6
1. Developing roller 4. Developing blade 7. Upper developer cover

2. Developing screw A 5. Magnet blade 8. Toner container
3. Developing screw B 6. Developer case
3-17
TCONSET
YC11-12
switch
Toner container
TCONLOCK
YC11-11
lock switch
Machine Design > Developing section
Toner container
TCONEMP
YC11-7
Toner sensor
DLP_SCL
YC2-2 YC11-3
DLP_SDA
YC2-3 YC11-2
DRUM_SDA
YC2-2 YC2-1
DRUM_SCL
YC2-6 YC2-5
3-18
DLPCLREM
Engine PWB
Developer
YC13-11
relay PWB
clutch
Developer
Developer PWB
EEPROM
DMOTREM
3 YC36-3
DMOTCLK
4 YC36-4
DMOTRDY
motor
5 YC36-5
Developer
DMOTDIR
6 YC36-6
DBCLK
CN1-11 YC19-4
DBCNT
CN1-12 YC19-3
PWB
High voltage
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Optical section
3 - 6 Optical section
The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for printing.
(1) Image scanner section

The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB via the
three mirrors and ISU lens, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
If a document processor is used, the image scanner unit stops at the position of the DP contact glass and scans
sequentially one row of the image on the original in synchronization with the moving timing of the original in the sub scan
direction by driving the DP.
3 2 1 6 5
1. Contact glass 3. DP contact glass 5. Scanner motor

2. Original size indicator plate 4. Scanner frame 6. Scanner wire
1 4 3 2
7
11
5
6
8
9 10
1. Mirror frame A 5. Mirror A 9. ISU lens

2. LED drive PWB 6. Mirror frame B 10. CCD PWB
3. Light guide holder 7. Mirror B 11. Scanner cover
4. Light guide 8. Mirror C
3-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Original
Contact glass
LED_PWM YC2-4 LED_PWM

LED YC29-6
drive PWB LED_ENABLE YC2-5 AFE_RD
YC29-26
AFE_WD
YC29-28
LED-F PWB Lens AFE_CLK
Mirror YC29-30
LED-R PWB AFE_CS
CCD YC29-32
image AFE_MCLK_P
YC29-34
sensor AFE_MCLK_N
YC29-35
CCD PWB
Home position sensor Engine PWB
Image scanner unit(ISU) SMOT1B YC34-10

ISU SMOT1A YC34-11
motor SMOT2A YC34-12
SMOT2B YC34-13
HP_SENS
YC34-9
Scanner unit
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Laser scanner section

The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. The laser beam is
dispersed as the polygon motor revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses and mirror are housed
in the laser scanner unit, adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focalize it at the drum surface. Also the LSU
cleaning motor is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the LSU dust shield glass.
2 3 4
1. Polygon motor 3. fθ lens A 5. LSU dust shield glass

2. Polygon mirror 4. fθ lens B
Engine PWB Engine PWB

YC4-10
YC4-10
YC4-11
YC4-11
YC5-3
YC5-4
YC5-5
YC4-3
YC4-4
YC4-5
YC4-6
YC4-7
YC4-8
YC4-9
YC4-5
YC4-6
YC4-8
YC4-9
PMOTRDY
PMOTREM
PMOTCLK
VDATA2P
VDATA1P
VCONT
VDATA1P
VCONT
VDATA2N
VDATA1N
SAMPLEN2
SAMPLEN1
OUTPEN
VDATA1N
SAMPLEN1
OUTPEN
PDN
PDN
YC1-3
YC1-4
YC1-5
YC1-6
YC1-7
YC1-8
YC1-9
YC1-10
YC1-11
YC1-3
YC1-4
YC1-5
YC1-6
YC1-7
YC1-8
APC PWB APC PWB

(40 ppm model / 2 beem) (32 ppm model / 1 beem)
3
2
1
Polygon
motor
3-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Transfer/Separation section
3 - 7 Transfer/Separation section
The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller, separation electrode and drum separation
claws.
A high voltage generated by the high voltage PWB is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging.
Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation charging that is output from the high voltage
PWB to the separation electrode.
2
1
1. Transfer roller 3. Separation needle holder

2. Separation needle 4. Paper chute guide
High voltage
Engine PWB
PWB
Separation nedle Separation bias TRA_CNT
CN1-8 YC19-7
SEP_REM
Transfer bias CN1-9 YC19-6
Transfer roller
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Fuser section
3 - 8 Fuser section
The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the heat roller and the press roller. The heat
roller is heated by the fuser heater, and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto the paper because the
press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring. The surface temperature of heat roller is detected by the fuser
thermistor and controlled by the engine PWB. If the fuser section shows extremely high temperature, the power line will
be shut off and the fuser heater is forced to turn off.
8
3
4
7
2
6
10
5 1 9
1. Heat roller 5. Fuser thermistor 1 9. Fuser paper guide

(contact / edge)
2. Press roller 6. Thermopile 10. Discharging plate
3. Fuser heater 1 7. Fuser thermostat
4. Fuser heater 2 8. Actuater (exit sensor)
3-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Fuser section
FUSERJAM
YC8-11
FSRPRSEN Fuser pressur
YC9-11 release sensor
FPMOTREM Fuser pressur
YC6-3 release motor
CTHERM Fuser
YC9-8 thermistor 1
Engine PWB Exit
sensor
FTOBJ Fuser Fuser
YC9-1 thermo stat 1 heater 1
YC9-4 FTAMB
THPSDA Termopile
YC9-5
YC9-6 THPSCL
Fuser Fuser
thermo stat 2 heater 2
EMOT A
YC8-1 1
YC8-2 EMOT B 2 Fuser unit
EMOT AN Exit motor
YC8-3 3
EMOT BN
LIVE
YC8-4 4
MH
SH
YC2-1
YC2-3
YC2-2
YC10-6 RELAYREM YC7-4
YC10-4 MHREM YC7-6
YC10-3 SHREM YC7-7 Low voltage
power source PWB
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Eject/Feedshift section
3 - 9 Eject/Feedshift section
The paper eject/feedshift section consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the fuser
section to the inner tray, the job separator tray or the duplex conveying section.
4 5
7
1. Exit roller A 4. Exit pulley B 7. Actuator

(JS paper full sensor)
2. Exit pulley A 5. Feed-shift guide 8. Actuator (JS paper sensor)
3. Exit roller B 6. Actuator (paper full sensor)
3-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Eject/Feedshift section
Engine PWB
JS paper
JTRYFULL full sensor
YC8-7
JS paper
JTRAYPAP sensor
YC8-16
Paper full
TRAYFULL sensor
YC8-10
EXTSOLPUL
YC7-1 Feed-shift
EXTSOLREL solenoid
YC7-3
YC8-1 EMOT A 1
YC8-2 EMOT B 2
EMOT AN Exit motor
YC8-3 3
YC8-4 EMOT BN 4
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Duplex conveying section
3 - 10 Duplex conveying section

The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the eject/feedshift section to
the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing.
3
2
1. Right cover 1 4. DU conveying roller B 7. DU conveying pulley C

2. DU conveying roller A 5. DU conveying pulley B 8. Actuater(DU sensor)
3. DU conveying pulley A 6. DU conveying roller C
3-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Duplex conveying section
Engine PWB
DUSENS DU
YC15-5 sensor
DUCLREM
YC13-5 DU clutch
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance
4Maintenance
4 - 1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off.Make sure that the Power lamp is off
before turning off the main power switch.Unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static
charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to the PARTS
LIST.
(2) Storage and handling of the drum

Note the following when handling or storing the drum unit.
When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the place where an ambient temperature is between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a ambient humidity is not
higher than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum unit.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Do not touch the bare hand and glove etc. When touch the surface of the
drum by hand or adhere to the oil etc, make sure to clean it.
(3) Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Avoid direct light and high humidity.
4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance
(4) How to tell a genuine toner container

As a means of brand protection, the toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual
validation. A validation viewer is required to accomplish this. Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the
brand protection seal on the toner container.
Seeing through each of two windows, validate genuineness or spuriousness by appearances of the brand protection
seal.
The brand protection seal is black color when seen through the left side window ( )
The brand protection seal is Gold color when seen through the right side window ( )
The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine branded toner container, otherwise, it is a counterfeit.
See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)
Validation viewer Validation viewer
Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal
A black-colored band when A shiny or gold-colored band when

seen through the left side window seen through the right side window
The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.
Incision
Cut
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
4 - 2 Maintenance parts
(1) List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Registration cleaner PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY SP 302NL9404_
Primary paper feed unit PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP 302MV9406_
MP paper feed roller PARTS ROLLER MPF ASSY SP 302MV9402_
MP separation pad PARTS PAD SEPARATION ASSY SP 302RH9418_
Exit unit PARTS EXIT UNIT SP 302V69406_
PARTS EXIT UNIT B SP 302V69407_
Contact glass PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(I) SP 302RH9415_
PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(C) SP 302RH9416_
Mirror A/B/C MIRROR A/B/C -
ISU lens - -
(PARTS ISU ASSY H SP) (302ND9311_)
LED unit PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302V69308_
ISU rail - -
Original size timing sensor SENSOR OPT. 302ND9480_
ISU - -
Roller ROLLERS -
Pulley PULLEYS -
Guide GUIDES -
Clutch CLUTCHS -
Sensor SENSORS -
Cover OUTER COVERS -
4-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
(2) Maintenance kits

Maintenance part name Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
MK-7125/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-7125/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V68NL0
(600,000sheet)
Transfer roller unit TR-7125 -
Drum unit DK-7125 -
Developier unit DV-7125 -
Fuser unit FK-7125 -
MK-7126/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-7126/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V69JP0
(600,000sheet)
Drum unit DK-7125 -
MK-7127/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-7127/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V67US0
(600,000sheet)
Drum unit DK-7125 -
Developerunit DV-7125 -
MK-7129/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-7129/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V68AS0
(600,000sheet)
Drum unit DK-7125 -
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance procedures
4 - 3 Periodic maintenance procedures

(CH: Check, CL: Clean, AD: Adjust, LU: Lubrication, RE: Replace)
• Check the maintenance counts by the maintenance mode U901.
Set up
Maintenance User PM maintenance (x1000 counts) Points and cautions
part/location call 600 1200 1800
Image Quality CH CH CH CH Perform at the maximum copy size
AD AD AD AD
PF and Conveying section

Registration cleaner CL CL CL CL CL: VACUUM
Primary paper feed unit CL RE RE RE CL:Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.

RE: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target
to replace at 300K.
MP paper feed roller CL RE RE RE CL:Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
to replace at 300K.
MP separation pad CL RE RE RE CL:Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
to replace at 300K.
Rollers ,Pulleys CL CL CL CL CL: alcohol or dry cloth
Guides CL CL CL CL CL: alcohol or dry cloth
Exit and Duplex Section

Exit unit CL CL CL CL: VACUUM
Rollers ,Pulleys CL CL CL CL CL: alcohol or dry cloth
Guides CL CL CL CL: alcohol or dry cloth
4-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance procedures
Image scanner section

Contact glass CL CL CL CL CL: Slit glass for DP: Clean by dry cloth or alcohol
when inatalling DP,clean with dry cloth.
Contact glass for putting the original on: Dry cloth after
cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
Wipe the back side with dry cloth after cleaning with
alcohol only when unusual image (line or stain)
appears. (BACK SIDE)
Mirror A/B/C CL CL: Airblow after dry cloth only when unusual
image(line) appears
ISU lens CL CL: Airblow after dry cloth only when unusual
image(line) appears
Exposure unit CL RE: Replace if there are image problems
RE
ISU rail LU Check abnormal noise and jitter.
LU: scanner rail grease PG-671(P/N 60170000)
Original detection CH CL:Alcohol or dry cloth if there is problem. (lighting part
switch CL and light reception part.)
ISU CH Replace if there are image problems

RE
Drive and other section

Clutch CH CH CH CH CH: Check the copy registration and paper feed
RE condition on registration and paper feed section
Sensor CH CH CH CH CH: Dry cloth or airblow if light reception part of photo

sensor is dirt or paper dust
Cover
Cover CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
Inside of machine CL CL CL CL CL: VACUUM: Remove toner and paper dust
especially at the paper conveying part and around the
image formation part.
Caution
Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures

Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after about 600,000 images. The message [Replace MK.]
appears at the replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following procedures.
(1) Paper feed section

(1-1)Detaching and attaching the primary paper feed unit
1 Pull the cassette, remove in the direction of the arrow.
Cassette
4-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Release the paper feed lever and then remove the primary paper feed unit.
3 Check or replace the primary paper feed unit and refit all the removed parts.
4 When replacing the new unit,proceed as follows:

(1) Performs maintenance mode U901 (Checking copy counts by paper feed locations).(See page 6-194 )
Ppaer feed lever
Primary paper feed unit
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the MP paper feed roller and MP separation pad
1 Open the right cover 1.
Right cover 1
2 While squeezing the holders inward, remove the MP paper feed roller.
Holders
MP paper feed roller
4-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Tilt the MP separation pad forward and then remove it upwards.
4 Check or replace the MP paper feed roller and MP separation pad and refit all the removed parts.

Performs maintenance mode U901 (Checking copy counts by paper feed locations).(See page 6-194 )
MP seperation pad
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the registration cleaner
2 Release the lock lever and remove the waste toner box.
Lock lever
Waste toner box
3 Release the toner container lever and then remove the toner container.
Toner container lever
Toner container
4-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Release the lock lever.
Lock lever
5 Release the lock lever and open the developer cover.
Lock lever Developer cover
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Set the cleaner lever up and draw the registration cleaner frontward.
7 Check or replace the registration cleaner and refit all the removed parts.
Cleaner lever
Registration cleaner
4-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Developer section

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit
Lock lever
Waste toner box
3 Release the toner container lever and then remove the toner container.
Toner container lever
Toner container
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Lock lever
4-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Release the lock lever and then remove the developer unit.
7 Check or replace the developer unit and reattach the removed parts in the original position.

(1)Performs maintenance mode U130 (Set Toner Install). (See page 6-71 )
(2)Execute maintenance mode U410 (Halftone automatic adjustment) (See page 6-136 )
Lock lever
Developer unit
Precautions when installing the developer unit

Important
When installing the developer unit, push the developer unit it clicks.
Developer unit
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Drum section

(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit
Lock lever
Waste toner box
Lock lever
4-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Release the lock lever and then remove the drum unit.
7 Check or replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts.

(1)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Halftone automatic adjustment) (See page 6-136 )
Lock lever
Drum unit
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Precautions when installing the drum unit

Important
When installing the drum unit, push the drum unit it clicks.
Drum unit
4-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the charger roller unit
1 Remove the drum unit. (See page 4-17 )
2 Release the lock lever and then remove the charger roller unit.
3 Check or replace the charger roller unit and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
4 When replacing the charger roller, execute as following procedures.

1)Execute maintenance mode U930 (Clear or check charger roller counts). (See page 6-205 )
2)Execute maintenance mode U410 (Halftone automatic adjustment) (See page 6-136 )
Lock lever
Chager roller unit
Durm unit
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) Transfer/Separation section

(4-1)Detaching and attaching the transfer roller unit
2 Release two lock levers and then remove the transfer roller unit.
3 Check or replace the transfer roller unit and refit all the removed parts.

1)Performs maintenance mode U127 (Clear Transfer Roller Counter). (See page 6-70 )
2)Execute maintenance mode U410 (Halftone automatic adjustment) (See page 6-136 )
Caution
Inserting the transfer roller unit in place until it click in,when reattaching it.
Lock lever
Lock lever
Transfer roller
unit
4-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) Fuser section

(5-1)Detaching and attaching the fuser unit
2 Release the lock by pushing down the lock lever and then remove the fuser unit by griping the knobs.
3 Check or replace the fuser unit and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
4 When replacing the new unit, execute as following procedure.

(1)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Halftone automatic adjustment) (See page 6-136 )
Lock lever Lock lever
Knob Knob
Fuser unit
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly procedures
4 - 5 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures

(1) Outer covers
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the front cover
1 Remove the cassette.
Front cover
3 Unhitch the straps by squeezing the hooks inward as shown.
Strap Strap
Hooks Hooks
4-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Remove two fulcrum axes of the front cover.
5 Remove the front cover.
Fulcrum axis Fulcrum axis
Fulcrum part Fulcrum part
Front cover
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the rear upper cover
2 Open the top part of the rear upper cover, remove in the direction of the arrow.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
4-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the rear lower cover
1 Remove the rear upper cover.
2 Detach four screws.
3 Open the top part of the rear lower cover, remove in the direction of the arrow.
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)Detaching and attaching the inner tray
1 Release the lock lever and then remove the job separator tray.
Lock lever
Job separator tray
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
4-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
8 Detach six screws.
9 Pull upwards and then release four hooks.
10Remove the left lower cover.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11While pulling the A portion in the direction of the arrow, remove the inner tray.
Inner tray
4-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-5)Detaching and attaching the front upper cover
1 Pull the cassette forward.
2 Open the right cover 1 and 2.
3 Remove the inner tray.
4 Release the projection of the front upper cover.
5 Tilt the front upper cover forward and then unhook two hooks by taking out it upward.
Projection
Front upper
cover
Fooks
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-6)Detaching and attaching the exit rear cover
1 Remove the screw and the exit rear cover.
Eject rear cover
Screw
4-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-7)Detaching and refitting the exit rear cover
1 Release two hooks by using a flat screwdriver.
2 Remove the tray left cover by releasing two projections.
Projections
Hooks Tray left cover
Hooks
Flat screwdriver
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Drive section

(2-1)Detaching and attaching the drive unit 1
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove four connectors.
6 Detach five screws and then remove the drive unit 1.
7 Check or replace the drive unit 1 and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
Engine PWB
Drive unit 1
Screw Connectors
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw Lift motor 1
Important
• When refitting the drive unit 1, checks that the position of a cam is in the A side from the judgement line.
• When cam isn't in the A side from the judgement line, turn the motor by hand and bring the cam into the A side.
Drive unit 1
Cam
A
Judgement line
Motor
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Detaching and attaching the drive unit 2
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove four connectors.
6 Detach three screws and then remove the drive unit 2.
7 Check or replace the drive unit 2 and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
Connectors
Connector
Connector
Drive unit 2 Drive unit 2
Screw
Screws
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Detaching and attaching the fuser press release motor assy
1 Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover and then the drive unit 1.
2 Open the right cover 1 and the right cover 2 and then remove the right rear cover
3 Remove the connector
4 Release the wires from two wire saddles.
5 Detach three screws and remove the fuser press release motor assy
Fuser press release

motor assy
Screw Connector
Wires
Screw
Wire saddles
Screw
4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Optical section

(3-1)Detaching and attaching the Laser Scanner Unit (LSU)
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Lock lever
Job separator tray
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
4-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Inner tray
12Release two hooks and remove the temperature sensor assy.
13Remove the connector of LSU fan motor.
14Detach the screw and then remove the LSU fan motor.
Temperature sensor
assy
Hooks
Screw
Connector
LSU fan motor
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Remove the connector.
16Detach four screws and then remove the laser scanner unit.
17Check or replace the laser scanner unit and refit all the removed parts.
Wire saddle
Connectors
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Laser scanner unit
4-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the lens unit
1 Detach two screws and then remove the scanner right cover.
Note
When installing, attach close to the contact glass.
Scanner right cover Screw
Screw
2 Remove the contact glass by pulling rightward.
Contact glass
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Detach five screws and then remove the lens unit cover.
Screw
Lens unit cover
Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
4 Remove the FFC and the connector.
5 Remove four screws and then remove the lens unit.
Screw
Screw Screw Lens unit
Screw
FFCs
CCD PWB
4-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Attaching the lens unit

1 When reinstalling, fix by adjusting to the scale of a original position.
When replacing, decide the fix position of lens unit by the following.
The right and left direction of machine:

Check the marked number (a) and then adjust the frame side of positioning line (b) of the same number and the
line (c) of lens unit.
(Line (c) is the side which is marked corresponding number of the two lines.)
The rear and front of machine:

Match the edge (e) of lens unit to the positioning line (d) on frame side.
2 Fix the lens unit as before with four screws.
3 Check or replace the lens unit and refit all the removed parts.
Lens unit
e
a c
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-3)Detaching and attaching the lamp unit
1 Detach two screws and then remove the scanner right cover.
Note
When installing, attach close to the contact glass.
Scanner right cover Screw
Screw
2 Remove the contact glass by pulling rightward.
Contact glass
4-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Detach two screws and then remove the scanner rear cover.
Screw
Scanner rear cover
Screw
4 Detach two screws and remove the scanner front upper cover.
Screw Scanner front

upper cover
Screw
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Peel off two sheets.
6 Move the lamp unit to the cutting lack part.
Lamp unit
Sheet
Sheet
7 Remove the FFC from the connector of the lamp unit.
8 Detach three screws and then remove the lamp unit.
9 Check or replace the lamp unit and reattach the removed parts in original position.
Lamp unit
Screw Screw
Connector FFC
Screw Lamp unit
4-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires

Follow the procedures below when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
(4-1)Detaching the scanner wires
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Remove the left lower cover.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
10Release three hooks upwards.
11Remove the left upper cover by sliding it backward.
Hooks
Left upper cover
4-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12Detach two screws and remove the scanner right cover.
13Remove the right upper cover.
Screw
Scanner right cover
Screw
Right upper
cover
14Detach two screws and remove the scanner rear cover.
Screw
Scanner rear cover
Screw
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Detach two screws and remove the scanner front upper cover.
Screw Scanner front

upper cover
Screw
16Raise the operation panel.
17Detach the screw and then remove the operation panel lower cover.
Screw
4-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18Twist the A section of card reader cover in front and remove to pull in the left direction.
Card reader cover
19Detach one screw, slide the keyboard cover in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Keyboard cover
Screw
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20After lifting the protrusion, remove the scanner front cover.
Scanner front cover
Projection
21Slide the controller box cover in sideway, and remove it.
4-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
22Remove seven connectors and release two wire saddles.
23Detach six screws and then remove the controller box.
Screw Screws
Connectors
Screws
Connectors
Screw
Wire saddles
Controller box
24Remove the wire from the saddle of the wire guide.
25Release the hook, lift the wire guide in front and remove it.
Hook
Wires
Saddles
Wire guide
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
26Remove FFC from the engine PWB.
FFC
Engine PWB
27Remove two connectors from the engine PWB.
28Release the wires from two wire saddles.
Wires
Wire saddles
Connectors
Engine PWB
4-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
29Remove the four screws and then remove the scanner unit upward.
Scanner unit
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
30Remove the two screws.
31Remove the scanner left cover and the contact glass assy.
Screw
Scanner left cover
Scanner unit
Screw
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
32Move the exposure unit to the cutout portion.
33Peel off the sheet.
34Release the hook and then remove the FFC cover.
Lamp unit
Sheet
Sheet
35Remove the FFC from the connector.
36Detach two screws and then remove the LED unit.
Lamp unit
Screw Screw
Connector FFC
Screw Lamp unit
4-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
37Remove each screw and remove front and rear wire holder plates.
38Remove the mirror frame 1 from the scanner unit.
Screw Rear wire Screw

holder plate
Front wire
holder plate
Mirror frame 1
39Remove the scanner wire springs from the hooks.
40Remove the scanner wires.
Scanner wire (black)
Scanner wire springs
Scanner wire
Hooks (gray)
Round terminals
(black marking)
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-2)Fitting the scanner wires
Important
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front:(P/N:302K317150), gray
Machine rear:(P/N:302K317140), black
Fitting requires the following tools

Two frame securing tools (P/N 302FZ17100)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 302RH94010)
1 Remove the screw and remove the scanner wire drum gear.
2 Remove the screw at two scanner wire drums.
3 Remove the stop ring and bush from the front of the scanner wire drum shaft.
4 Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the scanner unit.
Screw
Scanner wire
drum gear
Scanner wire Screw

drum shaft
Screw
Scanner unit
Bush Scanner
Stopring wire drums
4-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Insert the locating ball of each scanner wires into the hole in the respective scanner wire drum and wind the
scanner wire three turns inward and four turns outward.
With the locating ball as the reference point, wind the shorter end of each of the wires outward.
6 Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers.

Scanner wire
stoppers
Three turns
inward
Locating Locating
ball ball
Scanner wire drums
Four turns
outward
7 Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the scanner unit.
8 Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to fix the
mirror frame 2 in position.
Frame securing tool
Frame securing tool
Mirror frame 2
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Wind the outer scanner wires from above to below on the outside grooves in the pulleys at the secondary
mirror frame. ..............(1)
10Hook the round terminals to the catches inside the scanner unit. ..............(2)
11Wind the inner scanner wires from below to above in the grooves of left side scanner unit. ..............(3)
12Wind from below to above inside grooves of the secondary mirror frame pulley. ..............(4)
13Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the left of the scanner unit ..............(5)
14Hook the round terminals to the scanner wire springs. ..............(6)
Black merking
Gray Black
4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and the mirror frame securing tools.
16Move to center the portion of the locating ball in the scanner wire drum, and the scanner wires to inside.
17Move the mirror frame 2 from side to side in order to correctly locate the wires in position.
18Refit the mirror frame 1.
19Move the mirror frame 1 and 2 to the left side of the machine, and insert the two frame securing tools into the
positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the frames in position.
20Hold the wires and fix each front and rear wire holder plate to the mirror frame 1 with the screw.
21Remove the two frame securing tools.
22Refit all the removed parts.
Frame securing tool
Frame securing tool
Mirror frame 2
Mirror frame 1
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) PWBs
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Slide the controller box cover in sideway, and remove it.
6 Detach the USB connector and three screws.
7 Unplug the connector and detach DP connect PWB.
Connection
connector
Screws
DPIF PWB
Screw
USB connector
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Remove all connectors and FFC from the main PWB.
9 Detach eight screws and then remove the main PWB.
10Check or replace the main PWB and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
YC42
YC62
YC32
YC2
YC31
YC20
YC10
YC5
YC65
YC64
YC8 YC60
YC59
YC12 Screw Screw Screw
YC9 YC63 YC11 YC6
Removing connector
Screw
Screw
Main PWB
Screw
Screws
Notes when replacing the main PWB

When replacing the main PWB, make sure to remove the SSD from the old board and install it in the new main board.
(4-86 Reference)
Important
A machine without the SSD does not start up.
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
4-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Execute the following setting after replacing the main PWB.
1 Machine No. (maintenance mode U004)

• If the C0180 error occurs, execute U004 to match the serial numbers in the PWBs.
Execute it after confirming the engine PWB machine serial number matches the main unit serial number.
Wrong data will be written when there is a discrepancy in U004.
• Before executing U004, execute U026/ Flash, return to the SSD back up data.
(1) Input "004" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2) Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
(3) Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
2 Firmware update (See page 5-1)

• Check the latest firmware and upgrade it.
3 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)

(1) Input "410" using the numeric keys.
(2) Press the [Start] key.
• Execution information screen is displayed.
• Test patterns 1 and 2 are output on the A4 paper.
(3) Set the output test pattern 1 as original, in the back side which the direction of the arrow is, looking down the
side which is printing to the original glass.
• Set test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

• The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
(5) Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
• Set test pattern 2 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
• The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
(7) [Finish] displays after normal completion.
4 Resetting the initial settings

Reset the user default setting and FAX default setting (e.g. the local FAX information) from the System Menu or Command
Center.
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Resetting the maintenance mode

Reset the following maintenance mode if necessary
.
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main unit No. Maintenance mode relating to
the main unit
U250 Maintenance counter preset U603 User data 1
U251 Maintenance counter clear U604 User data 2
U253 Double/single count switch U610 System 1
U260 Feed/eject counter switch U611 System 2
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting U612 System 3
U402 Print margin adjustment U625 Communication Setting
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table) U695 FAX function customization
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP)
U425 Target adjustment
6 Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
4-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove six screws.
9 Remove the left lower cover.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
10Slide the controller box cover in sideway, and remove it.
4-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Remove seven connectors and release two wire saddles.
12Detach six screws and then remove the controller box.
Screw Screws
Connectors
Screws
Connectors
Screw
Wire saddles
Controller box
13Remove the wire from the saddle of the wire guide.
14Release the hook, lift the wire guide in front and remove it.
Hook
Wires
Saddles
Wire guide
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Remove all connectors and FFC from the engine PWB.
16Detach six screws and then remove the engine PWB.
17Check or replace the engine PWB and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
Screw Screw Screw
Screw Screw Engine PWB

Screw
2 14 1 1 13 1 16
YC23 YC19 YC29 YC34 YC33
4 1 YC24
18 40 1 20
YC7 1
1
3
YC18
YC8 YC22
12 1
14
1
U3 6
11 YC16
7
YC9 YC30
1 1
YC27 1
1 7
YC15 11
1
14 YC10
11
1 1
YC6 42 YC35 1
3 YC21 YC11
2 1 7
YC32 YC3 1
1 1
1
1 YC20 12
YC38 YC4
12 1 1 13
YC36 YC31
6 1
B13 B1 A1 A12 YC39 1 21 15
YC5 6 1
YC37 YC12
YC13 YC17 YC14 5 1 18
1 12 B12 B1 2 1
A1 A13
Notes when replacing the engine PWB

When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U3) from the PWB and then reattach it to the new PWB.
EEPROM (U3)
Engine PWB
4-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detaching of EEPROM
1 The flat screwdriver is inserted between EEPROM and socket.
2 Detach it little by little right and left and alternately while noting the transformation and the damage of the pin.
EEPROM
Soket
Flat screwdriver
Execute the following setting after replacing the engine PWB.

Scanner auto adjustment (maintenance mode U411): Table(ChartA)
• Adjusts using the digital color chart (Parts number: 7505000005).
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the low voltage power source PWB
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach one screw and then remove the power source box cover.
Power source
box cover
Screw
6 Remove all connectors from the low voltage power source PWB.
7 Detach eight screws and then remove the low voltage power source PWB.
8 Check or replace the low voltage power source PWB and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
Screw
Low voltage
power source PWB
Caution
Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric charge may remain
in the capacitors on the low voltage power source PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the mounted parts to
protect you from electric shock.
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB
Lock lever
Job separator tray
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
4-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Inner tray
12Remove the screw and the exit rear cover.
Eject rear cover
Screw
4-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Remove FFC from the high voltage PWB.
14Detach four screws and remove the high voltage PWB.
15Check or replace the high voltage PWB and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
FFC
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
High voltage PWB
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB 1
Lock lever
Job separator tray
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
4-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Inner tray
12Open the right cover 1 and 2.
13Release the projection of the front upper cover.
14Tilt the front upper cover forward and then unhook two hooks by taking out it upward.
Projection
Front upper
cover
Fooks
4-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Detach the screw and then remove the operation panel lower cover in the direction of the arrow.
Screw
16Remove the screw and then remove the operation panel cover d from the operation panel upper unit.
Screw
Operation panel unit
Operation panel
cover d
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17Remove the wire holder in the fulcrum.
18Remove USB connector.
19Remove three connectors.
Wire holder
Connectors
USB connector
20Remove two screws in the upper portion of the fulcrum.
21Knock down the operation panel and detach two screws in front of the fulcrum.
22Remove the operation panel in the direction of the arrow.

Scews
Screws
4-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23Detach one screw from operation panel upper unit and remove the operation panel cover a.
24Detach two screws and then remove the operation panel cover b.
25Detach two screws and then remove the operation panel cover c.
Operation panel cover c
Operation panel cover a Screw

Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Operation panel upper unit
Operation panel cover b
26Remove the connector and FFC and release from the hook.
27Lift the protrusion of the wire guide, slide in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Connnector
Protrusion
FFC
Wire guide
Hook
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28Remove all connectors and FFC from the operation panel PWB 1.
29Detach four screws and remove the operation panel PWB 1.
30Check or replace the operation panel PWB 1 and reattach the removed parts in the original position.
Screw
Operation panel PWB 1
Screw Screw
Screw
4-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6) Others
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the SSD
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Slide the controller box cover in sideway, and remove it.
6 Remove one screw (M2).
7 Remove the SSD from the connector.

• Use a Phillips 1 screwdriver and take care not to damage the screws.
• Do not use other screw than the item below that is dedicated to securing the SSD.
(7BB000204H BIND M SCREW 2x4)
Positioning boss
Screw hole
Screw
SSD
Connector
Important
To avoid damage when attaching the SSD, align the screw hole to the positioning boss.
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
4-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
SSD replacement procedures when the SSD replacement is indicated.

• Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read Only
mode.
Preparation: 2 USB memory (for firmware and data backup)

Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
1 Firmware storage in a USB memory (USB memory A)

(1) Store the firm upgrade pack of latest version in USB memory or release firmware (Main/MMI/BROWSER/DICTIONARY/
LANGUAGE/OCR).
• Check the firmware applicable to the target model. When inputting the software of outside the target, becomes
unstable in action.
In order to reboot, require minimum main.
2 SSD data backup (USB memory B)

• When fully back up 32G SSD, it need 64GB USB memory.
(1) Install the USB memory B.
(2) Execute maintenance mode U026
Input "026" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Select [SSE].
Select [Backup]. Press the [Start] key.
Turn the power off after completion.
(3) Replace the new SSD.

• When equipping with SSD (8G/32G) which the capacity is different from the specification, pay attention as
F010 SSD and communication error happen.
(4) Turn ON the power with equipping with USB memory A.
As the program from SSD can't load, SSD recovery program which is SNOR on the main PWB start up, is formatted
automatically.
• When forgot the USB memory equipment, pay attention as F010 displays.
(5)If UPDATE completion is displayed on the control panel, turn OFF/ON the power with inserted USB memory A.
3 Update firmware. (See page 5-1)
4 Retrieve the data backed up in the USB memory B.
5 Install from HyPAS application(FMU), application screen.

• Check the kind of HyPAS application which is displayed in the application screen before replacing and
reinstall.
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-2)Detaching and attaching the MP tray
2 Remove the MP wire cover and then remove the connector.
3 Close the right cover 1.
MP wire cover
Connector
Right cover 1
4 Open the MP tray.
5 Remove two stop rings by using the flat-bladed screwdriver.
6 Pull two straps upwards and remove them.
Stop ring Stop ring
Flat Flat
screwdriver screwdriver
Straps
MP tray
4-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Release two fulcrums of the MP tray by using a flat screwdriver.
8 Remove the MP tray.
Fulcrum Fulcrum
Flat screwdriver Flat screwdriver
MP tray
4-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-3)Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit
2 Remove the MP wire cover and then remove the connector.
3 Close the right cover 1.
MP wire cover
Connector
Right cover 1
4 Open the MP tray.
5 Remove two stop rings by using the flat-bladed screwdriver.
6 Pull two straps upwards and remove them.
Stop ring Stop ring
Flat Flat
screwdriver screwdriver
Straps
MP tray
4-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Release two fulcrums of the MP tray by using a flat screwdriver.
8 Remove the MP tray.
Fulcrum Fulcrum
Flat screwdriver Flat screwdriver
MP tray
Right cover 1
4-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove two screws and then remove two straps.
Screw
Strap
Screw
Strap
11Rotate the wire cover.
12Remove the connector.
13Rotate the fulcrum axis and slide it forward.
14Pull the right cover 1 backward and then remove it.
Wire cover Right cover 1
Connector
Fulcrum axis
4-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-4)Detaching and reattaching the conveying fan motor.
Right cover 1
2 Release the front and rear lock levers and close the conveying assembly.
Conveying assembly
Lock lever
Lock lever
4-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Release five hooks and detach the duplex conveying guide.
Hook
Hooks
Duplex conveying guide
4 Disconnect the connector of the conveying fan motor.
5 Detach two screws and then detach the conveying fan motor assy.
Connector
Screws
Conveying fan motor assy
4-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-5)Detaching and attaching the LSU fan motor
Screw
Screw
Screw
Rear upper cover
Screw Screw
Screw
Lower rear cover
Screw
4-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Lock lever
Job separator tray
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Left lower cover
Hooks
4-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Inner tray
12Release two hooks and remove the temperature sensor assy.
13Remove the connector of LSU fan motor.
14Detach the screw and then remove the LSU fan motor.
Temperature sensor
assy
Hooks
Screw
Connector
LSU fan motor
4-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-6)Detaching and attaching the developer fan motor
1 Remove the inner tray and then the LSU fan motor.
2 Remove the connector of the developer fan motor.
3 Remove the fan holder by releaseing the projection part and three hooks A from the aperture of frame.
4 Release the hook B and remove the fan duct.
Hook B
Hooks A
Fan duct Fan holder
Hook B Projection part
Connector
Fan holder
Aperture
Hook A
Projection part
4-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-7)Detaching and attaching the power souce fan motor
1 Remove the lower rear cover and then the power source box cover.
2 Pull the upper cassette out.
3 Remove the connector of fan motor.
4 Release two hooks of fan holder from the power source box.
5 Remove the fan holder in the direction of the arrow.
Hooks Connector
Fan holder
Power source box
4-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7) Direction of installing the principal fan motors
When detaching or reattaching the fan motor, take careful of the installing direction (intake or exhaust).
Eject fan motor

(Rating label: outside)
LSU fan motor
(Rating label: inside)
Intake
Exhaust Conveying fan motor

Intake Intake
Developer fan motor

Intake
Power sorce fan motor
4-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
5Firmware
5 - 1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
• The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller data DL_CTRL.2V6 CTRL
2 Panel data DL_PANL.2V6 PANL
3 Optional language data DL_OPT.2V6 OPT
4 Dictionary data DL_DIC.2ND DIC
5 Browser data DL_BRWS.2ND BRWS
6 OCR dictionary data DL_OCR.2R6 OCR
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
step
1 Slot 1 FAX PWB DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1
2 Slot 2 FAX PWB FAX2
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
step
1 MAIL BOX DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
2 PUNCH UNIT DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
3 1000-sheets DF DL_03RW.2ND 1000DF
4 3000-sheetsDF DL_03NB.2RH 3-4000DF
5 500-sheets×2 PF DL_03N4.2RH 500X2PF1
6 3000-sheets PF DL_03PC.2RH 3000PF1
7 Engine PWB DL_ENGN.2V6 ENGN
[GROUP4 UPDATE]
step
1 DP(inversion) DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
2 DP(CIS) DL_03R8.2ND DP-CIS
3 DP(inversion: bargain price) DL_03RJ.2ND DP-LOW
4 Scanner DL_SCAN.2RH SCAN
[GROUP5 UPDATE]
step
1 Panel PWB DL_SPNL.2ND SPNL
5-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Verify the signature at firmware update

Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data.
File names of the signature and firmware certificate

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file
name
Controller data 2V6_CTRL_sign.bin 2V6_CTRL_cert.pem
Panel data 2V6_PANL_sign.bin 2V6_PANL_cert.pem
Optional language data 2V6_OPT_sign.bin 2V6_OPT_cert.pem
Dictionary data 2ND_DIC_sign.bin 2ND_DIC_cert.pem
Browser data 2ND_BRWS_sign.bin 2ND_BRWS_cert.pem
OCR dictionary data 2R6_OCR_sign.bin 2R6_OCR_cert.pem
FAX PWB 3R2_FAX_sign.bin 3R2_FAX_cert.pem
PUNCH UNIT 2RH_03NK_sign.bin 2RH_03NK_cert.pem
MAIL BOX 2ND_03N0_sign.bin 2ND_03N0_cert.pem
3000-sheets DF 2RH_03NB_sign.bin 2RH_03NB_cert.pem
1000-sheets DF 2ND_03RW_sign.bin 2ND_03RW_cert.pem
3000-sheets PF 2RH_03PC_sign.bin 2RH_03PG_cert.pem
500-sheets×2 PF 2RH_03N4_sign.bin 2RH_03N4_cert.pem
Engine PWB 2V6_ENGN_sign.bin 2V6_ENGN_cert.pem
DP 2ND_03R7_sign.bin 2ND_03R7_cert.pem
2ND_03R8_sign.bin 2ND_03R8_cert.pem
2ND_03RJ_sign.bin 2ND_03RJ_cert.pem
Scanner PWB 2RH_SCAN_sign.bin 2RH_SCAN_cert.pem
Panel PWB 2ND_SPNL_sign.bin 2ND_SPNL_cert.pem
5-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file (skip files:
ES_SKIP.ON) in [FWUP_02V6] folder of the root folder of the USB memory.
• If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.
1 After turning the power switch on and the screen is properly displayed, turn the power switch off.
2 Insert the USB memory with the firmware into the USB memory slot.
3 Turn the power switch on.
USB memory
Power switch
USB
memory slot
4 [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indicator is displayed.

• Several kinds of firmware updates are processed simultaneously.
FW-U PD ATE
CTRL MAIL-BOX 80%

PANL 100% P-UNIT
OPT 1000DF
DIC 3-4000DF
BRWS 500×2PF1
OCR 100% 3000PF1
FAX1 20% ENGN
FAX2 DP-REV
DP-CIS
DP-LOW
SCAN
SPNL
5-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 "Completed" is displayed when the firmware update is completed.
6 Check if the new firmware versions are displayed.
FW-UPDATE Com pleted
CTRL 2RH_2000.001.03 MAIL-BOX No Change

PANL No Change P-UNIT No Change
OPT No Change 1000DF No Change
DIC No Change 3-4000DF No Change
BRWS No Change 500×2PF1 No Change
OCR No Change 3000PF1 No Change
FAX1 ---------- ENGN 2RH_1000.001.005*
FAX2 ---------- DP-REV No Change
DP-CIS No Change
DP-LOW No Change
SCAN No Change
SPNL No Change
• When there is no corresponding master file, "No Change" is displayed.

* is displayed after the firmware version update that has been skipped.
• ----------is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.
For the case of an error

When an error occurs during the firmware upgrade, the process is immediately interrupted and the error code and error
message are indicated.
FW-U P D A T E E rror
CTRL 2RH_2000.001.03 MAIL-BOX No Change

PANL No Change P-UNIT No Change
OPT No Change 1000DF No Change
DIC No Change 3-4000DF No Change
BRWS No Change 500×2PF1 No Change
OCR No Change 3000PF1 No Change
FAX1 ---------- ENGN Error 0801
FAX2 ---------- DP-REV No Change
DP-CIS No Change
DP-LOW No Change
SCAN No Change
SPNL No Change
Error Error content Error Error content

code code
0000 Other S000 Other signature verification error *1
0100 No Master file S001 Signature verification file is inadequate
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no upgrade target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
04xx File (No.xx) Checksum mismatch N002 Network connection failed. *3

(There is an upgrade target interrupted)
05xx File (No.xx) Preparation failure
06xx File (No.xx) Oversize
08xx File (No.xx) Writing failure
*1: Including the expired FW certificate

*2: Automatically restarted for the normal start-up since the normal start-up is available next time.
*3: Transferred to the USB upgrade mode instead of the automatic restart since the normal start-up may not be
available next time.
5-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Indication of the signature verification result

Official signature verification file Result indication
Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is successful. Version number
Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful. S000
Neither certificate nor signature files exist. S001

Or either of them does not exist.
1 Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory.
2 Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on.
3 Check that the "Home" screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off.
Important
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update.
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware
update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
• The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.
5-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6Maintenance mode
6 - 1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the [▲] [▼] keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Maintenance modes list

Section Maintenance item Outline
General U000 Output Maintenance Report Printing the reports and exporting them to a USB memory
U001 Exit Maintenance Mode Exiting from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initializing to the factory-default setting
U003 Set Telephone Number for Service Call Sets the telephone number of the service person.
U004 Machine Number Display of the machine serial number and setting
U010 Set Maintenance Mode ID Setting the maintenance mode ID
U018 Check Firmware Checksum Check the firmware falsification.
U019 Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the PWB
Initialization U021 Initialize Memory Initializing the backup RAM
U024 Format HDD Formats/configures the HDD
U025 Firmware update (S) Updates the firmware
U026 Pulling Backup Data Retrieve the backup data
Drive U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor
Paper feed U031 Check the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
Conveying U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
Cooling U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply solenoids
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjusting the leading edge timing and the center line
U035 Folio size setting Sets the Folio paper length and width.
U037 Fan motor operation check Drive each fan motor.
U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment Adjusts the paper loop amount between the rollers
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Sets each motor's speed correction
Optical U061 Lamp lighting check Turns the exposure lamp on
U063 Shading position adjustment Changes the scanner shading position
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning Adjusting the magnification for table scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjusting the leading edge timing for table scanning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line Adjusting the center line for table scanning
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjusting the starting position for DP scanning
U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing Adjusting the DP scanning timing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjusting the center line for DP scanning
U073 Scanner motor operation check Move the scanner in the set condition
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteristics Sets the DP image scanning density
U087 Setting the DP scanning position change Change the scanning position as the corrective measures for
operation the black lines
U089 MIP-PG pattern output Output MIP-PG pattern
U091 White lines correction setting Sets the white lines detection threshold
U099 Original size detection setting Sets the original size detection check and detection threshold
High voltage U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
system U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Sets high voltage except the main high voltage and outputs
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Adjust ON/OFF timing of separation shift bias.
U110 Drum counter Displays/sets the drum counter
U111 Drum drive time. Displays the drum drive time.
U117 Drum unit number Displays the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Displays the drum history
U120 Drum drive distance counter Display the drum drive distance counter.
U127 Clearing the transfer count Displaying the counts
6-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Developer U130 Developer agent initial setting Installs initial toner in the developer unit
system U136 Toner level detection setting Sets the number of pages printable at toner near end
U139 Temperature, humidity Displays the machine inside and outside humidity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Sets the overcharge toner removal mode
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Setting auto drum refresh
U150 Check Toner Sensor Operation Displays the ON/OFF status of each switch and sensor in
related toner.
U157 Developer drive time Displays/sets the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Displays/sets the developer counter
Fuser U161 Fuser temperature adjustment Sets the fuser control temperature
U167 Clearing the fuser count Displaying/clearing the counts
U198 Set Fuser Phase Control Switch the fuser phase control.
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Operation U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
section / U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch panel
Support
U203 Check DP operation Checking the DP paper conveying operation with the DP
equipment
alone
U204 Key card/key counter setting Key card/key counter connection setting
U206 Sets the coin vendor Sets the coin vendor
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key operation
U221 USB host lock function setting Sets USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U222 Setting the IC card type Sets the ID card type
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock
U224 Setting Original Panel Display Sets the opening screen
U230 Optional device serial number Displays the optional device serial number
U234 Setting destination for punch Set the punch destination
U237 Finisher eject volume limit Sets the main tray stack capacity
U240 Finisher operation check Checks the drive operation
U241 Finisher switch check Check the switch operation
U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the DP motor
U244 DP switch check Check the DP sensor
U245 Checking the message Check message
U246 Finisher adjustment Sets the finisher adjustment value
U247 Paper feed operation check Drives the PF motor and clutch
Mode U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set Changes the preset value
Setting U251 Clearing the maintenance counter Displaying/clearing/changing the counter value
U252 Destination Sets the machine operation and indication depending on the
specification of each destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Sets the counter by color mode
U260 Switching the timing for copy counting Setting the count-up timing
U265 Setting by destination Sets the OEM code
U278 Delivery date setting Register Delivery Date
U285 Set Service Status Page Setting the print coverage report output
U286 Optional language setting Add/delete/change the optional language
U287 Automatic recovery function Sets whether to automatically recover after error
U326 Black line cleaning indication Switch the black line cleaning guidance indication
U327 Cassette heater control setting Selects the cassette heater control setting
6-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Mode U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient Setting the coefficient of the custom size
Setting U340 Setting the applied mode Sets the memory allocation
U341 Printer cassette setting Sets the cassette to printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switches the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Setting the maintenance timing display
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Setting the BAM related sleep mode
Image U402 Adjusting the printing margins Adjusts the margin for writing images
processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
the document processor
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Reversal) Adjusting the writing timing in rotated 180 degrees
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Acquiring the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and
the ID correction
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjusting the scanner and DP automatically
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing
U425 Set Target Inputs the Lab value printed on an adjustment original
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Sets the JPEG compression rate
U485 Image process mode setting Sets the image processing
U520 TDRS setting Checking/setting the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initializes all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initializing the software switches of other than the machine
data
U603 User data 1 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U604 User data 2 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U605 Data clear Initializing the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a FAX
at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
U611 System 2 Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
U612 System 3 Setting regarding the FAX communication operation
U615 System 6 Sets the size to print at FAX reception and received image
size
U620 FAX system Sets the signal detection method for remote switching
U625 Communication settings Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of
auto redialing
U630 Communication control procedures 1 Setting the FAX communication
U631 Communication control procedures 2 Sets the FAX communication
U634 Communication control procedures 5 Set the acceptable error when judging the received TCF
signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Setting the detection time by remote switching mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Sets the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Sets the modem output level
U660 Ring setting Setting the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Outputting the list of the fax communication data
U671 FAX backup data clear Clear the FAX backup data
U695 FAX function customization FAX batch transmission is set up.
6-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

FAX U698 Setting the maintenance port Set the port to apply
U699 Software switch: Set Sets the software switches individually
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper source Displays/clears the counters by paper source
U903 Clearing the jam counter Displays/clears number of occurrence by jam trigger code
U904 Clearing the service call error counter Displays/clears the service call error and system error counts
U905 Optional counter Displaying the counts
U906 Resetting the partial operation Resets the partial operation
U908 Total counter Displays the FAX count
U910 Black rate data Clearing the print coverage data and its period
U911 Counter by media type Displays/clears the counts by media type
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Reading/writing the backup data to a USB memory
U920 Billing counter Displays the billing count
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clearing the billing count and machine life count
U928 Machine life counter Displays the machine life count
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Displaying/setting the counts
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log Sets the maintenance mode log
U935 Maintenance Relay Board Set the disorder mode setting.
U942 DP loop amount setting Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document
processor
U952 Maintenance mode workflow Execute the maintenance flow with the WorkFlow data
U964 Log check Transfer the log files save in the HDD to a USB memory
U969 Toner area code Displays the toner area code
U977 Setting the data capture mode Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory
U981 Set/Check CBM Alert Data Refers and changes the information on CBM (condition
based maintenance) in KFS.
U984 Developer unit number Displays the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Displays the developer unit number history
U989 HDD scan disk Execute the HDD scan disk
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time Displays the accumulated CIS lighting time
U991 Scanner counter Displays the scanner count
6-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Content of each maintenance mode

U000 Output Maintenance Report
(Message: Output Maintenance Report)
Contents
Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences. Output the
event log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter
the settings after initialization or replacement.
Execution
1 Press the [Start] key.
2 Select the item to output.

Items Output list
Maintenance Maintenance mode setting status list
User Status Output User Status Page
Service Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
Network Status Output Network Status Page
LLU Report Output LLU report
All All reports output
3 Press the [Start] key to output the list.

If A4 paper is available, it is output with this size. If A4 paper is unavailable, select the paper source. Output status is
displayed.
Execution: when sending output data to a USB memory
2 Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3 Select the item to send.
4 Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].

Items Output list
Print A report is printed.
USB(Text) Destination: send to USB memory (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)

The output data is sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detail of event log
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 4012i (2) 2017/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2V6_2000.001.133 2017.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (7) Life Count:100000
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time (10) Maintenance Log
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Item. Data and Time
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2 444444 02.01 2014/02/12 17:30
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 1 222222 02.02 2014/02/12 17:30
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5
4 0501.01.08.01.00
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01
0501.01.08.01
2014/02/12 17:30
2014/02/12 17:30
3 (a)
555555 (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01 (e)
2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
(9) Service Call Log (11) Unknown toner Log

# Count. Service Code Data and Time # Count. Serial Number Item. Data and Time
8 1111111 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 5 1111111 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 01.01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 4 999999 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 01.01.0000 2014/02/12 17:30 3 888888 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5 777777 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 2 777777 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
4 666666 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 1 666666 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
3 555555 01.01.4000 2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30
6-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 4012i 2017/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2V6_2000.001.133 2017.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 Life Count:100000
(12) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4302: 0
J0100: 1 J4303: 1
J0101: 11 J4304: 11
J0104: 222 J4309: 2
J0105: 1 J9000: 1
J0106: 1 J9004 0
J0107: 1 J9010: 1
J0110: 1 J9060: 1
J0111: 1 J9061: 2
J0211: 1 J9062: 1
J0212: 1 J9110: 1
J0213: 999 J9120: 0
J0501: 1 J9200: 1
J0502: 1 J9210: 1
J0503: 1 J9220: 2
J0504: 1
J0508: 1 (g) C0000: 0
J0509: 1 C0001: 1
J0511: 1 C0002: 2
J0512: 1 C0003: 3
J0513: 1 C0004: 4
J0514: 1 C0005: 5
J0518: 1 C0006: 6
J0519: 1 C0007: 7
J1403: 1 C0008: 8
J1404: 1 C0009: 9
J1413: 1 C0010: 10
J1414: 1 CF245: 11( 0)
J1604: 1 CF248: 12( 0)
J1614: 1 CF345: 13( 0)
J4002: 1 (h) T00: 10
J4003: 1 M00: 20
J4004: 1 M02: 30
J4009: 1
J4012: 1
J4013: 1
J4014: 1
J4019: 1
J4201: 1
J4202: 0
J4203: 1
J4204: 1
J4208: 0
J4209: 1
J4211: 11
J4212: 222
J4213: 1
J4214: 2
J4218: 1
J4219: 2
J4301: 1
6-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Description of event log

No. Items Contents
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Paper Jam Log
# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Record 1 to 16 of occurrence. The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in Date and
If the past paper jam time of a paper jam. hexadecimal) time of
occurrence is less than 16, all occurrence
of them are indicated. The (a) Cause of paper jam
oldest log is deleted when
(b) Paper source
exceeding 16 events.
(c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject
(a)Detail of cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection",for the detail of cause of paper jam. (P.7-54)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
05 to 09: Unused
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 35: Youkei type 4
6-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(7) Paper Jam Log
cont. (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(8) Service Call Log

# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 th of The total page count at the The first two digits Date and
occurrence of self diagnostics time of the self diagnostic (identification) time of
error. error. 01: Service call / System error occurrence
If the occurrence of the 02: Unit replacement
previous self-diagnostic error
is 8 or less, all of the
diagnostics errors are logged. Next two digits (Auto reboot
information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
Last four digits

Self diagnostic error code
(P.7-64See page )
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnostic
error, 00 without auto beboot
and 6000 Self diagnostic error
code.
U287 sets the auto reboot
function
6-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(9) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 of Total page count at the time of Maintenance item code (1- Date and
occurrence of unknown toner the replacement of the byte value to indicate 2 items) time of
detection. If the occurrence of maintenance item. occurrence
the previous unknown toner
First byte (Replacing item)
detection is less than 8, all of
the unknown toner detection 02: Maintenance kit
are logged. The toner replacement log is
triggered by toner empty. This
Second 1 byte (replacement
record may contain such a
item type)
reference as the toner
container is inserted twice or a
used toner container is 01: MK-7125
inserted. MK-7126
MK-7127
MK-7129
6-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(10) Toner Log
# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 32 of The total page count at the log code Date and
occurrence of unknown toner time of the request of toner First 1byte(Replacing item) time of
detection. If the occurrence of container replacement. occurrence
01: Genuine product
the previous unknown toner
detection is less than 32, all of 02: Non-genuine product
the unknown toner detection
are logged. Next 1byte (type of
replacement item)
00: Black
Last 16 digits
Displays the serial number of
the toner container.
(11) Counter Log

(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for
maintenance Item
Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter Consist of
paper jams depending on self diagnostics errors depending on the three log
location. depending on cause. maintenance replacing item. counters of
Refer to Paper Jam Log. paper jams,
self
The number of auto reboot is T: Toner container
diagnostics
All instances including those also displayed at the service 00: Black errors, and
not having occurred are call/system error.
maintenanc
displayed. e
M: Maintenance kit
replacement
01: MK-7125 items.
(Example) CF245: 4(2)
MK-7126
System Error 245 occurred
MK-7127
last four times and then
executed the auto reboot MK-7129
twice.
Example: T00: 1
The toner container (Black)
has been replaced once.
The toner replacement log is

triggered by toner empty. This
record may contain such a
reference as the toner
container is inserted twice or a
used toner container is
inserted.
6-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detail of service status page
Service Status Page (2) ZKG6400006

MFP
(3) 01/08/2017 14:30
TASKalfa 4012i (4)(5) [2.1.6] [2V6_F000.001.008]
(1) Firmware Version 2V6_Q000.001.146 2017.08.01 (6)(7)(8) [2V6_1000.001.020] [2V6_1100.001.001] [2V6_7000.001.216]
Controller Information
Memory Status
Standard Size 1.0 GB KIR Mode N0 02
Option Slot 0 MB Duplex mode N4 00
(9) Total Size 1.0 GB Sleep Timer N5 120
EcoPrint Mode N6 00
Time Reserved N7 00
(10) Local Time Zone Print Resolution N8 01
GMT Greenwich Mean Time: Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London Default Emulation P1 06
(11) Date and Time 04/08/2016 01:46 CR/LF Action P2/P3 1/1
(12) Time Server AES Mode P4 00
AES Option 1/2 P7 10
Installed Options Command Recognition P9 82
(13) Document Processor Installed Default Paper Output R0 01
(14) Paper Feeder Cassette (500 x 2) Default Paper Size R2 00
(15) Hard Disk *1 Not Installed Reserved R3 00
(16) SD Card Not Installed Default Paper Source R4 01
(17) Finisher Not Installed Override A4/LT S4 01
(18) Mail Box Not Installed Host Buffer Size Rate S5 01
(19) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed RAM Disk Size S6 128
(20) Internet Fax Kit (E) Not Installed RAM Disk Mode S7 01
(21) Data Security Kit (E) Not Installed Wide A4 T6 00
(22) UG-33 Installed Default Line Spacing U0+U1/100 6.00
(23) UG-34 Installed Default Character Spacing U2+U3/100 10.00
(24) USB Keyboard Not Connected Reserved U4 01
(25) USB Keyboard Type US-English Country Code/Symbol Set U6/U7 41/53
(26) Scan extention Kit (A) Installed Default Pitch U8+U9/100 10.00
Default Font Height V0*100+V1+V2/100 12.00
(27) Print Coverage Default Font Name V3 Courier
Average (%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) Default KANJI Font Size V4*100+V5+V6/100 10.00
(28) Total Default KANJI Font Name V7 MTHSMINCHO-W3
K: 0.00 / 0.00 Courier/LetterGothic V9 05
(29) Copy MP Tray Paper Type X0 01
K: 0.00 / 0.00 Cassette 1 Paper Type X1 01
(30) Printer Cassette 2 Paper Type X2 01
K: 0.00 / 0.00 Cassette 3 Paper Type X3 01
(31) FAX PCL Paper Source X9 00
K: 0.00 / 0.00 Auto Error Clear Y0 00
(32) Period ( - 04/08/2016 01:46) Error Clear Timer Y1 06
(33) Last Page (%) 0.00 Finishing error Y3 127
(34) Last Job (%) 0.00 Special Type Act Mode Y4 00
PDF mode Y5 00
(35) FRPO Status e-MPS error control Y6 03
Reserved B0 00
Default Pattern Switch B8 00 RP Code
Page Orientation C1 00 (36) 0008 01E2 3177
Default Font Number C5*10000+C2*100+C3 00000 (37) 0008 027A C873
Reserved C6 00 (38) FFFF FFFF FFFF
PCL Font Switch C8 00 (39) 0008 01E2 31F5
Print density D4 03
Reserved D6 03
Host Buffer Size H8 05
FF Time Out H9 06
Reserved I5 01
Reserved I6 00
Zoom J0 00
Text wrap mode J7 00
Horizontal user offset K0+K1/100 0.00
Vertical user offset K2+K3/100 0.00
Default KANJI number K4 00
KANJI code switch K6 00
Reserved K9 00
*1: Only except KDA of 32 ppm model
6-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Service Status Page ZKG6400006

MFP
01/08/2017 14:30
TASKalfa 4012i [2.1.6] [2V6_F000.001.008]
Firmware Version 2V6_Q000.001.146 2017.08.01 [2V6_1000.001.020] [2V6_1100.001.001] [2V6_7000.001.216]
Controller Information Engine Information

Print Settings (43) NVRAM Version _Cb26630_Cb26630
(40) MP Tray Priority Off (44) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version 2GR_5000.001.001
(41) Altitude Adjustment FAX APL Version 2GR_5100.001.001
Status Normal FAX IPL Version 2GR_5200.001.001
(45) MAC Address 00:17:C8:16:84:04
(42) System Firmware(Details) (46) DP Counters
2V6_Q000.001.146 Total 0
2V6_QA00.001.146
2V6_R000.001.146
2V6_R100.001.146
2V6_R200.001.146
2V6_R300.001.146
2V6_R400.001.146
2V6_R500.001.146
2V6_R600.001.146
2V6_R700.001.146
2V6_R800.001.146
2V6_R900.001.146
2V6_RB00.001.146
2V6_RD00.001.146
2V6_S100.001.146
6-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Service Status Page ZKG6400006

MFP
01/08/2016 14:30
TASKalfa 4012i [2.1.6] [2V6_F000.001.008]
Firmware Version 2V6_Q000.001.146 2016.08.01 [2V6_1000.001.020] [2V6_1100.001.001] [2V6_7000.001.216]
(47)(48) 1/1
(49) 600/600
(50) 0/0/0/0/0/
(51) 0/0/0/0/0/
(52) 0/50/0/50/
(53) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
(54) 0000000//0000000/0000000//0000000/
(55) 0000000/
F00/U00/0/1/1/1/25/25/50/0/0/0/0/00//5/2/0/1/ (56)(57)(58)(59)(60)(61)(62)(63)(64)(65)(66)(67)(68)(69)(70)(71)(72)(73)(74)
(75) 2010/9000/4010/5000/3010/2010/4000/4010/3010/2010/5000/6000/
5010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/
(76) 00000000/00000000/00000000000000000000000000000000/00000000000000000000000000000000/0000/00/00
(77)(78) /0/
(79)(80) [3NN_9000.002.001][][]
(81) [2P1_81DK.001.003][2P1_81SE.001.003][2P1_81NO.001.003][2P1_81BR.001.003][2P1_81TR.001.003]
(82) 0258000000/0258000000/0000------/----------/--------00/000000002E/C3694B6---/----------/----------/---0000000/
0---------/----------/----------/----------/---------0/0000000---/----------/----------/----------/---00A00A8/
C00360000-/----------/----------/----------/----------/---0000000/0---------/----------/-----00000/000-------/
---96AF961/43C14-----/---000493E/0--------0/0000000000/249F000024/9F0000249F/000000000-/-------000/0000000000/
0000000000/000000000-/-0202-----/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/
----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/-------000/00000
(83) 0/
(84)(85) -/-/
(86)(87) 0/5/
(88) 1/
1/0/1/ (89)(90)(91)
(92) EZJ00Z400033/
(93) EZK00Z400016/
6-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(1) Firmware Version -
(2) Machine serial number -
(3) System date -
(4) API version of the HyPAS application -
(5) Browser version -
(6) Engine firmware version -
(7) Engine boot version -
(8) Operation panel firmware version -
(9) Total memory size -
(10) Local time zone -
(11) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(12) NTP server name -
(13) Whether the DP is installed or not Installed/Not Installed
(14) Whether the paper feeder is installed or not Cassette(500-sheet×2) / Cassette(1500-sheet×2) / Not Installed
(15) Availability of the Hard Disk Installed/Not Installed
(Only except KDA of 32 ppm model)
(16) Availability of the SD memory card Installed/Not Installed
(17) Availability of the finisher 1000-sheet finisher/
3000-sheet finisher/not installed
(18) Availability of Mailbox Installed/Not Installed
(19) Availability of the ID Card Authentication Kit Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(20) Availability of the Internet FAX Kit(A) Installed/Not Installed
(21) Availability of the Security Kit(E) Installed/Not Installed
(22) Availability of UG-33 Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(23) Availability of UG-34 Installed/Not Installed
(24) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(25) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German
France
(26) Availability of the Scan extension kit(A) Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(27) Page count converted to the A4/Letter size Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of toner
consumption and will not match the actual toner consumption.
(28) Entire average coverage Black
(29) Average coverage for copy Black
(30) Average printer coverage Black
(31) Average coverage for FAX Black
(32) Cleared date and output date -
(33) Coverage on the last output page -
(34) Last job coverage information -
(35) FRPO setting -
(36) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the previous
update.
(37) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the latest
update.
(38) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the previous
update.
(39) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous
update.
6-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(40) MP tray priority setting Off (No setting)/Auto(Auto paper feed)/Always(All times)
(41) High altitude adjustment set data Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m
(42) System Firmware (detail) -
(43) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the
database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME
firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are
identical with (c) and (f).
(44) FAX firmware version -
(45) Mac address -
(46) DP counter The number of times of DP feeding
(47) Destination information -
(48) Area information -
(49) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(50) Top offset -
(51) Left offset -
(52) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left margin
integer part /Left margin decimal part
(53) Life counter (cassette 1) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette/Paper feeder 1/Paper feeder 2/
Duplex
(54) Life counter (cassette 2) Drum unit/Transfer unit/MC roller/Fuser unit
(55) Life counter (cassette 3) Maintenance kits
(56) Panel lock information F00: OFF
F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(57) USB information U00: Not Connected
U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
(58) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select
1: Paper source fixed
(59) Auto cassette change 0: OFF
1: ON (Default)
(60) Black and white printing double count mode 0: All single counts
1: A3 (Less than 420 mm length), Single counts
2: Legal(Less than 356mm length), Single counts
3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
6-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(61) Billing counts timing 0: When secondary paper feed starts
1: When completing output
(62) Temperature (machine inside) -
(63) Temperature (machine outside) -
(64) Relative humidity (machine outside) -
(65) Absolute humidity (machine outside) -
(66) Machine inside humidity -
(67) LSU1 humidity information -
(68) LSU2 humidity information -
(69) DRT information -
(70) Asset Number -
(71) Job end judgment time-out time -
(72) Job end detection mode 0: Detects as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detects as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a break in
job
(73) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
(74) Scan to SMB mode setting 0: Off
1: On
(75) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
For details on settings, refer to MDAT 2: Normal 2 2: Low
command in "Prescribe Commands 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Reference Manual".
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Heavy 4 1: Enable
8: Heavy 5
9: Extra Heavy
(76) RFID information -
(77) RFID reader/writer version -
(78) Toner install mode information 0: Off
1: On
(79) Cassette3 software version -
(80) LCF1 software version -
(81) Option message version -
(82) Maintenance information -
(83) MC correction 1 to 7
(84) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(85) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(86) Toner low setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(87) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(88) Shift regulation for a single original 0: disable (shift regulation off)
1: enable (shift regulation on)
(89) ErP applied mode setting 0: ErP non-applied mode
1: ErP applied mode
6-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(90) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)
1: Full-page mode
(91) Wake-up mode 0: Off (Don't wake up)
1: On (Do wake up)
(92) Drum serial number -
(93) Developer serial number -
6-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U001 Exit Maintenance Mode

(Message:Exit Maintenance Mode)
Contents
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method
2 The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Set Factory Default

(Message: Set Factory Default)
Contents
Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
2 Select [Mode1(All)].

Items Contents
Mode1(All) Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.

An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U002.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U003 Set Telephone Number for Service Call

(Message: Set Telephone Number for Service Call)
Contents
Sets the phone number indicated at the service call error.
Purpose
Execute to set the service telephone number at the installation of the machine.
Setting

Input keys are indicated on the touch panel.
2 Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
6-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U004 Machine Number

(Message: Machine Number)
Contents
Sets or displays the machine serial number.
Purpose
Checks the machine serial number
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the "C0180 machine number mismatch" occurs.
Caution
Do not execute U004, select [Execute] and press [Start] key if the machine serial number in the engine
PWB is different from the main unit serial number. A different machine serial number is overwritten in the
main PWB.
Execution

When the machine serial number in the engine PWB matches the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number in the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1 Select [Execute].

The serial number writing starts.
Completion
6-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U010 Set Maintenance Mode ID

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security.
Method
2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.
Setting: New ID
1 Select [New ID].
2 Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.

Either [*] or [#] must be included.
4 Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5 Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID.
Method: Initialize
1 Select [Initialize].
2 Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
6-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U018 Check Firmware Checksum

(Message: Check Firmware Checksum)
Contents
Verifies that the firmware is not falsified3.
Purpose
Re-calculate the checksum to verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method

Items Contents
Expected Displays the checksum expected value
Result Displays the checksum calculation
Execute Execute self-verification
2 Select [Execute].

After execution, display the checksum obtained in the [Expected].
The following appears if the verification result is illegal.

Codes Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Illegal data of the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Fails to obtain the checksum
NG Expected value and checksum are different
Completion
6-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U019 Firmware Version

(Message: Firmware Version)
Contents
Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method

The firmware version is displayed.
2 Change the screen using the [▲][▼] key.

Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation firmware
Panel Main Panel firmware
Panel Boot Panel Boot
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
Scanner Scanner
Scanner Boot Scanner Boot
RFID RFID
Dictionary Dictionary firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
OCR OCR dictionary firmware
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DP SSW DP SSW
PF1 Paper feeder 1 firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot
DF finisher firmware
DF Boot finisher boot
PH Punch firmware
PH Boot Punch Boot
MT mailbox Firmware
MT Boot mailbox boot
Fax APL1 Fax APL1
Fax Boot1 FAX Boot1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL1
Fax APL2 Fax APL2
Fax Boot2 FAX Boot2
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL2
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
6-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
Completion
6-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U021 Initialize Memory

(Message: Initialize Memory)
Contents
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call error history and
mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area specification selected in the maintenance mode U252
(Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion
6-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U024 Format HDD

(Message: Format HDD)
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Precautions
The following settings are initialized if the HDD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document Box, etc.),Shortcut key,
Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software, color table.
Method
2 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
3 Select the item to execute. Displays the item to delete.

Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (save in the application software)
4 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Starts operation
5 Press the [Start] key to execute the initialization.
Manually reinstall deleted software.

Optional language, OCR dictionary software, (OCRDATA): Install using a USB memory.
Install the HyPAS application (FMU, etc.) from the Application screen.
If there is no OCR dictionary software, a warning dialog is displayed, and the OCR function is unavailable.
Completion
6-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U025 Firmware update (S)

(Message: Firm Update(Security))
Contents
Executes Firmware-Update from the USB memory while "Very High" is selected in the Security Level settings under the
System Menu.
Supplement
Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB memory is inserted
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware

This is not executable when a USB memory is not installed.
4 After normal completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off
and on.
Completion
6-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U026 Pulling Backup Data

(Message: Pulling Backup Data)
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restores the setting values backup from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Data is transferred from an SSD to another via a USB memory.
Method

Items Contents
Flash Backup data is retrieved to flash memory.
SSD SSD data is backed up and retrieved when a USB memory is installed.
Method:Flash
1 Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data
Method:SSD

Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data
3 After [Restore] completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off
and on.
Indicates "NG" when completing abnormally.

Saved data:
U278 Delivery date setting
U402 margin adjustment
U952 Maintenance workflow data
Completion
6-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U030 Motor operation check

(Message: Check Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each motor.
Contents
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
2 Select the motor to operate.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Main Operate the main motor
Exit(CW) Drive the Exit(CW) motor
Exit(CCW) Drive the Exit(CCW) motor
DLP Operate the DLP motor
Fuser Operate the Fuser motor
Bridge Operate the bridge motor
To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U031 Check the conveying switch

(Message: Check Conveying Switch)
Contents
Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
Execute to check the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
2 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
3 The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.

Items Contents
FeedA Displays the feed sensor Astatus
FeedB Displays the feed sensor B status
Regist Display the registration sensor status
Duplex Displays the DU sensor status
Bridge1 Displays the bridge conveying sensor 1 switch status
Bridge2 Displays the bridge conveying sensor 2 switch status
Fuser Displays the exit sensor status
Face Down Tray Full Display the paper full sensor state
Job separator Full Display the job paper full sensor state
Contain Displays the toner container switch status
Completion
6-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U032 Clutch operation check

(Message: Check Clutch Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch operation.
Method
2 Select the clutch to operate.

Items Contents
Feed 1 Operate the vertical conveying clutch 1
Feed 2 Operate the vertical conveying clutch 2
Regist Operate the registration clutch
Duplex Operate the DU clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Motor Operate the motor
The clutch operation is available while the motor is operated.
4 To stop the clutch operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U033 Solenoid operation check

(Message: Check Solenoid Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid's operation.
Method
2 Select the solenoid to operate.

Select the motor before checking the motor rotation.
Items Contents
MPT Operate the MPT solenoid
Eject Operate the eject solenoid
Motor Operate the motor
The solenoid operation is available while the motor is operated.
4 To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U034 Paper timing data adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Timing Data)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method
2 Select the item to adjust.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Full Adjust the leading edge timing of full speed output
LSU Out Left Adjusts the center line
Adjustment: LSU Out Top Full
2 Press the [System Menu] key.
3 Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
MPT Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
Cassette1 Adjusts the leading edge timing for cassette 1 -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
feed
feed
(Optional unit) feed
(Optional unit) feed
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
paper feed
6-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value is
decreased.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode.
U034 > U066(P.6-48) > U071(P.6-52)
Adjustment: LSU Out Left

setting variation
MPT Adjust the center line for the MP tray -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
Cassette1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
Cassette2 Adjust the center line for cassette 2 feed -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
Cassette3 Adjust the center line for cassette 3 (Optional -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
unit) feed
Cassette4 Adjust the center line for cassette 4 (Optional -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
unit) feed
Duplex Adjusting the center line when duplex copying -128 to 127 0 0.1mm
(Back page)
6-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting value is decreased.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Precautions
U034 < U067(P.6-49) < U072(P.6-54)
Completion
6-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U035 Folio size setting

(Message: Adjust Folio Size)
Contents
Changes the printable area when copyng with Folio paper.
Purpose
Setting the actual size of Folio to use prevents the image dropout at the trailing edge or right/left edges.
Method
setting variation
Length Sets the Folio paper length. 318 to 356 (mm) 330 1(mm)
Width Sets the Folio paper width. 200 to 220 (mm) 210 1(mm)
Completion
6-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U037 Fan motor operation check

(Message: Check Fan Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
2 Select the fan motor to operate.

Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Eject Operate the eject fan motor
Low Power Operate the low voltage power source fan motor
LSU Cooling Operate the LSU fan motor
Conveying Operate the conveying fan motor
DLP Operate the developer fan motor
Completion
6-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjusts the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded in a Z-shape.
Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method

Items Contents
Full Paper loop amount adjustment of full spead
Half Paper loop amount adjustmen of half spead
Full(Heavy) Paper loop amount adjustment of full spead(Heavy)
Half(Heavy) Paper loop amount adjustmen of half spead(Heavy)
Adjustment: Full/Half
3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.


setting variation
MPT Loop amount adjustment for the MP tray paper -30 to 20 -5 lmm
feed
Cassette 1 Loop amount adjustment for cassette 1 paper -30 to 20 -5 1mm
feed
feed
PF Loop amount adjustment for PF(Cassette 3,4) -30 to 20 -3 1mm
paper feed
Duplex Loop amount adjustment for the duplex paper -30 to 20 -7 1mm
feed
6-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases when the setting value is
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Adjustment: Full(Heavy)/Half(Heavy)


setting variation
MPT Loop amount adjustment for the MP tray paper -30 to 20 -5 lmm
feed
feed
feed
PF Loop amount adjustment for PF(Cassette 3,4) -30 to 20 -1 1mm
paper feed
Duplex Loop amount adjustment for the duplex paper -30 to 20 -5 1mm
feed
6-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Completion
6-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U053 Adjusting the motor speed

(Message:Adjust Motor Speed)
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Full Set the speed correction value of full speed.
Half Set the speed correction value of half speed.
Adjustment: Full/Half
2 The screen for adjusting is displayed.
setting variation
Main Set main motor's speed correction. -50 to 50 0 0.1%
Main(MPT) Set Main(MPT) motor's speed correction -50 to 50 0 0.1%
Main(Duplex) Set Main(Duplex) motor's speed correction -50 to 50 -4 0.1%
Cassette2 Set PF main motor's speed correction -50 to 50 0 0.1%
Fuser Set Fuser motor's speed correction -50 to 50 0 0.1%
Polygon Set Polygon motor's speed correction -20 to 20 0 0.1%
Exit Set Exit motor's speed correction -50 to 50 0 0.1%
DLP Set DLP motor's speed correction -50 to 50 0 0.1%
Bridge Set Bridge motor's speed correction -50 to 50 0 0.1%
Completion
6-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U061 Lamp lighting check

(Message: Check Lamp ON)
Contents
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
Light the exposure lamp to confirm.
Method
2 Select the item to operate.

Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the CIS lamp on (when the simultaneous duplex scanning document
processor is installed)
3 Press the [Start] key. Lamps are lit.

Press the [Stop] key to turn the lamp off.
Completion
6-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U063 Shading position adjustment

(Message: Adjust Shading Position)
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning the shading plate, namely
there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or scratch of the shading plate.
Setting
setting variation
Position Changes the scanner shading position 0 to 18 0 0.16mm
If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and toward the right side if the value
is reduced.
Precautions
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode when executing this
maintenance mode.
Completion
6-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

(Message: Adjust Scanner Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusts the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the above incorrect
Precautions
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depending on the content of the
original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-46)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-46)
Method

setting variation
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scanning -75 to 75 0 0.02%
direction
Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub- -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction
Adjustment: Main Scan
When the setting value is increased, the image widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
6-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Adjustment: Sub Scan
When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Completion
6-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

(Message: Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. -30 to 30 0 0.16 mm
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value is
decreased.
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Precautions
U034(P.6-35) > U065(P.6-46) > U066
Completion
6-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

(Message: Adjust Table Center)
Contents
Adjusts the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
For the copy example 1, increase the setting value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the setting value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting value is decreased.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Precautions
U034(P.6-35) > U065(P.6-46) > U067
Completion
6-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U068 DP scanning position adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Scan Position)
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used
Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method

setting variation
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -38 to 38 0 0.16 mm
originals.
Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test copy 0 to 3 0 -
originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1 Select [DP Read].
When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value is
decreased.
Adjustment: Black Line
1 Select [Black Line].
4 Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu] key.
5 Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line
appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
6-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U070 DP magnification adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

Items Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Sub Scan (F) Adjusting the magnification for table scanning -125 to 125 0 0.02%
Sub Scan (B) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning
Main Scan (CIS) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the main 0 to 75 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning (CIS)
Sub Scan (CIS) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning (CIS)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Completion
6-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

(Message: Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is
used
Method
DP-7100
setting variation
Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Front Tail Trailing edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Head Leading edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Tail Trailing edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
DP-7110
setting variation
CIS Head Adjusts the leading edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.297 mm
scanning
CIS Tail Adjusts the trailing edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.297 mm
scanning
DP-7120
setting variation
6-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head/CIS
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-35) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail/CIS Tail
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Completion
6-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U072 Adjusting the DP original center

(Message: Adjust DP Original Center)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image when the DP is used
Adjustment

setting variation
Front DP center line. (Front page) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
Back DP center line. (Back page) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
CIS Adjusts the DPCIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085 mm
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-35) > U065(P.6-46) > U067(P.6-49) > U072
Completion
6-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U073 Scanner motor operation check

(Message: Check Scanner Motor Operation)
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit glass.
Method

Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading scan position operation for the document processor

Scanning starts with the condition specified.
4 To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Setting: Scanner Motor
setting variation
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 (%) 100 1%
Size Original size 100 to 10200 10200 100
Lamp Turning the exposure lamp on/off 0: OFF 1: ON -
1: ON
Paper size corresponding to each set value

setting Destination setting Destination setting Destination
4300 B5 6100 B5R 8600 B4
5000 A4 6600 8 1/2"×11" 9000 11"×15"
5000 A5R 7100 A4R 10000 A3
5100 11"×8 1/2" 7800 Folio 10200 11"×17"
5100 5 1/2"×8 1/2" 8400 8 1/2"×14"
4 Select [Execute].

Scanning starts with the condition specified.
6-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Completion
6-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteristics

(Message: Adjust DP Input)
Description
Sets the DP image scanning density
Purpose
Changes the setting if the background image appears when scanning bluish original or originals with slightly thick
background Adjusts the image difference between the table scanning and DP scanning CIS scanning is not corrected.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Coefficient DP image scanning density correction 0: No correction 1
1: Low-level
2: Middle-level
3: High-level
DP Color Regist Permitting the color registration correction operation 0: Off 1
1: On
Completion
6-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U087 Setting the DP scanning position change operation

(Message: Set DP Scanning Position Operation)
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the original trailing edge scanned data with the scanned data after the original feed,
change the original scan position next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measures for the black lines appearing with dust on the original scanning position when using the
document processor.
Setting
setting
Front Set the 1st side scanning data threshold 0 to 128 48
Back Set the threshold of the back page scan data at 0 to 128 48
duplex scan
Black Line Initialize the original scanning position 0 to 255 -
If the set value is reduced, dark density image is regarded as dust and dust detection becomes more likely.
If the set value is increased, dust detection becomes less likely.
Method: Black Line
1 Select [Clear].

Original scan position returns to the initial line.
Completion
6-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U089 MIP-PG pattern output

(Message: Output MIP-PG Pattern)
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scanner section using the MIP-
PG pattern output without image scanning process.
Method
2 Select the MIP-PG pattern to output

Display Output contents Purpose
Gray scale Gray scale patten PG Check of the gradation
reproducibility
Mono 1 PG for the gray check(Density: 0) Check the drum quality
Mono 4 PG for the gray check(Density: 7.0) Check the drum quality
256 Gradation 256 Gradation PG Check of the gradation

reproducibility
Sample Set Gray scale patten PG The output patterns for the long
PG for the gray check(Density: 7.0) life unit warranty application
4 Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.
Completion
6-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U091 White lines correction setting

(Message: Set White Line Correction)
Contents
Set the error detection threshold for white lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Setting
setting variation
Coefficient(R) Displays the red pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Coefficient(G) Displays the green pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Coefficient(B) Displays the Blue pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Threshold(R) Sets the red error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(G) Sets the green error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(B) Sets the blue error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(Abnorm Sets the abnormal pixel threshold 0 to 8191 75 -
al)
Mode Set the white lines correction mode 0: No correction 0 -
1: Correction
2: Test mode
Execute Execute retaining the white reference data - - -
Normally do not change the threshold from the initial value of 112.
Increase the value if white lines appear while the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Reduce the set value if thin lines disappear depending on the original to use.
Set in the range of 50 to 200. (In the case of out of range, it may affect the image output)
Method: Execute
1 Select [Execute].

Starts retaining the white reference data.
4 Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
Match the original and paper size.

Outputs 2-sheet test pattern.
1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about 60mm width)
6-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Setting is correctly complete if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.

If a vertical black line appears on blank paper or a gray band or vertical white line appear on the black band, execute the
white line correction again after cleaning the CIS roller or CIS glass.
White line correction is complete if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical white lines. However, check the engine
since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.

Mode is set to [1].
How to check the test copy

Blank paper Black band Factor Corrective action
No lines No lines - Completion
Black line White lines CIS roller/glass Execute the U091 CIS roller/glass contamination
contamination
Black line No lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
No lines White lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
Completion
6-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U099 Original size detection setting

(Message: Set Original Size Detection)
Description
Sets the original size detection check and detection threshold
Purpose
Changes the detection threshold if the original size is often mis-detected with entirely dark originals (high density) or dark
originals at edges only
Changes the detection threshold.
Setting

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Data1 Display of the original width of RGB each three color
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display of the original copies width of RGB each three color (when the document
processor is installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
1 Place an original copy on the table and close the original copy cover or document processor.
2 The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. The original size sensor detects
the original lengthwise. (Detected twice when the document processor is installed)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected number of pixels (mm) in the original width
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)
6-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: B/W Level1
setting variation
Original1 Sets the threshold to judge the original 0 to 255 20 *1/50 *2 1
*1: Without DP, *2: With DP

Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can be detected but the original mat
may be detected as an original.
If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of placing the original.
Original mat Original

Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"
Completion
6-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U100 Main high voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Main High Voltage Output)
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Adj DC Bias Adjust the main charge AC bias of each color
Set AC Auto Adj *1 Sets the automatic AC bias adjustment
Set DC Bias Displays the main charge DC bias correction value.
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq Sets the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current Displays the electric current flows
Setting: Adj AC Bias
When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the setting value is decreased.
Set value is variable depending on the environment.

setting
AC Bias(K) Main charge AC bias value 400 to 2300 950
Setting: Set AC Auto Adj

Items Contents
On Adjust automatically (1)
Off Not adjusted automatically (0)
Initial setting: On (1)
6-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Set DC Bias
1 Displays the current setting.

setting
DC1 Bias(K) Main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed) 350 to 700 450
Setting: Adj DC Bias
When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the setting value is decreased.

setting
DC2 Bias(K) Main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -128 to 127 0
Setting: Set Charger Freq
When the setting value is increased, the image get thicker, and it gets thinner when the setting value is decreased.

setting
Generally Setting the frequency of the main charger (Normal speed) 500 to 3000 1800
Setting: Chk Current

Displays the current setting.
Items Contents
K Inflow current value
Completion
6-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Voltage Output)
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
setting variation
On Timing On Timing setting -1000 to 1000 0 0.1 ms
Off Timing Off Timing setting -1000 to 1000 0 0.1 ms
Pre On Timing Pre On Timing setting -1000 to 1000 0 1 ms
Pre Bias Pre Bias setting 0 to 2400 0 0.1 μA
Bias(L) Bias(L) setting 100 to 2400 935 0.1 μA
Bias(M) Bias(M) setting 100 to 2400 1213 0.1 μA
Bias (S) Bias (S) setting 100 to 2400 1763 0.1 μA
Bias(L) Bias(L) setting 100 to 2400 423 0.1 μA
Bias(M) Bias(M) setting 100 to 2400 483 0.1 μA
Bias (S) Bias (S) setting 100 to 2400 643 0.1 μA
Precautions
maintenance mode.
Completion
6-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Separation Shift Bias)
Description
Adjust ON/OFF timing of the separation shift bias
Purpose
Execute when the poor paper separation occurs.
Execution

Display Content to adjust Setting Initial setting
range
Mode Mode setting 1 to 8 1
Completion
U110 Drum counter

(Message: Drum Unit Counter)
Contents
Displays the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method

The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum counter
Completion
6-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U111 Drum drive time.

(Message: Drum Driving Time)
Contents
Display the drum drive time which is used in the high voltage time correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method

Display the drum drive time.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum drive time.
Completion
U117 Drum unit number

(Message: Drum Unit Number)
Contents
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method

Displays the drum number.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum number
Completion
6-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U118 Drum unit history

(Message: Drum Unit History)
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
2 Select the item to refer to.

Items Contents
K Displays the black drum history
Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 The drum counter history
Completion
U120 Drum drive distance counter

(Message: Drum Driving Distance Counter)
Contents
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to display the drum control counter.
Method

Display the counter value.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum drive distance counter
Completion
6-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Message: Clear Transfer Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Execute when checking the counts after replacing transfer roller unit. Also, clear the counts after replacement.
Method

The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the transfer counts
Clear Clear the transfer counts
Execution: Clear
1 Select [Clear].
2 Press the [Start] key, clear the counts.
Completion
Back to the maintenance mode No. selecting screen.
6-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U130 Developer agent initial setting

(Message: Set Toner Install)
Contents
Installs initial toner in the developer unit
Purpose
Insert the initial toner into the developer unit when arriving and replacing the new developer.
Execution
2 Select [Execute].
The screen for executing is moved.
Items Contents
Execute Execute the toner install mode.
Execution
1 Select [Execute].

Toner installation is started.
Display "Finish" after the toner installation is completed.
Error codes
Codes Contents
E001 In case of opening the main unit cover while executing.
E002 In case of detecting the toner empty while executing.
E003 In case of fully detecting the waste toner box.
E004 In case of detecting the C call.
Completion
6-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U136 Toner level detection setting

(Message: Set Toner Near End Detection)
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval between toner near end and
toner empty is too short.
Setting

By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.

setting variation
K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
Note
The set value is not reflected if set when Toner Low is already indicated.
Turn the main switch off and on to change the setting when Toner Low is already indicated toner hopper.
Completion
6-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U139 Temperature, humidity

(Message: Temperature/Humidity)
Contents
Displays the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Method

Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside and outside temperature (°C) and machine outside humidity (%)
Developing Current temperature is displayed (°C)
Method: Ext/Int
1 Displays the current temperature and humidity

Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Method: Developing
1 Displays the current temperature and humidity

Items Contents
Internal Temp Temperature around the developer section inside the machine (°C)
Completion
6-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Developing Bias)
Contents
Displays/changes each setting value of the developer bias.
Purpose
If an image failure (background image, etc.) appears, change the setting value to adjust the image.
Execution
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
40 ppm 32 ppm
Bias Bias setting 120 to 220 180 180
Duty Duty setting 40 to 70 50 56
Clock Clock setting 2600 to 3000 2700 2700
Bias (Half) Bias (Half) setting 120 to 220 180 180
Duty (Half) Duty (Half) setting 40 to 70 59 59
Clock (Half) Clock (Half) setting 2600 to 3000 2700 2700
Image Toner density setting in case of copying - - -
Preference
Execution: Image Preference
1 Select [Copy]
Copy Toner density setting in case of copying -1 to 1 0
Initial setting: 0 (-1: light 0: Normal 1: Dark)
3 Press the [Start] key, set the setting.
Completion
6-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U147 Setting the toner applying mode

(Message: Set Toner Apply Mode)
Contents
Mode selection for the operation to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode).
Purpose
Normally no need to change the setting. However change the mode when output in large quantities the usual low coverage
originals(Reference: less than 1 %)
Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method

Items Contents
Mode 0 Nomal mode
Mode 1 Toner consumption mode
Initial value: Mode 1
Completion
6-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U148 Drum refresh mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Refresh Mode)
Contents
Sets the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting
Mode Sets Auto drum refresh 0: Off
1: Short 2
2: Standard
3: Long
Completion
U150 Check Toner Sensor Operation

(Message: Check Toner Sensor Operation)
Contents
Display the ON/OFF status each switch sensor status in relation to the toner.
Purpose
Execute to check if each switch sensor is operating correctly.
Setting
2 Check the ON/OFF status of switch sensor.

The display of applicable switch sensor becomes "1" when the switch "ON" is detected.
Items Contents
Container Set Display the switch status of toner container set
Container Sensor Display the status of toner sensor
Waste Box Sensor Display the status of waster toner sensor
Motor Drive the main motor.
3 To stop the motor drive, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U157 Developer drive time

(Message: Developing Unit Drive Time)
Contents
Displays the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method

Displays the developer drive time.
Items Contents
K Display the developer drive time
Completion
U158 Developer counter

(Message: Developing Unit Counter)
Contents
Displays the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method

The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displaying the developer counts
Completion
6-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U161 Fuser temperature adjustment

(Message: Adjust Fuser Control Temperature)
Contents
Set the fuser control temperature, control temperature correction, other setting value.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl, creases and fusing failure
on thick paper.
Method

Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature for printing and feeding
Grain Mode Setting the granular image control mode
Belt Mode Image offset (white dot missing) countermeasure mode setting
Setting:Warm Up
40 ppm 32 ppm
1st Feed(Center) Print start temperature (Center) setting 50 to 185 160 *1 150 *1
165 *2 155 *2
Print(Center) Temperature (Center) setting during printing 100 to 210 175 165
Standby(Center) Standby temperature (Center) setting 120 to 185 165 *1 155 *1
170 *2 160 *2
1st Feed(Duty) Printing start duty setting 0 to 100 25 25
2nd Feed(Duty) Secondary paper feed start Duty setting 0 to 100 35 335
*1:100
V model , *2:Except 100 V model

Setting:Grain mode

Items Contents
Mode0 Current level (no special control is done {OFF})
Mode1 Granular image reduction mode (Low) (Standby temperature: -10°C, Control
temperature: -5°C)
Mode2 Granular image reduction mode (High) (Standby temperature: -20°C, Control
temperature: -5°C)
Initial setting value:Mode0
• When Mode change (Mode 0 ↔ Mode 1 or 2), we recommend implementing "U 410 Adjusting the halftone
automatically".
6-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting:Belt Mode

Items Contents
Mode0 No drive at Standby (Ready, Low Power) (Default)
Mode1 Full-speed drive for 500ms at every 10 minutes at Standby (Ready, Low Power
Mode2 Full-speed drive for 500ms at every 3 minutes at Standby (Ready, Low Power)
Initial setting value:Mode0
Completion
U167 Clearing the fuser count

(Message: Clear Fuser Counter)
Contents
Displays and clears the fuser count.
Purpose
Verify the fuser count after replacement. Also, clear the counts after replacement.
Method

The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays and change the fuser unit counts.
Clear Clears the fuser count
Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].

Fuser unit counts are cleared.
Completion
6-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U198 Set Fuser Phase Control

(Message: Set Fuser Phase Control)
Contents
Switch the fuser phase control.
Purpose
Switch the fuser phase control.
Execution
Mode Set the phase control mode. 0 to 1 0
Completion
U199 Fuser temperature

(Message: Fuser Temperature)
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method

Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge 1 Displays the heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Center Displays the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Completion
6-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U200 All LEDs lighting

(Message: Turn ON All Panel LEDs)
Contents
All the LEDS on the operation panel are lit.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation panel LED lighting.
Method
2 Select [Execute].

All the LEDs on the operation panel are blinking.
4 Press the [Stop] key to turn the display off.
Completion
6-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U201 Initializing the touch panel

(Message: Initialize Touch Panel)
Contents
Adjusts touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or if the
detecting positions are not aligned.
Maintenance Mode
Method Maintenance Mode Active U201
Initialize Touch Panel
Initialize
Check

The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch panel display position
Check Checks the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
Do not touch the touch panel.
Please do not touch a operation panel.
1 Press the center of indicated "+".

+
Press the center of the "+" sign.

*Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
6-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]


If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.

+

+

6-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 [Initialize Completed] appears after setting and the touch

panel is automatically corrected.
7 After finishing setting, the [Check] screen is automatically

displayed.
Initialize completed.
Method: Check
+
Single Tap Check
Initialize
1 Press the center of indicated three "+", and then check the
display position.
Single Tap Check.
+
If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.
2 Check that the gap of the X and Y axis of the displayed

coordinate is 6 or less.
+
(13, -3)
Initialize
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press the [Start] Multi Tap
key to return to Step.1. Check
Single Tap Check.

+
(-8, 15)
Select "Mult Tap Check" and press the Startkey to go to the next step.
If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.
+
(4, -1)
Multi Tap Check

Step 1 : Not completed.
1 Select [Multi Tap Check] and press the [Start] key.
Initialize
2 Press 2 points of [○] simultaneously. (Step1)

Displays the detected point with a red dot if it is out of the default Multi tap Check. Step1.
value. Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press the [Start]
key to return to Step.1.
6-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Press 2 points of [○] simultaneously. (Step2) Step 1 : Not completed.

[Completed] appears in Step1 and Step2 if it is within the default
value. Initialize
Multi tap Check. Step1.

Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
4 [Multi Tap Check completed.] appears when the setting is Step 1 : Completed.
Step 2 : Completed.
complete.
Multi Tap Check completed.

Press the Stopkey.
The screen for selecting a maintenace item No. is displayed.
Completion
6-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U203 Check DP operation

(Message: Check DP Operation)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3 Select the scan speed

Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scanning
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed

Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD
CCD RADP With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD
CIS With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS (continuous operation)

The operation starts.
Setting: Mode

Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
6-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Reset
1 Select [Execute].
2 Press the [Start] key to reset.
Method: Result
1 Displays the conveying timing data.
Completion
6-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U204 Key card/key counter setting

(Message: Set Key-Card/Key-Counter)
Contents
Sets the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Method

Items Contents
Device Sets the key card/key counter connection.
Message Sets the message indicated when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1 Select the type of the optional counter.

Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Parallel Coin Vender Use Parallel Coin Vender (Displays when U 206 On / Off Config is set to Off)
Off Not installed
Initial setting: Off
Setting: Message

Items Contents
Key Device Prioritized display of the key device on the login screen when multiple devices
are used.
Coin Vendor Prioritized display of the coin vendor on the login screen when multiple devices
are used .
Initial setting: Coin Vendor
Completion
6-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U206 Sets the coin vendor

(Message: Set Coin Vendor Mode)
Description
Sets the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, sets the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is installed. (This is an optional
device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines.)
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a coin vendor is installed.
Method

Items Contents
On/Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vendor
(When U204 Device is other than Parallel Coin Vender)
No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size and color
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Extended charge unit price
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On The coin vendor is installed
Off The coin vendor is not installed
Setting: No Coin Action

Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage
Off Do nothing at coin shortage
6-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Price

Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: Normal / AD

Items Contents
B/W Black & White
CMY Single color C, M, Y
RGB Single color R, G, B
Full Color Full color
2 By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
B/W CMY /RGB /
Full Color
A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10 30
Other Others 0 to 300 10 50
Settable in 10-yen increments

Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: Print

Items Contents
B/W Black & White
Full Color Full color
B/W Full Color
A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10 30
Other Others 0 to 300 10 50
Settable in 10-yen increments

Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
6-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Apl
Apl1 Expanded charging unit 1 0 to 300 10
Apl2 Expanded charging unit price 2 0 to 300 10
Setting: Boot Mode

Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
Initial setting: Copy Service
Setting: Apl Charge Mode

Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.
Completion
6-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U207 Operation key check

(Message: Check Panel Key Operation)
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1 Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2 [Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3 Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by one. When
pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the LED is lit.
The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
6-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U221 USB host lock function setting

(Message: Set USB Host Lock Function)
Contents
Sets ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the USB host is not recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Method
2 Select [Host Lock].

Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off

Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available
Completion
*: The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U222 Setting the IC card type

(Message: Set IC Card Type)
Contents
Sets the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting

Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
Initial setting: Other

SSFC: Shared Security Formats Cooperation
Completion
6-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U223 Operation panel lock

(Message: Set Panel Operation Lock)
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the users other than those with
administrator privileges.
Setting

Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution setting and
Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
Initial setting: Unlock
Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock

Entering the maintenance mode Prohibition Prohibition
Switching to System Menu Prohibition Prohibition
Send, Send from Document Box Prohibition Prohibition
Switches the Yellow developer On/Off setting Prohibition Prohibition
Switch to registration/editing Document Box Prohibition Prohibition
Pressing the [Stop] key Permission Prohibition
Pressing the [Status/Job Cancel] key Permission Prohibition
Disconnect the FAX line Permission Prohibition
Completion
6-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U224 Setting Original Panel Display

(Message: Install Original Panel Display)
Description
Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and theimage data and the
message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Setting
1 Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.

Items Contents
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data

Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock
Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive area)

Installation or uninstallation is started.
8 When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Supplement 1: File information

Description File name Image size (in pixels) File format
Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width : 800
Service call screen callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG
Width : 180
Home Menu menu_background.png Length: 480 PNG
screen Width : 800
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT
message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT
message 2 (Unicode)
6-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Supplement 1: Displaying Startup screen

The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call screen

The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call.
How to change the message

Entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call screen display will be displayed service call
messages 1 and 2.
How to reset the message display

Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous.
Caution
The graphics file for startup screen must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping at recovering from
sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion
U230 Optional device serial number

(Message: Optional Device Serial No)
Contents
Displays the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem occurrence.
Method

Displays the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Displays the document processor serial number.
Finisher Displays the finisher serial number.
PF1 Displays the paper feeder 1 serial number.
Completion
6-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U234 Setting destination for punch

(Message: Set Punch Destination)
Contents
Sets destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
2 Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric
Initial setting: Destination
Completion
6-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U237 Finisher eject volume limit

(Message: Set Finisher Paper Stack Limit)
Contents
Sets the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Method
2 Select [Main Tray].
setting
Main Tray Sets the main tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Middle tray Sets the middle tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Main tray input value Main Tray

3000-sheet finisher 1000-sheet finisher
0 3000 sheets 1000 sheets
1 1500 sheets 500 sheets
Completion
6-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U240 Finisher operation check

(Message: Check Finisher Operation)
Contents
Turn the finisher's motors and solenoids on.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's motors and solenoids operation check.
Method

Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box Mail Box motor operation check
6-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Motor

Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at high speed
Save(L) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at low speed
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.
Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and descends
again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off. ascends again
when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the punch motor.
Punch Move Drive the punch slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) *2 Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) *2 Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
*1: 3000-sheet DF only, *2: 1000-sheet DF only

Method: Solenoid

Items Contents
Sub Tray *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
*1: 3000-sheet DF only

6-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Conv Drives the MB drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drives the MB drive motor for feed-shift
Completion
6-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U241 Finisher switch check

(Message: Check Finisher Switches)
Contents
Displays the status of finisher's switches and sensors operation.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Method

Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the mail Box switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover switch
Eject cover *1 DF exit cover switch
Top Cover *2 DF top cover switch
Tray U-Limit DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF Tray sensor 4
Tray Top DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF paper entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub tray exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject DF middle exit sensor
Drum *1 DF drum sensor
Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle Tray DF bundle exit sensor
Width Front HP DF width adjustment 1
Width Tail HP DF width adjustment 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor
*1: 3000-sheet DF only, *2: 1000-sheet DF only
6-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Eject MB tray exit sensor
Cover MB cover open close switch
Over Flow1 MB tray sensor 1
Over Flow 6 MB tray sensor 6
Over Flow 7 MB tray sensor 7
Motor HP MB home position switch
Method: Punch

Items Contents
Punch HP Punch home position sensor
Edge Face 1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
Tank Punch tank set switch
Tank Full Punch tank full sensor
Completion
6-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U243 Checking the DP motor

(Message: Check DP Motors)
Contents
Drive the motor of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor of the document processor.
Method

Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP papaer feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor
Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP eject motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor
DP Fan *1 DP drive fan motor
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan motor
*1: DP-7110 only, *2: DP-7120 only, *3: Except DP-7120
3 Press the [Start] key. Each operation starts.

Completion
6-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U244 DP switch check

(Message: Check DP Switches)
Contents
Displays each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method

Items Contents
Feed Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head *2 Check DP timing sensor.
Set Check DP original detection sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit *3 Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit *3 Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP top cover switch.
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject *3 Check DP exit sensor.
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
*1: DP-7100 only, *2: DP-7110 only, *3: Except DP-7120
Completion
6-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U245 Checking the message

(Message: Check Display Message)
Contents
Displays messages indicated on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
Execute to check messages indicated.
Method
2 Using the [▲] [▼] key, display messages in order.

Enter the message number using the numeric keys,then press the [Start] key to display the message of the designated
number.
3 By using the [+] [-] keys key, switch the language.
Completion
6-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U246 Finisher adjustment

(Message: Adjust Finisher)
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
• Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in A z-shape in the punch mode.
• Punch position stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.

Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the punch mode.
• Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.

Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the punch mode.
• Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment

Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
• Adjustment of front/rear shift home position

Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper
• Front/rear staple home position adjustment

Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
• Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position

Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
Setting

Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Setting: Finisher

Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Feed Punch position stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Width Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
*1: 3000-sheet DF only
6-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Punch Regist
1 Select [Punch Regist].
Content to adjust Setting range Initial setting Data
variation
Adjusting the punch registration stop timing -5 to 5 0 1 mm
Increase the value if paper is skewed (sample 1).

Reduce the set value if paper is folded in a Z-shape (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Punch Feed
1 Select [Punch Feed].
variation
Adjusting the punch stop timing -5 to 5 0 1 mm
Increase the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Reduce the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
6-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Punch Width
1 Select [Punch Width].
variation
Punch center position timing adjustment -5 to 5 0 1 mm
Reduce the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Increase the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
Center line
(within ± 0.5 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Setting: Width Front HP / Width Tail HP
1 Select [Width Front HP] or [Width HP].
variation
Front width adjuster home position adjustment -5 to 5 0 1 mm
Rear width adjuster home position adjustment -5 to 5 0 1 mm
4 Press the [Stop] key to return to the screen to select the maintenance item No.
5 Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Width Test(A4R)].

The middle tray side registration guides move to A4R size position.
6 Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7 Repeat the above adjustment until the consistency is appropriate.
Setting: [Shift Front HP/Shift Tail HP]
1 Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP].
2 Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
variation
Adjustment of front shift home position -5 to 5 0 1 mm
Adjustment of rear shift home position -5 to 5 0 1 mm
3 Press the start key. The value is set.
4 Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Sort Test].
6-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Repeat the above adjustment until eject paper is properly in position.
Setting: Staple HP
1 Select [Staple HP].
variation
Front/rear staple home position adjustment -5 to 5 0 1 mm
Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Completion
6-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U247 Paper feed operation check

(Message: Check Paper Feeder)
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Method

Items Contents
LCF Operate the high capacity feeder
Setting

Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
On PF paper feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
V Feed Clutch PF vertical conveying clutch ON
H Feed 1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
H Feed 2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF 1 solenoid ON
Cassette2 Solenoid PF 2 solenoid ON
Execute Starts operation
2 Select [Execute].
3 Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.

To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set

(Message: Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set)
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment
Setting
setting
M.Cnt A Changes the maintenance counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt HT Change the maintenance counter preset value (HT 0 to 9999999 0
adjustment)
Cassette 1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 1)
Cassette 2 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 2)
Cassette 3 *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 3)
Cassette 4 *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 4)
*1: 500 X 2 cassettes / 1500-sheet X 2 lines only
Completion
6-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U251 Clearing the maintenance counter

(Message: Clear Maintenance Counter)
Contents
Displays, clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 1) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 2 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 2) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 3 *1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 3) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 4 *1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 4) 0 to 9999999
Clear Clears all the maintenance counts 0
*1: 500 X 2 cassettes / 1500-sheet X 2 lines only
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].
2 Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.
Completion
6-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization
Method

Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
*1: 100 V model only, *2: Except 100 V model

Initial setting: Seted destination

Initializes according to the destination
An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U253 Switching the double/single counts

(Message: Set Double/Single Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as one sheet (single
count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2 Select [Color] or [B/W].

Items Contents
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
3 Select [SGL(All)] or [DBL(Folio)].

Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set double count for A3(420mm) size or larger
DBL(B4) Set double count for larger than Legal(356mm) size
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
Initial setting: DBL(A3/Ledger)

*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035. However, the double count
will be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or longer.
Completion
6-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U260 Switching the timing for copy counting

(Message: Set Copy Count Mode)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2 Selects the copy count timing.

Items Contents
Feed When secondary paper feed starts.
Eject Selects the paper eject timing
Initial setting: Eject
Completion
U265 Setting by destination

(Message: Set Model Destination)
Contents
Sets the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
Items Contents
No. Displays the OEM code
Completion
6-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U278 Delivery date setting

(Message: Set Delivery Date)
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method
2 Select [Today].

Sets the delivery date of the machine.
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].

Clears the delivery date of the machine.
Completion
6-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Service Status Page)
Contents
Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print.
Purpose
Setting

Items Contents
On Displays the digital dot coverage.
Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.
Initial setting: On
3 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
6-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U286 Optional language setting

(Message: Set Option Language)
Description
Add/delete/change the optional language
Purpose
Sets the optional languages selectable from System Menu
Setting

Items Contents
Option Language 1 Optional language 1 setting
6-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting

Items Contents
ARABIC Installed langauage list
BULGARIAN
CATALAN
CHINESE-S
CHINESE-T
CROATIAN
CZECH
DANISH
ESTONIAN
FINNISH
GREEK
HEBREW
HUNGARIAN
JAPANESE
KOREAN
LATVIAN
LITHUANA
NORWEGIAN
POLISH
PORTUGUESE
ROMANIA
SLOVAK
SLOVENE
SWEDISH
THAI
TURKISH
VIETNAMESE
None
Display varies depending on installed optional language package.
Completion
6-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U287 Automatic recovery function

(Message: Set Auto Reset Function)
Description
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
Purpose
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error or system error
Setting

Items Contents
C0XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
C1XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C1xxx code
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
CFXXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the CF code service
call error
Completion
6-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U326 Black line cleaning indication

(Message: Set Black Line Clean Display)
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the contact glass when scanning
from the document processor.
Method

Items Contents
Black Line Mode Sets On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication

Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated
Initial setting: On
Completion
6-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U327 Cassette heater control setting

(Message: Set Cassette Heater Control)
Contents
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Selects the cassette heater control setting
Sets if there is the cassette heater for the optional cassette.
Method

Items Contents
On Sets the cassette heater control On (installed).
Off Sets the cassette heater control Off (not installed).

Drum refresh is not executed at power-up when the cassette heater control is [On].
Completion
6-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

(Message: Adjust Coverage Size Calculation Rate)
Contents
Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation
to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
setting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Completion
6-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U340 Setting the applied mode

(Message: Set Applied Mode)
Description
Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct printing occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Adj Memory Sets the memory allocation
Adj Max Job Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
setting: Adj Memory
Image Area temporarily used to create output image. -50 to 50(MB) 0
Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage. (recommended value)
Image : +100
The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.
4
Setting: Adj Max Job
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 -
The maximum [Printer] jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
Completion
6-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U341 Printer cassette setting

(Message: Set Printer Exclusive Cassette)
Contents
Sets the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it cannot be used for copy.
Setting

Multiple cassettes are selectable.
Items Contents
Cassette1 Setting cassette 1 to the printer paper source
Cassette2 Setting cassette 2 to the printer paper source
Cassette3 Setting cassette 3 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Cassette 4 Setting cassette 4 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Initial setting: Off (Cassette1 to 4)
Completion
6-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U343 Duplex priority mode

(Message: Set Duplex Priority Mode)
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Sett the frequently used settings depending on the user’s usage.
Setting

Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled
Completion
6-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

(Message: Set Maintenance Time Soon Display)
Contents
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by setting the number of prints
that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Displays the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value before the maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Cnt Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of prints that can be made before
the current maintenance cycle reaches)
Completion
6-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

(Message: Selecting Sleep Mode)
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method

Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
Initial setting: More Energy Save
Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On Enable auto sleep function.
Off Disable auto sleep function.
Initial setting: On
If it is set to Off, sleep shift operation will not be performed even if sleep mode is set in the system menu.
Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off.
Completion
6-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U402 Adjusting the printing margins

(Message: Adjust Print Margin)
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
• If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
• If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second page.
Adjustment

setting variation
Lead Adjusts the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)

Precautions
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-35) > U402
Completion
6-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass

(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table))
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

setting variation
A Margin Adjusts the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Precautions
U034(P.6-35) > U402(P.6-131) > U403
Completion
6-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the document processor
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjusts the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
C Margin Sets the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
A Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP left margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP leading edge margin (2nd 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
side)
C Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP right margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin (2nd 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
side)
*1: Simultaneous duplex scan model only
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
6-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Precautions
U034(P.6-35) > U402(P.6-131) > U403(P.6-132) > U404
Completion
6-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Reversal)

(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjusts the writing timing in rotated 180 degrees.
Purpose
Adjusted when the page image of copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner reading image (image on the
memory)
Precautions
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-35) > U402(P.6-131) > U66(P.6-48) >
U403(P.6-131) > U71(P.6-52) > U404(P.6-133) > U407
Adjustment
5 Select [Adj Data].

setting variation
Adj Data Adjusts the leading edge timing when writing -47 to 47 0 1dot
the image in the memory
decreased.
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Completion
6-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

(Message: Half Tone Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment

Displays the execution information screen.
Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4 paper.
2 Set the test pattern output on the original glass with the arrow facing the rear side and print side face-down.
Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.

The first auto adjustment is executed.
4 Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.

Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 2.

The second auto adjustment is executed.
6 [Finish] appears after normal completion.
7 An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error codes
Codes Occurrence Contents Re-
position adjustmen
t
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected Enable
S002 Original deviation is in excess in the main scanning Enable
direction
S003 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scanning Enable
direction
S004 Original skew is in excess Enable
S005 Original type error Enable
SFFF Other scanner error Disable
E001 Engine Engine status error Disable
E002 Adjustment result error Disable
EFFF Other engine error Disable
C001 Controller Pause status Disable
C002 Adjustment result error Disable
C110 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error (black) Disable
C210 Adjustment value (increase rate) error (black) Disable
CFFF Other controller error Disable
Completion
6-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U411 Scanner auto adjustment

(Message: Scanner Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/sub scanning
direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color correction matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF correction, Input gamma,
automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
6-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Use Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Table (Chart A) In case of losing Execute automatic adjusts the table 7505000005
adjustment data, scanning.
differing from the
color tone extremely
Magnification in the sub scanning
(not improve in case
direction / Leading edge timing
of executing U410)
Center line / chromatic aberration
ISU(CCD unit),
Optical LED lamp, Sub scanning chromatic aberration / MTF
Engine EEPROM, correction
COL OR SCANN ER
when replacing DP
CHART A4
gamma in color mode / color correction

No.302K 357010
CIS matrix
Use when setting up Input gamma in monochrome mode
DP or executing U021
initialization
DP FU(ChartA) Execute the 1st side automatic
*1 adjustment in the DP scanning section.
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF
correction
matrix
DP FD(ChartA) Execute the 2nd side automatic
*2 adjustment in the DP scanning section.
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF
correction
matrix
DP FU(ChartB) Use when setting up Execute the 1st side automatic 302AC68243
*1 DP or executing U021 adjustment in the DP scanning section.
initialization Execute the 2nd side automatic
DP FD(ChartB) adjustment in the DP scanning section.
*2
Magnification in the sub-scanning
direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 7505000005
DP Auto Adj *1 Adjusting the document processor Without Chart B, executed in a
scanning section with the chart output by simplified manner.
the local machine
Magnification in the sub-scanning

direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
*1: DP installed machine only, *2: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP machine only
6-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Table (Chart A)

Automatic input of the target value
Usually, it adjusts here.
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
2 Enter maintenance item U411.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [Table(ChartA)].
7 Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
8 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the barcode is not
read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value
1 Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [Table(ChartA)].
8 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjusting it with
ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
6-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode is not
2 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode is not
2 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
6-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
3 Select [DP FU(ChartB)].
Method: DP FD (Chart B)
Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-down on the DP.
3 Select [DP FD(ChartB)].
Method: DP Auto Adj
1 Set A4/Letter paper.
2 Press the [Start] key to print the adjustment original.
3 Set the adjustment original output on the table and press the [Start] key.
4 Set the output adjustment original with face-up on the DP.
5 Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
6 Press the [Start] key to start the 1st side automatic adjustment.
7 Set the output adjustment original with face-down on the DP.
8 Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
9 Press the [Start] key to start the 2nd side automatic adjustment.
When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs during auto adjustment, error
code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case, check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
6-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action
00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error Set the original correctly and execute the
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the sub- adjustment again.
scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading edge
in the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in the
main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end in
the main scanning direction)
07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing edge in
the sub-scanning direction)
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in the Check the attachment position of DP.
main scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in the Check the back and front of the adjustment
main scanning direction) original.
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading edge in
0b Black band is not detected
(Original check of DP leading edge in the sub-
scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing edge in
0d White band is not detected (DP trailing edge in
0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on, and execute
again.
0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning direction Turn the power switch off then on, and execute
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning direction again.
Adjust manually.
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning direction
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direction
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on, and execute
again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning direction Turn the power off and on, and execute again.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direction Adjust manually.
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
16 Magnification error in the main scanning
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and execute again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and execute again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error Clean the contact glass and slit glass.
Exchange the adjustment original.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and execute again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction
coefficient error
6-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Codes Contents Corrective action

1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and execute again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original error
63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
Completion
6-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically

(Message: Print Position Auto Adjust)
Description
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjusting the leading edge timing, enter line and margins
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
* Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1 Set A3/Ledger paper.

Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
3 Select [Execute].

A test pattern is outputted.
5 Set the output Test Pattern as the original.

Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7 When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

An error code appears when there is an error.
Error codes list

Display Contents Display Contents
S001 Black band is not detected (main C101 Adjustment value error (main scanning
scanning direction far end) direction magnification)
S002 Black band is not detected (main C102 Adjustment value error (auxiliary
scanning direction near end ) scanning direction magnification)
S003 Black band is not detected (auxiliary C103 Adjustment value error (leading edge
scanning direction leading edge) timing)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxiliary C104 Adjustment value error (center line)
scanning direction trailing edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew error C105 Adjustment value error (B margin)
(1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error C106 Adjustment value error (A margin)
(1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse C107 Adjustment value error (C margin)
original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch) C108 Adjustment value error (D margin)
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
Completion
6-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U425 Set Target

(Message: Set Target Adjustment Value)
Description
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Execution

Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA

Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -
6-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Black
setting variation
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -
Setting: Gray1
setting variation
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -
Setting: Gray2
setting variation
Setting: Gray3
setting variation
6-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: C
setting variation
Setting: M
setting variation
Setting: Y
setting variation
Setting: R
setting variation
6-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting variation
Setting: G
setting variation
Setting: B
setting variation
Setting: Adjust Original

This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the leading 4.0 to 6.0 *1 5.0 *1 0.1 mm *1
edge. 0.16 to 0.24 *2 0.2 *2 0.01 inch *2
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the left 9.0 to 11.0 *1 10.0 *1 0.1 mm *1
edge. 0.36 to 0.44 *2 0.4 *2 0.01 inch *2
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing 189.0 to 191.0 *1 190.0 *1 0.1 mm *1
edge. 7.44 to 7.52 *2 7.49 *2 0.01 inch *2
*1: Centimeter model, *2: Inch model
6-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt 3 of
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B: 105mm from the
left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2 Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
4 Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original.
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of black belt 2.
5 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
7 Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on the
adjustment original at two positions.
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the leading edge to the
trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and deduct A. E: Measure the distance from
the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8 Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COL OR SCANN ER
CHART A4
No.302K 357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
6-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: DP(ChartB)
This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the leading 14.0 to 16.0 *1 15.0 *1 0.1 mm *1
edge. 0.56 to 0.63 *2 0.6 *2 0.01 inch *2
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the left 14.0 to 16.0 *1 15.0 *1 0.1 mm *1
edge. 0.56 to 0.63 *2 0.6 *2 0.01 inch *2
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing 388.0 to 392.0 *1 390.0 *1 0.1 mm *1
edge. 15.28 to 5.43 *2 15.36 *2 0.01 inch *2
*1: Centimeter model, *2: Inch model
1 Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
2 Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
3 Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
5 Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the
adjustment original.
6 Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
Main Scan
Lead
Sub Scan
Original for adjustment Chart 2-2 (P/N: 302AC68243)
Completion
6-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate

(Message: Adjust JPEG Compression Rate)
Contents
Sets the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce the image roughness by
changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged copy . If the set value is reduced, compression is
high and image quality is lowered. If the set value is increased, image quality is improved but processing speed is slower.
Method

Items Contents
Copy Compression rate of the copy
Send Compression rate of the Send
System Compression rate of the temporary saving in the system
Print Compression rate for printer
Method: Copy

Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
Setting: Photo
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 10
Setting: Text
6-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Send

Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Sets the compression rate for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression priority).
Setting: Photo
Items Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)
Setting: Text
range
6-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: HC-PDF(BG)
range
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)
range
Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)
range
6-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: System
range
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)
CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)
Setting: Print
range
Supplement
maintenance mode.
Completion
6-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U485 Image process mode setting

(Message: Set Image Process Mode)
Contents
Sets the PDF image rotation.
Purpose
Change the PDF image rotation setting.
Method

Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
setting Contents
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter (CTM
rotation)
Initial setting: 0
Completion
6-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U520 TDRS setting

(Message: Set TDRS)
Contents
Checks/sets the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method

Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
Setting: Registration

Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Registers Access Code
TDRS User & Access Registering the user, password and access code
Code
Setting: TDRS User / Access Code / TDRS User & Access Code

Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Sets the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Sets the TDRS Username
Access Code Sets the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Sets the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Sets the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Sets the TDRS proxy username
Text Sets the TDRS description
[Regist] is not executable if a USB memory is not installed.

When the USB memory is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and displayed.
After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information by pressing the [OK] or [Start]
key.
After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item that was performed.
When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the item that has been operated.
If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the "TDRS User" will be indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the "Access Code" will be indicated.
Error codes
Items Contents Items Contents
e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error
6-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents Items Contents

e0002 The USB memory is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network
e0003 The file to import does not exist in the t0003 An illegal parameter error
USB memory.
e0004 Reading from the USB memory has t0004 Insufficient resource
failed.
e0005 Unmounting the USB memory has t0005 Communication error
failed.
e0006 Moving or renaming the file has failed. t0006 Error in processing communication.
e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error
e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error
e0009 Error in reading the file t0009 Authentication error
e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A HTTP error: Request error
e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B HTTP error: Error due to the server
e000C Creating the working directory has t000C HTTP error: Error due to the client.
failed.
e000D Deleting the working file has failed.
Setting: Information
1 Displays the set contensts

Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Display of the model name
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS
Completion
6-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U600 Initialize: All Data

(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the
destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file system is
checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
2 Select [Execute].
The screen for entering the country code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3 Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following country code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Country code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

Data initialization starts.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
5 The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.

The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.

Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
Country code list

Country Destination Country Destination
code code
000 Japan 181 North America *2
156 Asian nations *1 181 South America *3
254 Taiwan 253 European nations *4
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand *5
6-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
*1 Applied for Sales company competent Singapore, India, Thailand, Hong Kong.
*2 Applied for Sales company competent USA, Canada,Mexico.
*3 Applied for Sales company competent Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentina, Brazil.
*4 Applied for Sales company competent Italy,Germany,Spain,U.K.,Netherlands,Sweden,France,Austria,Switzerland,
Belgium,Denmark,Finland,Portugal,Ireland,Norway,Turkey,Russia,Saudi arabia.
*5 Change the country code when selling in New Zealand. The country code to input is 126.
Completion
6-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U601 Initialize: Keep data

(Message: Initialize: Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
2 Select [Execute].
The screen for entering the country code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3 Select [Country Code].
Refer to the country code list. (See page P.6-159 )
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Country code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

Data initialization starts.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6 The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.

The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
6-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U603 User data 1

(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Sets the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2 Select [Line Type].

Items Contents
Line Type Line Type

Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS

[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
6-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U604 User data 2

(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method
2 Select [Rings(F/T)].
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.

Completion
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clear Data)
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2 Select [Clear Com.Rec.].

Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

Completion
6-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
Method

Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the
auto reduction mode.
Setting: Cut Line(100%)

Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when
recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting, they are recorded on the
next page.
Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% 0 to 22 3 -
magnification.
Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease the value if there is
dropout in received image.
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data
is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is
further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
setting variation
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction 0 to 22 0 -
mode.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
6-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data
is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is
further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
setting variation
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Completion
6-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U611 System 2
Contents
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method

Items Contents
ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
Setting: ADJ LINES

setting variation
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 0 to 22 7 -

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)

setting variation
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper 0 to 22 22 -
is set.

Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
setting variation
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size 0 to 22 26 -
paper is set.
6-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Completion
6-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U612 System 3
Contents
Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method

Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direction or at 100%
magnification.

Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the FAX
paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.
Initial setting: On

Setting: Protocol List

Sets the automatic protocol list printing.

Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion
6-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U615 System 6
Contents
Sets the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification machine
Method

Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Setting: RX WIDTH FOR 11"

Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
Initial setting: LEDGER
Completion
6-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U620 FAX system

(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
2 Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.

Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode

Items Contents
One Sets the one-shot type detection
Cont Sets the continuous type detection
Initial setting: One
Completion
6-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U625 Communication settings

(Message: Set Communication)
Contents
Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete transmission.
Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method

Items Contents
Interval Sets the auto redialing interval
Times Sets the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval
setting variation
Sets the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 minutes -

Setting: Times
setting variation
Sets the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

Completion
6-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U630 Communication control procedures 1

(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method

Items Contents
TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Sets the reception speed.
TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Sets the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for
transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the communication speed.

Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
Initial setting: 14400bps/V17

Setting: RX Speed
Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has the V.34
capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the reception speed.

Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
Initial setting: 14400bps
6-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: TX Echo
Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo at the
transmitter side.

Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Initial setting: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo
at the receiver side.

Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Initial setting: 75

Completion
6-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Sets the transmission and reception of ECM
Sets the CED frequency
Method

Items Contents
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.
ECM RX Sets ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.

Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Completed is displayed.
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.

Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.
Initial setting: On

6-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: CED Freq

Sets the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement measures for the international
communication.

Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz
Initial setting: 2100

Completion
6-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method

Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone switching
mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Sets whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.

Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Sets the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.

Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.
2Time Detects CNG twice.
Initial setting: 1Time (100V model)/2Time (Others)

Completion
6-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method

Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception.

Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Initial setting: On

Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.

Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
Initial setting: On

6-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: DIS 2Res

Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the corrective measures for
transmission errors and other problems.

Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
Initial setting: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Sets the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors occur frequently due to the
line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.

Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
Initial setting: 15%

Completion
6-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as one of measures
to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2 Select [TCF Check].
setting
TCF Check Sets the allowed error bytes when detecting the 1 to 255 0
TCF signal

Completion
6-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U640 Communication time setting 1

(Message: Communication Time 1)
Contents
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
range setting
Time(One) Sets the one-shot detection time for remote 0 to 255 7
switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Sets the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80
remote switching.

Completion
6-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U641 Communication time setting 2

(Message: Communication Time 2)
Contents
Sets the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method

Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Sets the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Sets the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Sets the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Sets the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Sets to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the destination unit
sets the auto switching function.
Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Sets the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 56
58 (100V model)


Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
*This setting is usually unnecessary.
setting
Sets the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 36
38 (100V model)

6-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
setting
Sets the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/telephone
automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-18). If either receiving a FAX signal within this time or passing this time, the
mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode. Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic
FAX/telephone switching.
setting
Sets the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 s 30

Ring back tone se
Start of fax recept

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring detection
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/telephone automatic
switching mode, (See figure 1-3-18). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching.
setting
Sets the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20
6-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/telephone
automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/
telephone switching.
setting
Sets the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after a connected handset
receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, operated as a normal phone after this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
setting
Sets the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 s 60

Setting: Td Time Out

Sets the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure not
to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone.
setting
Sets the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6
30 (100V model)
9 (120V model)

Completion
6-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method

Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level.
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr
1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr
1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

Setting: RX Mdm Level
1 Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].

Initial setting: -43dBm

Completion
6-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Sets the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
range setting
Sgl LVL Modem Sets the modem output level -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV (Cent) DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
-9 (100V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6 (120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Sets the DTMF output level (level 0 to 5.5 2
difference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

Completion
6-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U660 Ring setting

(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Sets the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Sets the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.

Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
Initial setting: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public
switched telephone network.

Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.
Initial setting: On

6-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Busy Tone

Sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected and the
line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this problem may be improved.
However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.

Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
Initial setting: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.

Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
Initial setting: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing.

Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.
Off Detects the loop current before dialing.
Initial setting: On

Completion
6-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U670 List output

(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is pressed to halt
printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4 Output selected list.

Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential boxes,
firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance mode (self-
status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
6-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U671 FAX backup data clear

(Message: Clear FAX Back Up Data)
Contents
Clears the FAX/i-FAX communication history and scheduled FAX transmission backup data in the FAX PWB.
Execute the memory Storage initialization.
Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Method

Items Contents
RECOVERY FAX Storage Clears the scheduled FAX data in the FAX PWB.
FAX Data CLEAR Clears all the data in the Storage.
Change Fax Storage Enable to use the Storage used in another machine.
Method: RECOVERY FAX Storage / FAX Data CLEAR

Clears the backup data.
2 Turn the power switch off and on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Setting: Change Fax Storage

Items Contents
SSD To save the data to the SSD
HDD To save the data to the HDD
3 Turn the power switch off and on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
6-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U695 FAX function customization

(Message: Customize FAX Function)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Setting: FAX Bulk TX
1 By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg
1 By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
2 Initial setting: Off

Completion
6-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U698 Setting the maintenance port

(Message: Set Port for Maintenance)
Contents
Sets the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Sets the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Sets only when different items are set for each port.
This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
2 Press [Port Select].

Current setting display is inverted.

Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
Precautions
These contents to set are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning the power off and the settings are
necessary when entering the maintenance mode.
Completion
6-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U699 Software switch: Set

(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method
2 Select [SW No.].
3 Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4 Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.

Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion
6-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. Bit Contents
36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or more
Communication time setting

No. Bit Contents
53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Modem setting
No. Bit Contents
89 76543 RX gain adjust
NCU setting
No. Bit Contents
121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/telephone
switching
6-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Calling time setting

No. Bit Contents
133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected
147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC
circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
U901 Clearing the counters by paper source

(Message: Clear Paper Feeder Counter)
Contents
Displays and clears the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Displays the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Displays/clears the MP tray feed counter
Cassette1 Displays/clears Cassette 1 count
Cassette2 Displays/clears Cassette 2 count
Cassette3 Displays Cassette 3 count
Cassette4 Displays Cassette 5 count
Duplex Displays/clears the duplex unit count
2 Select the counter to clear.

[Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are unable to clear.
3 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
6-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U903 Clearing the jam counter

(Message: Clear Paper Misfeed Counter)
Contents
Displays/clears the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2 Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt
1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
2 Change the screen using the [▲] [▼] key.

Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.
Completion
6-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U904 Clearing the service call error counter

(Message: Clear Service Call Counter)
Contents
Displays/clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Items Contents
Cnt Displays/clears the service call counter.
Total Cnt Displays accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2 Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt
1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.
Completion
6-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U905 Optional counter

(Message: Option Counter)
Contents
Displays the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher and inner finisher.
Method
2 Select the device to check.

Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP Displays the document processor count.
DF Displays the document finisher count.
Method: DP
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Displays the count of simultaneous duplex scanning
*1: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP installed machine
Method: DF
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Carry in Displays the sorter counter.
Staple Displays the staple counter.
Punch Displays the punch counter.
Tray A *1 Displays the main tray eject counter.
*1: 3000-sheet finisher installed machine
Completion
6-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U906 Resetting the partial operation

(Message: Reset Disable Function Mode)
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after repairing the parts.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
3 Press the [Start] key to release the partial operation.
Completion
U908 Total counter

(Message: Total Counter)
Contents
Displays the total counter.
Purpose
Displays the total counter for check.
Method

Displays the total count.
Completion
6-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U910 Black rate data

(Message: Clear Coverage Data)
Contents
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on the service status
page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.
3 Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.
Completion
6-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U911 Counter by media type

(Message: Paper Size Counter)
Contents
Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Displays the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method

Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Displays A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Displays B4 feed counts
B5 *1 Displays B5 feed counts
Folio *1 Displays Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Displays Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Displays Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Displays Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Displays Statement feed counts
ETC Displays Other paper feed counts.
*1: metric specification, *2: inch specification
Completion
6-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U917 Read/Write Backup Data

(Message: Read/Write Backup HDD Data(USB))
Contents
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method

Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
5 Select the object item.

Items Contents Depending data*
Address Book Address book information -
Job Account Job accounting information -
One Touch One-touch key information Address book information
User User management Job accounting information
information
Document Box Document box information Job accounting, User information
Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Fax Forward FAX forward information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
System System setting information -
Network Network setting -
information
Job Setting Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting information -
Fax Setting FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX setting
Panel Setting Panel setting information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX setting
and Program
Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or written.
6 Select [Export] or [Import].

Items Contents
Import Imports data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
7 Press the [Start] key. Starts reading or writing.

The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
8 [Finish] appears after normal completion.
6-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 seconds
between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00: toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import
(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion
6-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U920 Billing counter

(Message: Charge Counter)
Contents
Displays the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
2 Select the item to display.

Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions count
Method: Main Function

The charge counts for the main functions are displayed.
Items Contents
B/W Copy B/W copy count is displayed.
B/W Prn B/W print count is displayed
B/W FAX FAX count
Method: Sub Function

The charge counts for the sub functions are displayed.
Items Contents
Simplex Simplex print count is displayed
Duplex Duplex print count is displayed
Combine(Off) Combine print counts (Off) is displayed
Combine(2in1) Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed
Combine(4in1) Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed
Completion
6-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters

(Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only))
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion
U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Machine Life Counter)
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method

The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the machine life count
Completion
6-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

(Message: Clear Charger Roller Counter)
Contents
Displays and clears the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method

The main charge roller counter for each color is displayed.
Items Contents
K The main charger roller counts are displayed.
Method: Clear
2 Select [Clear].
Completion
6-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log)
Contents
Sets the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each maintenance item individually
and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export the maintenance log to a USB memory.

Export the maintenance log to a USB memory.
If a USB memory is not inserted, [Execute] is grayed out .
Display OK/NG after execution.
Setting: Setting

Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
Items Contents
U000-U019 Sets the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
6-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
2 Set on/off for the number desired to set.
Completion
U935 Maintenance Relay Board

(Message: Maintenance Relay Board)
Contents
Set the disorder mode setting.
Purpose
Set when the disorder of the relay PWB occurs.
Execution
Items Contents
Mode 0 Disorder setting mode invalidity
Mode 1 Disorder setting mode validity
3 Press the [Start] key, determine the setting value.
Completion
6-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U942 DP loop amount setting

(Message: Adjust DP Original Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method
Front Single-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.1758mm
Back *1 Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.1758mm
Mix *2 Mixed original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.1758mm
*1: Reversing duplex scanning machine only, *2: except DP-7120

decreased.
Increase the set value if no feed jam or skew feed occurs and reduce the set value if creases appear on the original.
Completion
6-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U952 Maintenance mode workflow

(Message: Maintenance Mode Work Flow)
Contents
Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the main unit or the USB memory.
Purpose
Execute to register regular maintenance items.
Method

The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Displays the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1 Select maintenance item number to execute.

Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
5 Select [Execute(USB)].
6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory

Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.
6-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Excute
1 Select the place to save the data to execute.

Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
3 Press the [Start] key to start the processing.
Method: Entry(USB)
5 Select [Entry(USB)].
6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
7 Select the workflow save area.

Items Contents
8 Select [Execute].
*: Registers the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.
Method: Entry
1 Select [Entry].
2 Select the workflow save area.

Items Contents
3 By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers

Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.
e.g.
When inserting a USB memory the following items can be registered: commands, texts and maintenance numbers
(variable).
File format: xxx.mwf
6-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1, SET UP, 327, 000, 927, 278

2, WARRANTY, 089, 000
3, MK-A, 127, 167, 130, 410, 251
4, EH SETUP, 411, 034, 246
Completion
6-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U964 Log check

Contents
Transfer the log files save in the HDD to a USB memory.
Transfer screenshots at log and log acquisition.
Purpose
Transfer the log file saved in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
5 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

Starts transferring the log files saved in the HDD to a USB memory.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7 [Completed] appears after normal completion.
An error code appears when there is an error.
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Log retrieving starts when pressing three keys on the operation panel (Status/Job Cancel + System Menu/Counter + Stop)
for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns on when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.
Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error HDD to USB memory copy failure
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
6-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U969 Toner area code

(Message: Toner Area Code)
Contents
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check the currently set toner area code and model code.
Method

Displays the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code
Model Code Model code
Completion
6-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture Mode)
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory to check it.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.

When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed.
Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data processing
or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurs
Completion
6-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U981 Set/Check CBM Alert Data

(Message: Set/Check CBM Alert Data)
Contents
Refers and changes the information on CBM (condition based maintenance) in KFS.
Purpose
Refers and changes setting current value of the counter and threshold / setting value, related on CBM (condition based
maintenance).
Method

The screen for next selecting is displayed.
Items Contents
CBM Alert CBM Alert
Cassette Feed Timing Paper feed timing
DP Feed Retry DP paper feed retry
Scan Image Setting / confirmation of DP black line detection (CBM alert data)
Method: CBM Alert

Items Contents
Engine Engine
Scanner Scanner
Setting: Engine
setting
Cassette Feed Timing Paper feed timing 0 to 1 0(off)

Setting: Scanner
setting
DP Feed Retry DP paper feed retry 0 to 1 0(off)
Scan Image Image vertical streak 0 to 1 0(off)
6-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Cassette Feed Timing

Items Contents
Total Error Cnt Threshold for error total cumulative count (for market)
Total Error Cnt(HQ) Threshold of error total cumulative count (for development)
Error Cnt Per Unit Threshold value of error unit number count (for market)
Notice 1K Cnt 1 k counter notification count
Error Cnt Per 1K 1 k Counter data threshold (for market)
Error Cnt Per 1K(HQ) 1 k Counter data threshold (for development)
Condition Setting Condition setting
Setting: Total Error Cnt /Total Error Cnt(HQ) /Error Cnt Per Unit /Notice 1K Cnt /Error Cnt Per 1K /Error Cnt
Per 1K(HQ)
setting
Cassette1 Cassette1
Cassette2 Cassette2

Setting: Condition Setting
setting
Threshold Feed Error1 Threshold of paper feed error 1
Threshold Feed Error2 Threshold of paper feed error 2
Rate Of Alert Rate at which alerts are raised
Unit Per Sheet Number Unit number
Method: DP Feed Retry

Items Contents
Cnt DP Feed Retry counter
Setting DP Feed Retry setting
6-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Cnt
setting
Total Cnt Threshold value of total cumulative count of DP
paper feed rollers (for market)
Total Cnt(HQ) Threshold value of total cumulative count of DP
paper feed rollers (for development)
Cnt Per Unit Threshold value for counting the number of DP
paper feed rollers (for market)
Errer Error counting with the specified number of DP
paper feed rollers

Setting: Setting
setting
Feed Error Paper feed error (for market) 200 to 5000
Feed Error(HQ) Paper feed error (for development) 200 to 5000
Rate Of Alert Rate at which alerts are raised 0 to 100
Unit Per Sheet Number Unit number 300/500/1000

Method: Scan Image

Items Contents
Cnt DP Feed Retry counter
Setting DP Feed Retry setting
Setting: Cnt
setting
Detect Black Line(CCD) DP(CCD side) Cumulative number of black
streak detection
Detect Black Line(CIS) DP(CIS side) Cumulative number of black
streak detection
Detect White Line(CIS) DP(CIS side) Cumulative number of white
streak detection
Table Scan Number of sheets to read on the table
6-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Setting
setting
Removal Of Black Line(F) DP(CCD side)Setting of reduction level when 5 to 15
black streak reduction processing setting is
"strong" [pixel]
Removal Of Black Line(B) DP(CCD side)Setting of reduction level when 5 to 15
black streak reduction processing setting is
"strong" [pixel]
Rate Of Alert(F) (DP CCD side)[%] Percentage of black streak 0 to 20
detection count per unit sheet number for
detecting CBM alert
Rate Of Alert(B) (DP CIS side) [%] Percentage of black streak 0 to 20
detection count per unit sheet number for
detecting CBM alert
Unit Per Sheet Num(F) (DP CCD side)[sheet] Setting of unit number of 300/500/1000
sheets to detect CBM alert
Unit Per Sheet Num(B) (DP CIS side))[sheet] Setting of unit number of 300/500/1000
sheets to detect CBM alert
Completion
U984 Developer unit number

(Message: Developing Unit Number)
Contents
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method

Displays the developer unit number.
Items Contents
K Displays the developer unit number
Completion
6-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U985 Developer unit history

(Message: Developing Unit History)
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Displays the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method

Select color to refer to.
Items Contents
K Displays the developer unit number history
Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion
U989 HDD scan disk

(Message: HDD Scandisk)
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
Execute recovery of HDD management data error by turning the power off while accessing to the HDD.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
3 Press the [Start] key to execute scandisk.
Completion
6-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time

(Message: Clear Scanner Lamp ON Time)
Contents
Displays the accumulated CIS lighting time
Purpose
1 Execute to check the CIS usage.
Method

CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Displays the accumulated CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
U991 Scanner counter

(Message: Scanner Counter)
Contents
Displays the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method

Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Displays times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Displays times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Displays times of other scan operations.
Completion
6-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7Troubleshooting
7 - 1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
How to isolate the cause

Execute U089 MIP-PG pattern output to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: Enginee factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.

Yes: Scanner factor
1 Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page 7-2 or 7-14).
(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass --> CCD] failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Scan by the main unit [CCD])
b. On the contact glass (Scan by the main unit [CCD])
2 Refer to image failure with Enginee factor (See page 7-33 or 7-41).
(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Tansfer image formation process failure)
Image data flow

When copying:
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Main PWB
(LSU)
When sending:
LED lamp CCD Main PWB PC
Data printing from PC:

APC PWB
Printer driver Main PWB
(LSU)
7-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side through
the mechanically reversed DP)
No. Contents Image sample

(2-1) Abnormal image
(2-2) Colored background
(2-3) Black or color spots
(2-4) Horizontal black streaks
(2-5) Vertical streaks, band (black or color)
(2-6) Vertical streaks, band (white)
(2-7) Missing entire image (White / Black)
(2-8) Blurred image
(2-9) Image is missing partly
7-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-10) Entire image is light
(2-11) Mismatch between the original center line and

output image center line (1st side)

output image center line (2nd side)
(2-13) Regular mismatch of the leading edge between

the original and output image (1st side)

the original and output image (2nd side)
(2-15) Skewed image
(2-16) Blurred characters
(2-17) Color shift
(2-18) Moiré
7-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-19) Image is dark partly or light
Content of Scanner Factors

(2-1)Abnormal image
(When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Reconnect the following FFC. If FFC
Or it is faulty. terminal is turned up or deformed, or FFC is
damaged, replace FFC.
• CCD PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the connector terminal of the HDD
connected or the HDD cable is cable and re-insert the connector. If there is
faulty. no continuity, replace the cable.
• HDD - Main PWB
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD.
4 Reattaching the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit.
properly.
5 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB and then execute
U411 [Table(ChartA)].
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
(2-2)Colored background

1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to [Auto] at
Adjustment is not set. [System Menu/Counter] > [Common
Settings] > [Function Defaults].
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to [Manual] to
dark. adjust the density at [System Menu/Counter]
> [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults].
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Auto] in
Adjustment is not set. [Color/Image Quality].
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Manual] in
density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality], and adjust the
background density background density.
adjustment is dark.
5 Reloading the original The original is raised at Set the original during pressing.
scanning.
6 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Check if the same image failure appears at
the table scanning. If it appears, execute
7-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
• LED drive PWB - CCD PWB
11 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is dirty or not Clean the slit glass. Also, reattach it if
properly attached. necessary.
12 Adjusting the left DP hinge The original is raised at Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height scanning.
13 Replacing the document The DP frame is deformed or Replace the document processor.
processor the DP hinge is faulty.
15 Replacing the LED unit The LED drive PWB is faulty. Replace the LED unit.
(2-3)Black or color spots


1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
(2-4)Horizontal black streaks


3 Executing U071 The image backside of the Adjust the value at U071 [Front Head] or
side indication plate is [Back Head].
scanned. (The adjustment
value of U071[Front Head] or
[Back Head] is not proper.)
4 Executing U411 Scanning the image on the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
back of the size indication
plate. (U411 [Table(ChartA)]
adjustment value is not
proper.)
7-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-5)Vertical streaks, band (black or color)


1 Cleaning the contact glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass and DP conveying guide.
and DP conveying guide
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and shading plate at
shading plate is dirty. the backside.
3 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror in the lamp unit.
4 Eliminating the dust The dust is adhered on the Remove dust inside the laser path of the
lamp unit. lamp unit.
5 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
6 Executing U063 The image scanning position Execute U063 to change the scanner
is incorrect. shading position.
8 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
detected original size are
mismatched.
9 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
10 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust the value at U067 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)
11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
incorrect. (Streaks or bands
appear out of the original.)
12 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust the value at U068 [DP Read].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
original image.)
14 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj].
15 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartB)].
7-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-6)Vertical streaks, band (white)


4 Reattaching the lens cover The lens cover is off. Reattach the lens cover.
(2-7)Missing entire image (White / Black)


1 Reloading the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
2 Reattaching the slit glass The slit glass is not properly Reattach the slit glass.
attached.
is incorrect.
6 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive belt comes Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt off.
7 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is not Reattach the scanner drive gear.
gear properly attached.
(2-8)Blurred image

1 Replacing the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
7-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Removing condensation (Slit The slit glass has Remove condensation on the slit glass.
glass) condensation.
3 Removing condensation The mirror has condensation. Remove the condensation on the mirror in
(Mirror) the lamp unit.
4 Removing condensation The lens has condensation. Remove the condensation on the lens in the
(Lens) lens unit.
5 Removing condensation (CCD The glass of the CCD PWB Remove the condensation on the CCD PWB
PWB) has condensation. glass using a blower brush.
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner is incorrect.
(2-9)Image is missing partly


1 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
2 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
3 Changing the setting The copy position is rotated Set [Auto Image Rotation] to [Off] from the
automatically. System Menu.
4 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is dirty or not Clean the slit glass. Also, reattach it if
properly attached. necessary.
properly.
(2-10)Entire image is light


is incorrect.
3 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is not properly Reattach the slit glass.
attached.
7-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the
adjusted. (The original type originals.
and image quality differs.)
5 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
'On'.) [EcoPrint].
6 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark.
adjusted. (The density setting
is too light.)
7 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Background Density
adjusted. ([Background Adjustment to make dark.
density] is set to 'Off'.)
8 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
[On]. [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
the contact glass.
10 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartA)].
adjusted.
11 (For the dual scan DP) The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
Executing U411 adjusted.
(2-11)Mismatch between the original center line and output image center line (1st side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust the value at U072 [Front].
the front page of the originals
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
3 (For the dual scan DP) The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj].
Executing U411 when DP scanning is not
executed.
4 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartB)].
when DP scanning is not
executed.
(2-12)Mismatch between the original center line and output image center line (2nd side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust the value at U072 [Back].
the back page of the originals
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
(2-13)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image (1st side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust the value at U071 [Front Head].
original leading edge at the
document processor is not
properly set.
2 (For the dual scan DP) The starting position for Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj].
Executing U411 scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
3 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartB)].
is incorrect.
4 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and the
roller and the bushings bushing is dirty. bushing.
5 Replacing the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying roller.
roller worn down.
6 Applying the grease The DP drive motor rotates Apply the grease to the drive gear of the DP
irregularly and the excessive drive motor. (EM-50LP: Part number
load is applied to the DP drive (7BG010009H))
gear.
7 Replacing the DP drive motor The DP drive motor rotates Reattach the DP drive motor and reconnect
irregularly due to the fault. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
(2-14)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image (2nd side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust the value at U071 [Back Head].
leading edge on the back page
of the originals at the
document processor is not
properly set.
(2-15)Skewed image

1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
2 Relocating the original width The original skews. Relocate the original width guides.
guides
3 Adjusting the right DP hinge The right DP hinge position is Adjust the right DP hinge position back and
position not adjusted back and forth. forth.
4 Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It Clean the DP feed roller.
can be removed by cleaning.)
7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Replacing the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It Replace the DP feed roller.
cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
6 Cleaning the DP registration The DP registration roller is Clean the DP registration roller.
roller dirty.
7 Reattaching the DP The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration pulley.
registration pulley registration pulley is faulty.
8 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop amount at U942.
before registration is improper.
(2-16)Blurred characters

1 Checking the original The originals out of Ask a user to use the specified paper.
specification are used. (They
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Correcting the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
4 Reattaching the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulley and the
pulley and pressure spring does not rotate smoothly. pressure spring.
5 Reattaching the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Reattaching the original The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up guide.
pickup guide does not operate properly.
7 Replacing the DP scanning The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning guide.
guide deformed.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights of Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height the DP do not match.
9 Refixing the document The document processor is Check the positioning of the document
processor not properly installed in the processor and tighten the screws again.
main unit.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of the Adjust the DP hinges holding pressure.
holding pressure DP hinge is not properly
adjusted. (The DP hinge does
not operate smoothly in the up
and down direction, and the
right and left sides of the DP
are distorted because the DP
can not hold the opened
condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
hinge does not operate
smoothly in the up and down
direction, and the right and left
sides of the DP are distorted
because the DP can not hold
the opened condition.)
7-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-17)Color shift

1 Checking the original The originals out of Ask a user to use the specified paper.
specification are used. (They
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Correcting the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
4 Reattaching the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulley and the
pulley and pressure spring does not rotate smoothly. pressure spring.
5 Reattaching the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Replacing the DP scanning The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning guide.
guide deformed.
7 Reattaching the original The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up guide.
pickup guide does not operate properly.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights of Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height the DP do not match.
9 Refixing the document The document processor is Check the positioning of the document
processor not properly installed in the processor and tighten the screws again.
main unit.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of the Adjust the DP hinges holding pressure.
holding pressure DP hinge is not properly
adjusted. (The DP hinge does
not operate smoothly in the up
and down direction, and the
right and left sides of the DP
are distorted because the DP
can not hold the opened
condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
hinge does not operate
smoothly in the up and down
direction, and the right and left
sides of the DP are distorted
because the DP can not hold
the opened condition.)
(2-18)Moiré

1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] at [System Menu/
not set properly. (moiré Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function
changes depending on the Defaults].
image quality.)
2 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset
(moiré appears in the original them.
scanning direction.)
7-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-19)Image is dark partly or light


1 Checking the situation The main unit original Check if the same phenomenon occurs
scanning is faulty. when scanning on the contact glass. If it
occurs, perform the field measures for the
same phenomenon that occurs when
scanning on the contact glass.
3 Reattaching the slit glass The slit glass is bent. Reattach the slit glass.
4 Reattaching the DP scanning DP scanning guide is not Reattach the DP scanning guide.
guide installed properly.
7-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Scanner Factors (When scanning the back side through DP)

(3-3) Black or color spots
(3-7) Missing entire image (White / Black)
(3-8) Blurred image
7-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]


output image center line

the original and output image
(3-13) Skewed image
(3-14) Color shift
(3-15) Moiré
7-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scanner Factors

(3-1)Abnormal image
Target: Dual scan DP

(When scanning the back side through DP)

1 Reattaching the DP relay The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB.
PWB properly attached.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the SATA cable
connected properly. The SATA connector and reinsert the connector. If there
cable is faulty. is no continuity, replace the SATA cable.
• DPSHD PWB - DP relay PWB
3 Reconnecting the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is not Reconnect the DPSHD PWB to the DPCIS.
PWB properly connected.
4 Replacing the DPSHD PWB The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
5 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then execute U091 and
U411.
6 Replacing the DP relay PWB The DP relay PWB is faulty. Replace the DP relay PWB.


1 Setting Background Density The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Auto] in
Adjustment density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality].
background density
adjustment is set to Off.
2 Setting Background Density The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Manual] in
Adjustment density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality], and adjust the
background density background density.
adjustment is dark.
3 Executing U411 The CIS image adjustment Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
(U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]) is not
executed.
4 Cleaning the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty. Clean the CIS roller.
5 Reattaching the CIS roller The CIS roller does not rotate Reattach the CIS roller driving section.
drive parts properly.
U411.
7-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-3)Black or color spots


U411.


2 Cleaning the CIS glass and The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the DP conveying
the DP conveying guide guide.
U411.
7-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Executing U071 The leading edge timing is Adjust the value at U071 [CIS Head].
improperly adjusted. (Streaks
or bands appear on the image
outside the original.)
2 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj].
3 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
5 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying guide is Clean the DP conveying guide.
guide. dirty.
6 Cleaning the DP registration The DP registration pulley is Clean the DP registration pulley.
pulley dirty.
8 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line Execute U091.
correction) is not executed.
U411.


3 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line Execute U091.
correction) is not executed.
7-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U411.
(3-7)Missing entire image (White / Black)


U411.
(3-8)Blurred image


1 Removing condensation The CIS glass has Remove condensation on the CIS glass.
condensation.
3 Reattaching the CIS glass The CIS glass is warped. Reattach the CIS glass.
4 Replacing the CIS glass The CIS glass has some Replace the CIS glass.
scratches.
6 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
adjustment is not executed.
7 Reattaching the DPCIS The DPCIS is not properly Reattach the DPCIS.
attached.
7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U411.


1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reload the original properly.
2 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original size manually.
mismatched.
3 Changing the setting The Border Erase function is Lower the setting of the Border Erase.
not properly set. (Setting is too
large.)
U411.


1 Checking the situation The original scanning process Check if the same phenomenon occurs
is faulty. when scanning on the contact glass. If it
occurs, execute the measures for the entirely
faint image that occurs when scanning on
the contact glass.
2 Executing U411 U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] is not Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
executed.
attached.
7-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U411.
(3-11)Mismatch between the original center line and output image center line


1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reload the original properly.
2 Executing U072 The DP scanning position is Adjust the DPCIS center line at U072 [CIS].
not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj].
not adjusted.
4 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
not adjusted.
(3-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image


1 Executing U071 The DP scanning position is Adjust the value at U071 [CIS Head].
not adjusted.
2 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj].
not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].
not adjusted.
(3-13)Skewed image


1 Checking the situation The DP scanning process is Check if the same phenomenon occurs
faulty. when scanning 1st side (front side) on DP. If
it occurs, execute the measures for the skew
image when scanning 1st side (front side) on
DP.
7-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]

attached.
(3-14)Color shift


1 Checking the situation The DP scanning process is Check if the same phenomenon occurs
faulty. when scanning 1st side (front side) on DP. If
it occurs, execute the measures for the color
shift when scanning 1st side (front side) on
DP.
2 Reattaching the CIS roller The originals are conveyed Reattach the CIS roller.
without contacting the CIS
roller.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Clean the DP conveying roller and bushing.
roller and the bushings dirty.
4 Reattaching the DPCIS The originals are away from Reattach the DPCIS.
the CIS glass.
(3-15)Moiré


1 Changing the image quality The image quality mode is not Change the image quality mode.
mode set properly. (Moiré changes
depending on the image
mode)
3 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].


1 Checking the image quality Image quality is not properly Select the image quality fitting the original
mode adjusted. (Original type and type.
image quality are
mismatched.)
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the fold or creases of the original.
creased.
7-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U411.
7-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(4-3) Black dots
(4-7) No image comes out (White or Black)
(4-8) Blurred image
7-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-11) Center of the original and output image is

inconsistent

the original and output image
(4-13) Skewed image
(4-15) Moiré
7-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(4-1)Abnormal image


1 Reloading the original The original is raised at Set the original during pressing.
scanning.
the contact glass.
3 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
6 Reattaching the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit.
properly.
(4-3)Black dots

1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Check the black dots or color dots on the
original and replace it if necessary.
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
7-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Executing U066 The image at the backside of Adjust the value at U066 [Front].
the size direction plate is
scanned.<br>
(The adjustment value of
[Front] at U066 is incorrect.)
4 Executing U411 Scanning the image on the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
back of the size indication
plate. (U411 [Table(ChartA)]
adjustment value is not
proper.)

2 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
mismatched.
3 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
6 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and the shading
shading plate at the backside plate at the backside of the contact glass.
of the contact glass is dirty.
7 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the optical mirror.
9 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
7-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]

the contact glass.
(4-7)No image comes out (White or Black)

1 Reloading the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
(4-8)Blurred image

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Removing condensation The contact glass has Remove the condensation on the contact
(contact glass) condensation. glass.
3 Removing condensation (Lens The lens unit has Eliminate condensation at the lens unit.
unit) condensation.
4 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner is incorrect.
7-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Changing the setting Marked part by highlighter pen Set to [On] at [Copy] key > [Functions] >
on the original cannot be [Original Image] > [Others] > [Highlighter].
scanned.
3 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
4 Changing the setting The copy position is rotated Set [Auto Image Rotation] to [Off] from the
automatically. System Menu.
5 Changing the setting The Border Erase function is Lower the setting of the Border Erase.
not properly set. (Setting is too
large.)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The original scanning side of Clean the original scanning side of the
the contact glass is dirty. contact glass.
the contact glass.
8 Reattaching the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass.
properly attached.
properly.
11 Replacing the original size Original size and paper size Replace the original size sensor.
sensor are not matched on the
operation panel display.
(Original size sensor is
misdetected.)

1 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the
adjusted. (The original type originals.
and image quality differs.)
2 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
'On'.) [EcoPrint].
3 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark.
adjusted. (The density setting
is too light.)
4 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
[On]. [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
the contact glass.
6 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
7-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-11)Center of the original and output image is inconsistent

1 Reloading the original The original is not properly set Reset the originals.
on the contact glass.
properly attached.
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is not Adjust the value at U067 [Front].
adjusted.
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scanning Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
(4-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image

(The leading edge of the
original is not set on the
contact glass properly)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust the value at U066 [Front].
timing is incorrect.
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
timing is incorrect.
5 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt loose.
6 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor is faulty, Reattach the scanner motor and reconnect
and so the rotation is irregular. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
(4-13)Skewed image

1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set. (The original is skewed.)
2 Checking the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit.
properly.
7-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Removing foreign material Foreign objects are adhering Remove foreign objects adhering to the
to the scanner rail and there is scanner rail.
a load at the scanner
movement.
2 Reattaching the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit.
properly.
3 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt tension
scanner movement since the properly.
belt tension is improper.
4 Removing foreign material Foreign objects are adhering Remove foreign objects adhering to the
to the scanner wire drum and scanner wire drum and pulley.
pulley.
5 Replacing the scanner wire The scanner wire is scratched. Replace the scanner wires.
(4-15)Moiré

1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/
not set properly. (moiré Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
changes depending on the [Function Defaults].
image quality.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scanning Change the scanner magnification in the
direction is large. (This main scanning direction to reduction at U65
problem occurs when the print [Main Scan].
ratio is set as 100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner section is incorrect.

2 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
3 Reattaching the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
properly attached.
7-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(5-1) Black dots (toner dirt)
(5-2) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)
(5-3) Vertical streaks or bands
(5-4) Blank image
(5-5) Blurred image
(5-6) Image is missing partly (blank image, white

spots)
(5-8) Center of the original and output image is

inconsistent
(5-9) Irregular mismatch of the leading edge between

the original and output image (paper leading
edge timing variation)
7-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-10) Paper skew at the trailing edge
(5-12) Offset
(5-13) Uneven transfer
(5-14) Dirty reverse side
(5-15) Fusing failure
(5-16) Trailing image
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(5-1)Black dots (toner dirt)

1 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or If the image failure appears in the transfer
unit scratched. roller circumference interval (49.5mm), clean
it. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller
unit.
2 Cleaning the fuser separation The fuser separation nails are Clean the fuser separation nails.
claws dirty.
7-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heat roller or fuser If the image failure appears in the fuser heat
press roller is dirty, there are roller of fuser press roller circumference
foreign objects adhere or interval (78.5mm), clean it. If not repaired,
scratched. replace the fuser unit.
4 Executing U034 The paper separation Adjust the center line at u034 [LSU Out Left]
performance is decreased and s that the drum separation nail does not
the line drawing image, etc. is overlap the image position.
rubbed by the separation nail.
(5-2)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)

press roller is dirty, there are roller of fuser press roller circumference
foreign objects adhere or interval (78.5mm), clean it. If not repaired,
scratched. replace the fuser unit.
2 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the left cover (conveying unit) and
right cover closed. securely close it.
3 Checking the transfer roller The pressure spring is not Reattach the transfer roller pressure spring.
unit properly attached or If deformed, repair it. If not repaired, replace
deformed. the transfer roller unit.
(5-3)Vertical streaks or bands

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heat roller or fuser Clean the fuser heat roller and fuser
separation nail is dirty with separation nail. If parts inside the fuser is
paper dust or toner or parts broken, replace the fuser unit.
inside the fuser is faulty.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.
3 Cleaning the feed-shift guide There is toner dirt or welding Clean the feed-shift guide.
on the feed-shift guide.
4 Cleaning the transfer The transfer separation needle Clean the transfer separation needle at the
discharger needle is dirty with paper dust or upper side of the transfer roller with a
toner. cleaning brush, etc.
5 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty, If the image failure appears in the transfer
unit deformed or worn down. roller circumference interval (49.5mm), clean
unit.
6 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is
Or it is faulty. peeled off, deformed or FFC wire is broken,
replace the FFC.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
7 Checking the high voltage The transfer bias output from Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB the high voltage PWB is faulty.
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
7-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-4)Blank image

1 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Check the lock of the right cover Assy, and
right cover closed. open and close the right cover (conveying
unit).
replace the FFC.
(5-5)Blurred image

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with dry paper. Ask users to store
paper at low humidity.
2 Setting the cassette heater Paper is stored in the high Turn the cassette heater switch on and set
humidity environment. U327 to [On] if necessary.
(5-6)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots)

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Turn the cassette heater switch on and set
place humidity environment. U327 to [On] if necessary. Ask users to store
unit.
4 Setting the media type The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with dry paper. Ask users to store
2 Setting the cassette heater Paper is stored in the high Turn the cassette heater switch on and set
humidity environment. U327 to [On] if necessary.
3 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Reset the transfer voltage to default at U101.
voltage is improperly set.
4 Checking the transfer bias The transfer bias contact is Clean the transfer bias contact or correct it
contact dirty or deformed and the so that it grounds securely.
transfer bias is not impressed.
7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]

replace the FFC.
(5-8)Center of the original and output image is inconsistent

1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides width guides do not fit with the size.
paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when image Adjust the center line at u034 [LSU Out Left].
writing the data is incorrect.
(5-9)Irregular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and output image (paper leading
edge timing variation)

1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is not Adjust the leading edge timing at U034 [LSU
properly adjusted. Out Top].
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount before Execute U051 to adjust the paper loop
registration is improper. amount before registration.
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying related Execute U032 and U247 (in case of the high
clutch does not operate capacity feeder). If the feed/conveying clutch
correctly. does not operate properly, reattach it and
reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace the drive unit including the faulty
clutch.
(5-10)Paper skew at the trailing edge

1 Cleaning the transfer roller The neighboring parts of the Clean the transfer roller, transfer separation
unit secondary transfer roller are needle and paper conveying path.
dirty with paper dust.
2 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking fan motor if it
material such as a piece of does not operate properly when executing
paper. U037 [Toner].
3 Relocating the paper width The paper width guide or MP Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width paper width guide position paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides does not match the paper size size.
and paper is conveyed in
skew.
4 Checking the registration The registration roller or Check if the left registration roller, right
rollers and the middle pulley middle pulley is not attached registration roller or middle pulley is attached
properly or is dirty. properly and reattach it if necessary. If it is
dirty with toner, paper dust or other, clean it.
7-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Reinstalling the fuser unit The fuser unit is not properly Insert the fuser unit straight into the main
installed. unit, and lock both sides of the fuser unit
firmly.

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the
specification.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.
3 Applying the grease The drives from the conveying Apply the grease to the drive gear of the
motors are not smoothly conveying related motor. (EM-50LP: Part
transmitted. number (7BG010009H))
4 Replacing the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser entry guide is Replace the fuser unit.
deformed or the fuser
pressure is uneven.
(5-12)Offset

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the
specification, or change to the media type
setting closest to the specified paper.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Change the settings according to the media
set. type (paper weight).
3 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or If the image failure appears the transfer roller
unit scratched. circumference interval (49.5mm), clean the
transfer roller. If not repaired, replace the
transfer roller.
5 Changing the setting The fuser control temperature Reset the fuser control temperature to
is set to high.. default at U161 [Warm Up].
press roller is dirty or roller of fuser press roller circumference
scratched. interval (78.5mm), clean it. If not repaired,
replace the fuser unit.
7 Leading edge smudge Toner offset on the fuser heat If the paper weight is [Light] or [Normal1] to
reduction mode setting roller adheres at the next page [Normal3], set to [Custom 6] (leading edge
leading edge. smudge reduction mode) at [System Menu/
Counter] key \> [Common Settings] \>
[Original/Paper Settings] \> [Media Type
Settings].
7-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-13)Uneven transfer

2 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty, If the image failure appears the transfer roller
unit scratched or the pressure circumference interval (49.5mm), clean the
spring is deformed. transfer roller. If the transfer roller pressure
spring is deformed, repair it. If not repaired,
replace the transfer roller.
replace the FFC.
7 Replacing the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in the Replace the fuser unit.
drive section or the fuser
press-release section are
deformed or worn down.
(5-14)Dirty reverse side

unit.
3 Cleaning the fuser press roller The fuser pressure roller is Clean the fuser press roller and set the
and changing the settings dirty caused by the paper type proper media type at System Menu.
setting.
4 Cleaning the conveying guide The conveying guide is dirty. Clean the conveying guide.
(5-15)Fusing failure

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the proper paper.
set. Menu.
is set to low. default at U161 [Warm Up].
4 Replacing the fuser unit The nipping pressure (width) Replace the fuser unit.
is small and fuser pressure
setting is weak.
5 (When feeding the OHP film) The transparency ejected to Select [1200dpi] in the printer properties >
Changing the settings the tray is stuck, toner fused to [Imaging] > [Print Quality] > [Custom] and
peel off on the backside of the execute printing. (Printed in the low speed if
previously ejected setting to 1200dpi)
transparency or paper.
7-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-16)Trailing image

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the proper paper.
set. Menu.
is set to high. default at U161 [Warm Up].
5 Trailing image reduction mode Toner not yet fused on paper If the paper weight is [Normal1] to [Normal3],
setting scatters when paper heated set to [Custom 8] (Trailing image reduction
by the fuser heat roller expose mode) at [System Menu/Counter] key \>
moisture to evaporated. [Common Settings] \> [Original/Paper
Settings] \> [Media Type Settings].
7-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(6-1) Background image is foggy.
(6-4) No image comes out (Black)
(6-5) Blank image
(6-7) Blurred image
7-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-11) Periodic toner dirt
(6-12) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)
(6-13) Vertical streaks and bands (black)
(6-15) Horizontal uneven density
(6-16) Vertical uneven density
(6-17) Offset
(6-18) Gradation reproducibility is low
7-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-19) Trailing image
Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(6-1)Background image is foggy.

1 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
2 Checking the developer high The developer high voltage Clean the developer high voltage contact
voltage contact contact of the high voltage and correct it so that it grounds securely. Or
PWB is dirty or deformed. reattach the high voltage PWB.
3 Executing U140 The setting value of the Retrieve the U140 setting values to the
developer bias is improper. default.
4 Replacing the developer unit The charge amount of the Replace the developer unit.
toner is low.
5 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the terminals of the FFC and
Or it is faulty. reconnect if. If the FFC terminal is deformed
or FFC wire is broken, replace the FFC.
6 Replacing the high voltage The developer bias output Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB from the high voltage PWB is
high.

1 Executing Drum refresh The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on the status page.
toner is low. If printed at high coverage, execute drum
refresh. (If Print Coverage Report is not
output, set U285 to [On] to output Print
Coverage Report.)
2 Reinstalling the main charger The main charger unit is not Reinstall the main charger unit to the drum
unit installed properly. unit, and Reinstall the drum unit to the main
body to ensure that the connector is
connected.
3 Checking the main charger The MC roller surface is dirty Clean the MC roller surface. If not improved,
unit or scratched. replace the main charger unit.
4 Replacing the main charger The MC roller reaches its life. If the main charger roller counter at U930
unit exceeds 600,000, replace the main charger
unit since the drum surface potential at low
temperature is low.
5 Executing U100 The setting value of the main Reset U100 setting value to default.
high voltage is incorrect.
6 Replacing the drum unit The drum is faulty. Replace the drum unit.
7-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Checking the main charger The main charger high voltage Clean the charger high voltage contact and
high voltage contact contact of the high voltage correct it to ensure that it is grounded. Or,
PWB is dirty or deformed. reinstall the high voltage PWB.
8 Replacing the high voltage The main charger bias output Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB from the high voltage PWB is
high.
10 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the If the machine inside temperature is below
inside the main unit installation environment. 10°C / 50°F at U139, instruct user to change
the installation environment of the room
temperature 16°C / 60.8°F or higher. (This
phenomenon tends to occur immediately
after being left in a low temperature
environment for few days if turning on the
power).

1 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• LSU (APC PWB) - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
(6-4)No image comes out (Black)

1 Reinstalling the main charger The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger unit to the drum
unit charger unit is not properly unit and reinstall the drum unit into the main
installed. unit to ensure secure contact .
2 Checking the MC roller The contact of the MC roller is Clean the main charger roller contact and
contact dirty or deformed. (Charge correct it so that it is grounded securely.
bias can't be applied)
3 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of the Clean the high voltage contact and correct it
contact high voltage PWB is dirty or so that it grounds securely. Or reattach the
deformed. high voltage PWB.
5 Replacing the high voltage The main charger bias voltage Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB output is not even from the
main high voltage PWB.
(6-5)Blank image

1 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
7-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Replacing the developer unit The developer drive gear is Replace the developer unit.
faulty.
4 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the wire connector. Clean the
connected properly. Or, the FFC and reconnect it. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal is deformed or FFC wire is broken,
replace the FFC.
• Developer motor - Engine PWB
• LSU(APC PWB) - Engine PWB
5 Checking the developer motor The developing motor does Reattach the developer motor and execute
not operate properly. U030[DLP]. If not operating normally, replace
it.
6 Replacing the high voltage The developer, main charger Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB and transfer bias output from
the high voltage PWB is low.
7 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
2 Replacing the drum unit There are adhered objects on Replace the drum unit.
the drum surface.
(6-7)Blurred image

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
2 Cleaning or replacing the LSU The LSU dust-proof glass is Clean the LSU dust-proof glass. If the glass
dirty or altered. is altered, replace the LSU.

1 Reinstalling the toner Toner is collected on one side. Sufficiently shake the toner container and
container reinstall it to the main unit.
2 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
3 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Correct the developer bias contact so that it
contact deformed. grounds securely.
7-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Replacing the high voltage The developer, main charger Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB and transfer bias output from
the high voltage PWB is low.

1 Executing Drum refresh Condensation on the drum Execute Drum refresh.
surface.
2 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.
3 Replacing the drum unit The eraser is faulty or the Reinstall the drum by inserting it all the way.
drum surface potential after If not repaired, replace the drum unit.
exposure is high since the
drum surface is worn down.

2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
(6-11)Periodic toner dirt

1 (In case of 94mm interval) The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
Executing drum refresh
2 (In case of 94mm interval) The drum surface is Replace the drum unit.
Checking the drum unit scratched.
3 (In case of 37.5mm interval) There is dirt or foreign object If the image failure appears in the main
Checking the main charger on the MC roller surface. charger roller circumference interval
unit (37.5mm), clean the main charger roller
surface. If not repaired, replace the main
charger unit.
4 (In case of 39.3mm interval) There is dirt, foreign object or Wipe the developer roller dry. If it does not
checking the developer unit scratch on the developing improve, replace the developer unit.
roller.
5 (In case of 63mm interval) There are foreign objects at Clean the DS pulley. If foreign objects cannot
Checking the DS pulley the DS pulley. be removed, replace the developer unit.
7-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-12)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)

1 Cleaning the developer unit Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the developer roller and
roller are dirty and it causes the developer bias contact.
the developer bias leakage.
2 Replacing the developer unit Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit.
roller and the developer bias
contact are deteriorated and it
causes the developer bias
leakage.
4 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is scratched Replace the drum unit.
and there is leak.
5 Checking the main charger The MC roller surface is dirty If the image failure appears in the main
unit or scratched. charger roller circumference interval
(37.5mm), clean the main charger roller
surface. If not repaired, replace the main
charger unit.
7 Replacing the high voltage The main charger bias voltage Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB output is not even from the
main high voltage PWB.
(6-13)Vertical streaks and bands (black)

2 Replacing the drum unit The cleaning blade or drum Replace the drum unit.
surface is worn out.
3 Checking the main charger Streaky dirt adheres to the If the image failure appears in the main
unit surface of the MC roller and charger roller circumference interval
electric potential is not (37.5mm), clean the main charger roller
impressed or the main charger surface. If not repaired, replace the main
roller surface is altered charger unit.
streaky.
4 Checking the developer unit There are foreign objects Remove foreign objects in between the
pinched between the developer blade and developer roller. If not
developer blade and repaired, replace the developer unit.
developer roller.

1 Replacing the developer unit Foreign objects or aggregated Clean the developer roller. Or, replace the
toner adhere on the developer unit if not repaired after cleaning.
developing roller.
2 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects on Remove foreign objects on the frame or
the laser path of the LSU. sealing material between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
7-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is Replace the drum unit.
scratched.
5 Checking the main charger There is dirt, foreign object or If the image failure appears in the main
unit scratch on the MC roller charger roller circumference interval
surface is dirty, scratched or (37.5mm), clean the main charger roller
foreign objects adhere. surface. If not repaired, replace the main
charger unit.
6 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.
(6-15)Horizontal uneven density

1 Reinstalling the main charger MC roller rotation is uneven. Reattach the main charger unit.
unit
2 Replacing the main charger The MC cleaning roller is Replace the main charger unit.
unit deformed.
3 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
4 Replacing the developer unit The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit.
5 Cleaning the developing bias The conduction is not Clean the developer bias contact.
contact stabilized due to the dirty
developer bias contact.
6 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the shape Execute Drum refresh.
of a streak are on both ends of
the drum surface.
7 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down.
8 Replacing the LSU The laser emission is uneven. Replace the LSU.
(6-16)Vertical uneven density

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
2 Checking the main charger Streaky dirt adheres to the Clean the MC roller surface. If not improved,
unit surface of the MC roller. replace the main charger unit.
down.
(6-17)Offset

down or scratched.
3 Cleaning the developing roller The developer roller is dirty. Clean the developer roller.
4 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller surface is Replace the developer unit.
worn down or scratched.
7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-18)Gradation reproducibility is low

1 Adjusting the image Grayscale adjustment is not Execute System Menu [Adjustment/
executed. Maintenance] > [Grayscale].
(6-19)Trailing image

1 Changing the setting The transfer current setting Change the media type setting of the
does not match the paper. cassette where the target paper is loaded.
7-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1) Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(2) Paper jam from paper factor
(3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(4) Paper jam due to the guide
(5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(7) Paper jam from the factor of conveying roller, motor or clutch
(8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection

1 Opening / closing the front The front cover is not Open the right cover and close it securely.
cover engaged.
2 Checking the toner container The toner container and waste Check how the toner container and waste
and waste toner box toner box are not attached toner box are attached. Reattach them if
properly. necessary.
3 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not aligned Open the right cover and close it again
right cover to the other exterior covers. securely.
4 Checking the conveying unit Parts on the conveying unit Check the attachment of the transfer roller
are not attached properly. unit and drum cover on the conveying unit,
and reattach them if necessary.
(1-2)Paper jam from paper factor

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
enough or the cutting edge of the paper direction. Correct or replace paper
loaded paper is damaged. if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used or Ask a user to use the specified paper type.
foreign objects are on the Or, remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
7-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl

1 Checking the paper path and The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs, check if a piece of
the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the torn paper, foreign objects or the burrs on the
leading edge of the sheet is part do not exist on the paper path, and
bent. remove them.
2 (In case of curl) executing Paper curls since the fuser Reset the fuser control temperature to
U161 control temperature is not default at U161when paper curl occurs.
proper.
3 Curl reduction mode setting The paper curls. If the paper weight is 74g/m2 or less, set to
[Custom 7] (Curl reduction mode) at [System
Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
[Original/Paper Settings] > [Media Type
Settings].
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide

1 Checking the guide The guide is dirty or foreign The guide is dirty with toner, paper dust, etc.
objects adhere. Or if foreign objects adhere, clean it with
cloth, etc.
2 Checking the guide The guide does not properly Check the guide, and remove any burrs.
operate due to the incorrect Also, if the guide does not operate smoothly
attachment or a fault. manually, reattach the guide. Then, replace
the guide if it is not fixed or if there is
deformation or frictional wear.
3 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not operate Execute U030 (main unit), U240 (finisher) to
properly. check the guide operation with the operation
sound. If the guide does not move or it is not
smooth, reattach the guide. If not repaired,
replace the solenoid.
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides width guides do not fit with the paper width guides along the paper size
paper size. when the paper skew or the paper creases
occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the paper source.
enough. If a part of the paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper from The paper is not properly Paper set in the high capacity feeder
the large capacity feeder) loaded. cassette runs over the guide reset the paper
Checking the paper so that the paper corner does not run over
the bump in the cassette.
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
7-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-7)Paper jam from the factor of conveying roller, motor or clutch

1 Checking the roller or the The roller or surface of the Check if the rollers or the pulleys have no
pulley pulley is dirty, or faulty. paper dust, toner, foreign objects, diameter
change or frictional wear, and clean their
surface. If not repaired, replace the parts.
2 Cleaning the roller shaft and The roller shaft or the bearings If a load is given to the roller rotation caused
the bearings are dirty. by the dirt of the roller shaft or the bearings,
clean.
3 Checking the spring The spring does not press the Check if the spring is dropping off or the
conveying roller or pulley roller and the pulley are pressed properly,
properly. then reattach them if necessary.
4 Checking the clutch The clutch does not operate Execute U032 (main unit), U243 (dual scan
properly. DP) to check the clutch operation. If the
clutch does not operate properly, reattach it
and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace the individual clutch or the unit
containing the clutch.
5 Checking the motor The motor does not operate Execute U030 (main unit), U240 (finisher) or
properly. U243 (DP) to check the motor operation. If
the motor does not operate normally, replace
it.
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor

1 Checking the actuator and the The actuator or the return If the actuator is caught or came off, reattach
recovery spring spring does not operate the actuator or recovery spring.
correctly.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. If the sensor surface is dirty with paper dust,
etc., clean it.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Check the sensor operation by executing
correctly. U031 (main unit), U241 (finishers) or U244
(document processor). If the sensor does not
operate correctly, clean and reattach it, then
reinsert the connector. If not resolved,
replace the sensor.
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper leading The leading edge margin is If there is no image margin at the paper
edge margin not enough. leading edge, execute U034 to adjust the
leading edge timing and then U403 to adjust
the leading edge margin.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misdetected. Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides paper width guides along with the paper size
to properly detect the paper size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not properly If the media type setting does not match the
set. actual paper thickness, set the paper weight
at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Common
Settings] > [Original/Paper Settings] >
[Media Type Settings].
7-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity

1 Checking the ground The static electricity When the main unit is installed in the low
accumulates. humidity environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates on the
conveying guide during the continuous
printing,
check if the discharge sheet in the exit
section and the metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded securely. Reattach
them if necessary.
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)

1 Checking the paper storage Papers have been stored in Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
place the improper place.
2 Setting the cassette heater The paper is damp. Turn the cassette heater switch on and set
U327 to [On].
7-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Paper misfeed detection

(2-1)Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and
Paper jam.
1. Open right cover 1 and
displays the paper misfeed message on the operation panel. To remove paper
remove the paper.
2. Open cassette 1.
3. Remove the paper.
To remove paper which is difficult
misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the paper conveying unit or JAM
to get access to, the cassette
can be removed.
4. Set the cassette
paper conveying cover. and close the cover.
The positions and the corrective actions are displayed on the touch panel 1/8
when a paper jam has occurred.
L M
Q
K H
O H N N
P P N N
P P G
F
A
I
B
E C
J
D
(A) Misfeed in the cassette 1

(B) Misfeed in the cassette 2
(C) Misfeed in the cassette 3 (500 sheets × 2 / 1,500 sheets × 2) (option)
(D) Misfeed in the cassette 4 (500 sheets × 2) (option)
(E) Misfeed in the cassette 4 (1,500 sheets × 2) (option)
(F) Misfeed in the MP tray
(G) Misfeed in the duplex unit
(H) Misfeed in the inner tray or fuser section
(I) Misfeed in the right cover 2
(J) Misfeed in the right cover 3 (option)
(K) Misfeed in the BRidge (option)
(L) Misfeed in the the mail box (option)
(M) Misfeed in the document processor (option)
(N) Misfeed in the 1,000 sheets finisher (option)
(O) Misfeed in the 3,000 sheets finisher (Inner) (option)
(P) Misfeed in the 3,000 sheets finisher (Tray A) (option)
(Q) Misfeed in the 3,000 sheets finisher (Tray B) (option)
7-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Paper misfeed detection component
31
Document processor
32
33
34
20 19
35
21
36 23
37
22
Mail box
31
9
27
26 8
28 25 24 7
30
29
10
3000-sheet 6
1
Document finisher
3
2
11
12 13
17
500-sheet×2 15
Paper feeder 14 18
16
3000-sheet
Paper feeder
7-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Sensor position
Main unit
1 Paper sensor 1 2 Paper sensor 2 3 Conveying sensor 1
4 Conveying sensor 2 5 MP Paper sensor 6 Registration sensor
7 Exit sensor 8 Paper full sensor 9 JOB paper full sensor
10 DU sensor
2x500-sheet Paper feeder
11 PF paper sensor 1 12 PF paper sensor 2 13 PF conveying sensor
3000-sheet Paper feeder
14 PF paper sensor 1 15 PF paper sensor 2 16 PF conveying sensor 1
17 PF conveying sensor 2 18 PF conveying sensor 3
Document processor
19 DP original sensor 20 DP feed sensor 21 DP registration sensor
22 DP timing sensor 23 DP feed-shift sensor
Bridge unit + Finisher + Mail box
24 BR conveying sensor 1 25 BR conveying sensor 2 26 DF paper entry sensor
27 DF sub exit sensor 28 DF drum sensor 29 DF middle sensor
30 DF Main tray sensor 31 MB exit sensor 32 Tray full switch 1
33 Tray full switch 2 34 Tray full switch 3 35 Tray full switch 4
36 Tray full switch 5 37 Tray full switch 6
7-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
JAM code contents

Code Contents Conditions Jam
location*
0000 Initial jam The power is turned on when a sensor in the conveying system -
is on.
0100 Secondary paper feed request time Secondary paper feed request given by the controller is B
out unreachable.
0101 Waiting for process package to be Process package won’t be ready. -
ready
0104 Waiting for conveying package to be Conveying package won’t be ready. -
ready
0105 Drive prevention jam A drive does not stop. -
0106 Paper feeding request for duplex Paper feeding request for duplex printing given by the controller E
printing time out is unreachable.
0107 Waiting for fuser package to be Fuser package won’t be ready. -
ready
0110 Right cover 1 open The right cover 1 is opened during printing. -
0111 Front cover open The front cover is opened during printing. -
0113 Right cover 2 open The Right cover 2 is opened during printing. -
0114 BR conveying unit open BR conveying unit is opened during printing. -
0210 Right cover 3 open The right cover 3is opened during printing. -
0300 Ejection uncompleted An ejection-completed error has occurred. -
0501 No paper feed from cassette 1 The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from A
cassette 1.
0502 No paper feed from cassette 2 Feed sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette B
2 (Retry 1 times).
0503 No paper feed from cassette 3 Feed sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette C
3 (Retry 1 times).
0504 No paper feed from cassette 4 PF feed sensor does not turn on during paper feed from D
cassette 4 (Retry 1 times).
0508 No paper feed from duplex section The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from G
the duplex section.
0509 No paper feed from MP tray The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from F
the MP tray.
0511 Multiple sheets in cassette 1 The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from H
cassette 1.
0512 Multiple sheets in cassette 2 Feed sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette B
2.
0513 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 Feed sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette B
3.
0514 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 PF feed sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette D
4.
0519 Multiple sheets in MP tray The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from H
theMP tray.
0523 No paper feed from cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from E
cassette 3 (Bulk paper feeder).
0524 No paper feed from cassette 4 PF feed sensor2 does not turn on during paper feed from D
0533 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from C
0534 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 PF feed sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from E
*: Refer to “(2)Paper misfeed detection componen” (see page 7-54).
7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]

location*
1503 Feed sensor 1 non arrival jam Feed sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette B
3.
1504 Feed sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette B
4.
1513 Feed sensor 1 stay jam Feed sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette B
3.
1514 Feed sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette B
4.
1704 Feed sensor 2 non arrival jam Feed sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette D
4.
1714 Feed sensor 2 stay jam Feed sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette B
4.
2603 PF feed sensor 1 non arrival jam PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from C
2604 PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from E
2613 PF feed sensor 1 stay jam PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from B
2614 PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from B
2704 PF feed sensor 2 non arrival jam PF conveying sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from E
2714 PF feed sensor 2 stay jam PF conveying sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from E
4002 Registration sensor non arrival jam The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from B
cassette 2.
4003 The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from B
cassette 3.
4004 The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from B
cassette 4.
4012 Registration sensor stay jam The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper A
from the cassette 2.
4013 The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper A
4014 The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper A
4201 Exit sensor non arrival jam The exit sensor does not turn on during paper feed from H
cassette 1.
4202 The exit sensor does not turn on during paper feed from H
cassette 2.
cassette 3.
cassette 4.
4208 The exit sensor does not turn on during paper feed from duplex G
section.
4209 The exit sensor does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. H
7-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]

location*
4211 Exit sensor stay jam The exit sensor does not turn off during paper feed from H
cassette 1.
4212 The exit sensor does not turn off during paper feed from H
cassette 2.
cassette 3.
cassette 4.
4218 The exit sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the H
duplex section.
4219 The exit sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the MP H
tray.
4301 DU sensor non arrival jam DU sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. G
4302 DU sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. G
4309 DU sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray. G
4901 BR conveying sensor 1 non arrival BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from H
jam cassette 1.
4902 BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from H
cassette 2.
cassette 3.
cassette 4.
duplex section.
the MP tray.
4911 BR conveying sensor 1 stay jam BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from H
cassette 1.
4912 BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from H
cassette 2.
cassette 3.
cassette 4.
duplex section.
the MP tray.
7-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]

location*
5001 BR conveying sensor 2 non arrival BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from H
jam cassette 1.
cassette 2.
cassette 3.
cassette 4.
the duplex section.
theMP tray.
5011 BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from K
cassette 1.
5012 BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from K
cassette 2.
cassette 3.
cassette 4.
duplex section.
the MP tray.
6000 DF paper entry error DF paper entry sensor turns on before the eject signal is output -
from the machine (3000-sheet finisher).
6001 DF paper entry sensor turns on before the eject signal is output -
from the machine (1000-sheet finisher).
6020 DF front cover open DF front upper cover is opened during operation (3000-sheet -
finisher).
6021 DF front cover is opened during operation (1000-sheet finisher). -
6041 DF top cover open DF top cover is opened during operation (1000-sheet finisher). -
6060 MB cover open MB cover is opened during operation (3000-sheet finisher). -
6100 DF paper entry sensor non arrival DF paper entry sensor does not turned on even if a specified K
jam time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received
(3000-sheet finisher).
6101 DF paper entry sensor does not turned on even if a specified K
time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received
6110 DF paper entry sensor stay jam DF paper entry sensor does not turned off within specified time N
of its turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6111 DF paper entry sensor does not turned off within specified time N
of its turning on (1000-sheet finisher).
6200 DF sub Exit sensor non arrival jam DF sub Exit sensor does not turn on within specified time of DF N
paper entry sensor turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6210 DF sub Exit sensor stay jam DF sub Exit sensor does not turned off within specified time of its N
turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6300 DF middle Exit sensor non arrival DF middle Exit sensor does not turn on within specified time of N
jam DF paper entry sensor turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6301 DF middle Exit sensor does not turn on within specified time of N
DF paper entry sensor turning on (1000-sheet finisher).
7-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]

location*
6310 DF middle Exit sensor stay jam DF middle Exit sensor is not turned off within specified time of its N
6311 DF middle Exit sensor is not turned off within specified time of its N
6400 DF tray upper surface sensor non DF tray upper surface sensor does not turn on within specified N
arrival jam time of DF eject paper sensor turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6401 DF tray upper surface sensor does not turn on within specified N
time of DF eject paper sensor turning on (1000-sheet finisher).
6410 DF tray upper surface sensor stay DF eject paper sensor s not turned off within specified time of N
jam DF tray upper surface sensor turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6411 DF eject paper sensor is not turned off within specified time of N
DF tray upper surface sensor turning on (1000-sheet finisher).
6500 DF eject paper sensor non arrival DF eject paper sensor does not turn on within specified time of N
jam DF middle Exit sensor turning on.
6510 DF eject paper sensor stay jam DF eject paper sensor is not turned off since the bundle N
discharge starts (3000-sheet finisher).
6511 DF eject paper sensor is not turned off since the bundle N
discharge starts (1000-sheet finisher).
6600 DF drum sensor non arrival jam DF drum sensor does not turn on within specified time of DF N
paper entry sensor turning on (3000-sheet finisher).
6610 DF drum sensor stay jam DF drum sensor is not turned off within specified time of its N
6710 DF drum sensor stay jam during The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific P
paper conveying into the BF unit time since it turned on when conveying the paper to the folding
unit (3000-sheet finisher).
6810 DF side registration sensor 1 stay DF side registration sensor 1 is not turned off within specified N
jam time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 (3000-sheet
finisher).
6811 DF side registration sensor 1 s not turned off within specified N
time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 (1000-sheet
finisher).
6910 DF side registration sensor 2 stay DF side registration sensor 2 is not turned off within specified N
jam time after driving the DF side registration motor 2 (3000-sheet
finisher).
6911 DF side registration sensor 2 is not turned off within specified N
time after driving the DF side registration motor 2 (1000-sheet
finisher).
7000 DF staple operation error DF staple sensor is not turned on within specified time after N
driving the DF staple motor (3000-sheet finisher).
7001 DF staple sensor is not turned on within specified time after N
driving the DF staple motor (1000-sheet finisher).
7100 BF paper entry sensor non- The BF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the P
arrival jam specific time since the BF vertical conveying sensor turned on
7110 BF paper entry sensor stay jam The BF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the P
specific time since the BF vertical conveying sensor turned on
7200 BF eject sensor non-arrival jam The BF eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific P
time since the center fold operation started (3000-sheet
finisher).
7210 BF eject sensor stay jam The BF eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific P
time since it turned on during the center fold operation (3000-
sheet finisher).
7-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]

location*
7300 BF eject sensor non-arrival jam The BF eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific P
at tri-folding time since starting the tri-fold operation (3000-sheet finisher).
7310 BF eject sensor stay jam at tri- The BF eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific P
folding time since it turned on during the tri-fold operation (3000-sheet
finisher).
7400 Upper BF side registration jam BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the P
specific time since the upper BF side registration guide shifted
toward the sensor (3000-sheet finisher).
7500 Lower BF side registration jam BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the P
specific time since the lower BF side registration guide shifted
toward the sensor (3000-sheet finisher).
7600 BF staple jam The BF staple home position cannot be detected after activating P
the BF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up was detected during
the BF staple motor operation (3000-sheet finisher).
7700 BF vertical conveying sensor The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing P
non-arrival jam the specific time since the eject signal from the main unit was
received (3000-sheet finisher).
7710 BF vertical conveying sensor The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing P
stay jam the specific time since it turned on (3000-sheet finisher).
7800 MB Exit sensor non arrival jam MB Exit sensor is not turned on even if a specified time has L
elapsed after the machine eject signal was received (3000-sheet
finisher).
7810 MB Exit sensor stay jam MB Exit sensor is not turned off within specified time of its L
7900 Middle paddle error jam DF paddle sensor is not turned on within specified time after N
driving the DF middle motor (3000-sheet finisher).
7901 DF paddle sensor s not turned on within specified time after N
driving the DF middle motor (1000-sheet finisher).
7950 Paper interval error jam An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has occurred (3000- N
sheet finisher).
7951 An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has occurred (1000- N
sheet finisher).
9000 No paper feed from DP DP feed sensor does not turn on during original feed from DP M
(Retry 5 times).
9001 DP original conveying jam DP timing sensor turns off within the specified time since the M
sensor turns on.
9002 DP sensor stay jam Sensor in the conveying system is on since original feeding M
starts.
9004 DP original switchback jam During duplex switchback scanning, the DP registration sensor M
does not turn on within specified time of the DP timing sensor
turning off.
9005 No original feed jam 2 DP lift sensor 1 does not turn on within specified time of the lift M
plate rising.
9006 DP switchback jam 3 DP Exit sensor is not turned on within specified time since M
original switchback operation starts.
9007 DP switchback jam 4 DP Exit sensor is not turned off within specified time since M
original switchback operation starts.
9008 No original feed jam 3 DP backside timing sensor does not turn on within specified time M
of the paper feed starting.
9009 DP original conveying jam 2 Next feed original became the stand-by states of paper feed M
while reading the image.
7-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]

location*
9010 DP open The DP is opened during original feeding. M
Sensor in the conveying system is on when the power is turned
on or the cover is closed.
9011 DP top cover open The DP top cover is opened during original feeding. M
9020 Original skew feed jam DP skew sensor does not turn on within specified time of DP M
registration sensor turning on.
9110 DP paper feed sensor stay jam The DP paper feed sensor or DP registration sensor does not M
turn off within the specified time of the DP timing sensor turning
on.
9200 DP registration sensor non arrival The DP registration sensor does not turn on within the specified M
jam time of the DP paper feed sensor turning on.
9210 DP registration sensor stay jam DP registration sensor does not turn off within specified time of M
DP timing sensor turning on.
9300 DP backside timing sensor non DP backside timing sensor does not turn on within specified time M
arrival jam of DP registration sensor turning on.
9310 DP backside timing sensor stay jam DP backside timing sensor does not turn off within specified time M
of DP registration sensor turning off.
9400 DP timing sensor non arrival jam The DP timing sensor does not turn on within the specified time M
of the DP registration sensor turning on (Retry 5 times).
9410 DP timing sensor stay jam The DP timing sensor does not turned off within the specified M
time its turning on.
9500 DP switchback sensor non arrival DP switchback sensor does not turn on within specified time of M
jam DP timing sensor turning on.
9600 DP Exit sensor non arrival jam DP Exit sensor does not turn on within specified time of DP M
timing sensor turning on.
9610 DP Exit sensor stay jam DP Exit sensor does not turn off within specified time of DP M
timing sensor turning off.
7-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 - 3 Self Diagnostic
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Caution
Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power switch off
and unplug the machine from power.
Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric charge may remain
in the capacitors on the low voltage PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the mounted parts to protect you from
electric shock.
(1) Self diagnostic error codes

(1-1)Error codes list
Error code Contents

C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0060 Engine PWB communication error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0150 Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0350 Operation panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
C0500 Engine firmware drive lock
C0510 high voltage remote control error
C0520 Developer control error
C0530 Backup task error
C0540 Engine firmware unanticipated control detection 1
C0640 Hard Disk error
C0650 FAX image storage pair-check error
C0660 Hard Disk encryption key error
C0670 Hard Disk overwriting error
C0680 SSD error
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error
C0870 Image data transmission error
C0920 FAX file system error
C0950 FAX job stay error
C0980 24V power interruption detection
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 Lift motor 2 error
C1030 PF lift motor 1 error
7-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
C2000 Main motor steady state error
C2010 Main motor startup error
C2101 Developer motor steady state error
C2111 Developer motor start-up error
C2300 Fuser motor steady state error
C2310 Fuser motor start-up error
C2600 PF drive motor error
C2610 PF feed motor error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 LED error
C3210 CIS lamp error
C3300 CCD AGC error
C3310 CIS AGC error
C3500 Scanner AISC communication error
C3600 Scanner sequence error
C3800 AFE error
C3900 Backup memory reading/writing error (Engine PWB)
C4001 Polygon motor synchronization error
C4011 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 BD initialization error
C4201 BD initialization error
C4701 VIDEO ASIC device error 1
C5101 Main high voltage error
C6000 Broken fuser heater 1 error
C6020 Fuser thermopile error
C6030 Broken fuser thermopile error
C6050 Fuser thermopile low temperature error
C6200 Broken fuser heater 2 error
C6220 Fuser thermistor high temperature error
C6230 Broken fuser thermistor error
C6250 Fuser thermistor low temperature error
C6400 Zero-cross signal error
C6410 Uninstalled fuser unit
C6610 Pressure release error
C6650 Fuser thermopile EEPROM error
C7200 Broken inner thermistor error
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited
C7401 Developer unit type mismatch error
C7411 Drum unit type mismatch error
C7800 Broken outer thermistor error
7-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C7901 Drum unit EEPROM error
C7911 Developer unit EEPROM error
C8010 PH motor error 1
C8090 DF paddle motor error
C8100 DF exit release motor error
C8100 DF exit release motor error
C8110 DF shift motor 1 error
C8120 DF shift motor 2 error
C8130 DF shift release motor error
C8140 DF tray motor error 1
C8170 DF side registration motor 1 error 1
C8210 DF slide motor error
C8210 DF slide motor error
C8230 DF staple motor error 1
C8250 DF main tray error 4
C8260 DF middle motor HP detection error
C8260 DF middle motor HP detection error
C8410 PH slide motor error 1
C8430 Main program error / Punch unit communication error
C8430 Main program error / Punch unit communication error
C8500 Main program error / Mail Box communication error
C8510 MB conveying motor error 1
C8520 MB conveying motor error 2
C8800 Main program error / communication error between the engine and DF.
C8800 Main program error / communication error between the engine and DF.
C8990 Finisher setup error
C9000 DP communication error
7-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

C9040 DP lift motor ascend error
C9050 DP lift motor descend error
C9060 DP EEPROM error
C9070 DP - SHD communication error
C9080 LED failure detection
C9180 DP feed-shift motor error
C9500 Image processing circuit error (Scanner)
C9510 Image processing circuit error (DP)
(1-2)Content of Self Diagnostic
C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
operate properly. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
main power switch and the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.
C0060: Engine PWB communication error

Error was detected at the initial communication of the engine PWB

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the engine PWB connector (YC17)
connected. and reconnect it.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable
installed. model.
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
7-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn off the power switch and the main
2 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
the wire, FFC, the PWB is wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

2 Checking the MAC address The MAC address is incorrect. Replace the main PWB when the MAC
address is not indicated on the network
status page.
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the engine Turn off the power switch and the main
PWB does not operate power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
properly. main power switch and the power switch.
2 Reinstalling the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the engine PWB.
attached.
7-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. 1. Print Maintenance Report at U000
beforehand.
2. Replace the EEPROM on the engine
PWB. C0180 appears when turning the
power on. Execute U004 at that state.
3. Then, print Maintenance Report at U000.
Compare the setting values with
Maintenance Report printed before and
change the different values. (Target
maintenance mode: U051, U065, U067,
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
4. Check the output image and adjust the
image at U410, etc. if necessary.
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the engine Turn off the power switch and the main
PWB does not operate power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
properly. main power switch and the power switch.
2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021.
EEPROM on the engine PWB
is faulty.
beforehand.
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
C0170: Charger count error

1. Errors are detected in both backup memory of the engine PWB charge counter and main PWB charge counter.
2. Main PWB counter data and engine PWB counter date are faulty

1 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB and execute U004.
7-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]

beforehand.
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the power on.

1 Checking the machine serial The main PWB for the Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
No. of the main PWB different main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct
main PWB if the MAIN No. differs.
2 Checking the machine serial The EEPROM for the different Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
No. in the EEPROM on the main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct
engine PWB EEPROM on the engine PWB if the ENGINE
machine serial No. differs.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine serial No. differs at
U004, replace the main PWB and execute
U004.
4 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number on the engine
PWB is different at U004, reattach the
EEPROM. If not repaired, replace the
EEPROM on the engine PWB.
1. Print Maintenance Report at U000
beforehand.
U067, U100, U101, U161, etc.)
7-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0350: Operation panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial command was
transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.

1 Resetting the main power The firmware installed in the Turn off the power switch and the main
engine PWB does not operate power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
correctly. main power switch and the power switch.
• Operation panel 1 - Main PWB
3 Replacing operation panel Operation panel PWB 1 is Replace operation panel PWB 1.
PWB 1 faulty.
C0500: Engine firmware drive lock

Remarks: excluding the case of maintenance mode in process
The main motor drive continued 60 minutes or more during the engine steady control.

C0510: high voltage remote control error

Only the high voltage remote signal is on when the drum is stopped.

C0520: Developer control error

The developer bias on is detected when the main charger bias is off.

7-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0530: Backup task error

No operation 30s or more when monitoring the backup task operation

C0540: Engine firmware unanticipated control detection 1

The feed-shift solenoid turns on for the specified time


Detecting the main charge control failure when the drum is stopped


Event watch process is come to time-out at start-up.


Time-out of each function control is detected during warm-up.

7-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0640: Hard Disk error

Hard disk (HDD) cannot be accessed normally.

1 Releasing the partial operation The partial operation is Reset the partial operation at U906.
executed.
2 (In case of HDD non-standard When installing the 8GB HDD Replace with the correct 32GB SSD.
machine) replacing the SSD mistakenly, it tries to access
the HDD. At that time, the
error appears if the HDD is not
installed in the main units .
3 (When abnormal sounds The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the abnormal
occur) Replacing the HDD sounds are from the HDD.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the below SATA cable and
connected properly. The SATA connector of the wire. If there is no continuity,
cable or the wire is faulty. replace SATA cable or the wire.
• HDD - main PWB
5 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Format).
faulty.
C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) When installing the SSD used once, replace
already used in other unit is with the correct SSD.
installed.
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image storage) When installing the SSD used once, execute
already used in other unit is U671 [FAX Data CLEAR].
reused without executing
U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) Be sure to install the SSD to the connector
is not properly installed. on the main PWB.
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) Replace with the new SSD.
is faulty.
C0660: Hard Disk encryption key error

1. The encrypted password entered when replacing the main PWB is not correct.
2. Install SSD which is used in the other machine.

1 (When the issue occurs after The encryption key after Execute U004 when this issue occurs after
replacing the main PWB) replacing the main PWB is replacing the main PWB.
Executing U004 faulty.
2 Replacing the HDD (abnormal The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the abnormal
sounds) sounds are from the HDD.
• HDD - main PWB
7-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]

faulty.
C0670: Hard Disk overwriting error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Replacing the HDD (abnormal The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the abnormal
sounds) sounds are from the HDD.
• HDD - main PWB
faulty.
C0680: SSD error

SSD cannot be accessed or an error occurs when accessing SSD.

1 Checking the SSD (if lit after An SSD out of specification is Install the SSD matching the memory
replacing the SSD) installed. capacity specification.
2 Resetting the main power The SSD is faulty. Turn off the power switch and the main
power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Reinstalling the SSD The connection with the main Reinstall the SSD on the main PWB.
PWB is faulty.
4 Initializing the SSD The data stored in the SSD is Retrieve data stored in the SSD at U026 and
faulty. initialize the SSD at U024.
5 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Retrieve data stored in the SSD at U026 and
replace the SSD .
C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) is detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only when handling
the certain image data, check if the image
data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of the Acquire the job's log if the phenomenon can
certain file is faulty. be reproduced by specifying the job when
the error was detected.
7-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not Turn off the power switch and the main
connected properly. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
FAX PWB, and then turn on the main power
switch and the power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
faulty.
C0840: RTC error

<Check at the start up>
• Setting value of RTC has returned to the past.
• The power has not turned on more than 5 years.
• Setting value of RTC is older than 00:01 January 1st, 2000.
<Check regularly (each 5 minutes) after start up>
• Setting value of RTC has returned to the past which is older than the time previously checked. After detecting C0840,
reset the main power to go into disable function and [Time for Maintenance] is displayed.

1 Executing U906 The backup battery on the Execute U906 and reset the display
main PWB is faulty, and so, [Maintenance T]. After that, set the date and
the RTC settings are erased time (RTC) through System menu. (It is
after unplugging the power necessary to perform this process every time
cord. when unplug/plug the power cord.)
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty, or the The user call regarding C0840 is frequent
backup battery runs out. even if performing the previous treatment,
replace the main PWB.
C0870: Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

operate properly. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
7-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD is Execute U024 [SSD Format].
faulty.
C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

2 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
incorrect.
C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn off the power switch and the main
properly executed. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
properly activate.
C0980: 24V power interruption detection

24V power off signal is detected for 1s continuously.

• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. When the +24V generation from the low
PWB voltage PWB is not stable, and it lowers,
replace the low voltage PWB.
version.
7-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1010: Lift motor 1 error

Cassette 1 lift motor 1 over-current is detected 5 times continuously.
The lift sensor not turning on 5 times continuously when passing 15s after loading cassette 1.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate Repair or replace the lift plate when it does
properly. not move vertically.
• Lift motor 1 - Engine PWB
• Lift sensor 1 - Engine PWB
3 Checking lift motor 1 Lift motor 1 is not attached Reattach lift motor 1. If it does not operate
properly, or it is faulty. correctly, replace it.
4 Checking lift sensor 1 Lift sensor 1 is not attached Reattach lift sensor 1. If it does not operate
version.
C1020: Lift motor 2 error

Cassette 2 lift motor 2 over-current is detected 5 times continuously.
The lift sensor not turning on 5 times continuously when passing 15s after loading cassette 2.

• Lift motor 2 - Engine PWB
• Lift sensor 2 - Engine PWB
3 Checking lift motor 2 Lift motor 2 is not attached Reattach lift motor 2. If it does not operate
4 Checking lift sensor 2 Lift sensor 2 is not attached Reattach lift sensor 2. If it does not operate
version.
C1030: PF lift motor 1 error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
The PF lift sensor 1 on is not detected 5 times continuously when passing 15s after loading cassette 3.

7-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• PF lift motor 1 - PF PWB
• PF lift sensor 1 - PF PWB
3 Checking PF lift motor 1 PF lift motor 1 is not attached Reattach PF lift motor 1. If it does not
properly, or it is faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
4 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift sensor 1 is not attached Reattach PF lift sensor 1. If it does not
5 PF firmware upgrade The PF firmware is not the Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
latest version.
6 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.

The PF lift sensor 1 on is not detected 5 times continuously when passing 15s after loading cassette 4.

4 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift sensor 2 is not properly Reattach PF lift sensor 2. If it does not
attached, or it is faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
latest version.

Target: Large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
• The PF lift sensor 1 not turning on is detected 5 times continuously when passing 23s after loading cassette 3.
(detection time at the 2nd time and later: 2s)
• The lift over-current protection monitor signal is detected for 1s or more 5 times continuously during the motor
operation. (however, this is not detected for 1s when starting up PF lift motor 1)

7-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]

latest version.

• The PF lift sensor 2 not turning on is detected 5 times continuously when passing 23s after loading cassette 3.
(detection time at the 2nd time and later: 2s)
• The lift over-current protection monitor signal is detected for 1s or more 5 times continuously during the motor
operation. (however, this is not detected for 1s when starting up PF lift motor 2)

latest version.
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

The communication error was detected 10 times continuously.

1 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Clean the drawer connector terminal of the
properly installed. paper feeder and main unit and reinstall the
paper feeder.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the connection. Repair and clean the
connected properly or, the terminal. Insert the connector all the way. If
wire or drawer connector is there is no continuity or the drawer connector
faulty. is faulty, replace it.
version.
7-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error


1 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Clean the drawer connector terminal of the
properly installed. paper feeder and main unit and reinstall the
paper feeder.
version.
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 4 times continuously when writing.

version.
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 4 times continuously when writing.

version.
7-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2000: Main motor steady state error

The main motor steady state off is detected 1s continuously after becoming the steady state.

version.
• Main motor - Engine PWB
3 Checking drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 is faulty. Execute U030[Main] and check if the gear in
drive unit 1 rotates normally. If there is a load
in rotation, clean the gear and bushing and
apply grease. If not repaired, replace drive
unit 1.
4 Checking the main motor The main motor is not Reattach the main motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U030[Main]. If not operating normally,
faulty. replace it.
C2010: Main motor startup error

The main motor is not in the steady state within 3s after start-up.

version.
• Main motor - Engine PWB
3 Checking drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 is faulty. Execute U030[Main] and check if the gear in
drive unit 1 rotates normally. If there is a load
unit 1.
faulty. replace it.
C2101: Developer motor steady state error

Developer motor steady state off is detected 1s continuously after becoming the steady state.

version.
7-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 is not attached Execute U030[DLP] and check if the gear in
properly, or it is faulty. drive unit 1 rotates normally. If there is a load
unit 1.
4 Checking the developer motor The developer motor is not Reattach the developer motor and execute
properly attached, or it is U030[DLP]. If not operating normally, replace
faulty. it.
C2111: Developer motor start-up error

The developer motor is not in the steady state within 3s after start-up

version.
3 Checking drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 is not attached Execute U030[DLP] and check if the gear in
properly, or it is faulty. drive unit 1 rotates normally. If there is a load
unit 1.
4 Checking the developer motor The developer motor is not Reattach the developer motor and execute
properly attached, or it is U030[DLP]. If not operating normally, replace
faulty. it.
C2300: Fuser motor steady state error

The fuser motor steady state off is detected 1s continuously after becoming steady state.

version.
• Fuser motor - Engine PWB
3 Checking drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 is not attached Execute U030[Fuser] and check if the gear in
properly, or it is faulty. the drive unit 1 rotates normally. If there is a
load in rotation, clean the gear and bushing
and apply grease. If not repaired, replace
drive unit 1.
4 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor is not properly Reattach the fuser motor ad execute
attached, or it is faulty. U030[Fuser]. If not operating properly,
replace the fuser motor.
7-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2310: Fuser motor start-up error

The fuser motor is not in the steady state within 3s after start-up.

version.
• Fuser motor - Engine PWB
3 Checking drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 is not attached Execute U030[Fuser] and check if the gear in
properly, or it is faulty. the drive unit 1 rotates normally. If there is a
load in rotation, clean the gear and bushing
and apply grease. If not repaired, replace
drive unit 1.
4 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor is not properly Reattach the fuser motor ad execute
attached, or it is faulty. U030[Fuser]. If not operating properly,
replace the fuser motor.
C2600: PF drive motor error

An error signal was received for 2s continuously when the PF drive motor is driven.

• PF drive motor - PF PWB
version.
3 Checking the PF drive motor The PF drive motor is faulty. Replace the PF drive motor.
C2610: PF feed motor error

An error signal was received for 2s continuously when the PF feed motor is driven.

• PF feed motor - PF PWB
version.
3 Checking the PF feed motor The PF feed motor is not Reattach the PF feed motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U247 [LCF] > [Motor] > {On]. If not operating
faulty. properly, replace the PF feed motor.
7-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3100: Carriage error

The home position sensor is off and does not turn on when passing the specified time at initialization and it does not turn
on at retry once.

1 Unlocking the primary mirror The primary mirror unit is not Unlock the primary mirror unit.
unit unlocked.
2 Checking the lamp unit There is a load at the lamp Execute U073[Scanner Motor] and check the
operation unit slide motion. lamp unit operation. If there is an excess
load applied, clean the scanner wire,
scanner wire drum, scanner rail, etc.
3 Checking the scanner wires The scanner wire is dirty or Clean the scanner wires. If the wires come
comes off. off, reattach the scanner wires.
• Scanner motor - Engine PWB
• Home position sensor - Engine PWB
5 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor is not Reattach the scanner motor and adjust the
attached properly, or it is belt tension properly. Execute U073[Scanner
faulty. The belt tension is not Motor] and if it does not operate normally,
enough. replace the scanner motor.
6 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor. If it does
sensor not attached properly or faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
version.
C3200: LED error

The white reference data obtained by turning on the LED lamp is lower than the specified value.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not light. Execute U061 [CCD] and check if the LED
lamp turns on. If it does not turn on, replace
the LED unit and execute
U411[Table(ChartA)].
2 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminal and reconnect it. If
Or it is faulty. the FFC terminal is deformed or FFC wire is
broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
4 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and execute U411.
version.
7-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3210: CIS lamp error

The input data did not exceed threshold for 5s when lighting the CIS lamp.

1 Releasing the partial operation The partial operation is Reset the partial operation at U906.
executed.
2 Checking the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not light. Execute U061 [CIS] and check if the CIS
lamp turns on. If the CIS lamp does not turn
on, replace the DPCIS and execute U091,
U411.
3 Cleaning the CIS glass and The CIS glass or the CIS roller Clean the CIS glass and the CIS roller.
the CIS roller is dirty.
• DPSHD PWB - DP PWB
• DP PWB - Engine PWB
8 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.
C3300: CCD AGC error

The white reference data after adjustment is not within the target range

1 Cleaning the backside of the The white reference sheet is Clean the white reference sheet at the
contact glass dirty. backside of the contact glass.
2 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp is broken. Execute U061 [CCD] and check if the LED
lamp turns on. If it does not turn on, replace
the LED unit and execute
U411[Table(ChartA)].
3 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminal and reconnect it. If
Or it is faulty. the FFC terminal is deformed or FFC wire is
broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
version.
7-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3310: CIS AGC error

For internal count
The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

1 Releasing the partial operation The partial operation is Execute resetting the partial operation at
executed. U906.
2 Cleaning the CIS glass and The CIS glass or the CIS roller Clean the CIS glass and the CIS roller.
the CIS roller is dirty.
U411.
C3500: Scanner AISC communication error

Readback values are different 4 times continuously during communication between the scanner and ASIC

• Main PWB - Engine PWB
version.
C3600: Scanner sequence error

• The mail box buffer overflow is detected.
• The software sequence error is detected.

version.
7-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C3800: AFE error

When writing, writing data and reading data does not match 3 times continuously. There is no response from AFE for
100ms.

1 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminals of the following FFC
Or it is faulty. and reconnect them. If the FFC terminal is
deformed or broken, replace the FFC.
C3900: Backup memory reading/writing error (Engine PWB)

Read value and write value are different

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error

The polygon motor does not become steady state when passing 10s after starting the drive

• Polygon motor - Engine PWB
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it
does not rotate properly.
version.
7-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error

Steady state off is detected 1s continuously after the polygon motor is in the steady state

• Polygon motor - Engine PWB
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it
does not rotate properly.
version.
C4101: BD initialization error

BD is not detected within 1s after the polygon motor is in the steady state

2 Checking the LSU The APC PWB does not Reattach or replace the LSU.
operate normally.
version.
C4201: BD initialization error

The BD signal is not detected during the laser lighting.

2 Checking the LSU The APC PWB does not Reattach or replace the LSU.
operate normally.
version.
7-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4701: VIDEO ASIC device error 1

Communication with VIDEO ASIC has fails 10 times continuously. (After writing to VIDEO ASIC, read from same
address and the error occurred that the value does not match)

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn off the power switch and the main
engine is faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
version.
C5101: Main high voltage error

When measuring the rush-in current by changing the Vpp in 3 steps at the Vpp adjustment, the difference between zero
current value and the third step current value is 5 or less.

1 Checking the drum unit and The drum does not rotate Check if the drum is rotated manually. If not,
the developer unit normally with a excess load. replace the drum unit.
2 Checking the main charger Since foreign objects adhere Check the high voltage contact of the main
unit to the main charger high charger unit and clean it if foreign objects
voltage contact, it is deformed adhere. If deformed or damaged, replace the
or damaged, proper current main charger unit and execute U930.
does not flow.
4 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
faulty. replace it.
version.
C6000: Broken fuser heater 1 error

1. The fuser thermopile does not detect 100°C/212°F within 20s after starting warm-up
2. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the fuser thermopile does reach the edge ready temperature within 60s
after detecting 100°C/212°F.

1 Reinstalling the fuser unit There are foreign objects in Clean the drawer connector terminal of the
the drawer contact terminal of fuser unit. Check if the pin of the drawer
the fuser unit. connector is not bent, and replace the fuser
unit if it is bent. If it is normal, reinstall the
fuser unit so that the drawer connector is
securely connected.
7-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• Fuser heater 1 - Low voltage PWB
• Fuser thermostat - Fuser unit (Drawer
connector) - Engine PWB
• Fuser thermopile - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the fuser thermopile The fuser thermopile does not Replace the fuser thermopile.
detect temperature correctly.
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heater, fuser Replace the fuser unit.
thermistor or other is faulty.
5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB
version.
C6020: Fuser thermopile error

The fuser thermopile detects high temperature 1s continuously

PWB
version.
C6030: Broken fuser thermopile error

1. During warm-up, the fuser thermopile detected the abnormal outer temperature output value for 1s.
2. During warm-up, the fuser thermopile detected the abnormal target output value for 1s.

2 Replacing the fuser thermopile The fuser thermopile is faulty. Replace the fuser thermopile.
version.
7-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6050: Fuser thermopile low temperature error

The fuser thermopile detected 100°C/212°F or less 1s continuously during printing

• Fuser heaters - Low voltage PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heater, fuser Replace the fuser unit.
PWB
version.
C6200: Broken fuser heater 2 error

1. The fuser thermistor does not detect 35°C/95°F within 30s after starting warm-up
2. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the fuser thermistor does reach the edge ready temperature within 60s
after detecting 100°C/212°F.

securely connected.
• Fuser heater 2 - Low voltage PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heater 2, fuser Replace the fuser unit.
PWB
version.
7-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6220: Fuser thermistor high temperature error

The fuser thermistor detected high temperature 1s continuously

securely connected.
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor does not Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature.
PWB
version.
C6230: Broken fuser thermistor error

The fuser thermistor detects 10°C/50°F or more while the fuser thermopile detects 100°C/212°F or more during war-up.

securely connected.
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.
PWB
version.
7-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6250: Fuser thermistor low temperature error

The fuser thermistor detected 60 degree C or less 1s continuously during printing

securely connected.
PWB
version.
C6400: Zero-cross signal error

The zero-cross signal did not enter 3s continuously during the fuser heater control.

• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
PWB
version.
C6410: Uninstalled fuser unit

The fuser pressure release sensor signal was not detected and the fuser thermistor AD value was 252 or more for 3s
continuously.

securely connected.
7-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• Fuser thermistor - Fuser unit (Drawer
• Fuser press-release motor - Engine PWB
PWB
version.
C6610: Pressure release error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor changing from on to off is not detected when passing 10s after starting the fuser
pressure decrease.
2. The fuser pressure release sensor changing from off to on is not detected when passing 10s after starting the fuser
pressure increase.

securely connected.
• Fuser press-release motor - Engine PWB
• Fuser press-release sensor - Fuser unit
(Drawer connector) - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty at the Replace the fuser unit.
fuser pressure release
mechanism or the fuser
pressure release sensor .
C6650: Fuser thermopile EEPROM error

1. Access to the thermopile EEPROM is not available.
2. Data in the thermopile EEPROM is abnormal.

detect normal temperature.
version.
7-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C7200: Broken inner thermistor error

The input sampling value of the sensor is at the reference value or more.

1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit so that the connector
properly installed. connects securely.
• Developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the developer unit The sensor on the developer Replace the developer unit.
PWB is faulty.
version.
5 Replacing the developer relay The developer relay PWB is Replace the developer relay PWB.
PWB faulty.
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited

The sensor input sampling value is at the reference value or less

3 Replacing the developer unit The sensor on the developer Replace the developer unit.
PWB is faulty.
version.
PWB faulty.
C7401: Developer unit type mismatch error

There is mismatch between the main unit and developer unit.

1 Checking the developer unit The different type of the Install the correct developer unit.
developer unit is installed.
7-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]

version.
PWB faulty.
C7411: Drum unit type mismatch error

There is mismatch between the main unit and drum unit.

1 Checking the drum unit and The different drum unit is Install the proper drum unit.
the developer unit installed.
2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinsert the drum unit connector for secure
installed. connection.
• Drum relay PWB - Engine PWB
version.
5 Replacing the drum relay The drum relay PWB is faulty. Replace the drum relay PWB.
PWB
C7800: Broken outer thermistor error

The input sampling value of the sensor is at the reference value or more.

• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
version.
7-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The sensor input sampling value is at the reference value or less

• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
version.
C7901: Drum unit EEPROM error

1. Five times consecutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing.
2. Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times.
3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn off the power switch and the main
EEPROM in the drum unit is power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
faulty. main power switch and the power switch.
2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinsert the drum unit connector for secure
installed. connection.
• Drum relay PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in the drum unit Replace the drum unit.
is faulty.
version.
6 Replacing the drum relay The drum relay PWB is faulty. Replace the drum relay PWB.
PWB
C7911: Developer unit EEPROM error

1. Five times consecutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing.
2. Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times.
3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn off the power switch and the main
EEPROM in the developer unit power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
is faulty. main power switch and the power switch.
7-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Replacing the developer unit The EEPROM in the Replace the developer unit.
developer unit is faulty.
version.
PWB faulty.
C8010: PH motor error 1

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher + Punch unit, 1,000-sheet finisher + Punch unit
1. The PH home position sensor does not turn on even 200ms passed when the PH motor drives.
2. The pulse plate does not count the specified pulse even if passing 300ms after the punch operation is started.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch unit does not move manually,
assembled properly. repair the position where restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the PH cam drive The PH cam drive parts are Reattach the PH cam drive parts. If not
parts not attached properly, or faulty. repaired, replace them.
• PH motor - PH PWB
• PH home position sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
4 Checking the PH motor The PH motor is not attached Reattach the PH motor and execute U240
properly, or it is faulty. [Motor] > [Punch]. If it does not operate
correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the PH home The PH home position sensor Reattach the PH home position sensor and
position sensor is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Punch] > [Punch HP]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the PH firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the PH PWB The PH PWB is faulty. Replace the PH PWB.
8 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

The positioning alignment of the home position is not completed within 3s when initializing or waiting the home position.

operation.
7-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• PH PWB - DF PWB
version. version.

The home position detection does not turn off within 50ms when initializing the home position.

operation.
• PH PWB - DF PWB
version. version.
C8090: DF paddle motor error

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher
1. The DF paddle sensor does not turn on when passing 1s while the DF paddle motor drives.
2. The DF paddle sensor does not turn off when passing 1s from the on condition.

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive parts are Reattach the DF paddle drive parts. If not
parts not properly attached, or it is repaired, replace them.
faulty.
• DF paddle motor - DF PWB
• DF paddle sensor - DF PWB
7-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the DF paddle motor The DF paddle motor is not Reattach the DF paddle motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Beat]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is not Reattach the DF paddle sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Lead Paddle]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
C8100: DF exit release motor error

Target: 1,000-sheet finisher
1. The DF paper bundle eject switch does not turn on after passing 1s when the DF eject release motor drives.
2. The DF paper bundle eject switch does not turn off when driving for 1s from the on condition.

1 Checking the DF bundle exit The exit guide in the DF If the eject guide, etc., of the DF bundle eject
unit bundle exit unit is deformed. unit is deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit unit drive Reattach the DF bundle exit unit drive parts.
unit drive parts parts are not properly If not repaired, replace them.
attached, or they are faulty.
• DF exit release motor - DF PWB
• DF bundle exit switch - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF exit release The DF exit release motor is Reattach the DF exit release motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject Unlock(HP)]. If
faulty. it does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit switch is Reattach the DF bundle exit switch and
switch not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Bundle Eject HP].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
C8100: DF exit release motor error

1. The DF paper bundle eject sensor does not turn on after passing 1s when the DF eject release motor drives.
2. The DF paper bundle eject sensor does not turn off when driving for 1s from the on condition.

1 Checking the DF bundle exit The exit guide in the DF If the eject guide, etc., of the DF bundle eject
unit bundle exit unit is deformed. unit is deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit unit drive Reattach the DF bundle exit unit drive parts.
unit drive parts parts are not properly If not repaired, replace them.
• DF exit release motor - DF PWB
• DF bundle exit sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF exit release The DF exit release motor is Reattach the DF exit release motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject Unlock(HP)]. If
faulty. it does not operate correctly, replace it.
7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit sensor is Reattach the DF bundle exit sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Bundle Eject HP].
C8110: DF shift motor 1 error

1. DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on when passing 3s while DF shift motor 1 drives.
2. DF shift sensor 1 does not turn off when passing 3s while DF shift motor 1 drives.

1 Checking the front shift guide The front shift guide is not If the front shift guide does not move
assembled properly. manually, repair the position where restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the front shift guide The front shift guide drive Reattach the front shift guide drive parts. If
drive parts parts are not properly not repaired, replace them.
• DF shift motor 1 - DF PWB
• DF shift sensor 1 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF shift motor 1 DF shift motor 1 is not Reattach DF shift motor 1 and execute U240
attached properly, or it is [Motor] > [Sort Test]. If it does not operate
5 Checking DF shift sensor 1 DF shift sensor 1 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 1 and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Shift Front HP]. If it does
C8120: DF shift motor 2 error

1. DF shift sensor 2 does not turn on when passing 3s while DF shift motor 2 drives.
2. DF shift sensor 2 does not turn off when passing 3s while DF shift motor 2 drives.

1 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not move
the operation.
2 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide drive parts Reattach the rear shift guide drive parts. If
drive parts are not properly attached, or not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
• DF shift motor 2 - DF PWB
• DF shift sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF shift motor 2 DF shift motor 2 is not Reattach DF shift motor 2 and execute U240
attached properly, or it is [Motor] > [Sort Test]. If it does not operate
7-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Checking DF shift sensor 2 DF shift sensor 2 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 2 and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Shift Tail HP]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
C8130: DF shift release motor error

1. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on when driving the DF shift release motor for 3s in the direction of HP
detection.
2. The DF shift release sensor does not turn off when driving the DF shift release motor for 3s in the direction of HP
detection off.

1 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not move
the operation.
2 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide drive parts Reattach the rear shift guide drive parts. If
drive parts are not properly attached, or not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
• DF shift release motor - DF PWB
• DF shift release sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF shift release The DF shift release motor is Reattach the DF shift release motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Sort Test]. If it does
5 Checking the DF shift release The DF shift release sensor is Reattach the DF shift release sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Shift Unlock HP].
C8140: DF tray motor error 1

The DF tray sensor or DF tray upper level sensor turning on is not detected when passing 30s while the DF tray is
ascending.

1 Checking the DF tray The DF tray is not assembled If the DF tray does not move up and down
properly. manually, repair the position where restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the DF tray drive The DF tray drive parts are not Reattach the DF tray drive parts. If not
parts properly attached, or they are repaired, replace them.
faulty.
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
• DF tray sensor 1 - DF PWB
• DF tray upper surface sensor 1 - DF PWB
7-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is not Reattach the DF tray motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If it does not operate
5 Checking DF tray sensor 1 DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1 and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Tray U-Limit]. If it does not
6 Checking DF tray upper side DF tray upper surface sensor Reattach DF tray upper surface sensor 1, 2
sensors 1, 2 1, 2 is not attached properly, and execute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Top]. If it
or it is faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.

The DF tray sensor or DF tray upper level sensor turning on is not detected when passing 30s while the DF main tray is
ascending.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not move up and
assembled properly. down manually, repair the position where
restricts the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive parts Reattach the DF main tray drive parts. If not
drive parts are not properly attached, or repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
5 Checking DF tray sensors 1, 2 DF tray sensor 1, 2 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, 2 and execute

The DF tray sensor or DF tray upper level sensor turning on to off is not detected when passing 30s while the DF main
tray is descending.

the operation.
7-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]

faulty.

The DF tray sensor or DF tray upper level sensor turning on to off is not detected when passing 30s while the DF tray is
descending.

they are faulty.
5 Checking DF tray sensors 1, 2 DF tray sensor 1, 2 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, 2 and execute
7-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The DF tray sensor 3 on is not detected when passing 30s at the DF tray descending.

the operation.
faulty.
• DF tray sensor 3 -DF PWB
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Tray L-Limit]. If it does not

The DF tray sensor 4 on is not detected when passing 60s at the DF main tray descending.

they are faulty.
• DF tray sensor 4 -DF PWB
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Tray L-Limit]. If it does not
7-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error 1

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the front DF The DF front adjusting plate is If the front DF adjusting plate does not move
adjusting plate not assembled correctly. manually, repair the position where there is
stuck.
2 Checking the DF front The DF front adjusting plate Reattach the DF front adjusting plate drive
adjusting plate drive units drive parts are not attached parts. If not resolved, replace the parts.
properly, or they are faulty.
• DF side registration motor 1 - DF PWB
• DF side registration sensor 1 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Reattach DF side registration motor 1 and
motor 1 not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A3)] or
faulty. [Width Test(LD)]. If it does not operate
5 Checking DF side registration DF side registration sensor 1 Reattach DF side registration sensor 1, then
sensor 1 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP].
faulty. If DF side registration sensor 1 does not
operate properly, replace it.


stuck.
7-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J6810/J6811/J6812 (Front DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

stuck.
3 Replacing the front DF side The front DF side registration Replace the front DF side registration guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are faulty. drive parts.

J6810/J6811/J6812 (Front DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

stuck.
3 Replacing the front DF side The front DF side registration Replace the front DF side registration guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are faulty. drive parts.
7-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]



1 Checking the rear DF The DF rear adjusting plate is If the rear DF adjusting plate does not move
stuck.
2 Checking the DF rear The DF rear adjusting plate Reattach the DF rear adjusting plate drive
sensor 2 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If
faulty. DF side registration sensor 2 does not


stuck.
sensor 2 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If
faulty. DF side registration sensor 2 does not
7-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]


J6910/J6911/J6912 (Rear DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

stuck.
5 Checking DF side registration DF width adjustment sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2, then
sensor 2 is not installed properly. Or, it execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If
is faulty. DF side registration sensor 2 does not

J6910/J6911/J6912 (Rear DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

stuck.
5 Checking DF side registration DF width adjustment sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2, then
sensor 2 is not installed properly. Or, it execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If
is faulty. DF side registration sensor 2 does not
7-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C8210: DF slide motor error

The home position is not be detected after passing 3s when replacing to the home position at the initial operation.

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit does not move front and
assembled properly. back manually, repair the position where
2 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit drive parts Reattach the DF staple unit drive parts. If not
they are faulty.
• DF slide motor - DF PWB
• DF slide sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF slide motor The DF slide motor is not Reattach the DF slide motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Staple Move]. If it does not
5 Checking the DF slide sensor The DF slide sensor is not Reattach the DF slide sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Staple HP]. If it does not
C8210: DF slide motor error

The home position is not be detected after passing 3s when replacing to the home position at the initial operation.

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit does not move front and
assembled properly. back manually, repair the position where
2 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit drive parts Reattach the DF staple unit drive parts. If not
they are faulty.
• DF slide motor - DF PWB
• DF slide sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF slide motor The DF slide motor is not Reattach the DF slide motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Staple Move]. If it does not
5 Checking the DF slide sensor The DF slide sensor is not Reattach the DF slide sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Staple HP]. If it does not
7-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8230: DF staple motor error 1

DF staple jam is detected twice continuously.

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple can't be done without paper
assembled properly. jam, repair the position where restricts the
operation.
• DF staple unit - DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Staple]. If the DF
staple motor does not operate properly,
replace the DF staple unit.

DF staple jam is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of jam detection for the second time: after the DF staple
motor (staple unit) is started, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

operation.

DF staple jam is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of jam detection for the second time: during the DF staple
motor (staple unit) operation, the lock detection signal level is 1V or more for 500ms continuously.)

operation.
7-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8250: DF main tray error 4

The lock detection signal level is 0.7V or less for 10s continuously during the DF tray motor motion.

the operation.
faulty.
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

Home position is not detected when passing 1s or more after driving the DF middle motor.

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive parts are Reattach or replace the DF paddle drive
parts not properly attached, or it is parts.
faulty.
• DF middle motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor is not Reattach the DF middle motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Middle(H)]. If it does not
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

Home position is not detected when passing 1s or more after driving the DF middle motor.

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive parts are Reattach or replace the DF paddle drive
parts not properly attached, or it is parts.
faulty.
7-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• DF middle motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor is not Reattach the DF middle motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Middle(H)]. If it does not
C8410: PH slide motor error 1

Target: 1,000-sheet finisher + Punch unit
The PH slide sensor does not turn on after shifting 30mm when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section does not move
assembled properly. front and back manually, repair the position
where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the PH drive parts The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts. If not repaired,
attached properly, or faulty. replace them.
• PH slide motor - PH PWB
• PH slide sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
4 Checking the PH slide motor The PH slide motor is not Reattach the PH slide motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Punch Move]. If it does not
5 Checking the PH slide sensor The PH slide sensor is not Reattach the PH slide sensor. If it does not
attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.

The PH slide sensor does not turn on after shifting 30mm when relocating to the home position.

7-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• PH slide sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
5 Checking the PH slide sensor The PH slide sensor is not Reattach the PH slide sensor. If it does not
attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.

The paper edge cannot be detected even if shifting 30mm when detecting the paper edge.

• PH paper edge sensor 1 - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
5 Checking the PH paper edge PH paper edge sensor 1 or 2 Reattach the sensor and execute U241 [] >
sensors 1, 2 is not attached properly, or it is []. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.

The paper edge cannot be detected even if shifting 30mm when detecting the paper edge.

7-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• PH PWB - DF PWB
5 Checking the PH paper edge PH paper edge sensor 1 or 2 Reattach the sensor and execute U241 [] >
sensors 1, 2 is not attached properly, or it is []. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error

1. The punch unit main program is faulty at power-up.
2. Communication is unavailable after establishing the connection with the punch unit.

1 Resetting the main power The PWB malfunctions. Turn off the power switch and the main
• PH PWB - DF PWB
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error

1. The punch unit main program is faulty at power-up.
2. Communication is unavailable after establishing the connection with the punch unit.

• PH PWB - DF PWB
7-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher + Mail box
1. The mail box main program is faulty at power-up.
2. Communication is unavailable after establishing the connection with the mail box.

• MT PWB - DF PWB
3 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.
C8510: MB conveying motor error 1

MT home position sensor on is not detected for 5s continuously at the initial operation.

1 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller is not If the MT conveying roller is not rotated
roller assembled properly. manually, repair the part that restricts the
operation.
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB
• MT home position sensor - MT PWB
3 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying motor is Reattach the MT conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If it does
4 Checking the MT home The MT home position sensor Reattach the sensor and execute U241 [] >
position sensor is not attached properly, or it is []. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
C8520: MB conveying motor error 2

MT home position sensor on is not detected for 1s continuously at the standby operation.

1 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller is not If the MT conveying roller is not rotated
roller assembled properly. manually, repair the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller drive Reattach the MT conveying roller drive parts.
roller drive parts parts are not properly
3 Replacing the MT conveying The MT conveying roller drive Replace the MT conveying roller drive parts.
roller drive parts parts are faulty.
7-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• MT conveying motor - MT PWB
• MT home position sensor - MT PWB
5 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying motor is Reattach the MT conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If it does
6 Checking the MT home The MT home position sensor Reattach the sensor and execute U241 [] >
position sensor is not attached properly, or it is []. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
C8800: Main program error / communication error between the engine and DF.
1. The main program is faulty at power-up.
2. Communication is unavailable after establishing the connection with the finisher.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start up Turn off the power switch and the main
properly. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DF firmware to the latest
version. version.
• DF PWB - Engine PWB
version.
C8800: Main program error / communication error between the engine and DF.
1. The main program is faulty at power-up.
2. Communication is unavailable after establishing the connection with the finisher.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start up Turn off the power switch and the main
properly. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DF firmware to the latest
version. version.
7-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]

version.
C8990: Finisher setup error

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher + Bridge unit, 1,000-sheet finisher + Bridge unit
1. The relay conveying unit is not installed while the finisher is connected.
2. The relay conveying unit is installed while the finisher is not connected.

1 Reinstalling the bridge unit The bridge unit is not Clean the connecting terminal of the bridge
connected properly. unit and reconnect it to the main unit.
• BR PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
version.
C9000: DP communication error

Target: Document processor

1 Firmware upgrade The main unit firmware and Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
the document processor
firmware mismatch.
7-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9040: DP lift motor ascend error

Unable to detect turning on the DP lift upper limit sensor continues specified times or more when passing 500 pulses
while the DP lift motor is ascending.

1 Checking the original lift plate The original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does not move up and
attached properly. Or, the down manually, repair the position where
fulcrum located at the back there is stuck. If damaged, replace it.
side of the machine for the
original lift plate is broken.
• DP lift motor - DP PWB
• DP lift upper limit sensor - DP PWB
3 Checking the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is not Reattach the DP lift motor and execute U243
attached properly, or it is [Lift Motor]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
4 Checking the DP lift upper limit The DP lift upper limit sensor Reattach the DP lift upper limit sensor and
sensor is not attached properly, or it is execute U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If it does not
C9050: DP lift motor descend error

Unable to detect turning on the DP lift lower limit sensor continues specified times or more when passing 500 pulses
while the DP lift motor is descending.

1 Checking the original lift plate The DP original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does not move up and
properly attached. down manually, repair the position where
• DP lift motor - DP PWB
• DP lift lower limit sensor - DP PWB
3 Checking the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is not Reattach the DP lift motor and execute U243
attached properly, or it is [Lift Motor]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
4 Checking the DP lift lower limit The DP lift lower limit sensor is Reattach the DP lift lower limit sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U244 [Lift L-Limit]. If it does not
7-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9060: DP EEPROM error

The writing data and the reading data into the EEPROM mismatch.

1 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the DP PWB.
installed.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the DP PWB, then
execute U411.
C9070: DP - SHD communication error

The communication error between the DP PWB and the DP SHD PWB is detected during the communication.

C9080: LED failure detection

For internal count
After 4 blocks of the LED lamps of the DPCIS are lit when turning on the power, the acquired peak value of some blocks
is the reference value or less.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp of the DPCIS Execute U061 [CIS] and confirm the LED
does not light. lamp of the DPCIS does not turn on. Then,
go to the next step.
4 Executing U411 DP scanning is not properly Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)] and [DP
adjusted. FD(ChartA)].
U411.
7-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9180: DP feed-shift motor error

Target: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Remarks: When detecting the DP feed-shift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times), display J9002.
HP can't be detected even after the retrying process for the HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide for 3 times
continuously.
* HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide: When the DP feed-shift motor moves to HP, if HP can't be detected even
driving the DP feed-shift motor for 1 round, the retry is done.

1 Removing the original The original accordion jam in Remove the original which is stuck in the
the guide between the DP guide between the DP reversing tray and DP
reversing tray and the DP registration roller.
registration roller. (The
position is not visible when the
DP upper cover is opened.)
2 Cleaning the DP conveying Sticky foreign objects adhere Clean the DP conveying guide.
guide. to the DP conveying guide.
3 Resetting the main power The DP feed-shift motor is not Turn off the power switch and the main
controlled correctly. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
4 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is not After removing the DP feed-shift motor and
motor rotated correctly. Or, there is repair it by rotating the drive section
an excess load. manually, reattach it.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the connector terminal of the wire and
connected properly, or the reconnect. If there is no continuity, replace
wire is faulty. the wire.
• DP feed-shift motor - DP PWB
• DP feed-shift sensor - DP PWB
version.
7 Replacing the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is Replace the DP feed-shift motor.
motor faulty.
8 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift sensor is Reattach the DP feed-shift sensor. If not
sensor not attached properly or faulty. repaired, replace it.
C9500: Image processing circuit error (Scanner)

• Main PWB (YC64, YC65)- Engine PWB
(YC37, YC3)
7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9510: Image processing circuit error (DP)


2 Checking the connection The SATA cable is not Reconnect the connector of the following
properly connected, or it is SATA cable. If there is no continuity, replace
faulty. the SATA cable.
• DP SHD PWB - DP relay PWB
7-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

(2-1)System Error code list
Error code Contents

F000 Main unit CPU communication error (Controller - Panel)
F010 Program read error (SSD)
F020 System memory error (RAM read/write error, CPU memory error)
F021 System memory error (RAM read/write error, ASIC memory error)
F022 System memory error (RAM read/write error, ASIC memory error)
F040 Communication error between the main unit CPU (Communication error between the controller and engine)
F041 Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
F050 Engine program error
F051 Scanner engine program error
F052 Panel engine program error
(2-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline
F000: Main unit CPU communication error (Controller - Panel)

The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and operation panel PWB 1 is
unavailable.

1 Resetting the main power The communication between Turn off the power switch and the main
the main PWB and the power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
operation panel PWB 1 is main power switch and the power switch.
faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the wire and SATA
connected properly. Or, the cable connector and reconnect them. If there
wire or the SATA cable is is no continuity, replace the wire.
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB 1
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM
faulty. data.
PWB 1 faulty.
F010: Program read error (SSD)

Data corruption is detected at the program read

faulty.
2 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Clean the SSD terminals and reinstall the
properly. SSD. If the SSD terminals are faulty, correct
or replace it.
3 Checking the SSD (if lit after An SSD out of specification is Install the SSD matching the memory
replacing the SSD) installed. capacity specification.
7-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 (When the service call error SSD was replaced without Install the USB memory storing the release
appears after replacing the installing the USB memory firmware set in the main unit and turn the
SSD) Replacing the SSD storing the release firmware power off and on to upgrade the firmware.
along the correct procedures set in the main unit. (For regular procedures, refer to Service
Manual Chapter 4 [SSD replacement
procedures when SSD replacement
message appears])
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the wire and SATA
connected properly. Or, the cable connector and reconnect them. If there
wire or the SATA cable is is no continuity, replace the wire.
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB 1
faulty. data.
7 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Replace the SSD. (For regular procedures,
refer to Service Manual Chapter 4 [SSD
replacement procedures when SSD
replacement message appears])
F020: System memory error (RAM read/write error, CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

operation panel main PWB is main power switch and the power switch.
faulty.
faulty. data.
F021: System memory error (RAM read/write error, ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for main PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
properly start up. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
faulty. data.
7-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F022: System memory error (RAM read/write error, ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for DP relay PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
properly start up. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
faulty. data.
3 Checking the DP relay PWB The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB and tighten the
properly connected or screw. If not repaired, replace the DP relay
attached. Or, it is faulty. PWB.
F040: Communication error between the main unit CPU (Communication error between the
controller and engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

1 Resetting the main power There is an error in the Turn off the power switch and the main
communication between the power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
main PWB and the engine main power switch and the power switch.
PWB.
2 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the reconnect the FFC. If there is no continuity,
wire or FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC terminal section
is deformed or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
version.
F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (Scanner).

the controller and the scanner power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
is faulty. main power switch and the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the reconnect the FFC. If there is no continuity,
wire or FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC terminal section
is deformed or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
version.
7-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F050: Engine program error

The engine program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
2 Resetting the main power The engine firmware Turn off the power switch and the main
checksum is faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Reinstalling the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM.
attached.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly. Or, engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB and
execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
F051: Scanner engine program error

The scanner program cannot start up

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
2 Resetting the main power The scanner engine RAM Turn off the power switch and the main
checksum is faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Reattaching the SSD The SSD is not installed Reinstall SSD.
properly.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly. Or, engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
F052: Panel engine program error

The panel program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the panel firmware to the latest
version. version.
2 Resetting the main power The panel RAM checksum is Turn off the power switch and the main
faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the operation panel
connected properly, or the PWB 1 connector and reinsert the wire
wire is faulty. connector. If there is no continuity, replace
the wire.
PWB 1 faulty.
7-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis
error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
• ower is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after
turning the power off and then on.
• Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
- Check the DIMM (DDR memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by releasing
and reinserting the DIMM.
If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM.
Code Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

- It locks on a Welcome (1) Check the harness of the connection state of a connector * Execution of U024 will
screen. between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation vanish user data and the
(Even if time passes for a check. software installed.
definite period of time in (2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Reinstallation is required
more than * notes, a U024) *
screen does not change) (3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an [Main <=> Panel]
operation check is performed.
Main PWB: YC12
(4) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
Panel PWB: YC5
check.
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.
* : only HDD standard model
- It locks on a starting logo (1) Check the mounting failure of optional equipment and * Execution of U024 will
(Taskalfa) screen. perform an operation check. vanish user data and the
(Even if time passes for a (2) Check the harness of the connection state of a connector software installed.
definite period of time in between Engine<=>Main boards, and perform an operation Reinstallation is required.
more than * notes, a check.
screen does not change) (3) Check the harness of the connection state of a connector [Main <=> Engine]
between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation
Main PWB: YC63
check.
Engine PWB: YC35
(4) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
U024) *
(5) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an [Main <=> DP I/F PWB]
(6) Exchange a Engine board and perform an operation [Main <=> Panel]
check. Main PWB: YC12
(7) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation Panel PWB: YC5
check.
headquarters.
7-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F000 CF000 will be displayed if * (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), [Main <=> Panel]
notes progress is carried and the connection state of a connector between Main PWB: YC12
out for a definite period of Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check.
Panel PWB: YC5
time with a Welcome (2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
screen. U024) *
The communication fault (3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
between Panel-Main operation check is performed.
boards
Communication fault
(5) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
between Panel Core-Main.
check.
headquarters.
F12X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, [Main <=> Engine]
Scan control section and the connection state of a connector, and perform an Main PWB: YC64
operation check.
Engine PWB: YC37
U024) *
[Main <=> DP I/F PWB
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
(4) Exchange a DP I/F, Engine and SHD board and perform [DP I/F <=> SHD]
an operation check. DP I/F PWB: YC2
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. SHD PWB: YC3
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F13X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Turn the power OFF / ON and check whether the same [Main <=> Panel]
Panel control section system error occurs again Main PWB: YC12
(2) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. Panel PWB: YC5
F14X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and the [Main <=> KUIO I/F]
FAX control part connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB: YC8, YC9
check.
KUIO PWB: YC3, YC4
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) *
(4) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
* Notes
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are
required.)
(5) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. *
Notes
(6) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
7-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F15X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between authentication device Authentication device: IC card
an authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection situation of a connector, reader etc.
control section and perform an operation check.
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of [Main <=> USB I/F]
U024) *
Main PWB: YC59, YC60
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
USB-HUB PWB: YC1, YC5
operation check.
[Main <=> USB HUB]
(5) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
Main PWB:YC59, YC60
F17X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
printer data control part U024) *
operation check.
F18X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and [Main <=> Engine]
Video control section the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB: YC65
check.
Engine: YC3
U024) *
(4) Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation
check.
F1DX Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of * F1D4: RAM placement error
the image memory U024) * 1.Check U340
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an 2.Initialize the setting value
operation check. (U021)
F21X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
F22X an image-processing part U024) *
F23X (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
7-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F24X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of * F248 is the abnormalities of
the system Management U024) * a printer process.
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an In recurring by specific printer
operation check. data, please give me
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. cooperation at acquisition of
capture data and USBLOG.
[Controller failure]
The solution method is only
the power Off / On.
USBLOG is required for the
investigation.
F25X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of * It may occur according to a
network management U024) * visitor's network environment.
departmen (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(4) Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service
headquarters.
the system Management U024) *
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F2BX Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
F2CX network control part U024) *
F2DX (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F2EX
F2FX
F30X
(Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture
F31X
acquisition)
F32X
F33X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, [Main <=> Engine]
the Scan Management and the connection state of a connector, and perform an Main PWB: YC11
Department operation check.
Engine PWB: YC27
U024) *
[Engine <=> DP Driver]
operation check is performed. Engine PWB: YC33
(4) Exchange a Engine/DP Driver board and perform an DP Driver PWB: YC1
operation check.
7-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F34X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and [Main <=> Panel]
the Panel Management the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB: YC12
Department check.
Panel PWB: YC5
U024) *
(4) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
the printing controlling U024) *
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F37X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of When OFF of the security kit
the FAX Management U024) * that replaced the HDD to the
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an SSD.
operation check.
(4 Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
the authentication U024) *
authorized Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
Department operation check.
(5 ) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F3AX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
F3BX the Entity Management U024) *
F3CX
operation check.
F3DX
F3EX
F3FX
F40X
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X
7-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F46X Abnormality detecting of a (1) Exchange Main boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of
printer rendering part (2) The acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out a printer process.
(Depending on the case, it is print capture data acquisition) In recurring by specific printer
data, please give me
cooperation at acquisition of
capture data and USBLOG.
F47X Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
F48X an image editing U024) *
processing part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F4AX Abnormality detecting of a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
F4CX printer rendering part U024) *
operation check.
* Only HDD standard mode
F4DX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
the Entity Management U024) *
operation check.
F4FX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the JOB Management U024) * immediately after occurrence
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
F50X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the FAX Management U024) * immediately after occurrence
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
When OFF of the security kit
that replaced the HDD to the
* Only HDD standard model SSD.
7-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F51X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
F52X JOB execution part U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
F53X
F55X acquisition.
F56X
F57X
F58X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
F59X the various-services U024) * immediately after occurrence
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
F5AX
F5BX acquisition.
F5CX
F5DX F5DX (especially if X is
F5EX 9,A,B,C or D) occurs when
* Only HDD standard model processing FAX reception and
URDS related matter.
When occurred, check data
sent from PC.
F5FX Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
service execution part U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
F62X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
service execution part U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
device control section U024) *
operation check.
F68X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of * F684 is the overwrite error at
storage device control U024) * the time of an HDD security
section (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an kit.
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. Each of the SSD / HDD to
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * check the operation after
initializing. (U024 of SSD /
FULL, U024 of HDD / FULL)
7-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]

F6AX HyPAS-E part U024) *
F6BX (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F6CX
7-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7 - 4 FAX Related Errors

(1) FAX
No. Contents
(1-1) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(1-2) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(1-3) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(1-4) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(1-5) C0920: FAX file system error
(1-6) The FAX cannot be sent
(1-7) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(1-8) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1)C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

(1-2)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable
installed. model.
(1-3)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not Turn off the power switch and the main
connected properly. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
faulty.
7-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version.
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD is Execute U024 [SSD Format].
faulty.
(1-5)C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
incorrect.
(1-6)The FAX cannot be sent

1 Checking the connection of The modular cable Reconnect the modular cable.
the modular cable disconnects.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit to the
switching device or the like is telephone line.
connected to the telephone
line, it is affected.
3 Changing the setting The line settings are incorrect. Correct the line settings. (Reduce the
transmission speed, etc.)
4 Checking the status at the The destination unit is busy. Wait a while and then redial the number if
destination unit. busy tones are heard.
5 Checking the status at the The modular cable is Request the destination unit to reconnect the
destination unit. disconnected in the modular cable.
destination unit if the
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
6 Checking the setting at the The manual reception is set in Ask the destination unit to change the
destination unit the destination unit if the reception settings.
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
7-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Changing the sending content When transmitting the data to Input a pause at the last of the destination
the other country, the FAX number.
communication line is
automatically cut.
(1-7)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version. version.
(1-8)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data

1 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] according to the
destination unit is A4 / Letter. receivable size at the Address book
registration display > [i-FAX] > [Paper size].
2 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select the condition of the destination unit
destination unit is A4 / Letter. when transmitting the data, choose [B4] or
[A3/Ledger] according to the receivable
sizes.
7-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) FAX Error code

Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U
followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-digit number)
Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits small classifi-
cation of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code
General classification of error code
Error code indication
Error code
Error code Contents

U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted number. Or, sub address-
based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID
in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was
not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address
box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not
registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 The optical section is faulty
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910/E00910 Some pages cannot be received after retry of transmission in the ECM mode
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN
signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
7-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
U01020/E01020 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending EOR•Q signal.
(ECM)
U01022/E01022 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028 T5 timeout is detected when sending in ECM (ECM)
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and communication speed
at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01095/E01095 Command send retry time is exceeded since the significant signal is not received after sending (PPS) Q signal
at phase D during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
7-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box specified by the
destination unit.
U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID
or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted
due to a mismatch in permitted ID or telephone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our
make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password was not registered in
the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified sub
address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no sub address bulletin
board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was not registered in the
destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did
not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Consequently, the transmission
was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or
the own unit did not return its phone number.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000

1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit can receive the
data and resend the data if there is no
particular problem.
U00100/E00100

1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
by a press of the stop/clear
key.
7-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00200/E00200

1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted by Suspend resending from the destination unit
a press of the [Stop] key. or request the destination unit to resend the
data.
U00300/E00300

1 Request to the destination unit Recording paper on the Request the destination unit to set the
destination unit has run out recording papers.
during transmission.
U00430/E00430

1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bulletin Register a valid permitted number.
number board transmission were
requested, but the
communication was
interrupted because the
permitted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting unit.)
U00431/E00431

1 Request to the destination unit An sub address bulletin board Register the sub address password in the
transmission was interrupted destination unit.
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.
U00432/E00432

1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin board Send by using correct the sub address
password transmission was interrupted password.
because the sub address
password did not match.
U00433/E00433

1 Checking the sub address box A sub address bulletin board Set data in the sub address box.
transmission request was
received but data was not
present in the sub address
box.
7-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00440/E00440

1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address password.
password reception was interrupted
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450

1 Checking the permitted The reception was interrupted Register the permitted number to be
number because the permitted ID and consistent at own machine side.
FAX number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check
transmission) in the
destination unit.
U00460/E00460

1 Checking the encryption key The encryption reception was Register an encrypted box number.
specified encryption box
number was not registered.
U00462/E00462

1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key.
encryption key for the
specified encryption box was
not registered.
U00601/E00601

1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and resend.
2 Checking the original The original length exceeds Check if the original length does not exceed
the maximum allowed. 1.6 meter and resend.
U00613/E00613

1 Checking the service call error The optical section is faulty Check the service call error record and
record perform the corrective actions.
7-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00656/E00656

1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
because there was an error in
the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was interrupted Turn off the power switch and the main
because there was an error in power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
the modem. FAX PWB, and then turn on the main power
version. version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
changed.
U00690/E00690

1 Resetting the main power System error Turn the power switch and the main power
switch off . After 5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power switch on.
2 Measures for the system error System error in the main unit. Perform the corrective actions for the system
error in the main unit.
U00800/E00800

1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not properly sent and
speed occurred because of reception resending does not solve it, reduce transmit
of a RTN or PIN signal. start speed and resend the data.
U00811/E00811

1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not properly sent and
remained after retry of resending does not solve it, reduce transmit
transmission in the ECM start speed and resend the data.
mode.
U00900/E00900

1 Re-reception An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a page not
transmitted because of a page transmitted properly.
reception error.
7-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00910/E00910

1 Re-reception Some pages cannot be Resend the page if there is a page not
received after retry of transmitted properly.
transmission in the ECM mode
U01000/E01000

1 Resending An FTT signal was received Resend.
for a set number of times after
TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal
was received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP) after
transmission at 2400 bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to reduce the
speed (Destination unit) transmit start speed. Then, resend the data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the default value of the transmit start
machine) speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01001/E01001

1 Resending Function as indicated by DIS Resend.
signal is not consistent with
the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016

1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since MBF Resend.
signal is received but DIS
signal is not after sending
EOM signal.
7-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01019/E01019

1 Resending Command send retrial times Resend.
exceeds since significant
signal is not received after
sending CNC signal. (between
own machines)
U01020/E01020

sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021

sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
U01022/E01022

sending RR signal. (ECM)
7-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01028/E01028

1 Resending T5 timeout is detected when Resend.
sending in ECM (ECM)
U01052/E01052

1 Resending DCN signal is received after Resend.
sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080

1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
U01092/E01092

1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol speed
and communication speed at
V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093

1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX
since the received signal is Mm Level]. (Initial setting: -43dBm)
attenuated with its frequency
response.
7-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
since the received signal is [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
response.
U01094/E01094

1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send retrial Resend.
time is exceeded at phase B
during transmission.
U01095/E01095

1 Resending Command send retry time is Resend.
exceeded since the significant
sending (PPS) Q signal at
phase D during transmission.
U01096/E01096

1 Resending DCN signal or invalid Resend.
command is received at phase
D during transmission.
U01097/E01097

1 Resending The preset number of Resend.
command retransfers was
exceeded after transmission of
an RR signal or no response.
7-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01100/E01100

1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request the destination unit to resend the
signal is not consistent with data.
the one of own machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].
U01101/E01101

1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request the destination unit to resend the
signal except communication data.
type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
U01102/E01102

1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is received Request the destination unit to resend the
while own machine has no data.
transmission data.
U01110/E01110

1 Request for resending No response is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DIS signal. data.
U01111/E01111

1 Request for resending No response is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DTC (NSC) signal. data.
7-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01113/E01113

1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX
since the received signal is Mm Level]. (Initial setting: -43dBm)
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
since the received signal is [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
response.
U01125/E01125

1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request the destination unit to resend the
a CNS signal. (Between the data.
units of our make)
U01129/E01129

1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request the destination unit to resend the
an SPA signal. (Short data.
protocol)
U01141/E01141

1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DTC signal. data.
U01143/E01143

1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received after Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
sending FTT signal. [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
U01155/E01155

1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending SPA signal. data.
(simplified protocol)
7-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U01160/E01160

1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request the destination unit to resend the
per line is exceeded while data.
receiving message.
U01162/E01162

1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request the destination unit to resend the
per line is exceeded while data.
receiving message.
U01191/E01191

1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request the destination unit to resend the
with error during image data data.
receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193

1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal or Extend T2 time-out time in U641 [T2 TIME
invalid command is received OUT]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to
at phase C/D during reception. 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to
timing '9600bps' or less.
U01194/E01194

1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request the destination unit to resend the
phase B during reception. data.
7-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01195/E01195

1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in U641 [T2 TIME
phase C during reception. OUT]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to
150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to
timing '9600bps' or less.
U01196/E01196

1 Resending Error line control overflow and Resend.
decoding error occurred in
messages during reception.
U01400/E01400

1 Checking the telephone '#' exists in advance of 'x' on Delete '#' from the registered numbers if '#'
number the phone numbers of the exists in advance of 'x' on the phone
destination unit, so it is numbers of the destination unit.
processed as the invalid dial
line.
U01500/E01500

1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is the Execute U630 [TX Speed] to reduce the
speed poor condition. transmit start speed. Then, resend the data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of the transmit start
speed condition is poor and an error speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].
frequently occurs.
U01600/E01600

1 Request to the destination unit The communication line is the Request the destination unit to resend the
poor condition. data after reducing the transmit start speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit to resend the
timing condition is poor and an error data after lowering the reception start speed.
frequently occurs.
7-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01700/E01700

1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
U01720/E01720

1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4 (replacing
the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721

1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there is
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
U01800/E01800

1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit to resend the
occurred in phase 2 (line data after reducing the transmit start speed.
probing).
U01810/E01810

occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
7-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U01820/E01820

occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
U01821/E01821

1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit to resend the
interrupted because there is data after reducing the transmit start speed.
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
U03000/E03000

1 Request to the destination unit No document was present in Request the destination unit to set the
the destination unit when originals.
polling reception started.
U03200/E03200

1 Request to the destination unit There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit to store the
address box in the main unit original data in the sub address box.
that are specified from the
destination unit.
U03300/E03300

1 Request to the destination unit The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit to register the
number registered in the own ID and the own FAX number as the
destination unit are incorrect. permitted ID and the permitted FAX number.
7-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U03400/E03400

1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the
because the password input in receiver's own FAX ID to receive again.
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.
U03500/E03500

1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the
because the password input in receiver's own FAX ID to receive again.
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.
U03600/E03600

1 Resending Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after inputting the sub
reception was interrupted address password registered in the
because the specified sub destination unit.
address password did not
match.
U03700/E03700

1 Checking the destination unit Destination machine has no Check if the destination unit has a sub
sub address bulletin board address bulletin board communication
communication function or no function. If available, request the destination
originals are stored in any unit to save the original data in the sub
original delivery box (sub address box.
address box).
U04000/E04000

1 Request to the destination unit The original was transmitted to Register the sub address password in the
the sub address box, but the destination unit.
specified box was not
registered in the destination
unit that is our own model.
2 Checking the sub address of The original was transmitted to Match the sub address in the FAX forward
the FAX transmission the sub address box in the condition.
condition destination unit that is our own
model, but the sub address of
the transmission condition did
not match.
7-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U04100/E04100

1 Resending The destination unit had no Transmit the data according to the reception
sub address reception function in the destination unit.
capability while the sub
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200

1 Request to the destination unit In encrypted transmission, the Request the destination unit to register the
specified encryption box was encrypted box.
not registered in the
destination unit.
U04300/E04300

1 Resending The encryption transmission Transmit the data according to the reception
was carried out, but there is no function in the destination unit.
encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400

1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500

1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines.
U05100/E05100

1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the authorization
number interrupted because the number that has been registered.
permitted ID and FAX number
did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check
transmission).
7-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U05200/E05200

1 Checking the settings The number does not match a Change the restricted reception settings.
permitted FAX number / ID, or
it matches a rejected FAX
number.
2 Request to the destination unit The own telephone number is Request the destination unit to register the
not informed from the own telephone number.
destination unit.
U05300/E05300

1 Request to the destination unit The number does not match a Ask the destination unit to change the
permitted FAX number / ID, or restricted reception settings.
it matches a rejected FAX
number.
2 Request to the destination unit The main unit did not Request the destination unit to register the
acknowledge its phone own telephone number.
number in question .
U14000/E14000

1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX box Print documents stored in memory and make
was interrupted due to room in memory. Or stop receiving in the
memory overflow in its unit. FAX box.
U14100/E14100

1 Request to the destination unit Transmission was interrupted Request the destination unit to release
due to the memory overflow in memory.
the destination unit when
transmitting into the sub
address box.
U19000/E19000

1 Checking the memory The reception was interrupted Release memory by printing originals stored
due to the memory overflow in in memory.
the main unit during memory
reception.
7-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U19100/E19100

1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and the main
interrupted because there is power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
an error in the data during FAX PWB, and then turn on the main power
transmission. switch and the power switch.
U19300/E19300

1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and the main
interrupted because there is power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the
an error in the data during FAX PWB, and then turn on the main power
transmission. switch and the power switch.
version. version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
changed.
7-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7 - 5 Send Related Errors

(1) Send
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear
(3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security
software settings

1 Changing the setting The incorrect port number has Change the SMB port number from '139' to
been set. '445'.
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear

1 Changing the setting The Windows Fire Wall is not Open [Control panel] > [System and
properly set. (Windows Vista / Security] > Windows firewall] and select
7 / 8) [Permit the program or function through
Windows firewall]. Check [Share files and
printers] and the check box on the right as
well.
(1-3)The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent

1 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not set to Press [Send] key or [FAX] key, and select
[On]. [On] in [Advanced setup] > [Continuous
scan].
2 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not set to Select [On] at [System Menu/Counter] key >
[On]. [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults] >
[Continuous Scan (Send/Store) or
[Continuous Scan (FAX)] .
7-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes)

(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 SMTP protocol is invalid.
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
34803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Changing the setting SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Changing the setting The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Changing the setting The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Changing the setting The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 user name or
password is incorrect. password at [Function Settings] > [E-mail]
via the command center.
2 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.
7-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Changing the setting Destination address domain is Correct the settings in the Network Settings
restricted and transmission is via the Command Center.
denied.

SMTP protocol is invalid.

1 Checking the settings SMTP protocol is invalid. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
via the Command Center.

The sender address is not set.

1 Changing the setting The sender address is not set. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

command center.
2 Connecting the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
3 Changing the setting The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

command center.
2 Changing the setting The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
7-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]

incorrect.

The server cannot establish communication.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
port No.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
incorrect.
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

incorrect.

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

incorrect.

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

7-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

incorrect.

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Changing the setting The SMTP server settings are Set the correct SMTP Authentication
incorrect. Protocol at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via
the command center.

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Changing the setting The self-signed certificate of Correct the certificates in the Security
the device is incorrect. Settings via the Command Center.
2 Changing the setting The service certificate settings Correct the certificates in the Security
are incorrect. Settings via the Command Center.
3 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
7-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a specific period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the
incorrect. Command Center.
incorrect.

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Correcting the user name or The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
2 Changing the setting FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting FTP protocol is not enabled. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
7-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings
device are incorrect. via the Command Center.

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings
device are incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Changing the setting The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
3 Correcting the FTP port no. The port number is incorrect. Correct the FTP port number.

Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

incorrect.

The server cannot establish communication.

7-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]

incorrect.

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

incorrect.
3 Correcting the destination The destination folder name is Set the correct destination folder.
folder name incorrect.

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

incorrect.

No response from the server during a specific period of time.

incorrect.

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

7-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]

incorrect.

FTP server responded with an error.

incorrect.
7-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a specific period of time.
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
incorrect.

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the user name and The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
3 Changing the setting The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings of the
destination host / folder are destination host / folder.
incorrect.

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the destination host The invalid character is Correct the destination host name, folder
name, destination folder name included. name or the file name if the invalid
and the file name characters are included.
2 Correcting the destination The destination folder name or Revise the destination folder and file name
folder name and the file name the file name is incorrect. according to the naming rules.
3 Changing the setting of the The destination host or the Revise the destination host and destination
destination host and folder. destination folder is not set folder properly.
properly.
7-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]

SMB protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
protocol are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
3 Correcting the SMB port no. The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMB port number.
incorrect.

Writing scanned data has failed.

1 Correcting the sending file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file name.
name incorrect.
incorrect.

No response from the host during a specific period of time.

incorrect.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
7-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
7 - 6 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) 'Check the document processor' is displayed
(2) 'Error occurred in cassette X' is displayed even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper
remaining in the main unit (Cassette 1, 2)
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(6) The cover open message remains after closing the front cover
(7) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
Content of Error Messages

(1) 'Check the document processor' is displayed
Closing of the document processor cannot be detected.

• DP opening/closing sensor - DP PWB
2 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Reattach the DP opening/closing switch and
closing switch switch does not operate execute U244 [Open]. If it does not operate
properly. correctly, replace it.
7-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) 'Error occurred in cassette X' is displayed even after removing/inserting the cassette and
checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit (Cassette 1, 2)

1 Reinstalling the primary paper The primary paper feed unit is Pull the primary paper feed unit out, then
feed unit not inserted completely. reinsert it completely.
2 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not rise up. Reattach the lift plate. If it is deformed,
replace it.
• Lift motor - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the lift motor The lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906
(Reset disable function) is executed, replace
the lift motor 1 and 2.

1 Reinstalling the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Pull out the PF primary feed unit and reinsert
paper feed unit unit is not inserted completely. it completely.
2 Checking the PF lift plate The PF lift plate does not rise Reattach the PF lift plate. If it is deformed,
up. replace it.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the connection, and correct and clean
connected properly or, the the terminal and reinsert the connector all
wire or drawer connector is the way.
faulty. If there is no continuity in the wire or drawer
connector is faulty, replace it.
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906
the PF lift motor 1 and 2.
7-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 (Cassette 3) Reinstalling the The PF primary paper feed Reinstall the PF primary paper feed unit.
PF primary paper feed unit unit is not inserted properly.
2 (Cassette 4) Reinstalling the The PF conveying unit is not Reinstall the PF conveying unit.
PF conveying unit inserted properly.
3 Checking the PF lift plate The PF lift plate does not rise Reattach the PF lift plate. If it is deformed,
up. replace it.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the connection, and correct and clean
connected properly or, the the terminal and reinsert the connector all
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB
5 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906
the PF lift motor 1 and 2.
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover

1 Reattaching the front cover The front cover does not turn Reattach the front cover.
the front cover sensor on due
to the fitting failure.
• Front cover switch - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the front cover The front cover switch is faulty. Replace the front cover switch.
switch
7-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6) The cover open message remains after closing the front cover

1 Checking the right cover The right cover is not fitted Check the right cover if the right cover switch
switch and the right cover switch does not turn on when closing the right cover
does not turn on. but turns on by pressing it manually. If the
right cover is not fitted, reattach it.
2 (Right cover 1) Checking the The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire
connection connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
• Right cover switch 1 - Engine PWB
3 (Right cover 2) Checking the The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire
connection connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
• Right cover switch 2 - Relay connector -
Relay connector - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is faulty. Replace the right cover switch.
switch
(7) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray

• MP paper sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the MP paper
sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is not Reattach the MP paper sensor. If it does not
sensor attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed

• DP original sensor - DP PWB
2 Checking the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the DP original
sensor.
3 Checking the DP original The DP original sensor is not Reattach the DP original sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U244 [Set]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
7-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7 - 7 Abnormal Noise
No. Contents Condition
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the
conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects,
improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy Fan motor is dirty or faulty.
(7) Abnormal sound from the paper feed section Wear, dirtiness, foreign material adhesion or attachment failure at
the paper feed section
(8) Abnormal sound from the MP feed section Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at
the MP feed section
(9) Abnormal sound from the fuser exit section The fuser exit roller bushing and pulley are dirty and foreign
objects adhere to them
(10) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between
the parts in the fuser section
(11) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Toner container drive failure, toner supply shutter opening/closing
failure or toner aggregation
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in
the developer section
(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste
toner clogging in the drum section
(14) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit
Content of Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)

1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear or Check the rotation of the roller, the pulley or
bushing is not enough. the gear, if they do not rotate smoothly, apply
the grease on the gears or the bearings.
(EM-50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H)
2 Reattaching the gears or the The parts such as each gear Reattach the gear or the bearings.
bearings or bushing are not properly
attached.
7-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the gears of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying related rollers, and apply the
them. grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the conveying
grease worn down. related pulley and apply the Hanarl.
(302LV94550)
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the drive gears of the conveying
grease foreign objects are on them. related rollers, and apply the grease (EM-
50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H).
4 Checking the pressure spring Pressure of the conveying Reattach the pressure springs of the
related roller and pulley are conveying related rollers or the pulleys, or
weak, and the bearing vibrates replace them.
as the roller and pulley rotate.
5 Replacing the drive unit The parts in the drive unit are Replace the drive unit.
faulty.
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

1 Executing U030 (Specify the source of Confirm the abnormal noise arises from the
abnormal noise is the developer unit by executing U030 [DLP].
developer unit.) Then, go to the next step.
2 Checking the developer unit The developer unit drive is Check if the developer is not leaking from the
faulty. developer unit, there is no damaged location,
and whether the roller rotates manually.
Repair if necessary.
3 Replacing the developer unit The developer unit is faulty. Replace the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and shaft of the DP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying roller and apply grease (EM-
them. 50LP• • • part no.: 7BG010009H)
2 Replacing the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bearing of the DP conveying
roller.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the gears which transmit the drive to
grease foreign objects are on it. the DP conveying roller, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
4 Reattaching the motor The motor does not engage Reattach the DP conveying related motors.
with the drive gear.
7-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushings and gears of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying rollers and apply the Hanarl (EM-
them. 50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H).
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the conveying
grease worn down. pulleys and apply the Hanarl. (302LV94550)
3 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or the Clean the feed-shift guide shaft. If dirt or
grease foreign objects adhere. foreign objects cannot be removed, replace
it.
4 Checking the exit motor The exit motor is faulty. Execute U030 [Exit]. If the abnormal noise
arises, replace the exit motor.
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy

Fan motor is dirty or faulty.

1 Cleaning the fan motor The fan of the fan motor is Execute U037 and specify the fan motor
dirty. which has a high rotation sound, and clean
the fan.
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and reconnect the
connector. If not repaired, replace it.
(7) Abnormal sound from the paper feed section

Wear, dirtiness, foreign material adhesion or attachment failure at the paper feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or Reattach the gear or the clutch at the paper
clutch the clutch are not properly feed drive section if they are not properly
attached. attached.
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the gears and the bearings of the feed
grease dirty or foreign objects are on drive section, and apply the grease. (EM-
them. 50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H)
3 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bearings of the feed
grease dirty or foreign objects are on roller, and apply the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
them. number: 7BG010009H)
4 Checking the paper feed roller The paper feed roller surface Clean the paper feed roller, or replace it if
is dirty or worn down. necessary.
(8) Abnormal sound from the MP feed section

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or When the gears or the clutch in the MP
clutch the clutch are not properly paper feed drive section are not properly
attached. attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bearings of the MP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on feed roller, and apply the grease. (EM-50LP,
them. Part number: 7BG010009H)
3 Checking the MP separation The surface of the MP Clean the MP separation pad. Then, replace
pad separation pad is dirty or worn it if necessary.
down.
7-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
attached properly.
(9) Abnormal sound from the fuser exit section

The fuser exit roller bushing and pulley are dirty and foreign objects adhere to them

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit roller, bushing Clean the fuser exit roller, the bushing, stop
grease or stop ring is dirty, or foreign ring, etc., and apply heat-resistant grease.
objects adhere to it.
(10) Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit roller, bushing Clean the fuser exit roller, bushing, stop ring,
grease or stop ring is dirty, or foreign pulley, etc. and apply grease (EM-50LP, Part
objects adhere to it. number: 7BG010009H)
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear and apply the
grease objects are on it. grease. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.
(11) Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Toner container drive failure, toner supply shutter opening/closing failure or toner aggregation

1 Checking the toner container The torque increases due to Shake the toner container enough and
the toner condensation. reinstall it. Or, replace it.
2 Cleaning the drive parts The shaft and bushing of the If the developer motor drive gears cannot
developer drive motor is dirty rotate smoothly, clean the shaft and the
or foreign objects adhere bushing.
there.

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

1 Checking the developer unit The shaft or the bushing of the Check if the developer roller rotates. If not
developer roller is dirty or rotating smoothly, clean the shaft or the
foreign objects are on them. bushing of the developer roller.
2 Checking the developer unit The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Then, replace it if
developer unit increased due the issue is not resolved.
to the toner condensation, etc.
7-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to supply the toner
drum. to the cleaning unit.
2 Checking the drum unit and The drum does not rotate Check if the drum can rotate. If it does not
the developer unit smoothly. rotate smoothly, replace it. If it locks up,
replace the drum unit.
3 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth surface of the drum drive
grease tooth of the drum drive gear, or gear and apply the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
the grease is not enough. number: 7BG010009H)
4 Replacing the drum unit The torque inside the drum Replace the drum unit.
unit increased due to the
waste toner clogging, etc.
(14) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit

1 Reattaching the motor The motor drive inside drive Reattach the motors inside drive unit 1.
unit 1 is faulty.
2 Reattaching drive unit 1 Drive unit 1 gears and Reattach drive unit 1.
surrounding gears do not
engage properly.
7-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7 - 8 Malfunction
No. Contents Condition
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or
not displayed
(2) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the
power switch
(3) No display in the operation panel (Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)
(4) The operation panel remains displaying 'WELCOME' Main PWB cannot communicate with operation panel PWB 1.
and does not change
(5) The login fails with other than the ID card
Content of Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Target: Main unit, paper feeder (500-sheetx2), large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)

1 Checking the paper length The paper length switch or Reattach the paper length switch or fan-
switch and fan-shape arm fan-shape arm does not shape arm.
operate properly.
2 (Cassette 1, 2) Checking the The connector is not Clean the wire connector terminal and
connection connected properly, or the reconnect it. If there is no continuity, replace
wire is faulty. the wire.
• Paper length switch - Engine PWB
• Paper width switch - Engine PWB
3 (Cassette 3, 4) Checking the The connector is not Check the connection, and correct and clean
connection connected properly or, the the terminal and reinsert the connector all
• PF paper length switch - PF PWB
• PF paper width switch - PF PWB
4 (Cassette 1, 2) Replacing the The paper length switch is Replace the paper length switch.
paper length switch faulty.
5 (Cassette 1, 2) Replacing the The paper width switch is Replace the paper width switch.
paper width switch faulty.
6 (Cassette 3, 4) Replacing the The PF paper length switch is Replace the PF paper length switch.
PF paper length switch faulty.
7 (Cassette 3, 4) Replacing the The PF paper width switch is Replace the PF paper width switch.
PF paper width switch faulty.
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
9 (Cassette 3, 4) Replacing the The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
PF PWB
7-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch

1 Measuring the input voltage The power cord has no Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
continuity.
2 Checking the power cord The power plug of the power If the power plug is deformed or faulty,
cord is faulty. replace the power cord.
3 Checking the power cord The power cord is faulty. If there is no continuity of the power cord,
replace the power cord.
4 Checking the power switch The power switch is faulty. Check the continuity between the contacts of
the power switch. Replace the power switch
if there is no continuity.
5 Checking the low voltage The connector is not Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
PWB connected properly. The wire low voltage PWB, then reconnect the wire
or the PWB is faulty. connector. If the wire is faulty, repair or
replace it. If not repaired, replace the low
voltage PWB.
6 Checking the main PWB The connector or FFC terminal Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
is not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
the wire, FFC, PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
7 Checking the engine PWB The connector or FFC terminal Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
is not connected properly. Or, engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
the wire, FFC, PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
(3) No display in the operation panel

(Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)

1 Resetting the main power The main firmware does not Turn off the power switch and the main
start correctly. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the wire and SATA
connected properly, or the cable connector and reinsert them. If there is
wire is faulty. no continuity, replace the wire.
• Main PWB - Operation panel PWB 1
PWB 1 faulty.
5 Replacing the low voltage Low voltage power PWB is Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB faulty and the power is not
supplied to the main PWB.
(4) The operation panel remains displaying 'WELCOME' and does not change
Main PWB cannot communicate with operation panel PWB 1.

faulty.
7-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the wire and SATA
connected properly. Or, the cable connector and reinsert them. If there is
wire or the SATA cable is no continuity, replace the wire.
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel PWB 1
faulty. data.
PWB 1 faulty.
(5) The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job Account] > [ID Card
while the card authentication Settings] > [Key Login] via the System Menu.
kit is not installed.
7-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > PWB description
8PWBs
8 - 1 PWB description
(1) Main PWB
(1-1)PWB photograph
(1-2)Connector position
1
1 10 1
YC42 11 20
3
YC62
10 YC32
YC2
1 7 YC31
10
YC20
1
YC10
10
2 1 1
YC5
YC65 1
41
1
YC64
YC59 A15 A1
6 1 5
21
YC8 YC60 1 YC12
1 15 B1 B15
YC9 YC63 YC11 YC6

6 1 13 1 7 1 1 7
8-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Connector lists
Destination
YC2: HDD
YC5: Ethernet
YC6: Operation panel PWB 1
YC8: KUIOIF PWB
YC9: KUIOIF PWB
YC10: DP IF PWB
YC11: Engine PWB
YC20: USB2.0 host, USB2.0 device
YC31: SD card slot
YC32: HDD
YC42: Low voltage power source PWB
YC59: USB PWB
YC60: USB PWB
YC62: WiFi module
YC63: Engine PWB
YC64: Engine PWB
YC65: Engine PWB
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2 1 GND - - Ground
2 SATATXDP_C2H O - HDD data signal
3 SATATXDN_C2H O - HDD data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SATARXDN_H2C I - HDD data signal
6 SATARXDP_H2C I - HDD data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 TD1+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

2 TD1- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
3 TD2+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
5 CT1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
6 CT2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
11 GRLED_A O 0/3.3 V DC LED emission signal
12 GRLED_K O 0/3.3 V DC LED emission signal
13 YWLED_A O 0/3.3 V DC LED emission signal
14 YWLED_K O 0/3.3 V DC LED emission signal

2 LCD_OFF O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
3 LOCKN O 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
6 TX0P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
8-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 VBUS1 O 5 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to IFPWB

2 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal
3 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO1 I Analog AUDIO signal
6 WAKEUP1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
7 RESET1 I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 VBUS0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to IFPWB
10 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal
11 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 AUDIO0 I Analog AUDIO signal
14 WAKEUP0 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
15 RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal

2 5.0V4_1 I 0/5 V DC 5 V DC cut signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 5.0V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to IFPWB
5 GND
6 5.0V4_2 I 5 V DC 5 V DC cut signal
YC10 1 GND
2 GND(DP_CONNECTN) I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 PCIEEP_TXDP0 O Image data signal
5 5.0V3 - 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
6 PCIEEP_TXDN0 O Image data signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
12 PCIEEP_RXDP0 I Image data signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 PCIEEP_RXDN0 I Image data signal
16 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
20 PCIEP_REFCLK_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 PCIEN_REFCLK_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
8-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 PCIERC_SWRST_N_M2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
DP
29 GND - - Ground
30 DP_RST_N O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
35 GND - - Ground
36 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground

2 SCN_E2C_IR O 0/3.3 V DC G6 interrupt signal
3 SCN_E2C_SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication direction signal
4 SCN_E2C_SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication busy signal
5 SCN_C2E_SDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 data input signal
6 SCN_E2C_SDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 data output signal
7 SCN_C2E_SCK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main communication clock signal
YC12 A1 I2C_SCL_NFC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) I2C clock signal

A2 3.3V2_CPU I 0/3.3 V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
A3 FPRST O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
A4 P2C_SDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
A5 C2P_SDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
A6 P2C_SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Panel communication direction signal
A7 P2C_SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC Panel busy signal
A8 C2P_SCK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel clock signal
A9 DISPLAY_POWERON O 0/3.3 V DC LCD backlight lighting-off signal
A10 INT_ANYKEY O 0/3.3 V DC Main recovery signal
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 5.0V6 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
B1 POWER_SW O 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 JOB_LED O 0/3.3 V DC JS LED control signal
B4 GND - - Ground
8-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC12 B5 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 BEEP_POWERON O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal
B8 LED_MEMORY O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
B9 LED_ATTENTION O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
B10 LED_PROCESSING O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
B11 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ O 0/3.3 V DC Panel recovery signal
B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY I 0/3.3 V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
B14 NIRQ O 0/3.3 V DC NFC interrupt signal
B15 I2C_SDA_NFC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) I2C clock signal
YC20 A1 VBUS_A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

A2 D-_A I/O - USB data signal
A3 D+_A I/O - USB data signal
A4 GND_A - - Ground
B1 VBUS_B O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
B2 D-_B I/O - USB data signal
B3 D+_B I/O - USB data signal
B4 GND_B - - Ground
YC31 1 CD/DAT3 I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

2 CMD I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
3 VSS - - Ground
4 VDD I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
5 CLK I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
6 VSS - - Ground
7 DAT0 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
10 CD I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
11 COMMON - 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
12 WP I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
YC32 1 GND - -
2 5.0V5 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to HDD
3 GND - - Ground
YC42 1 5.0V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from Power supply PWB

2 GND - - Ground
3 5.0V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from Power supply PWB
4 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
8-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC59 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

2 DATA- I/O LVDS USB data signal
3 DATA+ I/O LVDS USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC60 1 5.0V7 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

2 5.0V7 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
3 5.0V7 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC62 1 SD_D3 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data signal

2 SD_D2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data signal
3 SD_CMD I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SD_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
6 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 VIO PI 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
11 VBAT PI 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 PAVDD PI 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE I/O 0/3.3 V DC Interrupt signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
18 DETECT - - Ground
19 USB_+ I/O LVDS USB data signal
20 USB_- I/O LVDS USB data signal
YC63 1 JS_LED_REM O 0/3.3 V DC JS separator LED lighting signal
2 ENG_WKUP_REQ I 0/3.3 V DC Engine sleep recovery signal
3 HLD_ENG I 0/3.3 V DC Engine stop signal
4 E2C_SDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication data output signal
5 C2E_SDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication data input signal
6 C2E_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication clock signal
7 E2C_SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication busy signal
8 E2C_IR O 0/3.3 V DC G6 communication interrupt signal
9 E2C_SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication direction signal
10 ENG_POWOFF_N I 0/3.3 V DC Engine power off signal
11 HLD_SCAN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner stop signal
12 DP_WAKEUP_REQ I 0/3.3 V DC DP sleep recovery signal
8-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 SRIF_SDR1N I LVDS Serializer output data
3 SRIF_SDR1P I LVDS Serializer output data
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 SRIF_SCLKRN I LVDS Serializer transfer data
12 SRIF_SCLKRP I LVDS Serializer transfer data
13 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
21 GND - - Ground
2 V1_DATA0_N I LVDS Image data signal
3 V1_DATA0_P I LVDS Image data signal
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 V1_CLK_N I LVDS Image data signal
12 V1_CLK_P I LVDS Image data signal
13 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
23 V0_CLK_N I LVDS Image data signal
24 V0_CLK_P I LVDS Image data signal
25 GND - - Ground
8-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC65 26 VSYNC_D_N I LVDS Image data signal
27 VSYNC_D_P I LVDS Image data signal
28 VSYNC_C_N I LVDS Image data signal
29 VSYNC_C_P I LVDS Image data signal
30 VSYNC_B_N I LVDS Image data signal
31 VSYNC_B_P I LVDS Image data signal
32 VSYNC_A_N I LVDS Image data signal
33 VSYNC_A_P I LVDS Image data signal
34 HSYNC_D_N I LVDS Image data signal
35 HSYNC_D_P I LVDS Image data signal
36 HSYNC_C_N I LVDS Image data signal
37 HSYNC_C_P I LVDS Image data signal
38 HSYNC_B_N I LVDS Image data signal
39 HSYNC_B_P I LVDS Image data signal
40 HSYNC_A_N I LVDS Image data signal
41 HSYNC_A_P I LVDS Image data signal
8-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Engine PWB

(2-1)PWB photograph
2 14 1 13 2 16
YC19 YC29 YC34 YC33
YC7 40 1
1 1
3 4
1 YC6 YC18
1
14
YC8
U3 6
13
10
YC30
YC9
7
YC27 1
1 YC16 7
1 1 9
YC15 1
14 YC10
9
1
A1 B12
YC21 YC35 1
1 7 1
YC13 1
1 YC20 12
YC4
B1
1 YC37 41
1 13 YC11
A12 YC32 B14 B1 YC31
A1 A12 15
YC5 YC3 YC12
YC17 YC14 5 1 1 21 18
2 1 2 1
A1 A14 B12 B1
8-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
YC3: Main PWB
YC4: APC PWB
YC5: Polygon motor
YC6: Fuser pressure release motor
YC7: Feed-shift solenoid
YC8: Exit motor, JS paper full sensor, Paper full sensor, Exit sensor, JS paper sensor, Exit fan motor
YC9: Fuser thermistor, Fuser pressure release sensor, Thermopile
YC10: Low voltage power source PWB, Power source fan motor
YC11: RFID PWB, Toner container switch, Toner container lock switch, Toner sensor, Developer relay PWB
YC12: Temperature sensor, LSU fan motor, Drum relay PWB, Developer fan motor
YC13: Feed clutch 1, Registration clutch, DU clutch, MP solenoid, Lift motor 1
YC14: Paper sensor 1 to 4, Paper length switch 1,2, Paper width switch 1,2
YC15: DU sensor, MP paper sensor, Conveying sensor 1, Conveying fan motor
YC16: MP tray switch, MP paper Length switch, MP paper width switch
YC17: Lift sensor 2, Lift motor 2, Conveying sensor 2, Right cover switch 2, Middle switch, Feed clutch 2, Lift sensor 1,
Registration sensor, Cassette 2 upper limit sensor
YC18: Bridge
YC19: High voltage PWB
YC20: PF
YC21: DF
YC27: Main PWB
YC29: CCD PWB
YC30: Low voltage power source PWB
YC31: Front cover switch
YC32: Right coverr switch
YC33: DP
YC34: Original size sensor, Original size timing sensor, Home posiotion sensor, Scanner motor
YC35: Main PWB
YC37: Main PWB
YC38: Main motor, Feed motor

YC3 1 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P O LVDS Image data signal
2 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N O LVDS Image data signal
3 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P O LVDS Image data signal
4 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N O LVDS Image data signal
5 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P O LVDS Image data signal
6 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N O LVDS Image data signal
7 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P O LVDS Image data signal
8 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N O LVDS Image data signal
9 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P O LVDS Image data signal
10 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N O LVDS Image data signal
11 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P O LVDS Image data signal
12 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N O LVDS Image data signal
13 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P O LVDS Image data signal
14 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N O LVDS Image data signal
15 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P O LVDS Image data signal
16 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N O LVDS Image data signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 SAR_2_VCLK1_P O LVDS Image data signal
19 SAR_2_VCLK1_N O LVDS Image data signal
8-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]

21 SAR_2_CH13_P O LVDS Image data signal
22 SAR_2_CH13_N O LVDS Image data signal
23 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
29 GND - - Ground
30 TP O LVDS Image data signal
32 GND - - Ground
35 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
41 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 5VIL O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 VDATA2N O LVDS Video data LVDS(-)
4 VDATA2P O LVDS Video data LVDS(+)
5 VDATA1N O LVDS Video data LVDS(-)
6 VDATA1P O LVDS Video data LVDS(+)
7 SAMPLEN2 O 0/3.3 V DC Laser output enabling signal
8 SAMPLEN1 O 0/3.3 V DC Laser output enabling signal
9 OUTPEN O 0/3.3 V DC Laser output enabling signal
10 VCONT O Analog Laser control signal
11 PDN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronizing signal
12 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
13 NC - - Not used
YC5 1 24V2 O DC4V 24 V DC power output to PM

2 GND - - Ground
3 POL_REM I 0/3.3 V DC Polygon motor control signal
4 POL_READY I 0/3.3 V DC Polygon motor redy signal
5 POL_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Polygon motor clock signal

2 NC - - Not used
3 FPMOTREM O DC0V/24V Exit fan motor drive signal
8-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC7 1 EJE_SOL_PULL O 0/24 V DC Feed-shift solenoid drive signal (Pressure)
2 24VF2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
3 EJE_SOL_RETURN O 0/24 V DC Feed-shift solenoid drive signal (Release)
YC8 1 EMOTA O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Exit motor drive signal
2 EMOTB O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Exit motor drive signal
3 EMOTAN O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Exit motor drive signal
4 EMOTBN O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Exit motor drive signal
5 3.3VLED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power outputExit motor drive signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 JTRAYFULL I 0/3.3 V DC JP paper full sensor
8 3.3VLED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
9 GND - - Ground
10 TRAYFULL I 0/3.3 V DC Conveying sensor
11 FUSER_JAM I 0/3.3 V DC Exit sensor
12 GND - - Ground
15 GND - - Ground
16 JJTRAYPAP I 0/3.3 V DC JS paper sensor
17 EXTFANREM O 0/3.3 V DC Exit fan motor drive signal
YC9 1 FTOBJ I Analog Thermopile detection temperature data

2 GND - - Ground
4 FTAMB I Analog Thermopile detection temperature data
5 THSDA IO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Thermopile comunication data
6 THPSCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Thermopile comunication clock
7 GND - - Ground
8 CTHERM I Analog Fuser thermistor (edge)
10 GND - - Ground
11 FSRPRSEN I Analog Fuser pressure release sensor
YC10 1 SHREM O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heater 2 control signal

2 MHREM O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heater 1 control signal
3 ZEROCROSS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero cross signal
4 RELAYREM O 0/3.3 V DC Power relay drive signal
5 LVU_SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 24VIL3 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
8 LVU_FAN O 0/24 V DC Power source fan motor control signal
9 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

2 DLP_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Developer PWB EEPROM data signal
3 DLP_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Developer PWB EEPROM clock signal
8-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC11 4 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
5 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor
6 GND - - Ground
7 TCON_EMP I 0/3.3 V DC Toner sensor
10 GND - - Ground
11 TCON_LOCK I 0/3.3 V DC Toner container lock sensor
12 TCON_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Toner container switch
13 GND - - Ground
14 5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power input
16 RFID_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RFID PWB EEPROM clock signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 RFID_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RFPWB EEPROM data signal
2 DRUM_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Drum PWB EEPROM data signal
3 DRUM_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Drum PWB EEPROM clock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 WTLED O 0/3.3 V DC Waste toner LED control signal
6 WTSEN I Analog Waste toner sensor
8 ERASE O 0/24 V DC Eraser control signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 LSU_FAN O 0/24 V DC LSU fan motor control signal
12 HUMCLK2 I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor (humidity)
13 HUMCLK1 O 0/3.3 V DC Temperature/humidity sensor clock signal
15 TEMP I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor (temperature)
16 DLP FAN O 0 V/24 V DC Developer fan motor control signal
YC13 1 FEED1CLREM O 0/24 V DC Feed clutch 1 drive signal
3 REGCLREM O 0/24 V DC Registration clutch drive signal
5 DUCLREM O 0/24 V DC DU clutch drive signal
8 MPFSOLREM O 0/24 V DC MP solenoid drive signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 LMOT1REM1 O 24 V DC Lift motor 1 drive signal
11 DLPCLREM - - Not used
12 24VF1 - - Not used
YC14 1 3.3VLED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PAPEMP1 I 0/3.3 V DC Paper sensor 1
8-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC14 4 3.3VLED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
13 PAP1LSIZE1 I 0/3.3 V DC Paper length switch 1
14 GND - - Ground
17 PAP1WSIZE I 0/3.3 V DC Paper width switch 1
18 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
23 PAP2WSIZE1 I 0/3.3 V DC Paper width switch 2
24 GND - - Ground
YC15 1 CONVFAN O 0/24 V DC Conveying fan motor control signal
2 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 DUSENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 MPFPAPSET I 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 FEED1SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off

2 MPFWSIZE I Analog MP paper width switch
3 MPFLSIZE I 0/3.3 V DC MP paper length switch
4 GND - - Ground
6 MPFTRAY I 0/3.3 V DC MP tray switch
7 GND - - Ground
YC17 A1 3.3V2 - - Not used

A2 GND - - Not used
A3 CECDT - - Not used
A4 SECCK - - Not used
A5 LMOT2REM2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
A6 LMOT2REM1 O 0/24 V DC Lift motor 2
8-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC17 A7 3.3VLED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 FEED2JAM I 0/3.3 V DC Conveying sensor 2
A10 LCOVERSW I 0/3.3 V DC Right cover switch 2
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 24V2 - - Not used
A13 ANYREM - - Not used
B1 24VF1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
B2 MIDCLREM O 0/24 V DC Middle clutch
B3 24VF1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
B4 FEED2CLREM O 0/24 V DC Conveying clutch 2
B5 3.3VLED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 CAS1LIFTLMT I 0/3.3 V DC Lift sensor 1
B8 5V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
B9 REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC Registration sensor
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 3.3VLED - - 3.3 V DC power output
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 CAS2LIFTLMT - - Lift sensor 2
YC18 1 BRFAN - - Not used

2 BRVREF - - Not used
3 BRREM O 0/3.3 V DC BR Conveying motor remote signal
4 BRCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BR Conveying motor clock signal
5 BRPH0 O 0/3.3 V DC BR Conveying motor control signal
6 BRPH1 O 0/3.3 V DC BR Conveying motor control signal
7 BRDET I 0/3.3 V DC Bridge set signal
8 BRSEN1 I 0/3.3 V DC BR Conveying sensor 1
9 BRSEN2 I 0/3.3 V DC BR Conveying sensor 2
10 BRCOVOP I 0/3.3 V DC BR cover switch
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
3 DBCNT O Analog Developer DC output switch signal
4 DBCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Developer AC clock signal
5 NC - - Not used
6 SEP_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Separation DC output remote signal
7 TRA_CNT O Analog Transfer DC output control signal
8 DC_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Transfer DC/ Transfer DC output remote signal
9 MISENS I Analog Charger output current detection signal
10 MDCCNT O Analog Charger DC output control signal
11 MACCNT O Analog Charger AC output control signal
12 MC_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Charger AC clock signal
8-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC19 13 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
14 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
YC20 1 EH_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder clock signal
2 EH_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
3 EH_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 PF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Paper feed select signal
5 PF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC Paper feed ready signal
6 PF_SET O 0/3.3 V DC Paper feed set signal
7 PF_PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC Paper feed control signal
9 3.3V3_FUSE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
YC21 1 DF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DF clock signal
2 DF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DF serial communication data signal
3 DF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC DF select signal
4 DF_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DF serial communication data signal
5 DF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DF ready signal
6 DF_DET O 0/3.3 V DC DF set signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC27 1 SC_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal
2 SC_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
3 SC_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 SC_BSY I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal
5 SC_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner communication direction signal
6 SC_IRN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner interrupt signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC29 1 12V5 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output
5 NC - - Not used
6 LED_PWM O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LED driver PWM signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 DSI_CIS_5P I LVDS Serial input data
9 DSI_CIS_5N I LVDS Serial input data
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 DSI_CIS_CKP I LVDS Transfer clock
18 DSI_CIS_CKN I LVDS Transfer clock
19 GND - - Ground
8-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC29 20 DSI_CIS_2P I LVDS Serial input data
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 AFE_RD I 0/3.3 V DC AFE serial communication read signal
27 GND - - Ground
28 AFE_WD O 0/3.3 V DC AFE serial communication write signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 AFE_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AFE serial communication clock signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 AFE_CS O 0/3.3 V DC AFE serial communication select signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 AFE_MCLK_P O LVDS AFE clock signal
35 AFE_MCLK_N O LVDS AFE clock signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 NC - - Not used
YC30 1 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
2 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input

2 24VIL1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
YC32 1 24VIL1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

2 24VIL2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
YC33 1 DPCLK O 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication clock signal
2 DPSDO O 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication data output signal
3 DPTMG I 0/3.3 V DC DP scanning start signal
4 DPCO I 0/3.3 V DC DP top cover switch
5 DPRDY I 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication ready signal
6 DPPAGEEND I 0/3.3 V DC DP conveying sensor
7 DPORGSEN I 0/3.3 V DC DP original sensor:
8 3.3V3F O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
8-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC33 15 DPSEL O 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication select signal
16 DPSDI I 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication data input signal

2 ORG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DP original sensor
5 GND - - Ground
6 PLT_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DP original size timing sensor
8 GND - - Ground
9 HP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC Home position sensor
10 SMOT1B O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Scanner motor drive signal
11 SMOT1A O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Scanner motor drive signal
12 SMOT2A O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Scanner motor drive signal
13 SMOT2B O 0/24 V DC(pulse) Scanner motor drive signal

2 DP_WAKEUP_REQ O 0/3.3 V DC DP sleep recovery signal
3 HLD_SCN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner stop signal
4 ENG_POWEROFF_N I 0/3.3 V DC Engine power off signal
5 ENG_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication direction signal
6 ENG_IR O 0/3.3 V DC G6 communication interrupt signal
7 ENG_BSY O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication busy signal
8 ENG_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication clock signal
9 ENG_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication data input signal
10 ENG_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication data output signal
11 ENG_HOLD I 0/3.3 V DC Engine stop signal
12 ENG_WKUP_REQ I 0/3.3 V DC Engine sleep recovery signal
13 JS_LED_REM O 0/3.3 V DC JS separator LED lighting signal
14 NC - - Not used
YC36 1 24VILF3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 DMOTREM O 0/24 V DC Developing motor remote signal
4 DMOTCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Developing motor clock signal
5 DMOTRDY I 0/3.3 V DC Developing motor ready signal
6 DMOTDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Developing motor drive switch signal

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 OS_SAD4P O LVDS Serializer output data
8 OS_SAD4N O LVDS Serializer output data
8-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 OS_SACKP O LVDS Serializer transfer data
11 OS_SACKN O LVDS Serializer transfer data
12 GND - - Ground
15 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
21 GND - - Ground
YC38 1 24VILF3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 MMOTREM O 0/24 V DC Main motor remote signal
4 MMOTCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main motor clock signal
5 MMOTRDY I 0/3.3 V DC Main motor ready signal
6 MMOTDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Main motor drive switch signal
7 24VILF3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 FMOTREM O 0/24 V DC Feed motor remote signal
10 FMOTCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Feed motor clock signal
11 FMOTRDY I 0/3.3 V DC Feed motor ready signal
12 FMOTDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Feed motor drive switch signal
8-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) Operation panel PWB 1

(3-1)PWB photograph
YC9
YC11
50 1
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
B1 A15 YC7
2
1
YC4
1
1
YC5
YC10
B15 A1
10
20
1 YC3
8-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
YC4: Speaker
YC5: Main PWB
YC6: LCD
YC7: Touch panel
YC8: Main PWB
YC9: LCD
YC10: 10 key PWB
YC11: NFC PWB

2 LED0 O 0/5 V DC LED control signal 0
3 NC - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 ATTENTION O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
6 MEMORY O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
7 PROCESSING O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
8 ENERGYSAVERLED O 0/3.3 V DC Energy Saver LED control signal
9 INT_ENERGYSAVERLE I 0/3.3 V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
D_N
10 KEY0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 0
14 SCAN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0
18 JOB_LED I 0/3.3 V DC JS separator LED control signal
19 N.C. - - Not used
20 LED2 O 0/5 V DC LED control signal 2
YC4 1 SPEAKER_P O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)

2 SPEAKER_N O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
YC5 A1 5V6 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

A2 5V6 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 ANYKEY O 0/3.3 V DC Main recovery signal
A7 DISPLAY_POWERON I 0/3.3 V DC LCD backlight lighting-off signal
A8 C2P_SCK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel clock signal
A9 P2C_SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC Panel busy signal
A10 P2C_SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC Panel communication direction signal
A11 C2P_SDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
8-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC5 A12 P2C_SDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
A13 FPRST I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel reset signal
A14 3.3V_MAIN I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) I2C clock signal
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 12C data signal
B2 NIRQ I 0/3.3 V DC NFC interrupt signal
B3 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY O 0/3.3 V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
_N
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I 0/3.3 V DC Panel recovery signal
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
B6 LED_PROCESSING_N I 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
B7 LED_ATTENTION I 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
B8 LED_MEMORY I 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
B9 BEEP_POWERON I 0/3.3 V DC Alert sound recovery signal
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 JOB_LED I 0/3.3 V DC JS LED control signal
B14 GND - - Not used
B15 N.C. - - Not used
YC6 1 LED_A O 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal
2 LED_C I 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal
YC7 1 YP-Bottom I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal

2 XN-Left I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal
3 YN-Top I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal
4 XP-Right I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal

2 LCD_OFF O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
3 LOCKN_GPIO0 O 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
6 RX0P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 VGH O 19.83 V DC LCD High power output

2 VDD O 3.3 V DC LCD Driver power output
3 VGL O 9.1 V DC LCD Low power output
4 VCOM O 3.67 V DC LCD Common power output
5 VCOM O 3.67 V DC LCD Common power output
6 AGND - - Ground
7 AVDD O 0.34 V DC LCD Analog power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 V1 O 9.55 V DC LCD V1 power output
8-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC9 12 V3 O 7.72 V DC LCD V8 power output
16 V7 O 5.02 V DC LCD V7power output
17 HSD O 0/3.3 V DC Control bit select signal
18 GND_LVDS - - Ground
19 RxIN3+ O LVDS Display data signal
20 RxIN3- O LVDS Display data signal
21 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
30 GND - - Ground
31 RxINCK+ O LVDS Display data signal
32 RxINCK- O LVDS Display data signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 VDD_LVDS O 3.3 V DC LVDS power output
42 AGND - - Ground
43 AVDD O 10.34 V DC LCD Analog power output
44 VDD O 3.3 V DC LCD Driver power output
45 MODE O 0/3.3 V DC Mode select signal
46 GBR O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
47 SHLR O 0/3.3 V DC Left/Right writing start point setting signal
48 UPDN O 0/3.3 V DC Upper/Lower writing start point setting signal
49 COM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
50 COM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
YC10 1 KEY0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 0
8-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC10 8 SCAN7 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 7
9 10key_detect I DC0V/3.3V Keyboard detect signal
10 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 3.3V_main I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 NFC_SWCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 12C clock signal
4 NFC_SWDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 12C data signal
5 NIRQ O 0/1.8 V DC Interrupt signal
8-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) Power supply PWB

(4-1)PWB photograph
1 YC7 9 10 2
1 YC2 3 1 YC5 10 YC6

9 1
TRA811 TRA821
YC1
1 4
TB2
(White)
TB1
(Black)
6 1 3 1
YC3 YC4
8-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
TB1, TB2: Inlet
YC1: Main power switch
YC2: Fuser heater 1,2, Fuser thermostat 1,2
YC3: Cassette heater
YC4: Cassette heater switch
YC5: Engine PWB, DF
YC6: Main PWB
YC7: Engine PWB

TB1 1 LIVE I 100 V AC AC power input
TB2 1 NEUTRAL I 100 V AC AC power input
YC1 1 LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output

2 LIVE I 100 V AC AC power input
3 NEUTRAL I 100 V AC AC power input
4 NEUTRAL O 100 V AC AC power output
YC2 1 LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output

2 MH O 100 V AC/0V Fuser heater 1 control signal
3 SH O 100 V AC/0V Fuser heater 2 control signal
YC3 1 DH_LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output

2 DH_LIVE - - Not used
3 NC - - Not used
4 NC - - Not used
5 DH_NEUTRAL O 100 V AC AC power output
6 DH_NEUTRAL - - Not used
YC4 1 DH_LIVE I 100 V AC AC power input

2 - - Not used
3 DH_LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output

5 GNDDF - - Ground
6 GNDDF - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
8-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB
6 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC7 1 24V3IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to EPWB

2 GND - - Ground
3 POWER_OFF O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
4 RELAY_REM I 0/3.3 V DC Power relay remote signal
5 ZCROSS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero cross signal
6 MH_REM I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heart 1 remote signal
7 SH_REM I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heart 2 remote signal
8 DRREM - - Not used
9 AC_DETECTOR - - Not used
8-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Appendixes
9Appendixes
9 - 1 Appendixes
(1) Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
37.5 mm/1 1/2” Chager roller

39.3 mm/1 9/16” Developing roller
46.5 mm/1 13/16” Right/Left registration roller
52.2 mm/1 15/16” Transfer roller
94 mm/3 11/16” Drum

94.2 mm/3 11/16” Heat roller/Press roller
Note
The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.
9-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands
9 - 2 Firmware environment commands

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. There parameters may be changed permanently
with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameter, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter values
before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send the FRPO INIT (FRPO-
INITialize) command.(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A
!R! FRPO P1, 11; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Item FRPO Setting values Factory
setting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inches 0
A2 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inches 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inches 17
Page width A7 Integer value in inches 17
Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Copy count C0 Number of copies to print:1-999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0

1: Landscape
Default font No. * C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switch C8 0:HP compatibility mode (Characters higher than 127 are 0
not printed.)
32:Conventional mode (Characters higher than 127 are
printed. Supported symbol sets: ISO-60 Norway [00D], ISO-
15 Italian [00I], ISO-11 Sweden [00S], ISO-6 ASCII [00U],
ISO-4 U.K. [01E], ISO-69 France [01F], ISO-21 Germany
[01G], ISO-17 Spain [02S], Symbol [19M]*1)
Printing concentration D4 1: Thin. 3
2: Slightly Thin.
3: Standard
4: Slightly Deep.
5: Deep.
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5
9-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 100V: 1
120V: 6
220-240V: 6
Page reduction function J0 0: 100 % 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
KIR mode N0 0: Off 2
2: On
Duplex mode N4 0: Off 0
1: Long edge binding
2: Short edge binding
Sleep timer time-out time N5 Value in units of 1 minute (1 to 240) 32 ppm: 30
40 ppm: 45
Ecoprint level N6 0: Off 0
2: On
Default emulation mode P1 6: PCL 6 100V: 6
9: KPDL 120V: 9
220-240V: 6
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 1
1: Carriage-return
2: Carriage-return + linefeed
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 1
1: Linefeed
2: Linefeed + carriage-return
Automatic emulation switching P4 0: AES disabled 100V: 0
1: AES enabled 120V: 1
220-240V: 0
Alternative emulation P5 Sam6: PCL 6 6
9: KPDL
Automatic emulation switching P7 0: Page eject commands 100V: 10
trigger 1: None 120V: 11
2: Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands 220-240V: 10
3: Prescribe EXIT commands
4: Formfeed (^L) commands
6: Pescribe EXIT and formfeed commands
10: Page eject commands; if AES fails, resolves to KPDL
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82 (R)
Default stacker R0 1 (inner tray) 1

3 (1,000-sheet Finisher)
7 (3,000-sheet Finisher)
9-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Default paper size R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2 inches)
2: Business (4-1/8 × 9-1/2 inches)
3: International DL (11 × 22 cm)
4: International C5 (16.2 × 22.9 cm)
5: Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2 inches)
6: US Letter (8-1/2 × 11 inches)
7: US Legal (8-1/2 × 14 inches)
8: A4 (21.0 × 29.7 cm)
9: JIS B5 (18.2 × 25.7 cm)
10: A3 (29.7 ´ 42 cm)
11: B4 (25.7 ´ 36.4 cm)
12: US Ledger (11 ´ 17 inches)
13: ISO A5
14: A6 (10.5 × 14.8 cm)
15: JIS B6 (12.8 × 18.2 cm)
16: Commercial #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8 inches)
17: Commercial #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2 inches)
18: ISO B5 (17.6 × 25 cm)
19: Custom (11.7 × 17.7 inches)
20:B4toA4
21:A3toA4
22:A4toA4[98%]
23:STKtoA4
24:STKtoB4
30: C4 (22.9 ´ 32.4 cm)
31: Hagaki (10 × 14.8 cm)
32: Ofuku-hagaki (14.8 × 20 cm)
33: Officio II
38:12 × 18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5 × 13.5 inches
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei 2
53: Youkei 4
Default cassette R4 0: MP tray 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
A4/letter equation S4 0: Off 100V: 0
1: On 120V: 1
220-240V: 1
Host buffer size S5 0: 10 KB 1
1: 100 KB
2: 1024 KB
9-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Wide A4 T6 0: Off 0
1: On
Line spacing * U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (decimal value) 0
Character spacing * U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (decimal value) 0
Country code U6 0: US-ASCII 100V: 0
1: France 120V: 53
2: Germany 220-240V: 53
3: UK
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US Legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multilingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
50 - 99: HP PCL symbol set coding
Code set at power up in U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53
daisywheel emulation 1: IBM
6: PCL
Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable U8 Default font pitch (integer value) 10
font * U9 Default font pitch (decimal value) 0
Font height for the default scalable V0 Integer value in 100 points: 0 to 9 0
font * V1 Integer value in points: 0 to 99 12
V2 decimal value in 1/100 points: 0, 25, 50, 75 0
Default scalable font * V3 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters, enclosed with Courier
single or double quotation marks
9-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Default weight V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
(courier and letter Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Label
5: Bond
6: Recycle
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Cardstock
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8
Paper type for cassettes 1 and 2 X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
Paper type for optional cassettes 3 X3 1: Plain 1
to 7 X4 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
17: High quality
PCL paper source X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence 0
compatible with HP-LJ5Si.
2: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence
compatible with HP-LJ8000.
Automatic continue for ‘Press GO’ Y0 0: Off 0
1: On
9-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Automatic continue timer Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 6 (30 s)
Error message for device error Y3 0: Not detect 127

127: Detect
Duplex operation for specified paper Y4 0: Off 0
type 1: On
(Prepunched, Preprintedand
Letterhead)
Default operation for PDF direct Y5 0: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper 0
printing size. Loads paper from the current paper cassette.
1: Through the image. Loads paper which is the same size
as the image.
2: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper
size. Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image
size.
3: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size paper
depending on the image size.
8: Through the image. Loads paper from the current paper
cassette.
9: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size paper
depending on the image size.
10: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper
size. Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image
size.
e-MPS error Y6 0: Does not print the error report and display the error 3
message.
1: Prints the error report.
2: Displays the error message.
3: Prints the error report and displays the error message.
*1 Characters higher than 127 are printed regardless of the C8 value. However, setting C8 to 0 does not print char-
acter code 160.
*: Ignored in some emulation modes.
9-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Chart of image adjustment procedures
9 - 3 Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjusting Item Image Description Maintenance mode Original Page Remarks
order
Item No. Mode
1 Adjusting the magnification in the main Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 POLYGON U053 test pattern P.6-43
scanning direction (printing adjustment)
2 Adjusting the magnification in the Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN U053 test pattern P.6-43
auxiliary scanning direction
(printing adjustment)
3 Adjusting the center line of the MP tray Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSUOUT LEFT /MPT U034 test pattern P.6-35 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
(printing adjustment) LSUOUT LEFT /DUPLEX LSUOUT LEFT /DUPLEX.
4 Adjusting the center line of the Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSUOUT LEFT / U034 test pattern P.6-35 Cassette 1: select Center /CASSETTE 1
cassettes CASSETTE 1 Cassette 2: select Center /CASSETTE 2
(printing adjustment) LSUOUT LEFT / Cassette 3: select Center /CASSETTE 3
CASSETTE 2
Cassette 4: select Center /CASSETTE 4
LSUOUT LEFT /
CASSETTE 3
LSUOUT LEFT /
CASSETTE 4
5 Adjusting the leading edge registration Registration motor turning on timing U034 LSUOUT TOP /MPT(L) U034 test pattern P.6-35 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
of the MP tray (secondary paper feed start timing) LSUOUT TOP / LSUOUT TOP /DUPLEX(L).
(printing adjustment) DUPLEX(L) PAPER WIDTH 218mm or more
6 Adjusting the leading edge registration Registration motor turning on timing U034 LSUOUT TOP U034 test pattern P.6-35 PAPER WIDTH 218mm or more
of the cassette (secondary paper feed start timing) CASSETTE(L)
7 Adjusting the leading edge margin LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P.6-131
9-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]

order
Item No. Mode
8 Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P.6-131
9 Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A MARGIN U402 test pattern P.6-131
(printing adjustment) C MARGIN
10 Adjusting magnification of the scanner Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN Test chart P.6-46 U065: For copying an original placed on the platen.
in the main scanning direction U070 MAIN SCAN(CIS) P.6-51 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
(scanning adjustment)
11 Adjusting magnification of the scanner Original scanning speed U065 SUB SCAN Test chart P.6-46 U065: For copying an original placed on the platen.
in the auxiliary scanning direction U070 SUB SCAN (F) P.6-51 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
SUB SCAN (B) To make an adjustment for second side: select SUB
SCAN(B) :Mechanism reversal model
SUB SCAN (CIS) To make an adjustment for second side: select SUB
SCAN(B) :Double-sided simultaneous reading model
12 Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data U067 FRONT Test chart P.6-49 U067: For copying an original placed on the platen.
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment)
U072 FRONT P.6-54 U072: For copying originals from the DP.
BACK To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
BACK. :Mechanism reversal model
CIS To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select CIS.
:Double-sided simultaneous reading model
13 Adjusting the leading edge registration Original scan start timing U066 FRONT Test chart P.6-48 U066: For copying an original placed on the platen.
U071 FRONT HEAD P.6-52 U071: For copying originals from the DP.
BACK HEAD To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
BACK HEAD. :Mechanism reversal model
CIS HEAD To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select CIS
HEAD. :Double-sided simultaneous reading model
14 Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 B MARGIN Test chart P.6-132 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) glass
U404 B MARGIN P.6-133 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
9-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]

order
Item No. Mode
15 Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 D MARGIN Test chart P.6-132 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) glass
U404 D MARGIN P.6-133 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
16 Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 A MARGIN Test chart P.6-132 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) C MARGIN the contact glass
U404 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
A MARGIN P.6-133
C MARGIN
Image quality
Item Specifications
100% magnification Machine: ±0.8%
Using DP: ±1.5%
Enlargement/reduction Machine: ±1.0%
Using DP: ±1.5%
Lateral squareness Machine: ±1.5 mm/375 mm
Using DP: ±2.5 mm/375 mm
Leading edge registration Cassette: +1.0/-1.5 mm
MP tray: +1.0/-1.5 mm
Duplex: +1.0/-1.5 mm
Skewed paper feed Cassette: 1.5 mm or less
(left-right difference) MP tray: 1.5 mm or less
Duplex: 2.0 mm or less
Lateral image shifting Cassette: ±2.0 mm
MP tray: ±2.0 mm
Duplex: ±3.0 mm
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005),
the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the scanner magnification (U065)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the DP) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243),
the following adjustments are automatically made:
• When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly positioned against the original.
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)

Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
9-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
9 - 4 Wiring diagram
YC4
NC 13 13 YC1 YC1
YC1 YC11 3.3V2 12 12 1 12 1 12 3.3V2 12 1 9 3.3V2
IC TAG RFIDSDA 1 1 18 18 RFIDSDA PDN 11 11 2 11 2 11 PDN 11 2 8 PDN
RFID PWB GND 2 2 17 17 GND VCONT 10 10 3 10 3 10 VCONT 10 3 7 VCONT
RFIDSCL 3 3 16 16 RFIDSCL OUTPEN 9 9 4 9 4 9 OUTPEN APC PWB 9 4 6 OUTPEN APC PWB
3.3V2 4 4 15 15 3.3V2 SAMPLEN1 8 8 5 8 5 8 SAMPLEN1 8 5 5 SAMPLEN1
5V2 5 5 14 14 5V2 SAMPLEN2 7 7 6 Relay 7 6 7 SAMPLEN2 7
VDATA1P 6 6 7 6 7 6 VDATA1P 6 6 4 VDATA1P
VDATA1N 5 5 8 5 8 5 VDATA1N 5 7 3 VDATA1N
VDATA2P 4 4 9 4 9 4 VDATA2P 4
GND 1 1 5 1 13 13 GND VDATA2N 3 3 10 3 10 3 VDATA2N
02V6 3
02V7
Toner container switch SW 2 2 4 2 12 12 TCONSET GND 2 2 11 2 11 2 GND 2beam 2 8 2 GND 1beam
5VIL 1 1 12 1 12 1 5VIL4 1 9 1 5VIL4
Relay
Vout 1 1 3 3 11 11 TCONLOCK
Toner container lock switch GND 2 2 2 4 10 10 GND 40 ppm model 32 ppm model
3.3V 3 3 1 5 9 9 3.3VLED
YC5
24V2 1 1 5 1 5 5 24V
3.3V4 3 1 8 8 3.3V2 GND 2 2 4 2 4 4 GND
Toner sensor Vout 2 Relay 2 7 7 TCONEMP PMOTREM 3 3 3 Relay 3 3 3 S/S Polygon motor
GND 1 3 6 6 GND PMOTRDY 4 4 2 4 2 2 READY
PMOTCLK 5 5 1 5 1 1 CLK
Developer PWB YC1 YC1 YC2

TH 2 1 TH TH 1 1 5 5 DLPTH
N.C. 1 2 N.C. 3.3V4 2 2 4 4 3.3V2
N.C. 4 3 N.C. DLP_SCL 3 3 3 3 DLPSCL
EEPROM 3.3V4 3 4 3.3V4 DLP_SDA 4 4 2 2 DLPSDA
N.C. 6 5 N.C. GND 5 5 1 1 GND YC7
N.C. 5 6 N.C. EXTSOLPUL 1 1 PULL
THERM N.C. 8 7 N.C. 24VF2 2 2 24V Feed-shift solenoid
GND 7 8 GND EXTSOLREL 3 3 RETURN
DLP_SDA 10 9 DLP_SDA
Developer
DLP_SCL 9 10 DLP_SCL relay PWB
YC8
EMOTA 1 1 1 1 A
YC31 EMOTB 2 2 2 2 B
Exit motor
EMOTAN 3 3 3 3 /A
#187 1 1 24V2 EMOTBN 4 4 4 4 /B
Front cover switch
#187 2 2 24VIL1
YC12 3.3VLED 5 5 3 3 3.3V

24V 2 1 17 17 24V2 GND 6 6 2 2 GND Job paper full sensor
Developer fan motor Relay
GND 1 2 16 16 DLPFAN JTRAYFULL 7 7 1 1 Vout
3.3VLED 8 8 3 3 3.3V
YC1 GND 9 9 2 2 GND Paper full sensor
THERM 4 1 15 15 TEMP TRAYFULL 10 10 1 1 Vout
Temperature sensor 3.3V3 3 2 14 14 3.3V2
AIRWET 2 3 13 13 HUMCLK1
WETCLK 1 4 12 12 HUMCLK2 FUSERJAM 11 11 3 3 1 1 Vout
GND 12 12 2 Relay 2 2 2 GND Exit sensor
3.3VLED 13 13 1 1 3 3 3.3V
24V 1 1 11 11 LSUFAN
Relay
LSU fan motor GND 2 2 10 10 GND 3.3VLED 14 14 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 2 2 GND Job exit paper sensor
JTRAYPAP 16 16 1 1 Vout
EXTFANREM 17 17 2 2 REM
YC3 YC2 YC2 YC1 Relay
24VF2 18 18 1 1 24V Exit fan motor
4 4 4 ERASE3 DRUM_SDA 2 1 DRUM_SDA 24V4 1 1 9 9 24VF3
3 3 3 ERASE2 WT_SENS 1 2 WT_SENS ERASE 2 2 8 8 ERASE
Eraser
2 2 2 ERASE1 3.3V4 4 3 3.3V4 3.3VLED 3 3 7 7 3.3VLED
1 1 1 24V4 WT_LED 3 4 WT_LED WT_SENS 4 4 6 6 WTSEN
DRUM_SCL 6 5 DRUM_SCL WT_LED 5 5 5 5 WTLED YC6
YC1 3.3VLED 5 6 3.3VLED GND 6 6 4 4 GND GND 1 1 3 3 -
4 4 3.3V4 NC 8 7 NC DRUM_SCL 7 7 3 3 DRUMSCL NC 2 2 2 2 NC Fuser press release motor
3 3 WT_SENS ERASE_REM 7 8 ERASE_REM DRUM_SDA 8 8 2 2 DRUMSDA FPMOTREM 3 3 1 1 +
2 2 WT_LED GND 10 9 GND 3.3V4 9 9 1 1 3.3V2
1 1 3.3VLED 24V4 9 10 24V4
YC32
EEPROM Drum PWB Drum relay PWB
24VIL1 1 1 #110
Right cover switch
24VIL2 2 2 #110
YC14
3.3V 3 3 A1 1 3.3VLED
Yellow
Paper sensor 1 GND 2 2 A2 2 GND
(Upper)
Vout 1 1 A3 3 PAPEMP1
YC19 CN1
24VIL3 14 14 1 1 24V
3.3V 3 3 A4 4 3.3VLED 24VIL3 13 13 2 2 24V
Red
Paper sensor 2 GND 2 2 A5 5 GND MCLK 12 12 3 3 MC_CLK
1 1 (Lower) A6 6 PAPEMP2 MACCNT 11
Vout 11 4 4 MC_ACCNT
MDCCNT 10 10 5 5 MC_DCCNT
MISENS 9 9 6 6 MC_ISENS
3.3V4 3 3 Yellow A7 7 3.3VLED DCREM 8 8 7 7 DC_REM High voltage PWB
Paper sensor 3 GND 2 2 (Upper) A8 8 GND TRACNT 7 7 8 8 TRA_CNT
Vout 1 1 A9 9 PAPEMP3 SEPREM 6 6 9 9 SEP_REM
NC 5 5 10 10 SEP_SEL
DBCLK 4 4 11 11 DLP_CLK
3.3V4 3 3 Red A10 10 3.3VLED DBCNT 3 3 12 12 DLP_CNT
Paper sensor 4 GND 2 2 (Lower) A11 11 GND GND 2 2 13 13 GND
Vout 1 1 A12 12 PAPEMP4 GND 1 1 14 14 GND
CN-1 4 4 B1 13 PAP1LSIZE1
GND 3 3 B2 14 GND
Paper length switch 1
SIZE_WS 2 2 B5 17 PAP1WSIZE
Paper width switch 1 GND 1 1 B6 18 GND
GND 3 3 B8 20 GND
Paper length switch 2
Engine PWB
SIZE_WS 2 2 B11 23 PAP2WSIZE
Paper width switch 2 GND 1 1 B12 24 GND (1/4)
9-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
YC13
REM 3 3 1 1 FEED1CLREM
Feed clutch1 24V 1 1 2 2 24VF1 YC16 3 3 SW_OFF
GND 7 7 1 7 1 7 2 2 COMMON MP tray switch
MPFTRAY 6 6 2 6 2 6 1 1 SW_ON
REM 3 3 3 3 REGCLREM
Registration clutch 24V 1 1 4 4 24VF1 3.3VLED 5 5 3 5 3 5 3 3 3.3V4
GND 4 4 4 Relay 4 4 Relay 4 2 2 GND MP paper length switch
MPFLSIZE 3 3 5 3 5 3 1 1 Vout
B03B-CZHK-B-1
REM 3 3 5 5 DUCLREM
DU clutch 24V 1 1 6 6 24VF1 MPFWSIZE 2 2 6 2 6 2 2 2 MPFWSIZE
3.3V2 1 1 7 1 7 1 1 1 3.3V MP paper width switch
24V 1 2 7 7 24VF1
Relay
MP sorenoid REM 2 1 8 8 MPFSOLREM
YC15
CONVFAN 1 1 5 1 2 2 GND
Relay
GND 2 2 9 9 GND 24V 2 2 4 2 1 1 24V Conveying fan motor
LIft motor 1 24V 1 1 10 10 LMOT1REM1
Relay
3.3VLED 3 3 3 3 3 3 3.3V
REM 3 3 11 11 DLPCLREM GND 4 4 2 4 2 2 GND DU sensor
Developer clutch 24V 1 1 12 12 24VF1 DUSENS 5 5 1 5 1 1 Vout
3.3VLED 6 6 3 1 3 3 3.3V
YC38 GND 7 7 2 Relay 2 2 2 GND MP paper sensor
24V 1 1 1 1 24VILF3 MPFPAPSET 8 8 1 3 1 1 Vout
GND 2 2 2 2 GND
Start/Stop 3 3 3 3 MMOTREM
Main motor
CLK 4 4 4 4 MMOTCLK 3.3VLED 9 9 3 3 3.3V
LD 5 5 5 5 MMOTRDY GND 10 10 2 2 GND Conveying sensor 1
CW/CCW 6 6 6 6 MMOTDIR FEED1SENS 11 11 1 1 Vout
24V 1 1 7 7 24VILF3
GND 2 2 8 8 GND
Start/Stop 3 3 9 9 FMOTREM
Fuser motor
CLK 4 4 10 10 FMOTCLK
LD 5 5 11 11 FMOTRDY
CW/CCW 6 6 12 12 FMOTDIR
YC22
YC36 24VF7 1
24V 1 1 1 1 24VILF3 GND 2
GND 2 2 2 2 GND GND 3
Start/Stop 3 3 3 3 DMOTREM MCVENB 4
Developer motor
CLK 4 4 4 4 DMOTCLK NC 5
LD 5 5 5 5 DMOTRDY MCVFDCNT 6
CW/CCW 6 6 6 6 DMOTDIR MCVEJCOUNT 7
MCVCOPYSIG 8
MCVUTXD 9
GND 10
MCVRXD 11
GND 12
YC17
A1 A1 3.3V2
A2 A2 GND
A3 A3 SECDT YC24
A4 A4 SECCK 5V2 1
5V2 2
5V2 3
5V2 4
GND 2 2 1 7 A5 A5 LMOT2REM2 5V2 5
Lift motor 2 24V 1 1 2 6 A6 A6 LMOT2REM1 5V2 6
5V2 7
5V2 8
MK2ENB 9
3.3VLED 3 3 1 5 3 5 A7 A7 3.3VLED 24V2 10
Conveying sensor 2 GND 2 2 2 4 4 Relay 4 A8 A8 GND MK2RKEY7 11
Vout 1 1 3 3 5 3 A9 A9 FEED2JAM MK2RKEY6 12
Relay MK2RKEY5 13
MK2RKEY4 14
SW 2 2 4 2 6 2 A10 A10 LCOVERSW MK2RKEY3 15
Right cover switch 2 GND 1 1 5 1 7 1 A11 A11 GND MK2RKEY2 16
MK2RKEY1 17
MK2RKEY0 18
A12 A12 24V2 GND 19
A13 A13 ANYREM MK2CNT 20
24V 3 3 1 4 B1 B1 24VF1
Middle clutch REM 1 1 2 3 B2 B2 MIDCLREM
Relay
24V1 3 3 3 2 B3 B3 24VF1
Feed clutch 2 REM 1 1 4 1 B4 B4 FEED2CLREM
YC23
24VF7 4
3.3VLED 3 3 1 6 B5 B5 3.3VLED DC1CNT 3
Lift sensor 1 GND 2 2 2 5 B6 B6 GND DC1SET 2
Vout 1 1 3 4 B7 B7 CAS1LIFTLMT GND 1
Relay
5V 3 3 4 3 B8 B8 5V2
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 5 2 B9 B9 REGSENS
GND 1 1 6 1 B10 B10 GND
3.3VLED 3 3 1 3 B11 B11 3.3VLED

Lift sensor 2 GND 2 2 2 Relay 2 B12 B12 GND
Vout 1 1 3 1 B13 B13 CAS2LIFTLMT
Engine PWB
(2/4)
9-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
YC6 YC42
Fuser 5V0 1 1 1 1 5.0V0
GND
5V0
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
GND
5.0V0
Main PWB
GND 4 4 4 4 GND
YC2 5V0 5 5 5 5 5.0V0
#250 #250 HEATER SUB 3 3 3 3 SH GND 6 6 6 6 GND (1/3)
5V0 7 7 7 7 5.0V0
#250 #250 HEATER MAIN 2 2 2 2 MH GND 8 8 8 8 GND
5V0 9 9 9 9 5.0V0
#250 #250 #250 #250 1 1 1 1 LIVE GND 10 10 10 10 GND
Zener PWB
GND 1 Relay 2 1 5
Fuser thermistor TH 2 1 2 4
3 3
Fuser press release sensor
3.3VLED
GND 2 2
3
4
3
2 Low voltage power source PWB
Vout 1 1 5 1
*Option YC9
YC1 YC18 FSRPRSEN 11 11
FAN_REM 14 14 1 14 14 14 1 1 BRFAN GND 10 10
Bridge unit BRIDGE_VREF 13 13 2 13 13 13 2 2 BRMOTVREF 3.3VLED 9 9
BRIDGE_REM 12 12 3 12 12 12 3 3 BRMOTREM CTHERM 8 8
AK-740 BRIDGE_CLK 11 11 4 11 11 11 4 4 BRMOTCLK GND 7 7
BRIDGE_PH0 10 10 5 10 10 10 5 5 BRMOTPH0 1 1 WP
BRIDGE_PH1 9 9 6 9 9 9 6 6 BRMOTPH1 THPSCL 6 6 2 2 SCK
BRIDGE_DET 8 8 7 8 8 8 7 7 BRDET THPSDA 5 5 3 3 SDA
BRIDGE_SENS 1 7 7 8 7 7 7 8 8 BRSEN1 FTAMB 4 4 4 4 VTA Termopile
BRIDGE_SENS 2 6 6 9 6 6 6 9 9 BRSEN2 3.3V2 3 3 5 5 VDD
COVER_OPEN 5 5 10 5 5 5 10 10 BRCOVOP GND 2 2 6 6 GND
GND 4 4 11 4 4 4 11 11 GND FTOBJ 1 1 7 7 VTO
GND 3 3 12 3 3 3 12 12 GND
3.3V 2 2 13 2 2 2 13 13 3.3V2
24V1 1 1 14 1 1 1 14 14 24VF5 YC7
YC10
SHREM 1 1 7 7 SH_REM
MHREM 2 2 6 6 MH_REM
Bridge PWB ZEROCROSS
RELAYREM
3
4
3
4
5
4
5
4
ZCROSS
RELAY_REM
LVU_SLEEP 5 5 3 3 POWER_OFF
GND 6 6 2 2 GND
YC4 24VIL3 7 7 1 1 24V3IL
1 24V
2 FAN_REM
LVU_FAN 8 8 2 1 REM
Relay Power source fan motor
24V2 9 9 1 2 24V
YC3
2 2 1 1 COVER_OPEN
BR cover switch YC30 YC5
1 1 2 2 GND
24V2 1 1 1 1 24V1
GND 3 3 3 3 BRIDGE_LED_A 24V2 2 2 2 2 24V1
BR conveying sensor 2 Vout 2 2 4 4 GND 3 3 24V2 x o o
5V 1 1 5 5 BRIDGE_SENS_2 4 4 24V2 4 5 6
5 5 GNDDF
6 6 GNDDF x o o
GND 3 3 7 7 GND 1 2 3
YC2 GND 4 4 8 8 GND
GND 3 3 1 1 BRIDGE_LED_A GND 5 5 9 9 GND
BR conveying sensor 1 Vout 2 2 2 2 GND 5V0 6 6 10 10 5V0 1
5V 1 1 3 3 BRIDGE_SENS_1 YC1 4
LIVE 1 1 YW 5 Main
LIVE 2 2 WE 6 switch
/B 4 4 4 4 SMOT_B2 NEUTRAL 3 3 YW 2
/A 3 3 5 5 SMOT_A2 NEUTRAL 4 4 WE 3
BR conveying motor
B 2 2 6 6 SMOT_B1
A 1 1 7 7 SMOT_A1 1 1
Engine PWB 2
3
2
3
LIVE 1 1
Black
AC_LIVE
4 4 Inlet 1
(3/4) NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
White
B10 B10 YC4

B9 B9
B8 B8
*Option DH_LIVE 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
AC_LIVE
Cassette heater switch
B7 B7 DH_LIVE 3 3 3 3 AC_LIVE
B6 B6
B5 B5
YC20 B4 B4
7 1 1 EHCLK B3 B3 YC3
6 2 2 EHSI B2 B2 DH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
Cassette heater
*Option 5
4
3
4
3
4
EHSO
PFSEL
B1 B1
A10 A10
DF DH_LIVE
NC
2
3
2
3
2 2
3 5 5 PFRDY A9 A9 NC 4 4
2 6 6 PFSET YC21 A8 A8 3RV (DF-7120) : 1k DH_NEUTRAL 5 5
1 7 7 PFPAUSE GND 7 7 A7 A7 3PG (DF-791) : 3k DH_NEUTRAL 6 6
DFDET 6 6 A6 A6
5 8 8 24VF6 DFRDY 5 5 A5 A5
PF 4 9 9 3.3V3FUSE DFSDI 4 4 A4 A4
3 10 10 3.3V2 DFSEL 3 3 A3 A3
3PC (PF-810) : 1,500x2 2 11 11 GND DFSDO 2 2 A2 A2 #187 PF cassette
1 12 12 GND DFCLK 1 1 A1 A1 #187 heater switch
3PJ (PF-791) : 500x2
#187 PF cassette
#187 heater switch
4
2
White
1
Black
9-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
YC37 YC64
YC1 YC2 YC1 YC29 GND 1 1 21 21 GND
12V 1 1 1 1 12V 12V 40 40 1 1 12V5 GND 2 2 20 20 GND
12V 2 2 2 2 12V 12V 39 39 2 2 12V5 GND 3 3 19 19 GND
NC 3 3 3 3 NC 12V 38 38 3 3 12V5 GND 4 4 18 18 GND
LED_PWM 4 4 4 4 LED_PWM 12V 37 37 4 4 12V5 GND 5 5 17 17 GND
LED_ENA 5 5 5 5 LED_ENABLE NC 36 36 5 5 NC GND 6 6 16 16 GND
GND 6 6 6 6 GND LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM OS_SAD4P 7 7 15 15 SRIF_SDR4P
GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 34 34 7 7 GND OS_SAD4N 8 8 14 14 SRIF_SDR4N
DSI_CIS_2_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P GND 9 9 13 13 GND
DSI_CIS_2_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N OS_SACKP 10 10 12 12 SRIF_SCLKRP
GND 31 31 10 10 GND OS_SACKN 11 11 11 11 SRIF_SCLKRN
DSI_CIS_2_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N OS_SAD3P 13 13 9 9 SRIF_SDR3P
LED drive PWB GND
DSI_CIS_2_3P
28
27
28
27
13
14
13
14
GND
DSI_CIS_3P
OS_SAD3N
GND
14
15
14
15
8
7
8
7
SRIF_SDR3N
GND
DSI_CIS_2_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N OS_SAD2P 16 16 6 6 SRIF_SDR2P
GND 25 25 16 16 GND OS_SAD2N 17 17 5 5 SRIF_SDR2N
DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP GND 18 18 4 4 GND
LED- F PWB DSI_CIS_CKN
GND
23
22
23
22
18
19
18
19
DSI_CIS_CKN
GND
OS_SAD1P
OS_SAD1N
19
20
19
20
3
2
3
2
SRIF_SDR1P
SRIF_SDR1N
Main PWB
CCD PWB DSI_CIS_2_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N (2/3)
YC2 YC1 GND 19 19 22 22 GND
LEDFK 1 1 2 2 LEDFK DSI_CIS_2_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P YC3 YC65
LEDFA 2 2 1 1 LEDFA DSI_CIS_2_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 1 1 41 41 HSYNC_A_P
GND 16 16 25 25 GND SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 2 2 40 40 HSYNC_A_N
AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 3 3 39 39 HSYNC_B_P
GND 14 14 27 27 GND SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 4 4 38 38 HSYNC_B_N
13 13 28 28 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 5 5 37 37 HSYNC_C_P
LED-R PWB AFE_WD
GND 12 12 29 29
AFE_WD
GND SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 6 6 36 36 HSYNC_C_N
AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 7 7 35 35 HSYNC_D_P
GND 10 10 31 31 GND SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 8 8 34 34 HSYNC_D_N
YC3 YC1 AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 9 9 33 33 VSYNC_A_P
LEDRK 1 1 2 2 LEDRK GND 8 8 33 33 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 10 10 32 32 VSYNC_A_N
LEDRA 2 2 1 1 LEDRA AFE_MCLK_P 7 7 34 34 AFE_MCLK_P SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 11 11 31 31 VSYNC_B_P
AFE_MCLK_N 6 6 35 35 AFE_MCLK_N SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 12 12 30 30 VSYNC_B_N
GND 5 5 36 36 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 13 13 29 29 VSYNC_C_P
NC 4 4 37 37 NC SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 14 14 28 28 VSYNC_C_N
5.1V 3 3 38 38 5V2 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 15 15 27 27 VSYNC_D_P
5.1V 2 2 39 39 5V2 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 16 16 26 26 VSYNC_D_N
5.1V 1 1 40 40 5V2 GND 17 17 25 25 GND
SAR_2_VCLK1_P 18 18 24 24 V0_CLK_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 19 19 23 23 V0_CLK_N
GND 20 20 22 22 GND
SAR_2_CH13_P 21 21 21 21 V0_DATA2_P
SAR_2_CH13_N 22 22 20 20 V0_DATA2_N
GND 23 23 19 19 GND
YC34 SAR_2_CH12_P 24 24 18 18 V0_DATA1_P
GND 3 3 1 1 GND SAR_2_CH12_N 25 25 17 17 V0_DATA1_N
Original size sensor ORGSW 2 2 2 2 ORGSENS GND 26 26 16 16 GND
5V 1 1 3 3 5V2 SAR_2_CH11_P 27 27 15 15 V0_DATA0_P
SAR_2_CH11_N 28 28 14 14 V0_DATA0_N
GND 29 29 13 13 GND
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3VLED TP 30 30 12 12 V1_CLK_P
Original size timing sensor GND 2 2 5 5 GND TP 31 31 11 11 V1_CLK_N
COSW 1 1 6 6 PLTOPEN GND 32 32 10 10 GND
TP 33 33 9 9 V1_DATA2_P
TP 34 34 8 8 V1_DATA2_N YC10 YC22
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3VLED GND 35 35 7 7 GND GND 1 1 GND
Home position sensor GND 2 2 8 8 GND TP 36 36 6 6 V1_DATA1_P GND(DP_CONNECTN) 2 2 GND
HPSW 1 1 9 9 HPSENS TP 37 37 5 5 V1_DATA1_N GND 3 3 GND
GND 38 38 4 4 GND PCIEEP_TXDP0 4 4 PCIEP_DP2M
TP 39 39 3 3 V1_DATA0_P 5.0V3 5 5 5.0V3
B/ 4 4 10 10 SMOT1B TP 40 40 2 2 V1_DATA0_N PCIEEP_TXDN0 6 6 PCIEN_DP2M
A/ 3 3 11 11 SMOT1A GND 41 41 1 1 GND 5.0V3 7 7 5.0V3
ISU motor
B 2 2 12 12 SMOT2A GND 8 8 GND
A 1 1 13 13 SMOT2B 5.0V3 9 9 5.0V3
YC35 GND 10 10 GND
NC 14 14 YC63 5.0V3 11 11 5.0V3
JSLEDREM 13 13 1 1 JS_LED_REM PCIEEP_RXDP0 12 12 PCIEP_M2DP
ENGWKUPREQ 12 12 1 2 ENG_WKUP_REQ GND 13 13 5.0V3
YC33 ENGHOLD 11 11 3 3 HLD_ENG PCIEEP_RXDN0 14 14 PCIEN_M2DP
1 16 1 1 DPCLK EGSDO 10 10 4 4 E2C_SDAT 5.0V3 15 15 5.0V3
*Option 2 15 2 2 DPSDO EGSDI 9 9 5 5 C2E_SDAT GND 16 16 GND
3 14 3 3 DPTMG EGCLK 8 8 6 6 C2E_SCLK 5.0V3 17 17 5.0V3
4 13 4 4 DPCO EGBSY 7 7 7 7 E2C_SBSY GND 18 18 GND
5 12 5 5 DPRDY EGIR 6 6 8 8 E2C_IR 5.0V3 19 19 5.0V3
6 11 6 6 DPPAGEEND EGDIR 5 5 9 9 E2C_SDIR PCIEP_REFCLK_DP 20 20 PCIEP_REFCLK_DP2M
DP 7
8
10
9
7
8
7
8
DPORGSEN
3.3V3F
EGPOWEROFFN
HLDSCN
4
3
4
3
10
11
10
11
ENG_POWOFF_N
HLD_SCAN
GND
PCIEN_REFCLK_DP
21
22
21
22
GND
PCIEN_REFCLK_DP2M
9 8 9 9 GND DPWKUPREQ 2 2 12 12 DP_WAKEUP_REQ GND 23 23 GND
3R8 (DP-7110): Double-sided 10 7 10 10 GND GND 1 1 13 13 GND GND 24 24 GND
11 6 11 11 GND GND 25 25 GND
simultaneous reading model 12 5 12 12 24VF8 GND 26 26 GND
13 4 13 13 24VF8 YC27 YC11 GND 27 27 GND
3R7 (DP-7100): Mechanical reverse model 14 3 14 14 24VF8 GND 7 7 1 1 GND PCIERC_SWRST_N_M2DP 28 28 PCIERC_SWRST_N_M2DP
15 2 15 15 DPSEL SCIRN 6 6 2 2 SCN_E2C_IR GND 29 29 GND
16 1 16 16 DPSDI SCDIR 5 5 3 3 SCN_E2C_SDIR DP_RST_N 30 30 DP_RST_N
3RJ (DP-7120): Mechanical reverse model SCBSY 4 4 4 4 SCN_E2C_SBSY GND 31 31 GND
SCSI 3 3 5 5 SCN_C2E_SDAT GND 32 32 GND
SCSO 2 2 6 6 SCN_E2C_SDAT GND 33 33 GND
SCCLK 1 1 7 7 SCN_C2E_SCK GND 34 34 GND
GND 35 35 GND
GND 36 36 GND
GND 37 37 GND
Engine PWB GND 38 38 GND
GND 39 39 GND
(4/4) GND 40 40 GND
DP I/F PWB
YC25
1 1 GND (only DP-7110)
2 2 HTPDN
3 3 LOCKN
4 4 GND
5 5 RX0N
6 6 RX0P
7 7 GND
SATA LP-1 GND
LP-2 GND
9-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
YC9
1 1 VGH YC31 YC20
2 2 VDD 1 CD/DAT3 VBUS_A A1
3 3 VGL 2 CMD D-_A A2
4 4 VCOM 3 VSS D+_A A3 USB2.0 Host
5 5 VCOM 4 VDD GND_A A4
6 6 AGND SD card slot 5 CLK VBUS_B B1
7 7 AVDD 6 VSS D-_B B2
8 8 GND 7 DAT0 D+_B B3
9 9 GND 8 DAT1 GND_B B4 USB2.0 Device
10 10 V1 9 DAT2 LockPin(1) LP-1
11 11 V2 10 CD LockPin(2) LP-2
12 12 V3 11 COMMON LockPin(3) LP-3
13 13 V4 12 WP LockPin(4) LP-4
14 14 V5 LP-1 LockPin(1)
17 17 HSD LP-4 LockPin(4) YC59 YC1 YC4
18 18 GND_LVDS VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS VBUS 1
19 19 RxIN3+ DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA- D- 2
20 20 RxIN3- YC5 DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ D+ 3 Card Reader *Option
21 21 GND 1 TD1+ ID 4 4 4 4 ID GND 4
22 22 RxIN2+ 2 TD1- GND 5 5 5 5 GND LockPin_1 LP-1
23 23 RxIN2- 3 TD2+ LockPin(1) LP-1 LP-1 LockPin(1) LockPin_1 LP-2
24 24 GND Ethernet 4 TD2- LockPin(2) LP-2 LP-2 LockPin(2)
25 25 RxIN1+ 5 CT1 LockPin(3) LP-3 LP-3 LockPin(3)
26 26 RxIN1- 6 CT2 LP-4 LockPin(4) YC3
27 27 GND YC4 7 TD3+ VBUS 1
28 28 RxIN0+ SPEAKER_P 1 1 - 8 TD3- D- 2
LCD 29 29 RxIN0- SPEAKER_N 2 2 + Speaker 9 TD4+ YC60 YC5 D+ 3 Keyboard *Option
30 30 GND 10 TD4- 5.0V7 1 1 6 1 5.0V7 GND 4
31 31 RxINCK+ 11 GRLED_A 5.0V7 2 2 5 2 5.0V7 LockPin_1 LP-1
32 32 RxINCK- 12 GRLED_K 5.0V7 3 3 4 3 5.0V7 LockPin_1 LP-2
33 33 GND 13 YWLED_A GND 4 4 3 4 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS 14 YWLED_K GND 5 5 2 5 GND
35 35 V8 LP-1 LockPin(1) GND 6 6 1 6 GND YC2
36 36 V9 LP-2 LockPin(2) VBUS 1
37 37 V10 D- 2
38 38 V11
YC5 YC12
D+ 3 USB Host
39 39 V12 GND 4
40
41
40
41
V13
V14
5V6
5V6
A1
A2
A1
A2
A15
A14
A15
A14
5.0V6
5.0V6
USB PWB LockPin_1
LockPin_1
LP-1
LP-2
42 42 AGND 5V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 5.0V6
43 43 AVDD 5V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 5.0V6
44 44 VDD GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND
45 45 MODE ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY
46 46 GBR DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON
47 47 SHLR C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK YC2 SATA SATA
48 48 UPDN P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY GND 1 1 1 1 GND
49 49 COM P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SATATXDP_C2H 2 2 2 2 A+
50 50 COM C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SATATXDN_C2H 3 3 3 3 A-
LP1 LOCKPIN1 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT GND 4 4 4 4 GND
LP2 LOCKPIN2 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SATARXDN_H2C 5 5 5 5 B-
3.3V_MAIN A14 A14 A2 A2 3.3V2_CPU SATARXDP_H2C 6 6 6 6 B+
CZWH-30-S
I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 I2C_SCL_NFC GND 7 7 7 7 GND
YC6
2 1 LED_A
1 2 LED_C I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC HDD
NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ
CZWH-30-S
INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY_N B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY 1 1 3.3V
PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ 2 2 3.3V
AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO 3 3 3.3V
LED_PROCESSING_N B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING YC32 4 4 GND
LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION GND 3 3 5 5 GND
LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY 6 6 GND
YC1 YC11 BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON 7 7 5V
3.3V2 5 5 1 1 3.3V_main GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND 5.0V5 2 2 8 8 5V
GND 4 4 2 2 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND 9 9 5V
NFC PWB NFC_SWCLK
NFC_SWDA
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
NFC_SWCLK
NFC_SWDA
GND
JOB_LED
B12
B13
B12
B13
B4
B3
B4
B3
GND
JOB_LED GND 1 1
10
11
10
11
GND
ACT
YC1
VDD5 1 1 VDD5
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ GND B14 B14 12 12 GND GND 2 2 GND
N.C. B15 B15 13 13 12V RESETN 3 3 RESETN
14 14 12V VDD5_CUT 4 4 VDD5_CUT
15 15 12V GND 5 5 GND
WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
8 8
YC7 Power switch Main PWB KUIO I/F PWB
RESERVE
RESERVE 9 9
NC
NC eKUIO
TOP 1 1 YP-Bottom HD-12 RESERVE 10 10 NC
Board
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN-Left
YN-Top RED 1 1 B2 B2 GND
(3/3) *32 ppm model is option
GND
RESERVE
11
12
11
12
GND
NC
RIGHT 4 4 XP-Right BLACK 2 Relay 2 B1 B1 POWER_SW RESERVE 13 13 NC
LP1 LOCKPIN1 (Except 120V model) GND 14 14 GND
LP2 LOCKPIN2 RESERVE 15 15 NC
RESERVE 16 16 NC
YC8 SATA SATA YC6 GND 17 17 GND
GND 1 1 1 1 GND USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
Operation panel PWB 2 LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF
YC8 YC3
USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN *Option
LOCKN_GPIO0 3 3 3 3 LOCKN VBUS 20 20 VBUS
GND 4 4 4 4 GND VBUS1 1 1 1 1 VBUS1 LockPin1 LP-1
RX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N USB_DN1 2 2 2 2 USB_DM1 LockPin2 LP-2
RX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1
YC1 YC3 GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC2
5V6 1 1 1 1 5V6 LockPin(1) LP-1 LP-1 LockPin(1) AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 VDD5 1 1 VDD5
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 LockPin(2) LP-2 LP-2 LockPin(2) WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 GND 2 2 GND
N.C. 3 3 3 3 NC RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESET1 RESETN 3 3 RESETN
GND 4 4 4 4 GND GND 8 8 8 8 GND VDD5_CUT 4 4 VDD5_CUT
ATTENTION 5 5 5 5 ATTENTION VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 GND 5 5 GND
MEMORY 6 6 6 6 MEMORY YC23 USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
PROCESSING 7 7 7 7 PROCESSING 1 REMOTE_FAM[1] USB_DP0 11 11 11 11 USB_DP0 AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
ENERGYSAVERLED 8 8 8 8 ENERGYSAVERLED 2 GND GND 12 12 12 12 GND RESERVE 8 8 NC eKUIO
INT_ENERGYSAVERLED_N 9 9 9 9 INT_ENERGYSAVERLED_N 3 5V AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 RESERVE 9 9 NC
KEY0 10 10 10 10 KEY0 WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 RESERVE 10 10 NC Board
KEY1 11 11 11 11 KEY1 RESET 15 15 15 15 RESET0 GND 11 11 GND
KEY2 12 12 12 12 KEY2 LockPin(1) LP-1 RESERVE 12 12 NC
GND 13 13 13 13 KEY3 LockPin(2) LP-2 RESERVE 13 13 NC
SCAN0
SCAN1
14
15
14
15
14
15
14
15
SCAN0
SCAN1 Wi-Fi PWB GND
RESERVE
14
15
14
15
GND
NC
SCAN2 16 16 16 16 SCAN2 YC9 YC4 RESERVE 16 16 NC
SCAN3 17 17 17 17 SCAN3 YC62 GND 1 1 6 6 GND GND 17 17 GND
JOB_LED 18 18 18 18 JOB_LED SD_D3 1 1 1 1 SD_D3 5.0V4_1 2 2 5 5 5V_CUT0 USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
N.C. 19 19 19 19 N.C. SD_D2 2 2 2 2 SD_D2 GND 3 3 4 4 GND USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN *Option
LED2 20 20 20 20 LED2 SD_CMD 3 3 3 3 SD_CMD 5.0V1 4 4 3 3 5V VBUS 20 20 VBUS
GND 4 4 4 4 GND GND 5 5 2 2 GND LockPin1 LP-1
SD_CLK 5 5 5 5 SD_CLK 5.0V4_2 6 6 1 1 5V_CUT1 LockPin2 LP-2
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
Operation panel PWB 1 SD_D1
SD_D0
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
SD_D1
SD_D0
GND 9 9 9 9 GND
VIO 10 10 10 10 VIO
YC1 YC10 VBAT 11 11 11 11 VBAT
KEY0 10 10 1 10 1 1 KEY0 GND 12 12 12 12 GND
KEY1 9 9 2 9 2 2 KEY1 PAVDD 13 13 13 13 PAVDD
KEY2 8 8 3 8 3 3 KEY2 GND 14 14 14 14 GND
KEY3 7 7 4 7 4 4 KEY3 HOSTWAKE 15 15 15 15 HOSTWAKE
SCAN4 6 6 5 6 5 5 SCAN4 GND 16 16 16 16 GND
Relay
SCAN5 5 5 6 5 6 6 SCAN5 NC 17 17 17 17 RESET
SCAN6 4 4 7 4 7 7 SCAN6 GND 18 18 18 18 DETECT
SCAN7 3 3 8 3 8 8 SCAN7 NC 19 19 19 19 USB_+
10key_detect 2 2 9 2 9 9 10key_detect NC 20 20 20 20 USB_-
GND 1 1 10 1 10 10 GND
10 key PWB
IB-35
NK-7100 *Option *Option (Except 120V model)
NK-7110 (120V)
9-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Installation Guide
9 - 5 Installation Guide
(1) DP-7100
DP-7100 / (Document processor)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B
Color MFP Black & White MFP

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 30ppm,32ppm,
35/35ppm,40/40ppm, 35ppm,40ppm
50/50ppm,60/55ppm
Black & White MFP

40ppm,50ppm,60ppm
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP(A), see Page 1 to Page 5,Page 10 to Page 28.
For installation with a MFP(B), see Page 6 to Page 28.
Français
1.
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A), voir Page 1 à Page 5,Page 10 à Page 28.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(B), voir Page 6 à Page 28.
1.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP(A), consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 5,páginas de la 10 a la 28.
Para la instalación con un MFP(B), consulte las páginas de la 6 a la 28.
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) siehe Seiten 1 bis 5,Seiten 10 bis 28.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(B) siehe Seiten 6 bis 28.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A), vedere le pagine da 1 a 5,pagine da 10 a 28.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(B), vedere le pagine da 6 a 28.
简体中文
1.
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到 MFP(A) 上时，请参见 P1-P5,P10-P28。
安装到 MFP(B) 上时，请参见 P6-P28。
1.한국어
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
MFP(A) 에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~5 페이지 ,10 페이지 ~28 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
MFP(B) 에 설치하는 경우 6 페이지 ~28 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
装着する対象によって、取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、以下のページに記載しています。
MFP(A) に設置する場合；1 ページ～ 5 ページ、 10 ページ～ 28 ページ
MFP(B) に設置する場合；6 ページ～ 28 ページ
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B C DD E A
L
F G(M4x10)
G(M4x10) H I(M3x8)
120V (North America / 230V (Europe) 100V

Latin America)
KJ KJ JK K J M
ձձ
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
ߑ
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de
rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes
suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den
gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
ߒ
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴኎૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖˈ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦ࣑ᗵ᨝лǄ

┍⸽䖼㜄GḔ㥉G䊀㢨䘸GSG㝸㻝㣠ᴴG⻍㛨G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈Gⵌ☐㐐G㥐ᶤ䚌㐡㐐㝘U
ྠᲕရ࡟ᅛᐃࢸ࣮ࣉࠊ⦆⾪ᮦࡀࡘ࠸࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡣࠊᚲࡎྲྀࡾእࡍࡇ࡜ࠋ
ղ ճ
մ յ
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ն
ն շ
շ
0mm
0mm
BB
1mm
1mm
BB
ո
ո չ
չ
AA
C
C
պ
պ
DD
ջ
ջ
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
ռ
ռ
ս
ս
EE
վ
վ տ
տ
ր
ր ց
ց ւ
ւ
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
փ
G(M4x10)
ք द
K
J
H I(M3x8)
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
ध
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B 㹁 D
B
E F G(M4x10) H I(M3x8) L
120V (North America / Latin America)

J K
suministradas. 230V (Europe)
gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden. J K

100V
M
ձ ղ
B 0mm
ߑ
B 1mm
ճ մ
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
յ ն
B
ո
E
LB
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
չ
B
G(M4x10)
պ ջ
K
J
I(M3x8)
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ռ
B
ON
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A 20mm 20mm
c
B 20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作，准备一张 A3 原稿（a），距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线（b）并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线（c）。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿（a）并进行测试复印，确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20mm 20mm A
c
20mm B
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿（a），如果偏移值在标准值以上时，对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整。
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
（주의） 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。

MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
（注意）画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 14. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 17. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page 21. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 14. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 17. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 21 <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 14. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 17. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 21. <Valor de referencia>Dentro de ±1,5 %
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 14. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 17. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 21. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 14. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 21. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整，否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度第 14 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度第 17 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值第 21 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .

・선단경사확인 14 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 17 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・등배도 확인 21 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±1.5% 이내
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 14 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
両面：±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 17 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・等倍度確認 21 ページ＜基準値＞ ±1.5% 以内
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 23. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 25. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 27.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 23. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 25. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 27.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 23. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 25. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 27.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 23. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 25. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 27.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 23. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 25. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 27.
・确认前端定时调整第 23 页
±2.5mm 以内< 标准值 >
・确认中心线第 25 页 < 标准值 >
单面：±2.0mm 以内，
双面：±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时，可以同时自动进行等倍值，前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整第 27 页
・선단 타이밍 확인 23 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±2.5mm 이내

・센터 라인확인 25 페이지 ＜기준치＞ 단면：±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면：±3.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하면 등배도 조정 , 선단타이밍 조정 , 센터 라인조정의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고에 의한 자동조정 27 페이지
・先端タイミング確認 23 ページ
＜基準値＞ ±2.5mm 以内
・センターライン確認 25 ページ
＜基準値＞片面：±2.0mm 以内、
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 27 ページ
13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Checking the angle of leading edge]

1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]

1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内。
　　　　　双面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준체＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±4.0mm 以内
14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2.
2. 3.
3. A
444
B
333
4.
4.
555
Adjust
Adjustthe
Adjust theposition
the positionof
position ofthe
of theDP
the DPunit
DP unit(A).
unit (A).
(A). Regolare
Regolarela
Regolare laposizione
la posizionedell'unità
posizione dell'unitàDP
dell'unità DP(A).
DP (A).
(A).
Loosen
Loosen the
the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw
Loosen the adjusting screw (5). (5).
(5). Allentare
Allentare la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione
Allentare la vite di regolazione (5). (5).
(5).
For
Forcopy
For copyexample
copy example(d):
example (d):Slide
(d): Slidethe
Slide theDP
the DPunit
DP unit(A)
unit (A)to
(A) tothe
to themachine
the machinerear
machine rear().
rear ().
(). Per
Perun
Per unesempio
un esempiodi
esempio dicopia
di copia(d):
copia (d):
(d):
For
Forcopy
For copyexample
copy example(e):
example (e):Slide
(e): Slidethe
Slide theDP
the DPunit
DP unit(A)
unit (A)to
(A) tothe
to themachine
the machinefront
machine front().
front ().
(). Far
Farscivolare
Far scivolarel'unità
scivolare l'unitàDP
l'unità DPDP(A)
(A)verso
(A) versoilililretro
verso retrodella
retro dellamacchina
della macchina((( ).).).
macchina
Tighten
Tightenthe
Tighten theadjusting
the adjustingscrew
adjusting screw(5).
screw (5).
(5). Per
Perun
Per unesempio
un esempiodi
esempio dicopia
di copia(e):
copia (e):
(e):
Perform
Performaaatest
Perform testcopy.
test copy.
copy. Far
Farscivolare
Far scivolarel'unità
scivolare l'unitàDP
l'unità DPDP(A)
(A)verso
(A) versola
verso lalaparte
parteanteriore
parte anterioredella
anteriore dellamacchina
della macchina((( ).).).
macchina
Stringere
Stringere la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione
Stringere la vite di regolazione (5). (9).
(5).
Eseguire
Eseguireuna
Eseguire unacopia
una copiadi
copia diprova.
di prova.
prova.
Régler
Réglerla
Régler laposition
la positionde
position del'unité
de l'unitéCD
l'unité CD(A).
CD (A).
(A). 䈳㢲'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅Ⲵս㖞Ǆ
䈳㢲'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅Ⲵս㖞Ǆ
䈳㢲'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅Ⲵս㖞Ǆ
Desserrez
Desserrezla
Desserrez lavis
la visde
vis deréglage
de réglage(5).
réglage (5).
(5). ᤗᶮ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
ᤗᶮ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
ᤗᶮ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pourl’exemple
Pour l’exemplede
l’exemple decopie
de copie(d):
copie (d):
(d): ༽ঠṧᕐ˄G˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘਾ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄G˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘਾ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄G˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘਾ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
Faire
Faireglisser
Faire glisserl'unité
glisser l'unitéCD
l'unité CD(A)
CD (A)àààl'arrière
(A) l'arrièrede
l'arrière dela
de lamachine
la machine((( ).).).
machine ༽ঠṧᕐ˄H˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘࡽ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄H˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘࡽ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄H˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘࡽ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
Pour
Pourl’exemple
Pour l’exemplede
l’exemple decopie
de copie(e):
copie (e):
(e): ㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Faire
Faireglisser
Faire glisserl'unité
glisser l'unitéCD
l'unité CD(A)
CD (A)àààl'avant
(A) l'avantde
l'avant dela
de lamachine
la machine((( ).).).
machine 䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
Serrez
Serrezla
Serrez lavis
la visde
vis deréglage
de réglage(5).
réglage (5).
(5).
Effectuer
Effectuerune
Effectuer unecopie
une copiede
copie detest.
de test.
test.
Ajuste
Ajustela
Ajuste laposición
la posiciónde
posición dela
de launidad
la unidadDP
unidad DP(A).
DP (A).
(A). kw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG㢌G㠸㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚌㉬㟈U
kw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG㢌G㠸㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚌㉬㟈U
kw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG㢌G㠸㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚌㉬㟈U
Afloje
Aflojeel
Afloje eltornillo
el tornillode
tornillo deajuste
de ajuste(5).
ajuste (5).
(5). 㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Parala
Para lacopia
la copiade
copia demuestra
de muestra(d):
muestra (d):
(d): ㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
Deslice
Deslicela
Deslice launidad
la unidadDP
unidad DP(A)
DP (A)hacia
(A) haciala
hacia laparte
la parteposterior
parte posteriorde
posterior dela
de lamáquina
la máquina((( ).).).
máquina GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G◘㯱OGGGGPG㡰⦐Gⴴ㛨㨰㉬㟈U
GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G◘㯱OGGGGPG㡰⦐Gⴴ㛨㨰㉬㟈U
GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G◘㯱OGGGGPG㡰⦐Gⴴ㛨㨰㉬㟈U
Para
Parala
Para lacopia
la copiade
copia demuestra
de muestra(e):
muestra (e):
(e): ㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
Deslice
Deslicela
Deslice launidad
la unidadDP
unidad DP(A)
DP (A)hacia
(A) haciael
hacia elfrente
el frentede
frente dela
de lamáquina
la máquina((( ).).).
máquina GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G㚒㯱GOGGGGPG㡰⦐G␭ᷜ㨰㉬㟈U
GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G㚒㯱GOGGGGPG㡰⦐G␭ᷜ㨰㉬㟈U
GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G㚒㯱GOGGGGPG㡰⦐G␭ᷜ㨰㉬㟈U
Apriete
Aprieteel
Apriete eltornillo
el tornillode
tornillo deajuste
de ajuste(5).
ajuste (5).
(5). 㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Haga
Hagauna
Haga unacopia
una copiade
copia deprueba.
de prueba.
prueba. 䊀㏘䏬G㾨䙰⪰G䚝⏼␘U
䊀㏘䏬G㾨䙰⪰G䚝⏼␘U
䊀㏘䏬G㾨䙰⪰G䚝⏼␘U
Stellen
StellenSie
Stellen Siedie
Sie diePosition
die Positionder
Position derDP-Einheit
der DP-Einheit(A)
DP-Einheit (A)ein.
(A) ein.
ein. '3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࡢ఩⨨ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࡢ఩⨨ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࡢ఩⨨ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Lösen
LösenSie
Lösen Siedie
Sie dieEinstellschraube
die Einstellschraube(5).
Einstellschraube (5).
(5). ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
FürKopienmuster
Für Kopienmuster(d):
Kopienmuster (d):
(d): ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝGࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔᚋഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝGࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔᚋഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝGࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔᚋഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Schieben
SchiebenSie
Schieben Siedie
Sie dieDP-Einheit
die DP-Einheit(A)
DP-Einheit (A)zur
(A) zurGeräterückseite
zur Geräterückseite((( ).).).
Geräterückseite ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝHࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔ๓ഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝHࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔ๓ഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝHࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔ๓ഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (e):(e):
(e): ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Schieben
SchiebenSie
Schieben Siedie
Sie dieDP-Einheit
die DP-Einheit(A)
DP-Einheit (A)zur
(A) zurGerätevorderseite
zur Gerätevorderseite((( ).).).
Gerätevorderseite ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Die
DieEinstellschraube
Die Einstellschraube(5)
Einstellschraube (5)festziehen.
(5) festziehen.
festziehen.
Eine
EineTestkopie
Eine Testkopieerstellen.
Testkopie erstellen.
erstellen.
15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
6.After the adjustment, install the inner cover (4) which is removed in step 3.Close the DP cover (3).
7. A Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 9 on page 2).
B Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 4 on page 6).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
6.Après l'ajustement, installez le capot interne (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 3.Refermez le capot du DP (3).
7. A Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 9 à la page 2.)
B Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 4 à la page 6.)
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
6.Después del ajuste, instale la cubierta interna (4) que se quitó en el paso 3.Cierre la cubierta del DP (3).
7. A Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 9 en la página 2).
B Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 4 en la página 6).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
6.Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Abdeckung (4), die in Schritt 3 entfernt wurde.Schließen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (3).
7. A Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 9 auf Seite 2).
B Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 4 auf Seite 6).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
6.Al termine della regolazione, installare il coperchio interno (4), rimosso al punto 3.Chiudere il coperchio del DP (3).
7. A Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 9 a pagina 2).
B Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 4 a pagina 6).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整结束后，重新安装在步骤 3 中取下的内部盖板 (4)。关闭 DP 盖板（3）。
7. A 拆下原稿垫（C），参照第 2 页的步骤 9 再次装上。
B 拆下原稿垫（C），参照第 6 页的步骤 4 再次装上。
5.벨크로 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

＜기준치＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
　　　　　양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
6.조정 후에 순서 3 에서 분리한 내부 커버 (4) 를 설치합니다 .DP 커버 (3) 를 닫습니다 .
7. A 원고매트 (C) 를 제거하고 2 페이지 순서 9 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
B 원고매트 (C) 를 제거하고 6 페이지 순서 4 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。

6.調整終了後、手順 3 で外したインナーカバー(4) を取り付ける。DP カバー(3) を閉める。
7. A 原稿マット (C) を取り外し、
2 ページの手順 9 を参考に再度取り付ける。
B 原稿マット (C) を取り外し、
16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]

1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值。如果超过标准值时，必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우：±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞片面の場合：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合：±4.0mm 以内
17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A 2.
2. 3.
3.
4.4. 5.5.
4
4
3
3
Adjust
Adjust the
the height
height of
of DP.
DP. Regolazione
Regolazione dell’altezza
dell’altezza del
del DP
DP
Loosen
Loosen the
the nut
nut (3).
(3). Allentare
Allentare ilil dado
dado (3).
(3).
For
For copy
copy example
example (f):
(f): Loosen
Loosen the
the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di di copia
copia (f):
(f): Allentare
Allentare la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
For
For copy
copy example
example (g):
(g): Tighten
Tighten the
the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di di copia
copia (g):
(g): Stringere
Stringere la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
Retighten the nut (3).
Retighten the nut (3). Stringere di nuovo il dado
Stringere di nuovo il dado (3). (3).
Réglez
Réglez la
la hauteur
hauteur du
du DP.
DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
Desserrez
Desserrez l’écrou
l’écrou (3).
(3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (f):
l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez
Desserrez la
la vis
vis de
de réglage
réglage (4).
(4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4).
l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Resserrez
Resserrez l’écrou
l’écrou (3).
(3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Ajuste
Ajuste la
la altura
altura del
del DP.
DP. kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
Afloje
Afloje la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (f):
(f): Afloje
Afloje el
el tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (g):
(g): Apriete
Apriete elel tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Vuelva
Vuelva a a apretar
apretar la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Die
Die Höhe
Höhe des
des DP
DP einstellen.
einstellen. '3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
Lösen
Lösen Sie die Mutter
Sie die Mutter (3).
(3). ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (f)
(f) :: Lösen
Lösen Sie
Sie die
die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4).
(4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die
Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4)
(4) festziehen.
festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ziehen
Ziehen Sie
Sie die
die Mutter
Mutter (3)
(3) wieder
wieder fest.
fest. ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ն
6.
շ
7.
A
ո
8.
չ
9.
պ
10.
ջ
11.
19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
12.Make a proof copy again.

13.Repeat steps 1 to 12 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
12.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

13.Répétez les étapes 1 à 12 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
12.Haga otra copia de prueba.

13.Repita los pasos 1 a 12 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
12.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

13.Die Schritte 1 bis 12 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
12.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

13.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 12 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
12.再次进行测试复印。
13.反复操作步骤 1~12，直至复印样张的线（2）为标准值内。
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
12.다시 벨크로를 합니다 .

13.벨크로 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 12 을 반복합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
12.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
13.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 12 を繰り返す。
20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- de ±1,5%
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procédure suivante. Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
<Valeur de référence> ner(surface)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
de ±1,5% ner (arrière)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2.Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ación secundaria del escáner(anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
<Valor de referencia> ación secundaria del escáner(reverso).
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale

1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
<Valore di riferimento> ner (superficie)
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% ner(lato posteriore)
[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（正面）
如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Sub Scan(B) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（反面）
< 标准值 >
对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Sub Scan(B)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（뒷면）
＜기준치＞
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面）
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Sub Scan(B)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面）
＜基準値＞
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
X X'
A X' X
B 3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,02 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值达

在长度偏短时复印样本（h）（j）：调高设定值到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时复印样本（i）（k）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.02% 对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

길이가 짧은 경우 벨크로 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . .
길이가 긴 경우 벨크로 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.02% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4

長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j)：設定値を上げるを繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k)：設定値を下げる＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.02% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
2.5mm
2.5mm B
2
1 2
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)
<Reference value> Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing(rear side)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)
<Valeur de référence> Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert> Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteri-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm ore)
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteri-
ore).
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端对位 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > Back Head ：调整前端对位 ( 反面 )
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 反面 )
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ Back Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 Back Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head ：先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail ：後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
＜基準値＞ Back Head：先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail：後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
2.5mm
B 2.5mm
1 2
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.21 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,21 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,21 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,21 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,21 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范

在前端定时偏快时复印样本（l）：调低设定值围内。
在前端定时偏慢时复印样本（m）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.21mm 线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 벨크로 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 벨크로 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
1 스텝당 변화량：0.21mm
4.벨크로를 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰

先端タイミングが短い場合コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を下げる。り返す。
先端タイミングが長い場合コピーサンプル (m)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.21mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。
24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。

1.确认原稿（a）中心线（1）和复印样本中心线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front ：中心位置（正面）的调整
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Back ：中心位置（反面）的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 벨크로 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . Back：센터 위치（뒷면）의 조정
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）
の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Back：センター位置（裏面）の調整
＜基準値＞片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): riduce il valore. scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): aumenta il riferimento.
valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm

当中心向前偏移时复印样本（n）：调低设定值围内。
当中心向内偏移时复印样本（o）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.085mm 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이：±2.0mm 이내
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を

センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n)：設定値を下げ繰り返す。
る。＜基準値＞
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる。片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina surface adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 4.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 3 until "OK" appears.
For details, see the service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la tou-
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'origi- che Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
nal du DP 4.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
l'original de réglage. fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 3 jusqu'à
2.Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
appuyer sur la touche Start. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 3.Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP realizar un ajuste de anverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 4.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2.Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 3 hasta que aparezca "OK"
de Start. en la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 3.Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan- betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
den ist 4.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
2.Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start- wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 3, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste betätigen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 3.Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 4.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
2.Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 3
tasto di Start. fino a quando appare "OK".
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。

没有 DP 调整用原稿时 4.如果屏幕上出现 "OK"（完成），则表示调整完成。
1.进入维修保养模式 U411，选择［DP Auto Adj］，输出测试原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上，按 Start 键。重复步骤 2 和 3，直到 "OK"（完成）出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 본체로 세트하고 시작 키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 다.
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 설정하고 [DP Auto Adj] 를 눌러 조정된 원고를 4.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작 키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 3 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合う。
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出 4.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
力する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 3 を繰り返す。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
5mm
B
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until "OK" appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca "OK"
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare "OK".
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上，并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。重复步骤 1 和 2，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FU(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行正面的详细内容请参照维修手册。
调整。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 “OK” 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .

1.DP 자동조정원고 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
DP 본체로 세트합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작키의 순서로 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、Start キーの詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) DP-7110

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 30ppm,32ppm,
35/35ppm,40/40ppm, 35ppm,40ppm
50/50ppm,60/55ppm
Black & White MFP

40ppm,50ppm,60ppm
English
Français
1.
Français
1.
Español
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
1.
Italiano
Italiano
简体中文
1.
1.한국어
1.日本語
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B(L) B(R) C(M4x14) D E F G A
I P Q P
H(M3x8 BLACK) K(M3x8) L L
M M
K(M3x8)
H(M3x8
I BLACK)
J J
120V (North America / 230V(Europe)

230V (Europe) 100V
Latin America)
O N
O NO O N R
N
ձձ
Be
Be sure
sure to
to remove
remove any
any tape
tape and/or
and/or cushioning
cushioning materials
materials from
from the
the parts
parts supplied.
supplied. ߑ
Veillez
Veillez àà retirer
retirer les
les morceaux
morceaux de
de bande
bande adhésive
adhésive et/ou
et/ou les
les matériaux
matériaux de
de
rembourrage
rembourrage des des pièces
pièces fournies.
fournies.
Asegúrese
Asegúrese de
de quitar
quitar todas
todas las
las cintas
cintas y/o
y/o material
material amortiguador
amortiguador de
de las
las partes
partes
suministradas.
suministradas.
Stellen
Stellen Sie
Sie sicher,
sicher, dass
dass sämtliche
sämtliche Klebebänder
Klebebänder und/oder
und/oder Polstermaterial
Polstermaterial von
von den
den ߒ
gelieferten
gelieferten Teilen
Teilen entfernt
entfernt wurden.
wurden.
Rimuovere
Rimuovere tutti
tutti ii nastri
nastri adesivi
adesivi e/o
e/o ii materiali
materiali di
di protezione
protezione dalle
dalle parti
parti fornite.
fornite.

ղ C(M4x14)
ճ
B(L)
B(L) C(M4x14)
A
B(R)
մ C(M4x14) յ
D
C(M4x14)
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ն շ
E C(M4x14)
շ շ-2
ո շ-2
ߑ
շ-2
ߑ ߒ
ߓ ߔ
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ߕ ߖ A
ߗ ߘ
ո չ
F
G
H(M3x8 BLACK)
պ ջ
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ռ ս
վ ࠉտ
ր ց
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
փ A
JJ
द ध
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
न ऩ
प फ
ब भ
म
N
N
O O
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
य
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B(L) B(R) C(M4x14) D E F G
I P Q P
H(M3x8 BLACK) K(M3x8) L ML M
K(M3x8)
IH(M3x8 BLACK)
J J
120V (North America / 230V

230V (Europe)
(Europe) 100V
Latin America)
O
N ON N O O N R ձ
ձ
ߑ
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes ߒ
suministradas.

C(M4x14)
ղ ճ
B(L) C(M4x14)
C(M4x14)
B(L)
A
B(R)
B(R)
մ յ
C(M4x14)
D
C(M4x14)
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ն շ
B
E C(M4x14)
շ շ-2
ո շ-2
ߑ
շ-2 ߒ
ߑ
ߓ ߔ
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ߕ ߖ
B
ߗ ߘ
ߎ չ
H(M3x8 BLACK)
պ ջ
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ռ B
ս վ
տ ր
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
փ
ւ
ւ փ
փ
B
J
J
J
Q
ք
ք द
द
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8) P
K(M3x8) P
L
L
द
ध
ध न ध
न
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ऩ
B
प
N
ON
13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A 20mm 20mm
c
B 20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
center.
[Funktionsprüfung]
gezeichnet sind.

[ 动作确认 ]
[ 동작확인 ]
[ 動作確認 ]
14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20mm 20mm A
c
20mm A
B
b B
20mm
gap.
ción.
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整

15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 24. <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.


16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
time.

조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 , 등배도 , 선단타이밍 , 센터 라인의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고를 사용한 자동조정은 30 페이지 참조
17
[CONFIDENTIAL]





1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B (L) A
B
C B (R)
C
C B
B (L) C
B (R)
2. Remove the left hinge cover (F) and the angle control fitting (E). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14 screws (C) on the left and right fixing fittings (B(L))(B(R)).
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (F) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (E). Desserrer les 2 vis M4 × 14 (C) sur les fixations gauche et
droite (B(L))(B(R)).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. Quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (F) y el herraje de control de ángulo (E). Afloje los 2 tornillos M4 × 14 (C) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho
(B(L))(B(R)).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (F) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (E) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14 Schrauben (C) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterungen
(B(L))(B(R)) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (F) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (E). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14 (C) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di fissaggio
(B(L))(B(R)) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.拆下左部铰链盖板 (F) 以及角度限制工具 (E)。拧松左右固定工具 (B(L))(B(R)) 的 2 颗 M4x14(C) 螺丝。

3.旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉（3）以调整 DP 位置。
对于复印样本 (d) ：逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。　
对于复印样本 (e) ：顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。
按比例尺的更改量：约 1.0mm
2.좌 힌지커버 (F) 및 각도 고정쇠 (E) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (B(L))(B(R)) 의 나사 M4x14(C) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우：조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 .
샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 ： 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량：약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
2.左ヒンジカバー(F) および角度規制金具 (E) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (B(L))(B(R)) のビス M4x14(C)2 本を緩める。

3.右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP の位置を調整する。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合：調整ビスを左に回し、 DP を奥へ動かす。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合：調整ビスを右に回し、 DP を手前へ動かす。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 1.0mm
19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14 screws (C) that have been loosened in step 2.
7. A Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 1).
B Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 8).
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis M4 × 14 (C) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7. A Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1) .
B Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 8) .
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos M4 × 14 (C) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7. A Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
B Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 8).
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14 Schrauben (C), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7. A Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1).
B Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 8).
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14 (C) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7. A Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
B Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 8).
　　　　　双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后，重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14 螺丝（C）。
7. A 拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次装上。
B 拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 8 页的步骤 5 再次装上。
5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

6.조정종료 후 순서 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14(C) 2 개를 조입니다 .
7. A 원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 1 페이지 순서 5 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
B 원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 8 페이지 순서 5 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .

6.調整終了後、手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14(C)2 本を締め付ける。
7. A 原稿マット (M) を取り外し、
B 原稿マット (M) を取り外し、
20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g


réglage suivant.

siguiente ajuste.


　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3
A A
5
A
B
B
6
9
8
7
4 10
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting
screw (9).
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5

2.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A) 4.Réglez la hauteur du DP.
mm (10)
3.Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis Desserrez l’écrou (8).
Resserrez l’écrou (8).
déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis
5. Reposer le couvercle arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3.
(7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7) de réglage (9).
du DP (A). Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de
réglage (9).
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el
tornillo de ajuste (9).
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm

2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen. 4.Die Höhe des DP einstellen.
(10)
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube Lösen Sie die Mutter (8).
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Ein-
5. Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung (7)
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann stellschraube (9).
wieder anbringen.
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
abnehmen. (9) festziehen.
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite
di regolazione (9).
2.打开 DP（A）的上盖板（3）。 4.调整 DP 的高度。每 1 格的移动量：约 0.5mm（10）

3.拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5)，将塑松驰螺母（8）。将螺母（8）按原样紧固好。
料片 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除，拆下 DP 主机复印样张（f）时：松弛调整螺丝（9）。 5.重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板（7）。
(A) 的后盖板 (7)。复印样张（g）时：紧固调整螺丝（9）。
2.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 . 4.DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 . 1 개 변화량：약 0.5mm(10)

3.TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 . 너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 .
스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해 샘플 카피 (f) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 느슨 5.순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로
DP(A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 . 하게 합니다 . 장착합니다 .
샘플 카피 (g) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 조입
니다 .
2.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。 4.DP の高さを調整する。 1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 0.5mm(10)

3.TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、ストナット (8) をゆるめる。ナット (8) を元通り締める。
ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、コピーサンプル (f) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 5.手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り
DP(A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。ゆるめる。取り付ける。
コピーサンプル (g) の場合：調整ビス (9) を
締める。
22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
6. A Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 1).
B Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 8).
6. A Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1).
B Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 8).
6. A Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
B Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 8).
6. A Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1) .
B Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 8) .
6. A Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).

B Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 8).
6. A 拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次装上。

B 拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 8 页的步骤 5 再次装上。
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
6. A 원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 1 페이지 순서 5 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .

B 원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 8 페이지 순서 5 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
7.다시 테스트 카피를 합니다 .
8.샘플 카피 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 6 을 반복합니다 .
6. A 原稿マット (M) を取り外し、1 ページの手順 5 を参考に再度取り付ける。

B 原稿マット (M) を取り外し、8 ページの手順 5 を参考に再度取り付ける。
23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
X X'
A X' X
A
B 3 3
B X
X'
2 X'
X
2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification
according to the following procedure. Sub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification
<Reference value>
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.

1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner(surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Main Scan(CIS):Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du CIS du scanner
procédure suivante. Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5%
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5%
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
escáner.(anverso)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia,
Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan (CIS): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
<Valor de referencia> escáner
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung
<Bezugswert>
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo compreso fra ±1,5%
scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa proce- 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
dura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Main Scan(CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento di CIS main-scan dello scanner.
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere com- Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner
preso fra ±1,5%

如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Main Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取主扫描等倍度的调整
< 标准值 > Sub Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Main Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 주주사 등배도의 조정
＜기준치＞ Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS 의 스캔 부주사 등배도의 조정

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面 )
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Main Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り主走査等倍度の調整
＜基準値＞ Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整
24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
X X'
X' X
A
A
B
3 3
X
X'
X'
X B
2 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3.Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
±1,5%


3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합

길이가 짧은 경우 샘플 카피 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . 니다 .
길이가 긴 경우 샘플 카피 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내

25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
2.5mm
A
B 2.5mm
2
B 2
1
a l m
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.
procédure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.
<Valeur de référence> CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端定时 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端定时 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > CIS Head ：调整 CIS 读取时的前段对位
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail ：调整 CIS 读取时的后端定时

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ CIS Head： CIS 스캔 시의 선단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 CIS Tail： CIS 스캔 시의 후단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .

＜基準値＞ CIS Head： CIS 読み込み時の先端タイミングを調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail： CIS 読み込み時の後端タイミングを調整する
26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
2.5mm
2.5mm A
B
2
2 B
1
a l m
value.
erhöhen.


3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 샘플 카피 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . .
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 샘플 카피 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.3mm 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .

27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
2
B 2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line
<Reference value>
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS
dure suivante.
<Valor de referencia> CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS
cara: ±2,0 mm
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie
<Bezugswert>
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS

移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 CIS ：CIS 的中心位置的调整

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
. 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . CIS：CIS 의 센터 위치조정

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 CIS：CIS のセンター位置の調整
28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
2
2mm/ B
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o


3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 반복합니다 .
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내

センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
る。両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm
29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment original. out rear-side adjustment.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP procéder au réglage du côté arrière.
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer 5. Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
l'original de réglage. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message "OK"
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP ajuste de reverso.
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca "OK"
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un en la pantalla.
ajuste de anverso. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das 5. Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betäti- Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 5. Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare "OK".
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 4.将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。

3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 4.원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정을 합

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 니다 .
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .
3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 4.原稿を FaceDown で DP へセットし、スタートキーを押し、裏面の調整を

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合行う。
1. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出力 5.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、スタートキーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰り返す。
3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、
スタートキーを押し、表面の調整を行詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
う。
30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
5mm
A
B
F 149 1mm B
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until “OK” appears.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca “OK”
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
cie.

调整。

1.DP 자동 조정 원고를 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이라고 표시된 곳 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
에서 부터 원고를 셋팅합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작키의 순서 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .

2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、スタートキー詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
の順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
5mm
A
B
B F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until “OK” appears.
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FD(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out rear-side adjustment.
4.Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arri- 6.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.
ère) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
lequel F et R sont indiqués. jusqu'à ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
FD(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage du côté
arrière.
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca “OK”
FD(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
reverso.
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen.
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
DP eingeführt wird. fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wieder-
5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FD(ChartB)] und die Start- holen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung aus- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
führen zu lassen.
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata. Se compare
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FD(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione del lato pos- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
teriore.
4.完成正面调整后，将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下，并首先将标有 F 和 6.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
5.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FD(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行反面的重复步骤 4 和 5，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
调整。详细内容请参照维修手册。
4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 6.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FD(ChartB)], 시작키 순서로 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 5 를 반복합니다 .
뒷면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
4.表面の調整完了後、 DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、 F、R が書かれて 6.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

いる方から DP へセットする。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
5.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FD(ChartB)]、スタートキー認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 4 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
の順に押し、裏面の調整を行う。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) DP-7120

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 30ppm,32ppm,
35ppm,40ppm
English
Français
1.
Français
1.
Español
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
1.
Italiano
Italiano
简体中文
1.
1.한국어
1.日本語
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
AA B
B C
C B C D
D E
E D
II A
A B C D E
E
120V
120V (North
F (North America
120V
120V (North
America //
(North America
230V
230V //
(Europe)
(Europe)
America 230V
230V (Europe)
(Europe) 100V
100V
F
F F
Latin America)Latin America)
Latin America)Latin America)
G HH
H G
G H
H H J
J G
G H G H G
ձ
Be
Be sure to
Be sure
sure to
remove any
to remove
remove any
tape and/or
any tape
tape and/or
and/or cushioning
from the
materials from
from the
parts supplied.
the parts
parts supplied.
supplied. ߑ
ߑ
Veillez
Veillez àà retirer
retirer les
les morceaux
morceaux de de bande
bande adhésive
adhésive et/ou
et/ou les
les matériaux
matériaux dede
rembourrage
rembourrage des des pièces
pièces fournies.
fournies.
Asegúrese
Asegúrese de de quitar
quitar todas
todas las
las cintas
cintas y/o
y/o material
material amortiguador
amortiguador de de las
las partes
partes
suministradas.
suministradas.
suministradas.
Stellen
Stellen Sie sicher,
Stellen Sie
Sie sicher,
gelieferten
dass sämtliche
sicher, dass
dass sämtliche
Teilen entfernt
sämtliche Klebebänder
wurden.
Polstermaterial von
und/oder Polstermaterial
Polstermaterial von
den
von den
den ߒ
ߒ
gelieferten
gelieferten Teilen
Teilen entfernt
entfernt wurden.
wurden.
Rimuovere
Rimuovere tutti ii nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
Rimuovere tutti
tutti i nastri
nastri adesivi
adesivi e/o
e/o ii materiali
materiali di
di protezione
protezione dalle
dalle parti
parti fornite.
fornite.

ղ
ղ ճ
ճ
մ
մ յ
յ
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ն
ն
0mm
0mm
BB
1mm
1mm
BB
շ
շ ո
ո
AA
CC
չ
չ
DD
պ
պ ջ
ջ
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ռ A
E E
ս վ
տ ր
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ւ
10 mm
10 mm
փ ք
(120V/230V model) (100V model)
H
J
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
BB CC D E
A D
F
F I
120V (North America / Latin America)

GH H G
suministradas. 230V (Europe)
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den GH H
G
100V
J
ձ ղ
B
0mm
ߑ
1mm
B
ߒ
ճ մ
A
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
յ
B
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
չ
B
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
պ
B
10 mm
10 mm
ջ ռ
(120V/230V model) (100V model)
H
J
ON
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20mm 20mm A
c
20mm B
20mm
[Operation check]
center.
[Funktionsprüfung]
gezeichnet sind.

[ 动作确认 ]
[ 동작확인 ]
[ 動作確認 ]
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A 20mm 20mm
c
B 20mm
20mm
gap.
ción.
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整。

10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 21. <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.


11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
time.

조정용 원고를 사용하면 등배도 조정 , 선단타이밍 조정 , 센터 라인조정의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고에 의한 자동조정 27 페이지
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]





1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준체＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5
A
B 4
8 e
6
2.Open the DP cover (4).

3.Remove the inner cover (5).
4.Lift up the lever (6).
In case of copy sample (d):Turn the dial (7) towards the direction of the arrow d.
In case of copy sample (e):Turn the dial (7) towards the direction of the arrow e.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm (8)
2.Ouvrez le capot du DP (4).

3.Retirez le capot interne (5).
4.Soulevez le levier (6).
Dans le cas de l'exemple de copie (d):Tournez le cadran (7) dans la direction de la flèche d.
Dans le cas de l'exemple de copie (e):Tournez le cadran (7) dans la direction de la flèche e.
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 1,0 mm (8)
2.Abra la cubierta del DP (4).

3.Quite la cubierta interna (5).
4.Levante la palanca (6).
En caso de muestra de copia (d):Gire el selector (7) en la dirección de la flecha d.
En caso de muestra de copia (e):Gire el selector (7) en la dirección de la flecha e.
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 1,0 mm (8)
2.Öffnen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (4).

3.Entfernen Sie die innere Abdeckung (5).
4.Heben Sie den Hebel (6) an.
Bei Verwendung der Kopiervorlage (d):Drehen Sie das Rad (7) in Pfeilrichtung d.
Bei Verwendung der Kopiervorlage (e):Drehen Sie das Rad (7) in Pfeilrichtung e.
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 1,0 mm (8)
2.Aprire il coperchio del DP (4).

3.Rimuovere il coperchio interno (5).
4.Sollevare la leva (6).
Nel caso dell'esempio copia (d):Ruotare il selettore (7) in direzione della freccia d.
Nel caso dell'esempio copia (e):Ruotare il selettore (7) in direzione della freccia e.
Variazione graduale: Circa 1,0 mm (8)
5.Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.打开 DP 盖板（4）。
3.取下内部盖板（5）。
4.提起杆（6）。
当处于样张（d）时 : 把拨盘（7）向 d 方向旋转。
当处于样张（e）时 : 把拨盘（7）向 e 方向旋转。
每 1 格的移动量：约 1.0mm（8）
2.DP 커버 (4) 를 엽니다 .
3.내부 커버 (5) 를 제거합니다 .
4.레버 (6) 를 위로 올립니다 .
복사 샘플 (d) 의 경우 : 다이얼 (7) 을 화살표 d 방향으로 돌립니다 .
복사 샘플 (e) 의 경우 : 다이얼 (7) 을 화살표 e 방향으로 돌립니다 .
1 개 변화량：약 1.0mm (8)
2.DP カバー(4) を開ける。
3.インナーカバー(5) を外す。
4.レバー(6) を上げる。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合：ダイヤル (7) を d 方向に回す。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合：ダイヤル (7) を e 方向に回す。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 1.0mm (8)
14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7.After the adjustment, install the inner cover (5) which is removed in step 3.Close the DP cover (4).
8. A Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 8 on page 2).
B Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 4 on page 5).
7.Après l'ajustement, installez le capot interne (5) qui a été retiré à l'étape 3.Refermez le capot du DP (4).
8. A Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 8 à la page 2.)
B Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 4 à la page 5.)
7.Después del ajuste, instale la cubierta interna (5) que se quitó en el paso 3.Cierre la cubierta del DP (4).
8. A Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 8 en la página 2).
B Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 4 en la página 5).
7.Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Abdeckung (5), die in Schritt 3 entfernt wurde.Schließen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (4).
8. A Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 8 auf Seite 2).
B Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 4 auf Seite 5).
7.Al termine della regolazione, installare il coperchio interno (5), rimosso al punto 3.Chiudere il coperchio del DP (4).
8. A Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 8 a pagina 2).
B Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 4 a pagina 5).
双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
7.调整结束后，重新安装在步骤 3 中取下的内部盖板 (5)。关闭 DP 盖板（4）。
8. A 拆下原稿垫（C），参照第 2 页的步骤 8 再次装上。
B 拆下原稿垫（C），参照第 5 页的步骤 4 再次装上。
6.벨크로 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

7.조정 후에 순서 3 에서 분리한 내부 커버 (5) 를 설치합니다 .DP 커버 (4) 를 닫습니다 .
8. A 원고매트 (C) 를 제거하고 2 페이지 순서 8 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
B 원고매트 (C) 를 제거하고 5 페이지 순서 4 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .

7.調整終了後、手順 3 で外したインナーカバー(5) を取り付ける。DP カバー(4) を閉める。
8. A 原稿マット (C) を取り外し、
B 原稿マット (C) を取り外し、
15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g


réglage suivant.

siguiente ajuste.


　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ղ
2. ճ
3. A
մ
4.
յ
5.
ն
6. շ
7.
17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ո
8.
B 44
33
55
Adjust the height of DP. Regolazione dell’altezza del DP

Adjust the height of DP. Regolazione dell’altezza del DP
Loosen the nut (3). Allentare il dado (3).
Loosen the nut (3). Allentare il dado (3).
For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite di regolazione (4).
For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite di regolazione (4).
For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite di regolazione (4).
For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite di regolazione (4).
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5 mm (5) Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (5)
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5 mm (5) Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (5)
Retighten the nut (3). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
Retighten the nut (3). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
Réglez la hauteur du DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ

Réglez la hauteur du DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
Desserrez l’écrou (3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Desserrez l’écrou (3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5 mm (5) ⇿ṬⲴ〫ࣘ䟿˖㓖PP˄˅
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5 mm (5) ⇿ṬⲴ〫ࣘ䟿˖㓖PP˄˅
Resserrez l’écrou (3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Resserrez l’écrou (3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Ajuste la altura del DP. kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U

Ajuste la altura del DP. kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
Afloje la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Afloje la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo de ajuste (4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo de ajuste (4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (5) XᵐGⷴ䞈⣽ஔ㚱WU\O\P
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (5) XᵐGⷴ䞈⣽ஔ㚱WU\O\P
Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Die Höhe des DP einstellen. '3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ

Die Höhe des DP einstellen. '3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
Lösen Sie die Mutter (3). ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Lösen Sie die Mutter (3). ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (4) festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (4) festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm (5) ┠┒ࡾᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸⣙PP
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm (5) ┠┒ࡾᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸⣙PP
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest. ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest. ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
չ
9. պ
10. A
ջ ռ
12.
11.
10 mm
ս
13.
վ
14.
19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g





双面时：±4.0mm 以内
15.다시 벨크로를 합니다 .

16.벨크로 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 15 을 반복합니다 .
20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
<Reference value>
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- de ±1,5%
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procédure suivante. Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
<Valeur de référence> ner(surface)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
de ±1,5% ner (arrière)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2.Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ación secundaria del escáner(anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
<Valor de referencia> ación secundaria del escáner(reverso).
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale

1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
<Valore di riferimento> ner (superficie)
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% ner(lato posteriore)

如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Sub Scan(B) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（反面）
< 标准值 >

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Sub Scan(B)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（뒷면）
＜기준치＞

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面）
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Sub Scan(B)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面）
＜基準値＞
21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
X X'
A X' X
B 3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
±1,5%


3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

길이가 짧은 경우 벨크로 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . .
길이가 긴 경우 벨크로 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내

22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
2.5mm
2.5mm B
2
1 2
a l m
according to the following procedure. Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)
<Reference value> Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing(rear side)
procédure suivante. Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)
<Valeur de référence> Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert> Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Valore di riferimento> Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteri-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm ore)
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteri-
ore).
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端对位 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > Back Head ：调整前端对位 ( 反面 )
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 反面 )

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ Back Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 Back Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .

＜基準値＞ Back Head：先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail：後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
2.5mm
B 2.5mm
1 2
a l m
value.
4. Perform a test copy.
erhöhen.


3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 벨크로 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 벨크로 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내

24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
<Reference value>
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante.
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
cara: ±2,0 mm
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)

移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Back ：中心位置（反面）的调整

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 벨크로 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . Back：센터 위치（뒷면）의 조정

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）
の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Back：センター位置（裏面）の調整
25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o


3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 합니다 .
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내

センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる。片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina surface adjustment.
For details, see the service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la tou-
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'origi- che Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
nal du DP 4.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
l'original de réglage. fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 3 jusqu'à
2.Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
appuyer sur la touche Start. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 3.Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP realizar un ajuste de anverso.
2.Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 3 hasta que aparezca "OK"
de Start. en la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 3.Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan- betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
den ist 4.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
2.Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start- wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 3, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste betätigen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 3.Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 4.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
2.Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 3
tasto di Start. fino a quando appare "OK".
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。

详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 본체로 세트하고 시작 키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 다.
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작 키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 3 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合う。
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出 4.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
力する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 3 を繰り返す。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
5mm
B
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until "OK" appears.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca "OK"
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se "OK"appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare "OK".
cie.

调整。

1.DP 자동조정원고 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
서 DP 본체로 세트합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작 키의 순서 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .

2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、Start キーの詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) PF-791
PF-791 / (500 x 2 Paper feeder)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-791
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D(M3x12)
B E F G(M4x20)
A C
*H
E. Stopper R................................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Stopper L ................................................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts G. S Tite screws M4 × 20 .............................. 4
A. Paper feeder.............................................. 1 H. Paper size plate ......................................... 2
B. Pin ............................................................. 2
C. Retainer ..................................................... 1
D. S Tite screw M3 × 12 ................................. 2
E. Butée R...................................................... 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Butée L ...................................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies G. Vis S Tite M4 × 20 ..................................... 4 pièces fournies.
A. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1 H. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2
B. Broche ....................................................... 2
C. Élément de retenue ................................... 1
D. Vis S Tite M3 × 12 ..................................... 2
E. Tope R ....................................................... 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Tope L ........................................................ 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas G. Tornillo S Tite M4 × 20 ............................... 4
A. Depósito de papel...................................... 1 H. Placa de tamaño de papel ......................... 2
B. Clavija........................................................ 2
C. Retén ......................................................... 1
D. Tornillos S Tite M3 × 12 ............................. 2
E. Anschlag R ................................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Anschlag L ................................................. 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile G. S-Tite-Schraube M4 × 20........................... 4 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1 H. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2
B. Stift............................................................. 2
C. Halterung ................................................... 1
D. S-Tite-Schrauben M3 × 12 ........................ 2
E. Fermo R..................................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Fermo L ..................................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite G. Vite S Tite M4 × 20 .................................... 4
A. Unità di alimentazione della carta ............. 1 H. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2
B. Perno ......................................................... 2
C. Fermo ........................................................ 1
D. Vite S Tite M3 × 12 .................................... 2
简体中文 E. 防止倾斜工具 R ........................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 防止倾斜工具 L ........................1 下。
附属品 G. 紧固型 S 螺丝 M4×20 ...................4
A. 供纸盒............................... 1 H. 纸张尺寸插片 ........................4*
B. 销................................... 2
C. 安装板............................... 1
D. 紧固型 S 螺丝 M3 × 12............... 2
한국어 E. 스토퍼 R....................................................................1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경

F. 스토퍼 L ....................................................................1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품 G. 나사 M4×20 S 타이트 .........................................4
A. 급지대 ........................................................................1 H. 용지 사이즈 플레이트 .........................................2
B. 핀 .................................................................................2
C. 리테이너....................................................................1
D. 나사 M3×12 S 타이트.........................................2
日本語 E. 転倒防止金具 R ........................1 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合

F. 転倒防止金具 L ........................1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品 G. ビス M4×20 S タイト ..................4
A. ペーパーフィーダー................... 1 H. 用紙サイズプレート ...................2
B. ピン................................. 2
C. 取付板............................... 1
D. ビス M3×12 S タイト.................. 2
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
Procedure 1.Place the machine (2) on the paper feeder 2.Remove the lower paper cassette (3) from
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the (A) so that the pins (1) at the rear left and the machine.
main power switch of the machine off, and rear right of the paper feeder (A) are aligned
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. with the holes in the base of the machine.
Procédure 1.Montez la machine (2) sur le chargeur de 2.Retirer le magasin de papier inférieur (3) de
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de papier (A) de sorte que les broches (1) à la machine.
mettre la machine hors tension et de l'arrière gauche et à l'arrière droit du
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise chargeur de papier (A) soient alignés avec
murale. les trous dans la base du machine.
Procedimiento 1.Coloque la máquina (2) sobre el depósito de 2.Quite la bandeja de papel inferior (3) de la
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de papel (A) de forma que las clavijas (1) en los máquina.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la lados posteriores izquierdo y derecho del
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación depósito de papel (A) estén alineadas con
de la toma de pared. los orificios de la base de la máquina.
Vorgehensweise 1.Setzen Sie das Gerät (2) so auf den 2.Entfernen Sie die untere Papierkassette (3)
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- Papiereinzug (A), dass die Stifte (1) hinten aus dem Gerät.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts links und hinten rechts am Papiereinzug (A)
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der auf die Öffnungen im Boden des Geräts aus-
Steckdose gezogen ist. gerichtet sind.
Procedura 1.Posizionare la macchina (2) sull'alimentatore 2.Rimuovere il cassetto carta inferiore (3) dalla
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la carta (A) in modo che i perni (1) sul lato sin- macchina.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di istro posteriore e sul lato destro posteriore
corrente. dell'alimentatore carta (A) siano allineati con
i fori presenti sulla base della macchina.
安装步骤 1.供纸盒 (A) 的左右后面的各插销 (1) 分别对 2.取出机器的下部纸盒 (3)。

安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插准机器主机底面的孔后，将机器主机 (2) 放
座拔下电源插头。在供纸盒 (A) 上。
설치순서 1.용지 급지대 (A) 의 후면 좌측과 후면 우측에 2.하단 용지 카세트 (3) 를 본체에서 꺼냅니다 .
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 있는 핀 (1) 이 본체의 바닥면에 있는 구멍에
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 맞도록 본체 (2) 를 용지 급지대 (A) 위에 놓
하십시오 . 습니다 .
取付手順 1.ペーパーフィーダー(A) の左右後方の各ピ 2.機械本体の下段カセット (3) を引き出す。

必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機ン（1）
と機械本体のベースの穴が合うよう
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこに、ペーパーフィーダー(A) に機械本体 (2)
と。を載せる。
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
B
B C
4 4
D
(M3x12)
3.Secure the machine (2) to the paper feeder 5.Install the retainer (C) in the location as 6.Turn the adjusters on each corner (4) until
(A) with the 2 pins (B). shown in the figure using 2 S Tite screws M3 they reach the floor and then secure the
4.Insert the lower paper cassette (3) into the × 12 (D). paper feeder.
machine.
3.Fixer la machine (2) au chargeur de papier 5.Installer l'élément de retenue (C) à l'endroit 6.Faire tourner les dispositifs de réglage de
(A) avec les 2 broches (B). indiqué sur la figure avec 2 vis S Tite M3 × chacun des coins (4) jusqu'à ce qu'ils
4.Insérez le magasin de papier inférieur (3) 12 (D). touchent le sol et fixer ensuite le chargeur de
dans la machine. papier.
3.Fije la máquina (2) al depósito de papel (A) 5.Instale el retén (C) en el lugar que muestra 6.Gire los reguladores en cada esquina (4)
con las dos clavijas (B). la ilustración, mediante los 2 tornillos S Tite hasta que lleguen al piso y, a continuación,
4.Inserte el depósito de papel inferior (3) en la M3 × 12 (D). asegure el depósito de papel.
máquina.
3.Sichern Sie das Gerät (2) mit den 2 Stiften 5.Die Halterung (C) an der dargestellten Stelle 6.Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke (4) drehen, bis
(B) am Papiereinzug (A). mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M3 × 12 (D) bef- sie den Boden berühren, und dann den
4.Setzen Sie die untere Papierkassette (3) ins estigen. Papiereinzug sichern.
Gerät ein.
3.Fissare la macchina (2) sull'alimentatore 5.Installare il fermo (C) nella posizione 6.Ruotare i regolatori (4) presenti su ciascun
carta (A) con i 2 perni (B). mostrata in figura, utilizzando le 2 viti S Tite angolo finché vengano a contatto con il pavi-
4.Inserire il cassetto carta inferiore (3) nella M3 × 12 (D). mento, e quindi fissare l’unità di alimentazi-
macchina. one della carta.
3.用 2 个固定插销 (B) 将机器主机 (2) 固定在 5.使用 2 颗紧固型 S 螺丝 M3 × 12（D）将安 6.转动四角上的调节器 (4) 直至与地面接触，
供纸盒 (A) 上。装板（C）安装在图示位置。然后再固定供纸盒。
4.把下部纸盒 (3) 插到机器主机中。
3.핀 (B) 2 개로 본체 (2) 를 급지대 (A) 에 고정 5.나사 M3 × 12 S 타이트 (D) 2 개를 사용하여 6.각 모서리에 위치하는 어져스터 (4) 를 맨 안
합니다 . 리테이너 (C) 를 그림에 표시된 위치에 설치 쪽에 닿을 때까지 돌려 급지대를
4.하단 용지 카세트 (3) 를 본체에 장착합니다 . 합니다 . 고정합니다 .
3.ピン (B)2 本で機械本体 (2) をペーパー 5.イラストの位置に取付板（C）をビス M3×12 S 6.四隅のアジャスター(4) を床に接触する位

フィーダー(A) に固定する。タイト
（D）2 本で取り付ける。置まで回し、
ペーパーフィーダーを固定す
4.下段カセット (3) を機械本体に挿入する。る。
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
G(M4x20) H
E 5
G(M4x20)
7.Select holes (5) and install each stopper (E,F) with 2 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (G) so that the stop- Setting paper size plate
pers will be grounded on the floor. Insert the paper size plate (H) into the size dis-
play slot.
7.Sélectionner les trous (5) et installer chaque butée (E,F) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (G) de sorte Réglage de la plaquette du format de papier
que les butées reposent sur le sol. Insérez la plaquette de format de papier (H)
dans le logement d'affichage du format.
7.Seleccione los orificios (5) e instale cada tope (E,F) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (G) de Ajuste de la placa de tamaño de papel
manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo. Inserte la placa de tamaño de papel (H) en la
ranura de visualización de tamaño.
7.Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (5) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (E,F) mit den 2 S-Tite- Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte
Schrauben M4 × 20 (G) so an, dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen. Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (H) in den
Schlitz der Formatanzeige ein.
7.Selezionare i fori (5) ed installare ogni fermo (E,F) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (G) in modo che i Inserimento della piastra formato carta
fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento. Inserire la piastra di formato carta (H) nello slot
di indicazione formato.
7.在孔 (5) 处各用 2 颗 M4×20 紧固型 S 螺丝 (G) 安装防止倾斜工具 (E,F)，使之和地板接触。设定纸张尺寸插片

将纸张尺寸插片 (H) 插入到尺寸表示插槽内。
7.구멍 (5) 을 선택해 스토퍼 (E,F) 가 바닥면에 닿도록 나사 M4×20 S 타이트 (G) 2 개를 사용하여 용지 사이즈 플레이트 장착하기
설치합니다 . 용지 크기 플레이트 (H) 를 해당 사이즈 디스플
레이 슬롯에 삽입합니다 .
7.転倒防止金具 (E,F) が床面に接地するように、

穴（5）を選択してビス M4×20 S タイト (G) 各 2 本用紙サイズプレートのセット
で取り付ける。用紙サイズプレート (H) を、サイズ表示スロッ
トに挿入する。
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20±2.5mm 㸫 b b
1
㸩
a b<20mm b>20mm
Adjusting the leading edge timing

The reference value for the leading edge timing is 20 ±2.5 mm at position (1) in the sample image (a). If the timing is outside this range, perform the fol-
lowing adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select [LSU Out Top Full] and [Cassette] or [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
2.Adjust the values.
b<20mm : Increase the setting value. b>20mm : Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête

La valeur de référence pour la synchronisation du bord de tête est de 20 ±2,5 mm à la position (1) sur l'image d'exemple (a).Si la synchronisation est
hors de cette plage, procéder au réglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, sélectionner [LSU Out Top Full] et [Cassette] ou [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
2.Régler les valeurs.
b<20mm : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. b>20mm : Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
Cómo ajustar la sincronización del borde superior

El valor de referencia para la sincronización del borde anterior es 20 ±2,5 mm en la posición (1) en la imagen de muestra (a). Si la sincronización estuvi-
era fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione [LSU Out Top Full] y [Cassette] o [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
2.Ajuste los valores.
b<20mm : Aumente el valor de configuración. b>20mm : Reduzca el valor de configuración.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing

Der Bezugswert des Vorderkantenabstands beträgt 20 ±2,5 mm an Position (1) des Beispieldokuments (a). Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs
liegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, wählen Sie [LSU Out Top Full] und [Cassette] oder [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
2.Die Werte einstellen.
b<20mm : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. b>20mm : Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale

Il valore di riferimento per la sincronizzazione del bordo superiore è pari a 20 ±2,5 mm sulla posizione (1) nell'immagine di esempio (a). Se la sincronizza-
zione è all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034, selezionare [LSU Out Top Full] e [Cassette] o [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
2.Regolare i valori.
b<20mm : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. b>20mm Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
前端对位调节
前端对位的基准值在图像样张（a）的（1）位置为 20±2.5mm。超出该范围时，须进行以下调节。
1.设置维护模式 U034，选择 [LSU Out Top Full]、[Cassette] 或 [Cassette3]/[Cassette4]。
2.调整设定值。
b<20mm ：调高设定值。 b>20mm ：调低设定值。
3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
선단 타이밍 조정
선단 타이밍은 샘플화상 (a) 의 (1) 위치에서 기준치는 20±2.5mm. 여기에서 벗어나는 것은 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 세트하고 [LSU Out Top Full], [Cassette] 또는 [Cassette3]/[Cassette4] 를 선택합니다 .
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
b<20mm ：설정치를 높입니다 . b>20mm ：설정치를 내립니다 .
3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
先端タイミング調整
先端タイミングは、サンプルイメージ (a) の (1) の位置で基準値は 20±2.5mm。これから外れるときは以下の調整をおこなう。
1.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Top Full]、[Cassette] または [Cassette3]/[Cassette4] を選択する。
2.設定値を調整する。
b<20mm ：設定値を上げる。
　b>20mm ：設定値を下げる。
3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 3 d d
㸫㸩
㸫㸩
3 2 2 3
c d<0mm d>0mm
Adjusting the center line

The reference value for the center line(2) is ±2.0 mm or less at position (3) in the sample image (c). If the center line position is outside this range, perform
the following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select [LSU Out Left] and [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Increase the setting value. d>0mm : Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de l'axe
La valeur de référence pour l'axe (2) est de ±2,0 mm ou moins à la position (3) sur l'image d'exemple (c). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le réglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, sélectionner [LSU Out Left] et [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. d>0mm : Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la línea central

El valor de referencia para la línea central (2) es ±2,0 mm o menos en la posición (3) en la imagen de muestra (c). Si la posición de la línea central estu-
viera fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione [LSU Out Left] y [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Aumente el valor de configuración. d>0mm : Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

Der Bezugswert der Mittellinie (2) beträgt ±2,0 mm oder weniger an Position (3) des Beispieldokuments (c). Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses
Bereichs liegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] und [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. d>0mm : Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione della linea centrale

Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale (2) è pari a ±2,0 mm o inferiore sulla posizione (3) nell'immagine di esempio (c). Se la posizione della linea
centrale è all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034, selezionare [LSU Out Left] e [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. d>0mm : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
中心线调节
中心线的基准值在图像样张（c）的（3），基准值是纸张中线位置（2）两端 ±2.0mm 以内。超出该范围时，须进行以下调节。
1.设置维护模式 U034，选择 [LSU Out Left]、[Cassette3] 或 [Cassette4]。
d<0mm ：调高设定值。 d>0mm ：调低设定值。
센터라인 조정
센터라인 (2) 은 샘플화상 (c) 의 (3) 위치에서 기준치는 ±2.0mm 이내 . 여기에서 벗어나는 것은 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 세트하고 [LSU Out Left], [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 를 선택합니다 .
d<0mm：설정치를 높입니다 . d>0mm ：설정치를 내립니다 .
センターライン調整
センターラインは、サンプルイメージ (c) の (3) の位置で、基準値は紙のセンター(2) から ±2.0mm 以内。これから外れるときは以下の調整をおこなう。
1.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Left]、[Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
d<0mm ：設定値を上げる。d>0mm ：設定値を下げる。
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) PF-810
PF-810 / (3000-sheet deck)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-810
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D(M3x12)
B E F G(M4x20)
H
A C
E. Stopper R................................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Stopper L ................................................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts G. S Tite screws M4 × 20 .............................. 4
A. Paper feeder.............................................. 1 H. Paper size plate ......................................... 2
B. Pin ............................................................. 2
C. Retainer ..................................................... 1
D. S Tite screw M3 × 12 ................................. 2
E. Butée R...................................................... 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Butée L ...................................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies G. Vis S Tite M4 × 20 ..................................... 4 pièces fournies.
A. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1 H. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2
B. Broche ....................................................... 2
C. Élément de retenue ................................... 1
D. Vis S Tite M3 × 12 ..................................... 2
E. Tope R ....................................................... 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Tope L ........................................................ 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas G. Tornillo S Tite M4 × 20 ............................... 4
A. Depósito de papel...................................... 1 H. Placa de tamaño de papel ......................... 2
B. Clavija........................................................ 2
C. Retén ......................................................... 1
D. Tornillos S Tite M3 × 12 ............................. 2
E. Anschlag R ................................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Anschlag L ................................................. 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile G. S-Tite-Schraube M4 × 20........................... 4 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1 H. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2
B. Stift............................................................. 2
C. Halterung ................................................... 1
D. S-Tite-Schrauben M3 × 12 ........................ 2
E. Fermo R..................................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Fermo L ..................................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite G. Vite S Tite M4 × 20 .................................... 4
A. Unità di alimentazione della carta ............. 1 H. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2
B. Perno ......................................................... 2
C. Fermo ........................................................ 1
D. Vite S Tite M3 × 12 .................................... 2
简体中文 E. 防止倾斜工具 R .......................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 防止倾斜工具 L .......................1 下。
附属品 G. 紧固型 S 螺丝 M4×20 ...................4
A. 供纸盒............................... 1 H. 纸张尺寸插片 .........................2
B. 销................................... 2
C. 安装板............................... 1
D. 紧固型 S 螺丝 M3 × 12............... 2
한국어 E. 스토퍼 R............................................ 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경

F. 스토퍼 L ............................................ 1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품 G. 나사 M4×20 S 타이트 ......................... 4
A. 급지대............................................... 1 H. 용지 사이즈 플레이트........................... 2
B. 핀..................................................... 2
C. 리테이너............................................ 1
D. 나사 M3×12 S 타이트.......................... 2
日本語 E. 転倒防止金具 R ........................1 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合

F. 転倒防止金具 L ........................1 は、
同梱品 G. ビス M4×20 S タイト ..................4
A. ペーパーフィーダー................... 1 H. 用紙サイズプレート ...................2
B. ピン................................. 2
C. 取付板............................... 1
D. ビス M3×12 S タイト.................. 2
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
4
1
1 3
Procedure 1. Place the machine (2) on the paper feeder (A) 2.Remove the lower paper cassette (4) from
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the so that the pins (1) at the rear left and rear right the machine.
main power switch of the machine off, and of the paper feeder (A) are aligned with the
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. holes in the base of the machine.
*Before placing the machine (2), be sure to
check that the guide (3) of paper feeder (A) is in
the horizontal position.
Procédure 1. Montez la machine (2) sur le chargeur de papier 2.Retirer le magasin de papier inférieur (4) de
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de (A) de sorte que les broches (1) à l'arrière la machine.
mettre la machine hors tension et de gauche et à l'arrière droit du chargeur de papier
(A) soient alignés avec les trous dans la base du
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise machine.
murale. *Avant de placer la machine (2), assurez-vous
de vérifier que le guide (3) du chargeur de papier
(A) est en position horizontale.
Procedimiento 1. Coloque la máquina (2) sobre el depósito de 2.Quite la bandeja de papel inferior (4) de la
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de papel (A) de forma que las clavijas (1) en los máquina.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la lados posteriores izquierdo y derecho del
depósito de papel (A) estén alineadas con los
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación orificios de la base de la máquina.
de la toma de pared. *Antes de colocar la máquina (2), asegúrese de
comprobar que la guía (3) del depósito de papel
(A) está en posición horizontal.
Vorgehensweise 1. Setzen Sie das Gerät (2) so auf den Papiere- 2.Entfernen Sie die untere Papierkassette (4)
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- inzug (A), dass die Stifte (1) hinten links und aus dem Gerät.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts hinten rechts am Papiereinzug (A) auf die Öff-
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der nungen im Boden des Geräts ausgerichtet sind.
Steckdose gezogen ist. *Bevor Sie das Gerät (2) absetzen, überprüfen
Sie, ob die Führung (3) des Papiereinzugs (A)
sich in horizontaler Position befindet.
Procedura 1. Posizionare la macchina (2) sull'alimentatore 2.Rimuovere il cassetto carta inferiore (4) dalla
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la carta (A) in modo che i perni (1) sul lato sinistro macchina.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di posteriore e sul lato destro posteriore dell'ali-
mentatore carta (A) siano allineati con i fori pre-
corrente. senti sulla base della macchina.
*Prima di installare la macchina (2), assicurarsi
che la guida (3) dell'alimentatore carta (A) sia in
posizione orizzontale.
安装步骤 1.供纸盒 (A) 的左右后面的各插销 (1) 分别对 2.取出机器的下部纸盒 (4)。

安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插准机器主机底面的孔后，将机器主机 (2) 放
座拔下电源插头。在供纸盒 (A) 上。
* 在放下供纸盒（A）的导板（3）的状态下，将
机器主机（2）放在供纸盒上。
설치순서 1. 용지 급지대 (A) 의 후면 좌측과 후면 우측에 있 2.하단 용지 카세트 (4) 를 본체에서 꺼냅니다 .
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 는 핀 (1) 이 본체의 바닥면에 있는 구멍에 맞도
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 록 본체 (2) 를 용지 급지대 (A) 위에 놓습니다 .
하십시오 . * 본체 (2) 를 배치하기 전에 용지 급지대 (A) 의
가이드 (3) 가 수평 위치인지 확인하십시오 .
取付手順 1.ペーパーフィーダー(A) の左右後方の各ピ 2.機械本体の下段カセット (4) を引き出す。

必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機ン（1）と機械本体のベースの穴が合うよう
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこに、ペーパーフィーダー(A) に機械本体 (2)
と。を載せる。
* ぺーバーフィーダー(A) のガイド (3) が倒
れた状態で機械本体（2）を載せること。
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2
B
5
B C
D 6
(M3x12)
3.Secure the machine (2) to the paper feeder 5.Install the retainer (C) in the location as 6.Open the lower right cover (5) on the
(A) with the 2 pins (B). shown in the figure using 2 S Tite screws M3 machine.
4.IInsert the lower paper cassette (4) into the × 12 (D). 7.Open the paper feeder right cover (6).
machine.
3.Fixer la machine (2) au chargeur de papier 5.Installer l'élément de retenue (C) à l'endroit 6.Ouvrir le capot inférieur droit (5) de la
(A) avec les 2 broches (B). indiqué sur la figure avec 2 vis S Tite M3 × machine.
4.Insérez le magasin de papier inférieur (4) 12 (D). 7.Ouvrir le capot droit (6) du chargeur de
dans la machine. papier .
3.Fije la máquina (2) al depósito de papel (A) 5.Instale el retén (C) en el lugar que muestra 6.Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (5) de la
con las dos clavijas (B). la ilustración, mediante los 2 tornillos S Tite máquina.
4.Inserte el depósito de papel inferior (4) en la M3 × 12 (D). 7.Abra la cubierta derecha del depós (6) ito de
máquina. papel .
3.Sichern Sie das Gerät (2) mit den 2 Stiften 5.Die Halterung (C) an der dargestellten Stelle 6.Öffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (5)
(B) am Papiereinzug (A). mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M3 × 12 (D) bef- des Geräts.
4.Setzen Sie die untere Papierkassette (4) ins estigen. 7.Die rechte Abdeckung (6) des Papiereinzugs
Gerät ein. öffnen.
3.Fissare la macchina (2) sull'alimentatore 5.Installare il fermo (C) nella posizione 6.Aprire il pannello destro inferiore (5) sulla
carta (A) con i 2 perni (B). mostrata in figura, utilizzando le 2 viti S Tite macchina.
4.Inserire il cassetto carta inferiore (4) nella M3 × 12 (D). 7.Aprire il pannello destro (6) dell'unità di ali-
macchina. mentazione della carta.
3.用 2 个固定插销 (B) 将机器主机 (2) 固定在 5.使用 2 颗紧固型 S 螺丝 M3 × 12（D）将安 6.打开机器主机的右下部盖板 (5)。
供纸盒 (A) 上。装板（C）安装在图示位置。 7.打开供纸盒的右部盖板 (6)。
4.把下部纸盒 (4) 插到机器主机中。
3.핀 (B) 2 개로 본체 (2) 를 급지대 (A) 에 고정 5.나사 M3 × 12 S 타이트 (D) 2개를 사용하여 6.본체의 오른쪽 하단 커버 (5) 를 엽니다 .
합니다 . 리테이너 (C) 를 그림에 표시된 위치에 설치 7.급지대 오른쪽 커버 (6) 를 엽니다 .
4.하단 용지 카세트 (4) 를 본체에 장착합니다 . 합니다 .
3.ピン (B)2 本で機械本体 (2) をペーパー 5.イラストの位置に取付板（C）をビス M3×12 S 6.機械本体の右下カバー(5) を開く。

フィーダー(A) に固定する。タイト
（D）2 本で取り付ける。 7.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー(6) を開く。
4.下段カセット (4) を機械本体に挿入する。
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 5
6 9
9
8.Remove the strap (7) from the shaft (8) and 9.Lift up the guide (3) until it clicks into place. 12.Turn the adjusters on each corner (9) until
remove lower right cover (5). they reach the floor and then secure the
10.Close the paper feeder right cover (6) and paper feeder.
replace the lower right cover (5) on the
machine
11.Close the lower right cover (5) on the
machine.
8.Déposer la courroie (7) de l'arbre (8) et 9.Soulevez le guide (3) jusqu'à ce qu'il 12.Faire tourner les dispositifs de réglage de
déposer le capot inférieur droit (5). s'enclenche en position. chacun des coins (9) jusqu'à ce qu'ils
10.Fermer le capot droit du chargeur de papier touchent le sol et fixer ensuite le chargeur de
(6) et reposer le capot inférieur droit (5) sur papier.
la machine.
11.Fermez le capot inférieur droit (5) de la
machine.
8.Quite la correa (7) del eje (8) y quite la cubi- 9.Levante la guía (3) hasta que encaje en su 12.Gire los reguladores en cada esquina (9)
erta frontal inferior (5). sitio con un clic. hasta que lleguen al piso y, a continuación,
10.Cierre la cubierta derecha del depósito de asegure el depósito de papel.
papel (6) y vuelva a colocar la cubierta dere-
cha inferior (5) en la máquina.
11.Cierre la cubierta derecha inferior (5) de la
máquina.
8.Den Riemen (7) von der Welle (8) 9.Heben Sie die Führung (3) an, bis diese in 12.Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke (9) drehen, bis
abnehmen und dann die untere rechte der korrekten Position einrastet. sie den Boden berühren, und dann den
Abdeckung (5) abnehmen. 10.Schließen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (6) des Papiereinzug sichern.
Papiereinzugs und setzen Sie die untere
rechte Abdeckung (5) wieder im Gerät ein.
11.Schließen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung
(5) des Geräts.
8.Rimuovere la cinghietta (7) dall'asta (8) e 9.Alzare la guida (3) fino a sentire il clic di 12.Ruotare i regolatori (9) presenti su ciascun
quindi rimuovere il pannello destro inferiore blocco in posizione. angolo finché vengano a contatto con il pavi-
(5). 10.Chiudere il pannello destro (6) dell'alimenta- mento, e quindi fissare l’unità di alimentazi-
tore carta e rimontare il pannello destro infe- one della carta.
riore (5) sulla macchina.
11.Chiudere il coperchio destro inferiore (5)
sulla macchina.
8.将带子 (7) 从轴 (8) 上拆除，拆下右下部盖 9.提起导板 (3) 直到听到咔哒音。 12.转动四角上的调节器 (9) 直至与地面接触，
板 (5)。 10.关闭供纸盒的右部盖板 (6)，按原样安装机器然后再固定供纸盒。
的右下部盖板 (5)。
11.关闭机器主机的右下部盖板 (5)。
8.스트랩 (7) 을 축 (8) 에서 분리하고 우측 하 9.제자리에 장착될 때까지 가이드 (3) 를 위로 12.각 모서리에 위치하는 어져스터 (9) 를 맨 안
단 커버 (5) 를 제거합니다 . 올립니다 . 쪽에 닿을 때까지 돌려 급지대를
10.급지대 오른쪽 커버 (6) 를 닫고 본체의 오른 고정합니다 .
쪽 하단 커버 (5) 를 다시 부착합니다 .
11.본체의 오른쪽 하단 커버 (5) 를 닫습니다 .
8.ストラップ (7) を軸 (8) から外し、右下カ 9.カチッと音がするまでガイド (3) を立てる。 12.四隅のアジャスター(9) を床に接触する位

バー(5) を取り外す。置まで回し、
ペーパーフィーダーを固定す
10.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー(6) を閉じ、る。
機械本体の右下カバー(5) を元通りに取り
付ける。
11.機械本体の右下カバー(5) を閉じる。
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A 12
G(M4x20)
13
10 E 13
G(M4x20)
11
F
13.Pull out the right cassette (10) and the left 15.Select holes (13) and install each stopper (E,F) with 2 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (G) so that the stop-
cassette (11) from the paper feeder (A). pers will be grounded on the floor.
Remove the lift plate stopper (12) from each
cassette and attach it to the storage location.
14.Gently close each cassette.
13.Sortez le magasin droit (10) et le magasin 15.Sélectionner les trous (13) et installer chaque butée (E,F) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (G) de sorte
gauche (11) du chargeur de papier (A). que les butées reposent sur le sol.
Retirez la butée de la plaque de levage (12)
de chaque magasin et fixez-la dans
l'emplacement de stockage .
14.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.
13.Extraiga el depósito derecho (10) y el 15.Seleccione los orificios (13) e instale cada tope (E,F) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (G) de
depósito izquierdo (11) del depósito de papel manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo.
(A).
Quite el tope de placa de elevación (12) de
cada depósito y póngalo en el espacio reser-
vado para guardarlo .
14.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.
13.Ziehen Sie die rechte Kassette (10) und die 15.Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (13) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (E,F) mit den 2 S-Tite-
linke Kassette (11) aus dem Papiereinzug Schrauben M4 × 20 (G) so an, dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
(A) heraus.
Entfernen Sie die Verriegelung des Papier-
lifts (12) aus jeder Kassette und setzen Sie
die Verriegelung in die Parkposition ein.
14.Alle Kassetten sachte schließen.
13.Estrarre il cassetto destro (10) e il cassetto 15.Selezionare i fori (13) ed installare ogni fermo (E,F) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (G) in modo che i
sinistro (11) dall'unità di alimentazione carta fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento.
(A).
Rimuovere il fermo della piastra di solleva-
mento (12) da ogni cassetto e fissarlo sulla
posizione a riposo .
14.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.
13.从供纸盒（A）拉出右侧纸盒（10）以及左侧纸 15.在孔 (13) 处各用 2 颗 M4×20 紧固型 S 螺丝 (G) 安装防止倾斜工具 (E,F)，使之和地板接触。

盒（11）。
在每个纸盒上各拆下 1 个升降板限位器
（12），并安装在保管场所。
14.轻轻地推入各纸盒。
13.급지대 (A) 에서 우측 카세트 (10) 와 좌측 카 15.구멍 (13) 을 선택해 스토퍼 (E,F) 가 바닥면에 닿도록 나사 M4×20 S 타이트 (G) 2 개를 사용하
세트 (11) 를 꺼낸다 . 여 설치합니다 .
각 카세트에서 리프트 플레이트 스토퍼 (12)
를 제거하고 보관장소에 부착합니다 .
14.각 카세트를 부드럽게 밀어 넣습니다 .
13.ペーパーフィーダー(A) のカセット右 (10) 15.転倒防止金具 (E,F) が床面に接地するように、

穴（13）
を選択してビス M4×20 S タイト (G) 各 2
およびカセット左 (11) を引き出す。リフト本で取り付ける。
板ストッパー(12) 各 1 個を外して保管場所
に取り付ける。
14.各カセットを静かに押し込む。
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
H
15
14
15
Setting paper size plate Changing paper size (metric specifications 1.Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder.
Insert the paper size plate (H) into the size dis- only) 2.Turn the front lock lever (14) 90° and remove
play slot. At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4 the front deck cursor (15).
is set for metric models. Use the procedure
below to change the size to B5.
Réglage de la plaquette du format de papier Modification du format du papier (pour 1.Tirer le magasin du chargeur de papier vers
Insérez la plaquette de format de papier (H) spécifications métriques seulement) soi.
dans le logement d'affichage du format. À expédition, les modèles à mesure en pouces 2.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant
sont réglés sur le format Letter et les modèles à (14) de 90º et déposer le curseur de platine
mesure métrique sur le format A4. Pour passer avant (15).
au format B5, procéder de la manière suivante.
Ajuste de la placa de tamaño de papel Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel (sólo para 1.Abra el casete del depósito de papel.
Inserte la placa de tamaño de papel (H) en la las especificaciones métricas) 2.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (14) 90º y
ranura de visualización de tamaño. En el momento de salida de fábrica, se config- quite el cursor frontal de la plataforma (15).
ura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4
para los modelos en sistema métrico. Siga este
procedimiento para cambiar el tamaño a B5.
Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte Ändern des Papierformats (nur metrische 1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade aus dem Papiere-
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (H) in den Spezifikationen) inzug.
Schlitz der Formatanzeige ein. Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zoll- 2.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (14) um
maß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei 90° drehen und den vorderen Konsole-Cur-
Modellen mit metrischem Maß das Format A4. sor (15) abnehmen.
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umge-
schaltet werden.
Inserimento della piastra formato carta Cambio del formato della carta (solo per le 1.Estrarre il cassetto dell’unità di alimentatore
Inserire la piastra di formato carta (H) nello slot specifiche metriche) della carta.
di indicazione formato. Al momento della spedizione, Letter è impostato 2.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (14) di 90°
per le specifiche in pollici e A4 è impostato per e rimuovere il cursore frontale del deck (15).
le specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura
riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5.
设定纸张尺寸插片纸张尺寸更改（仅限公制规格） 1.拉出供纸盒的纸盒。

将纸张尺寸插片（H）插入到尺寸表示插槽内。产品出厂时，英制规格设定为 Letter、公制规格 2.将前部锁定杆 (14) 旋转 90°，拆下堆纸板前
设定为 A4。要将尺寸更改为 B5 时，请按以下步骤部游标 (15)。
进行操作。
용지 사이즈 플레이트 세팅 용지크기 변경（센치 사양만） 1.급지대 카세트를 빼 냅니다 .

용지 사이즈 플레이트 (H) 를 해당 사이즈 디스 출하시 , 인치사양은 Letter, 센치사양은 A4 로 2.프론트 잠금 레버 (14) 을 90° 회전시켜 프론
플레이 슬롯에 삽입합니다 . 설정되어 있습니다 . 크기를 B5 로 변경하는 경 트 데크커서 (15) 을 제거합니다 .
우에는 다음 순서를 진행해 주십시오 .
用紙サイズプレートのセット用紙サイズ変更（センチ仕様のみ） 1.ペーパーフィーダーのカセットを引き出す。

用紙サイズプレート (H) を、サイズ表示スロッ出荷時、インチ仕様は Letter、センチ仕様は A4 2.ロックレバー前 (14) を 90° 回転させ、
デッ
トに挿入する。に設定されています。サイズを B5 に変更する場キカーソル前 (15) を取り外す。
合は次の手順をおこなってください。
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18 19
16
20
17
15
14 19
3.Move the front deck cursor (15) so that it is aligned with the size indicators on the top (17) and 6.Release the hook (19) and remove the deck
bottom (16) of the cassette. trailing edge cursor (20).
4.Turn the front lock lever (14) 90° to lock it.
5.Move the rear deck cursor (18) in the same way.
3.Déplacer le curseur de platine avant (15) de sorte qu'il soit aligné avec les indicateurs de format 6.Libérer le crochet (19) et déposer le curseur
en haut (17) et en bas (16) du tiroir. du bord arrière de la platine (20).
4.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (14) de 90º pour le verrouiller.
5.Déplacer le curseur de platine arrière (18) en procédant de la même manière.
3.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (15) para que quede alineado con las indicadores de 6.Libere el gancho (19) y quite el cursor del
tamaño de la parte superior (17) e inferior (16) del cajón. borde inferior de la plataforma (20).
4.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (14) 90º para bloquearla.
5.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (18) de la misma forma.
3.Den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (15) so verschieben, dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben (17) 6.Den Haken (19) lösen und den Hinterkante-
und unten (16) an der Kassette fluchtet. Cursor (20) der Konsole abnehmen.
4.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (14) zum Verriegeln um 90° drehen.
5.Den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (18) auf gleiche Weise verschieben.
3.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (15) in modo che esso risulti allineato con gli indicatori di for- 6.Rilasciare il gancio (19) e rimuovere il cur-
mato sulla parte superiore (17) e inferiore (16) del cassetto. sore del bordo di uscita del deck (20).
4.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (14) di 90°, per bloccarla.
5.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (18) allo stesso modo.
3.移动堆纸板前部游标 (15)，使纸盒下部的尺寸标记（16）与纸盒上部的尺寸标记（17）对齐。 6.解除挂钩 (19)，拆下堆纸板后部游标 (20)。

4.将前部锁定杆 (14) 旋转 90° 以固定。
5.按同样方式移动后部堆纸板后部游标 (18)。
3.카세트 상단 (17) 과 하단 (16) 의 사이즈 지침에 맞춰 프론트 데크 커서 (15) 을 이동합니다 . 6.후크 (19) 를 해제하고 데크 뒷단커서 (20) 를
4.프론트 잠금레버 (14) 을 90° 회전시켜 고정합니다 . 제거합니다 .
5.리어 데크커서 (18) 도 같은방식으로 이동시킵니다 .
3.カセット下のサイズ表示 (16) とカセット上のサイズ表示 (17) に合わせてデッキカーソル前 6.フック (19) を解除し、

デッキ後端カーソル
(15) を移動させる。 (20) を取り外す。
4.ロックレバー前 (14) を 90° 回転させ固定する。
5.同様にデッキカーソル後 (18) を移動させる。
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23 21
18
24
0.5∼1.5mm
20
22 15
7.Lift up the sub-cursor (21). Adjusting the cursor width

8.Align with the size indicator (22), engage the 1.Load paper in the cassettes.
hook (23) and install the deck trailing edge 2.If the gap between the front deck cursor (15) and the paper (24) is outside the 0.5 to 1.5 mm
cursor (20). range when the paper (24) is touching up against the rear deck cursor (18), perform the following
adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large
can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
7.Lever le curseur secondaire (21). Réglage de la largeur du curseur

8.Aligner avec l'indicateur de format (22), 1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
engager le crochet (23) et reposer le curseur 2.Si l'écartement entre le curseur de platine avant (15) et le papier (24) est hors des limites de 0,5
du bord arrière de la platine (20). à 1,5 mm quand le papier (24) touche le curseur de platine arrière (18), procéder au réglage sui-
vant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur
trop grande risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
7.Levante el cursor secundario (21). Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor

8.Alinee con el indicador de tamaño (22), 1. Cargue papel en los cajones.
enganche el gancho (23) e instale el cursor 2. Si la separación entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (15) y el papel (24) está fuera del rango de
del borde inferior de la plataforma. (20). 0,5 a 1,5 mm cuando el papel (24) toca el cursor trasero de la plataforma (18), haga el siguiente
ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel; una anchura
del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
7.Den Unter-Cursor (21) anheben. Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

8.Auf die Formatanzeige (22) ausrichten, den 1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
Haken (23) einsetzen und den Hinterkante- 2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (15) und dem Papier (24) außerhalb
Cursor (20) der Konsole anbringen. des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,5 mm liegt, wenn das Papier (24) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (18) anliegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu große Cursor-
Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
7.Sollevare il cursore secondario (21). Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

8.Allineare con l'indicatore formato (22), fis- 1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
sare il gancio (23) e installare il cursore del 2. Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (15) e la carta (24) è fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,5 mm
bordo di uscita del deck (20). quando la carta (24) tocca il cursore postertiore del deck (18), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalar-
ghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione
obbliqua della carta.
7.抬起副游标 (21)。游标宽度的调节

8.对齐尺寸标记 (22)，将挂钩 (23) 嵌入以安装 1.在纸盒中装入纸张。
堆纸板后部游标 (20)。 2.在堆纸板后部游标 (18) 与纸张 (24) 接触的状态下，如果堆纸板前部游标 (15) 与纸张 (24) 的间
隙超出了 0.5 ～ 1.5mm 的范围，须进行以下调节。
※ 如果游标宽度过小，可能造成不供纸，游标宽度过大，则可能发生歪斜进纸等情况。
7.서브커서 (21) 를 세웁니다 . 커서 폭 조정

8.사이즈 지침 (22) 에 맞춰 후크 (23) 를 부착 1.카세트에 용지를 장착합니다 .
후 , 데크 후단 커서 (20) 를 설치합니다 . 2.데크커서 뒤 (18) 에 용지 (24) 가 접하고 있는 상태에서 데크커서 앞 (15) 과 용지 (24) 의 틈이
0.5 ～ 1.5mm 의 범위외의 경우에는 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
※ 커서 폭이 작으면 무급지 , 커서 폭이 크면 경사급지 등이 발생할 가능성이 있습니다 .
7.サブカーソル (21) を起こす。カーソル幅の調整

8.サイズ表示 (22) に合わせて、
フック (23) を 1.カセットに用紙をセットする。
はめデッキ後端カーソル (20) を取り付け 2.デッキカーソル後 (18) に用紙 (24) が接している状態で、デッキカーソル前 (15) と用紙 (24) の
る。隙間が 0.5 ～ 1.5mm の範囲外の場合は、
以下の調整をおこなう。
※ カーソル幅が小さいと無給紙、カーソル幅が大きいと斜め給紙などが発生する可能性がある。
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
26
15
15
25
3.Insert a Philips-head screwdriver into the 2 long slots (25) in the front deck cursor (15) and loosen 4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (26).
the 2 adjusting screws (26). Then move the front deck cursor (15). 5.Check that the gap between the front deck
cursor (15) and the paper is between 0.5
and 1.5 mm.
3.Insérer un tournevis cruciforme dans les 2 longues fentes (25) du curseur de platine avant (15) et 4.Resserrer les 2 vis de réglage (26).
desserrer les 2 vis de réglage (26). Déplacer ensuite le curseur de platine avant (15). 5.Vérifier que l'écartement entre le curseur de
platine avant (15) et le papier est entre 0,5 et
1,5 mm.
3.Inserte un destornillador de cabeza Philips en las dos ranuras largas (25) en el cursor frontal de 4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste
la plataforma (15) y afloje los 2 tornillos de ajuste (26). Después, mueva el cursor frontal de la (26).
plataforma (15). 5.Verifique que la separación entre el cursor
frontal de la plataforma (15) y el papel sea
de entre 0,5 y 1,5 mm.
3.Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen Öffnungen (25) im vorderen Konsole-Cursor 4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (26) wieder anzie-
(15) stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben (26) lösen. Danach den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (15) hen.
verschieben. 5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand
zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor
(15) und dem Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,5
mm liegt.
3.Inserire un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips nelle 2 fessure lunghe (25) nel cursore fron- 4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (26).
tale del deck (15) e allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (26). Quindi spostare il cursore frontale del 5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore fron-
deck (15). tale del deck (15) e la carta sia compreso
nella gamma tra 0,5 e 1,5 mm.
3.将十字螺丝刀从堆纸板前部游标 (15) 的 2 处长孔 (25) 处插入，拧松 2 颗调节螺丝 (26)，移动堆 4.拧紧 2 颗调节螺丝 (26)。
纸板前部游标 (15)。 5.确认堆纸板前部游标 (15) 与纸张的间隙在
0.5 ～ 1.5mm 的范围内。
3.프론트 데크커서 (15) 의 두 군데의 긴 구멍 (25) 에서 십자 드라이버 삽입하고 조정 나사 (26) 2 4.조정나사 (26) 2 개를 조입니다 .
개를 풀어 프론트 데크 커서 (15) 를 이동시킵니다 . 5.데크커서 앞 (15) 과 용지의 틈이 0.5 ～ 1.5
mm 범위내가 되어 있는 것을 확인합니다 .
3.デッキカーソル前 (15) の 2 箇所の長穴 (25) からプラスドライバー挿入し、調整ビス (26)2 本を 4.調整ビス (26)2 本を締め付ける。

緩め、
デッキカーソル前 (15) を移動させる。 5.デッキカーソル前 (15) と用紙の隙間が 0.5
～ 1.5mm の範囲内になっていることを確認
する
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20±2.5mm 㸫 b b
1
㸩
a b<20mm b>20mm
Adjusting the leading edge timing

The reference value for the leading edge timing is 20 ±2.5 mm at position (1) in the sample image (a). If the timing is outside this range, perform the fol-
lowing adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select [LSU Out Top Full] and [Cassette] or [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
b<20mm : Increase the setting value. b>20mm : Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête

La valeur de référence pour la synchronisation du bord de tête est de 20 ±2,5 mm à la position (1) sur l'image d'exemple (a). Si la synchronisation est
hors de cette plage, procéder au réglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, sélectionner [LSU Out Top Full] et [Cassette] ou [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
b<20mm : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. b>20mm : Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Cómo ajustar la sincronización del borde superior

El valor de referencia para la sincronización del borde anterior es 20 ±2,5 mm en la posición (1) en la imagen de muestra (a).Si la sincronización estuvi-
era fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione [LSU Out Top Full] y [Cassette] o [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
b<20mm : Aumente el valor de configuración. b>20mm : Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing

Der Bezugswert des Vorderkantenabstands beträgt 20 ±2,5 mm an Position (1) des Beispieldokuments (a). Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs
liegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, wählen Sie [LSU Out Top Full] und [Cassette] oder [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
b<20mm : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. b>20mm : Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale

Il valore di riferimento per la sincronizzazione del bordo superiore è pari a 20 ±2,5 mm sulla posizione (1) nell'immagine di esempio (a). Se la sincronizza-
zione è all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034, selezionare [LSU Out Top Full] e [Cassette] o [Cassette3]/[Cassette4].
b<20mm : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. b>20mm : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
前端对位调节
前端对位的基准值在图像样张（a）的（1）位置为 20±2.5mm。超出该范围时，须进行以下调节。
1.设置维护模式 U034，选择 [LSU Out Top Full]、[Cassette] 或 [Cassette3]/[Cassette4]。
b<20mm ：调高设定值。 b>20mm ：调低设定值。
선단 타이밍 조정
선단 타이밍은 샘플화상 (a) 의 (1) 위치에서 기준치는 20±2.5mm. 여기에서 벗어나는 것은 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 세트하고 [LSU Out Top Full], [Cassette] 또는 [Cassette3]/[Cassette4] 를 선택합니다 .
b<20mm ：설정치를 높입니다 . b>20mm ：설정치를 내립니다 .
先端タイミング調整
先端タイミングは、サンプルイメージ (a) の (1) の位置で基準値は 20±2.5mm。これから外れるときは以下の調整をおこなう。
1.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Top Full]、[Cassette] または [Cassette3]/[Cassette4] を選択する。
b<20mm ：設定値を上げる。
　b>20mm ：設定値を下げる。
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 3 d d
㸫㸩
㸫㸩
3 2 2 3
c d<0mm d>0mm
Adjusting the center line

The reference value for the center line (2) is ±2.0 mm or less at position (3) in the sample image (c). If the center line position is outside this range, per-
form the following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select [LSU Out Left] and [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Increase the setting value. d>0mm : Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de l'axe
La valeur de référence pour l'axe (2) est de ±2,0 mm ou moins à la position (3) sur l'image d'exemple (c). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le réglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, sélectionner [LSU Out Left] et [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
d<0mm: Augmentez la valeur de réglage. d>0mm : Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la línea central

El valor de referencia para la línea central (2) es ±2,0 mm o menos en la posición (3) en la imagen de muestra (c). Si la posición de la línea central estu-
viera fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione [LSU Out Left] y [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Aumente el valor de configuración. d>0mm Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

Der Bezugswert der Mittellinie (2) beträgt ±2,0 mm oder weniger an Position (3) des Beispieldokuments (c). Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses
Bereichs liegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] und [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. d>0mm : Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione della linea centrale

Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale (2) è pari a ±2,0 mm o inferiore sulla posizione (3) nell'immagine di esempio (c). Se la posizione della linea
centrale è all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034, selezionare [LSU Out Left] e [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
d<0mm : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. d>0mm : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
中心线调节
中心线的基准值在图像样张（c）的（3），基准值是纸张中线位置 (2) 两端 ±2.0mm 以内。超出该范围时，须进行以下调节。
1.设置维护模式 U034，选择 [LSU Out Left]、[Cassette3] 或 [Cassette4]。
d<0mm ：调高设定值。 d>0mm ：调低设定值。
센터라인 조정
센터라인 (2) 은 샘플화상 (c) 의 (3) 위치에서 기준치는 ±2.0mm 이내 . 여기에서 벗어나는 것은 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 세트하고 [LSU Out Left], [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 를 선택합니다 .
d<0mm ：설정치를 높입니다 . d>0mm：설정치를 내립니다 .
センターライン調整
センターラインは、サンプルイメージ (c) の (3) の位置で、基準値は紙のセンター(2) から ±2.0mm 以内。これから外れるときは以下の調整をおこなう。
1.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Left]、[Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
d<0mm ：設定値を上げる。　d>0mm ：設定値を下げる。
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6) DF-791
DF-791 / (3000-sheet finisher)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DF-791
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
B
AK-740
F(M4x8)
G(M4x20)
C AA
E
E. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. M4 × 8 screw ............................................. 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts G. M4 × 20 screw ........................................... 2
A. Document finisher...................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 AA.Earth Plate ................................................ 1
C. Connecting plate........................................ 1
D. Connector cover ........................................ 1
E. Cartouche d’agrafes .................................. 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Vis M4 × 8.................................................. 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies G. Vis M4 × 20................................................ 2 pièces fournies.
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1
B. Bac d'éjection ............................................ 1 AA.Plaque de terre ......................................... 1
C. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
D. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
E. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
Español
F. Tornillo M4 × 8 ........................................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas G. Tornillo M4 × 20 ......................................... 2
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 AA.Placa de conexión a tierra ........................ 1
C. Placa de conexión ..................................... 1
D. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
E. Heftklammer-Magazin................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. M4 × 8 Schraube ....................................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile G. M4 × 20 Schraube ..................................... 2 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Finisher...................................................... 1
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 AA.Grundplatte ............................................... 1
C. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
D. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
E. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Vite M4 × 8................................................. 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite G. Vite M4 × 20............................................... 2
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1 AA.Piastra di messa a terra............................ 1
C. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
D. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
简体中文 E. 装订针盒 .............................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. M4×8 螺丝 ............................1 下。
附属品 G. M4×20 螺丝 ...........................2
A. 装订器............................... 1
B. 排纸托盘............................. 1 AA.接地板 ...............................1
C. 连接板............................... 1
D. 接插件盖板........................... 1
한국어 E. 스테이플 카트리지............................... 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경

F. 나사 M4×8......................................... 1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품 G. 나사 M4×20 ....................................... 2
A. 도큐먼트 피니셔.................................. 1
B. 배출 트레이........................................ 1 AA.접지판 .............................................. 1
C. 연결판 .............................................. 1
D. 커넥터 커버........................................ 1
日本語 E. ステープルカートリッジ ...............1 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合

F. ビス M4×8 ............................1 は、
同梱品 G. ビス M4×20 ...........................2
A. ドキュメントフィニッシャー........... 1
B. 排出トレイ........................... 1 AA.アース板 .............................1
C. 連結板............................... 1
D. コネクターカバー..................... 1
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B A
NOTICE Procedure 1.Install eject tray (B) to document finisher (A)

The Attachment Kit (AK-740) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the back of
before the document finisher is installed. main power switch of the machine off, and the tray in the holes (2) of the finisher lift
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. plate.
REMARQUE Procédure 1.Installez le bac d'éjection (B) sur le finisseur

Le kit de fixation (AK-740) doit être installé Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de de document (A) en insérant les 2 crochets
avant d'installer le finisseur de document. mettre la machine hors tension et de (1) au dos du bac d'éjection (B) dans les
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise trous (2) du dispositif de levage du finisseur.
murale.
AVISO Procedimiento 1.Instale la bandeja de salida (B) en el finaliza-

El Kit de conexión (AK-740) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de dor de documentos (A); para ello, inserte los
antes de instalarse el finalizador de documen- apagar el interruptor de encendido de la 2 enganches (1) de la parte posterior de la
tos. máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación bandeja en los orificios (2) de la placa de
de la toma de pared. elevación del finalizador.
ANMERKUNG Vorgehensweise 1.Setzen Sie das Ausgabefach (B) in den Fin-

Das Attachment Kit (AK-740) muss installiert Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- isher (A), indem Sie die 2 Haken (1) auf der
werden, bevor der Finisher installiert wird. gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts Rückseite des Fachs in die beiden Löcher
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der (2) der Finisher-Lift-Platte einsetzen.
Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO Procedura 1.Installare il vassoio di uscita (B) sul finisher

Installare l'unità Attachment Kit (AK-740) prima Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la documenti (A) inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul
di collegare il finisher documenti. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di retro del vassoio nei fori (2) della piastra di
corrente. elevazione del finisher.
注意安装步骤 1.将排纸托盘（B）内侧的 2 个挂钩（1）装入装

安装装订器前，必须先安装连接组件 (AK-740)。安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插订器（A）的升降板的孔（2）中。
座拔下电源插头。
주의 설치순서 1.배출 트레이 (B) 의 후면 후크 (1) 2 개를 문

도큐먼트 피니셔를 설치하기 전에 어태치먼트 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 서 피니셔 (A) 의 리프트 플레이트 구멍 (2)
키트 (AK-740) 를 설치해야 합니다 . 위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 에 장착합니다 .
하십시오 .
注意取付手順 1.排出トレイ (B) の裏側のフック (1)2 個をド

ドキュメントフィニッシャーを取り付ける前必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機キュメントフィニッシャー(A) の昇降板の
に、
アタッチメントキット（AK-740) の取り付け械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ穴 (2) に入れて、取り付ける。
をおこなうこと。と。
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F(M4x8)
F(M4x8)
AA AA
If PF-810 is installed If PF-791 is installed

2.Install earth plate (AA) to the bottom center of document finisher using 2.Install earth plate (AA) to the bottom center of document finisher using
an M4 × 8 screw (F).Secure the plate at the location marked "PF-810". an M4 × 8 screw (F). Secure the plate at the location marked "PF-791".
Earth plate (AA) is supplied with AK-740. Earth plate (AA) is supplied with AK-740.
Proceed to step 3.If PF-791 is installed, see the next.
Si le PF-810 est installé Si le PF-791 est installé

2.Installez la plaque de terre (AA) en bas au centre du finisseur de docu- 2.Installez la plaque de terre (AA) en bas au centre du finisseur de docu-
ment à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (F). Fixez la plaque à l'emplacement ment à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (F). Fixez la plaque à l'emplacement
marqué "PF-810". marqué "PF-791".
La plaque de terre (AA) est fournie avec l'AK-740. La plaque de terre (AA) est fournie avec l'AK-740.
Passer à l'étape 3. Si le PF-791 est installé, voir ci-après.
Si está instalado PF-810 Si está instalado PF-791

2.Instale la placa de conexión a tierra (AA) a la parte central inferior del 2.Instale la placa de conexión a tierra (AA) a la parte central inferior del
finalizador de documentos con un tornillo M4 × 8 (F). Fije la placa a la finalizador de documentos con un tornillo M4 × 8 (F). Fije la placa a la
ubicación con la marca "PF-810". ubicación con la marca "PF-791".
Con AK-740 se proporciona la placa de conexión a tierra (AA). Con AK-740 se proporciona la placa de conexión a tierra (AA).
Vaya al paso 3. Si está instalado PF-791, consulte lo siguiente.
Falls der PF-810 installiert ist Falls der PF-791 installiert ist
2.Installieren Sie die Grundplatte (AA) mit der Schraube M4 × 8 (F) unten 2.Installieren Sie die Grundplatte (AA) mit der Schraube M4 × 8 (F) unten
in die Mitte des Finishers. Sichern Sie die Platte an der Stelle, die mit in die Mitte des Finishers. Sichern Sie die Platte an der Stelle, die mit
"PF-810" markiert ist. "PF-791" markiert ist.
Die Grundplatte (AA) wird mit dem AK-740 geliefert. Die Grundplatte (AA) wird mit dem AK-740 geliefert.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 3. Falls der PF-791 installiert ist, folgen Sie
den weiteren Schritten.
Quando è installato l'alimentatore carta modello PF-810 Quando è installato l'alimentatore carta modello PF-791
2.Installare la piastra di messa a terra (AA) al centro della base del fin- 2.Installare la piastra di messa a terra (AA) al centro della base del fin-
isher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (F). Fissare la piastra nella isher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (F). Fissare la piastra nella
posizione contrassegnata con "PF-810". posizione contrassegnata con "PF-791".
La piastra di mesa a terra (AA) viene fornita con AK-740. La piastra di mesa a terra (AA) viene fornita con AK-740.
Procedere al passo 3. Se invece è installato l'alimentatore carta mod-
ello PF-791, vedere più avanti.
当安装了 PF-810 的情况时当安装了 PF-791 的情况时

2.使用 M4×8（F) 螺丝，将接地板（AA）安装至装订器下部中央位置。将接 2.使用 M4×8（F) 螺丝，将接地板（AA）安装至装订器下部中央位置。将接
地板固定在刻有 “PF-810” 印记的位置。地板固定在刻有 “PF-791” 印记的位置。
接地板（AA）是随附在 AK-740 内的。接地板（AA）是随附在 AK-740 内的。
进至步骤 3。当安装了 PF-791 的情况时。参考如下内容。
PF-810 이 설치되어 있는 경우 PF-791 이 설치되어 있는 경우

2.나사 M4 × 8(F) 을 이용하여 도큐먼트 피니셔 하부 중앙에 접지판 2.M4 × 8 나사 (F) 를 사용하여 접지판 (AA) 을 도큐먼트 피니셔의 하부
(AA) 을 설치합니다 . "PF-810" 으로 표시된 곳에 플레이트를 고정하 중앙에 부착합니다 .
십시오 . 접지판 (AA) 은 AK-740 과 함께 제공됩니다 . "PF-791" 이 표시된 지점에 플레이트를 고정합니다 .
스텝 3 을 진행합니다 .PF-791 이 설치되어 있는 경우 다음을 참조하 접지판 (AA) 은 AK-740 과 함께 제공됩니다 .
십시오 .
PF-810 が装着されている場合 PF-791 が装着されている場合

2.アース板 (AA) をドキュメントフィニッシャー下部センターにビス 2.アース板 (AA) をドキュメントフィニッシャー下部センターにビス
M4×8(F) で取り付ける。 PF-810 の刻印のある位置で固定する。 M4×8(F) で取り付ける。PF-791 の刻印のある位置で固定する。
アース板 (AA) は AK-740 の同梱品。アース板 (AA) は AK-740 の同梱品。
手順 3 に進む。PF-791 が装着されている場合は次に記載しています。
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
G(M4x20)
G(M4x20)
3.Remove the machine interface cover (3). 4.Attach the connecting plate (C) to the machine using 2 M4 × 20 screws (G). Attach them at the
point as shown above.
Only If PF-810 is installed, execute step 5

5.Remove the breakaway cover (4) from the left cover.
If PF-791 is installed, proceed to step 6.
3.Déposer le couvercle d'interface (3) de la 4.Fixez la plaque de connexion (C) à la machine à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 20 (G).Raccordez-les au
machine. point indiqué ci-dessus.
N'exécutez l'étape 5 que si le PF-810 est installé.

5.Déposer le couvercle amovible (4) du couvercle gauche.
Si le PF-791 est installé, passez à l'étape 6.
3.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (3) de la 4.Fije la placa de conexión (C) a la máquina mediante 2 tornillos M4 × 20 (G).Conéctelas en el
máquina. punto que se muestra arriba.
Solo si está instalado PF-810, ejecute el paso 5.

5.Quite la cubierta divisoria (4) de la cubierta izquierda.
Si está instalado PF-791, vaya al paso 6.
3.Nehmen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3) 4.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (C) mit 2 M4 × 20 Schrauben (G) am Gerät an.Bringen Sie
des Geräts ab. diese an der in der Abbildung gezeigten Stelle an.
Nur wenn der PF-810 installiert ist, führen Sie Schritt 5 aus.
5.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (4) von der linken Abdeckung ab.
Falls PF-791 installiert ist, führen Sie Schritt 6 aus.
3.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (3) 4.Applicare la piastra di connessione (C) alla macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 × 20 (G).Fissare
della macchina. nella posizione sopra indicata.
Se è installato solo l'alimentatore carta modello PF-810, eseguire il punto 5.

5.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (4) dal coperchio sinistro.
Se è installato solo l'alimentatore carta modello PF-791, proseguire con il punto 6.
3.拆下机器的接口盖板 (3)。 4.使用 2 颗 M4×20(G) 螺丝将连接板 (C) 安装到机器上。按图示位置来安装。
仅安装了 PF-810 的情况时，执行步骤 5。

5.去除左侧盖板上的可去除部 (4)。
当安装了 PF-791 的情况时，进入步骤 6。
3.본체의 인터페이스 커버 (3) 를 제거합니다 . 4.나사 M4 × 20(G) 2 개를 사용하여 연결판 (C) 을 본체에 부착합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 부착
합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 부착합니다 .
PF-810 만 설치되어 있는 경우 스텝 5 를 실행하십시오 .

5.좌측커버의 분할커버부 (4) 를 떼어 냅니다 .
PF-791 이 설치되어 있는 경우 스텝 6 을 진행하십시오 .
3.機械本体のインターフェイスカバー(3) を 4.連結板 (C) をビス M4×20(G)2 本で、機械本体に取り付ける。図の位置で取り付けること。

取り外す。
PF-810 が装着されている場合のみ手順 5 を行う。
5.左カバーの割りカバー部 (4) を切り取る。
PF-791 が装着されている場合は手順 6 に進む。
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 8
D 11
9
10
D D
11
5 6 C C
6.Connect the signal line connector (5) to the 7.Fit the connector cover (D) in the connecting 8.Open the document finisher upper front
connector (6) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (C). Take care not to get the cable cover (9). Remove the screw (10). Pull the
nal line wire (7) onto the hook (8). pinched by objects. Attach it at the point as lock frame (11) frontwards.
shown above. Check that the signal line con-
nector is covered by the connector cover
(D).
6.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 7.Placer le couvercle de connecteur (D) dans 8.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur du finis-
(5) sur le connecteur (6) de la machine. la plaque de connexion (C). Prendre soin à seur de document (9). Retirez la vis (10).
Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (7) sur le ne pas pincer le câble. Raccordez-les au Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (11) vers le
crochet (8). point indiqué ci-dessus. Vérifier que le con- bas.
necteur de ligne de signal est couvert par le
couvercle de connecteur (D).
6.Conecte el conector de línea de señales (5) 7.Acople la cubierta del conector (D) en la 8.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza-
al conector (6) de la máquina. Enganche el placa de conexión (C). Tenga cuidado de dor de documentos (9). Quite el tornillo (10).
cable de la línea de señales (7) en el que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos. Empuje el marco de cierre (11) hacia del-
enganche (8). Conéctelas en el punto que se muestra ante.
arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
línea de señales quede cubierto por la cubi-
erta del conector (D).
6.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 7.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (D) in die 8.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
(5) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gerät (6). Verbindungsplatte (C) ein. Stellen Sie sicher, des Finishers (9). Entfernen Sie die
Hängen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (7) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird. Schraube (10). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung
in den Befestigungshaken (8) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung (11) nach vorne.
gezeigten Stelle an. Überprüfen Sie, ob der
Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung (D) abgedeckt ist.
6.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 7.Inserire il copri connettore (D) nella piastra di 8.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin-
(5) al connettore (6) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (C). Fare attenzione a non isher documenti (9). Togliere la vite (10).
ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (7) al gancio impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (11).
(8). sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore
della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (D).
6.把信号线的接插件 (5) 和机器本体的接插件 7.将接插件盖板 (D) 嵌入到连接板 (C)。请注 8.打开装订器的前上盖板 (9)。取下螺丝 (10)。
(6) 相连接。把信号线 (7) 挂到挂钩 (8) 上。意不要夹住电线。按图示位置来安装。请确向身体前侧拉出固定架（11）。
认信号线的接插件是否完全隐藏在接插件盖
板中 (D)。
6.시그널 라인 연결 커넥터 (5) 를 본체의 커넥 7.커넥터 커버 (D) 를 연결판 (C) 에 맞추어 끼 8.도큐먼트 피니셔의 상단 프론트 커버 (9) 를
터 (6) 에 연결합니다 . 시그널 라인 와이어 웁니다 . 케이블이 커넥터 커버 (D) 에 끼이 엽니다 . 나사 (10) 를 제거합니다 . 잠금 프
(7) 를 후크 (8) 에 겁니다 . 지 않도록 주의합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 레임 (11) 을 앞으로 뺍니다 .
부착합니다 . 시그널라인 커넥터가 커넥터
커버 (D) 에 덮여있는지 확인합니다 .
6.信号線のコネクター(5) を機械本体のコネ 7.コネクターカバー(D) を連結板 (C) にはめ 8.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー

クター(6) に接続する。信号線 (7) は、
フッ込む。
電線を挟み込まない様注意すること。 (9) を開く。ビス (10) を外す。ロックフレー
ク (8) に掛けること。図の位置で取り付けること。信号線のコネクム (11) を手前に引く。
ターがコネクターカバー(D) で隠れている
ことを確認する。
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10
12 C 11
13 13
E
9
9.Insert the pin (12) on the connecting plate 10.Slowly push the lock frame (11) fully into the 12.Install the staple cartridge (E).
(C) into the hole (13) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far 13.Close the upper front cover (9).
isher. Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
machine. 11.Secure the lock frame (11) using the screw Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
* If the document finisher doesn't comply (10) removed in step 8. page 12.
with the reference of the height as described
on page 7, adjust the height.
9.Introduire l'ergot (12) sur la plaque de con- 10.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage 12.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (E).
nexion (C) dans le trou (13) sur le finisseur (11) à fond dans la machine de sorte que les 13.Refermer le couvercle avant supérieur (9).
de document. Connecter le finisseur de doc- connecteurs à l'extrémité soient raccordés.
ument sur la machine. 11.Fixez le bâti de verrouillage (11) à l'aide de Passez à l'ajustement de la position d'agraf-
* Si le finisseur de document n'est pas con- la vis (10) déposée à l'étape 8. age page 12.
forme à la référence de hauteur comme
décrit à la page 7, ajustez la hauteur.
9.Inserte la clavija (12) de la placa de conex- 10.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el 12.Instale el cartucho de grapas (E).
ión (C) en el orificio (13) del finalizador de marco del cierre (11) hacia la máquina de 13.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (9).
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
mentos a la máquina. extremo más lejano. Proceda al ajuste de la posición de grapado
* Si el finalizador de documentos no cumple 11.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (11) por en la página 12.
con la referencia de altura como se describe medio del tornillo (10) quitado en el paso 8.
en la página 7, ajuste la altura.
9.Setzen Sie den Stift (12) der Verbindung- 10.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (11) wieder 12.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin
splatte (C) in die Öffnung (13) des Finishers. langsam ins Gerät, so dass die Verbindun- (E).
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gerät. gen am anderen Ende des Geräts geschlos- 13.Schließen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
* Falls die Höhe des Finishers nicht mit der sen werden. (9).
auf Seite 7 in der Referenz beschriebenen 11.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (11) mit der
Höhe übereinstimmt, justieren Sie die Höhe. in Schritt 8 entfernten Schraube (10). Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 12 fort.
9.Inserire il perno (12) della piastra di connes- 10.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (11) 12.Installare il contenitore punti (E).
sione (C) nel foro (13) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori 13.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore (9).
menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremità risultino collegati.
macchina. 11.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (11) utilizzando Proseguire con la regolazione della
* Se il finisher documenti non è conforme la vite (10) rimossa nel passo 8. posizione di pinzatura a pagina 12.
con il riferimento altezza come descritto a
pagina 7, regolare l'altezza.
9.将连接板 (C) 的销钉 (12) 插入装订器的孔 10.慢慢的把固定架 (11) 完全推入机器，这样机 12.安装装订针盒 (E)。
(13) 中。把装订器连接到机器本体。器里侧的接插件就可以顺利连接。 13.关闭前部上盖板 (9)。
※ 若不符合 P7 的高度调整的基准时，执行高 11.使用在步骤 8 中取下的 1 颗螺丝 (10) 来固定
度调整。锁框 (11)。跳至 P12「调节装订位置」。
9.연결판 (C) 의 핀 (12) 을 두큐먼트 피니셔의 10.본체 뒷쪽의 커넥터가 연결되도록 잠금 프레 12.스테이플 카트리지 (E) 를 설치합니다 .
구멍 (13) 에 삽입합니다 . 도큐먼트 피니셔 임 (11) 을 본체 안으로 천천히 밀어 넣습니 13.상단 프론트 커버 (9) 를 닫습니다 .
를 본체에 연결합니다 . 다.
※ 연결할 도큐먼트 피니셔가 7 페이지에 설 11.스텝 8 에서 뺀 나사 (10)1 개로 잠금 프레임 12 페이지의 스테이플 위치 조정을 진행합니
명된 높이 기준에 부합하지 않으면 높이를 (11) 을 고정합니다 . 다.
조정하십시오 .
9.連結板 (C) のピン (12) をドキュメントフィ 10.機械奥側のコネクタが接続されるように、 12.ステープルカートリッジ (E) を取り付ける。

ニッシャーの穴 (13) に挿入する。ドキュメロックフレーム (11) をゆっくり奧に押す。 13.前上カバー(9) を閉じる。
ントフィニッシャーを機械本体に接続する。 11.手順 8 で外したビス
（10）で、ロックフレーム
※P7 の高さ調整の基準に適合しない場合（11）を固定する。 P12「ステープル位置の調整」に進む。
は、高さ調整を行う。
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12
b
b a a a
13 b
13 12 21
21
Adjusting the height Compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (12) is within the height range (b) of the curved section (21).
1.Check that the respective heights of the pins Non-compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (12) is extends beyond the height range (b) of the curved
(12) on the connecting plate installed on the section (21).
machine and the connecting holes (13) on If the heights are non-compliant, use the procedure below to adjust the height.
the document finisher comply with the refer-
ences below.
Réglage de la hauteur Bon : Le diamètre (a) de l'ergot (12) est dans les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbée (21).
1.Vérifiez que les hauteurs respectives des Mauvais : Le diamètre (a) de l'ergot (12) dépasse les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbée (21).
ergots (12) sur la plaque de connexion Si la hauteur n'est pas conforme, l'ajuster en procédant comme indiqué ci-dessous.
installée sur la machine et les trous de con-
nexion (13) sur le finisseur de document
sont conformes aux références ci-dessous.
Ajuste de la altura Cumple: el diámetro (a) de la clavija (12) está dentro del rango de altura (b) de la sección curvada
1.Compruebe que las alturas correspondien- (21).
tes de las clavijas (12) de la placa de fijación No cumple: el diámetro (a) de la clavija (12) sobrepasa el rango de altura (b) de la sección curvada
instaladas en la máquina y los orificios de (21).
conexión (13) del finalizador de documentos Si las alturas no cumplen con las especificaciones, utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
cumplen las referencias de abajo. altura.
Einstellen der Höhe Korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (12) befindet sich im Höhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts
1.Überprüfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Höhe der (21).
Stifte (12) der am Gerät installierten Verbind- Nicht korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (12) ragt über den Höhenbereich (b) des Kurvenab-
ungsplatte und Verbindungsöffnungen (13) schnitts (21) hinaus.
des Finishers mit den unten angegebenen Falls die Höhen nicht korrekt sind, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
Werten übereinstimmen.
Regolazione dell'altezza Conformità: Il diametro (a) del perno (12) è compreso nella gamma di altezza (b) della sezione cur-
1.Controllare che le rispettive altezze dei perni vata (21).
(12) sulla piastra di connessione installata Non conformità: Il diametro (a) del perno (12) si estende oltre la gamma di altezza (b) della sezione
sulla macchina e i fori di connessione (13) curvata (21).
sulla finisher documenti corrispondano ai Se le altezze sono non corrispondenti, utilizzare la procedura riportata sotto per regolare l'altezza.
riferimenti mostrati sotto.
高度调节符合：销钉 (12) 的直径 (a) 在弯曲部 (21) 的高度 (b) 的范围内。
1.确认机器主机上安装的连接板的销钉 (12) 和不符合：销钉 (12) 的直径 (a) 超出了弯曲部 (21) 的高度 (b) 的范围。
装订器的连接用的孔 (13) 的高度是否符合以不符合时，通过以下步骤进行调节。
下标准。
높이조정 적 합 ：핀 (12) 의 직경 (a) 가 곡선부 (21) 의 높이 (b) 의 범위에 들어간다 .

1.본체에 설치된 연결판의 핀 (12) 과 도큐먼트 부적합：핀 (12) 의 직경 (a) 가 곡선부 (21) 의 높이 (b) 의 범위를 넘는다 .
피니셔의 연결용 구멍 (13) 의 각 높이가 아 부적합의 경우에는 이하의 순서대로 조정합니다 .
래의 기준에 부합하는지 확인합니다 .
高さ調整適合：ピン (12) の直径 (a) が曲げ部 (21) の高さ (b) の範囲に収まっている。
1.機械本体に取り付けた連結板のピン (12) と不適合：ピン (12) の直径 (a) が曲げ部 (21) の高さ (b) の範囲からはみだしている。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーの連結用の穴不適合の場合は、以下の手順で調整する。
(13) の高さが以下の基準に適合するか確認
する。
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
24
22
24
23 25
22 24
2.Open the upper front cover (9) of the document finisher. 4.Remove the 3 screws (24) and remove the lower rear cover (25).
3.Remove the 3 screws (22). Remove the lower front cover (23).
2.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur (9) du finisseur de document. 4.Déposer les 3 vis (24) puis le couvercle arrière inférieur (25).
3.Déposer les 3 vis (22). Déposer le couvercle avant inférieur (23).
2.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (9) del finalizador de documentos. 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (24) y quite la cubierta posterior inferior (25).
3.Quite los 3 tornillos (22). Quite la cubierta frontal inferior (23).
2.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (9) des Finishers. 4.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (24) und nehmen Sie die untere hintere
3.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (22). Entfernen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (25) ab.
Abdeckung (23).
2.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (9) della finisher documenti. 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (24) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio inferiore poste-
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti (22). Rimuovere il coperchio frontale inferiore (23). riore (25).
2.打开装订器的前部上盖板 (9)。 4.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (24)，拆下后部下盖板 (25)。

3.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (22)。拆下前部下盖板 (23)。
2.도큐먼트 피니셔 프론트 상단 커버 (9) 를 엽니다 . 4.나사 (24) 3 개를 제거하고 , 하단 리어 커버 (25) 를 제거합니다 .
3.나사 (22) 3 개를 제거합니다 . 프론트 하단 커버 (23) 를 떼어 냅니다 .
2.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー(9) を開く。 4.ビス (24)3 本を外し、後下カバー(25) を取り外す。

3.ビス (22)3 本を外し、前下カバー(23) を取り外す。
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
29
28
26
27
27
5.Remove the screw (26) to remove the span- 7.Turn the adjustment bolts (29) with the spanner (27) to adjust the height of the document finisher.
ner (27). Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
6.Loosen the 2 screws (28) on the front right lowers the document finisher.
and on the rear right of the document fin- 8.Retighten each of the 2 screws (28) and attach the spanner (27) to its original position.
isher.
5.Déposer la vis (26) pour libérer la clé (27). 7.Faire tourner les boulons de réglage (29) avec la clé (27) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de
6.Desserrer les 2 vis (28) du côté avant droit et document.
arrière droit du finisseur de document. Tourner le boulon de réglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre.
8.Resserrer les 2 vis (28) et repositionner la clé (27) au même endroit.
5.Quite el tornillo (26) para extraer la llave 7.Gire los pernos de ajuste (29) con la llave inglesa (27) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de
inglesa (27). documentos.
6.Afloje los 2 tornillos (28) en los lados dere- Al girar el perno de ajuste en la dirección de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
cho frontal y derecho posterior del finaliza- documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu-
dor de documentos. mentos.
8.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (28) y coloque la llave inglesa en su lugar (27).
5.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (26), um den 7.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (29) mit dem Schlüssel (27), um die Höhe des Finishers
Schlüssel (27) abzunehmen einzustellen.
6.Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben (28) vorne rechts Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, während er
und hinten rechts am Finisher. durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
8.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (28) wieder an und verstauen Sie den Schlüssel (27) wieder.
5.Rimuovere la vite (26) per rimuovere la chi- 7.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (29) con la chiave (27) per regolare l'altezza della finisher docu-
ave (27). menti.
6.Allentare le 2 viti (28) sulla parte anteriore Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotan-
destra e posteriore destra della finisher doc- dolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
umenti. 8.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (28) e riporre la chiave (27).
5.取下螺丝 (26) 以便拆下扳手 (27)。 7.使用扳手 (27) 旋转调节螺栓 (29)，以调节装订器的高度。

6.拧松装订器右前侧与右后侧的各 2 颗螺丝将调节螺栓向顺时针方向旋转，装订器的高度升高，逆时针方向旋转则装订器的高度降低。
(28)。 8.拧紧各 2 颗螺丝 (28)，按原样安装扳手 (27)。
5.나사 (26) 1 개를 빼고 , 스패너 (27) 를 떼어 7.스패너 (27) 로 조정 볼트 (29) 를 돌려 도큐먼트 피니셔의 높이를 조정한다 .
냅니다 . 조정 볼트를 시계방향으로 돌리면 도큐먼트 피니셔의 높이가 높아지고 , 반 시계방향으로 돌리면
6.도큐먼트 피니셔 우측 프론트와 리어의 나사 낮아 집니다 .
(28) 각 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 . 8.나사 (28) 각 2 개를 조이고 스패너 (27) 를 원래 자리에 장착합니다 .
5.ビス (26)1 本を外し、スパナー(27) を取り 7.スパナー(27) で調整ボルト (29) を回し、

ドキュメントフィニッシャーの高さを調整する。
外す。調整ボルトを時計方向に回すとドキュメントフィニッシャーの高さが高くなり、反時計方向に回
6.ドキュメントフィニッシャー右前と右後のすと低くなる。
ビス (28) 各 2 本を緩める。 8.ビス (28) 各 2 本を締め付け、
スパナー(27) を元通り取り付ける。
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
30
33
31
32
9.If the distances between the document fin- 10.Loosen the 2 screws (32) on the front left 11.Turn the adjustment bolts (33) with a Philips-
isher and the machine (30, 31) are unequal, and on the rear left of the document finisher. head screwdriver to adjust the height of the
use the procedure below to adjust the spac- document finisher.
ing. Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts
the document finisher, and turning it counter-
clockwise lowers the document finisher.
9.Si les distances entre le finisseur de docu- 10.Desserrer les 2 vis (32) du côté avant 11.Faire tourner les boulons de réglage (33) à
ment et la machine (30, 31) sont inégales, gauche et arrière gauche du finisseur de l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster
régler l'espacement en procédant de la document. la hauteur du finisseur de document.
manière suivante. Tourner le boulon de réglage dans le sens
horloger pour lever le finisseur de document,
et dans le sens contraire au sens horloger
pour le descendre.
9.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de docu- 10.Afloje los 2 tornillos (32) en los lados izqui- 11. Gire los pernos de ajuste (33) con un destornilla-
mentos y la máquina (30, 31) no son erdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finalizador de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del
iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento dor de documentos. finalizador de documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la dirección de las
para ajustar la separación. manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las
manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu-
mentos.
9.Falls die Abstände zwischen dem Finisher 10.Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben (32) vorne links 11.Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (33) mit
und dem Gerät (30, 31) ungleich sind, führen und hinten links am Finisher. einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um
Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um die Höhe des Finishers zu korrigieren.
den Abstand zu korrigieren. Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im
Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben,
während er durch Drehen entgegen dem
Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
9.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la 10.Allentare le 2 viti (32) sulla parte anteriore 11.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (33) con un
macchina (30, 31) sono diverse, attenersi sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per
alla sottostante procedura per regolare la documenti. regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
spaziatura. Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso
orario si solleva la finisher documenti, men-
tre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa
la finisher documenti.
9.装订器与机器的间隙 (30、31) 不等时，按以 10.拧松装订器左前侧与左后侧的各 2 颗螺丝 11.使用十字螺丝刀旋转调节螺栓 (33)，以调节

下步骤进行调节。 (32)。装订器的高度。
将调节螺栓向顺时针方向旋转，装订器的高
度升高，逆时针方向旋转则装订器的高度降
低。
9.도큐먼트 피니셔와 본체의 거리 (30, 31) 가 10.도큐먼트 피니셔 좌측 프론트와 리어의 나사 11.플러스 드라이버로 조정 볼트 (33) 를 돌려
동일하지 않는 경우 아래의 절차에 따라 간 (32) 각 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 . 도큐먼트 피니셔 높이를 조정합니다 .
격을 조정합니다 . 조정 볼트를 시계방향으로 돌리면 도큐먼트
피니셔의 높이가 높아지고 , 반 시계방향으
로 돌리면 낮아 집니다 .
9.ドキュメントフィニッシャーと機械本体の 10.ドキュメントフィニッシャー左前と左後の 11.プラスドライバーで調整ボルト (33) を回

間隔（30、31）
が等しくない場合は、以下の手ビス (32) 各 2 本を緩める。し、ドキュメントフィニッシャーの高さを調
順で調整を行う。整する。
調整ボルトを時計方向に回すとドキュメン
トフィニッシャーの高さが高くなり、反時計
方向に回すと低くなる。
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12.Retighten each of the 2 screws (32).

13.Reinstall the lower front cover (23) and lower
rear cover (25).
12.Resserrer les 2 vis (32).

13.Reposez le couvercle avant inférieur (23) et
le couvercle arrière inférieur (25).
12.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (32).

13.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta frontal inferior
(23) y la cubierta posterior inferior (25).
12.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (32) nach.

13.Setzen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung
(23) und die untere hintere Abdeckung (25)
wieder ein.
12.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (32).

13.Reinstallare il coperchio frontale inferiore
(23) e il coperchio posteriore inferiore (25).
12.拧紧各 2 颗螺丝 (32)。

13.按原样安装前部下盖板 (23)、后部下盖板
(25)。
12.나사 (32) 각 2 개를 조입니다 .

13.프론트 하단 커버 (23), 리어 하단 커버 (25)
를 원래 자리에 장착합니다 .
12.ビス (32) 各 2 本を締め付ける。

13.前下カバー(23)、後下カバー(25) を元通り
に取り付ける。
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
78.5mm±2.5
158mm±2.5
Adjusting the stapling position

1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center. If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm ±2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Ajustement de la position d'agrafage

1.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procéder à une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vérifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en décalage.Si la position d'agrafage est décalée, la régler en procédant de la manière suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier.
Ajuste de la posición de grapado

1.Conecte el enchufe de la máquina al receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la máquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posición de grapado está descentrada.Si la posición de grapado está descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posición.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Justage der Heftposition

1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am Hauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prüfen Sie, ob die Heftposition außermittig ist.Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura

1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere l’interruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalità di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro.Se la posizione di spillatura è fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio
调节装订位置
1.将机器上的电源插头插入电源插座中，打开主电源开关。
2.在装订模式（2 点固定）下进行测试复印。
3.确认装订位置的中心偏差。装订位置偏离中心时，按以下步骤进行调节。
＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm± 2.5mm
스테이플 위치 조정
1.본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
2.스테이플 모드 ( 더블 스테이플）에서 테스트 카피를 합니다 .
3.스테이플 위치의 센터 어긋남을 확인합니다 . 스테이플 위치가 중심에서 벗어난 경우다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm± 2.5mm
ステープル位置の調整
1.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
2.ステープルモード（2 箇所止め）
でテストコピーを行う。
3.ステープル位置のセンターずれを確認する。ステープル位置が中心からずれていた場合、
次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm± 2.5mm
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(a) (b)
4.Set maintenance mode U246, select Finisher, Staple HP. 6.Perform a test copy.
5.Adjust the values. 7.Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the staple position is within the reference
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase value.
the setting value. <Reference value> 78.5 mm ±2.5 mm from the center of the paper
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b):
Decrease the setting value.
4.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Staple 6.Effectuer une copie de test.
HP. 7.Recommencer les étapes 4 à 6 jusqu'à ce que la position d'agrafe soit
5.Régler les valeurs. conforme à la valeur de référence
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
menter la valeur de réglage. de papier.
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
la valeur de réglage.
4.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Staple 6.Haga una copia de prueba.
HP. 7.Repita los pasos 4 a 6 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
5.Ajuste los valores. dentro del valor de referencia.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
4.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und 6.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
Staple HP. 7.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 6, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
5.Die Werte einstellen. des Bezugswerts liegt.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
4.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Sta- 6.Eseguire una copia di prova.
ple HP. 7.Ripetere i passi 4 to 6 finché la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
5.Regolare i valori. del valore di riferimento.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della mac- <Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della mac-
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
4.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Staple HP。 6.进行测试复印。

5.调整设定值。 7.重复步骤 4 ～ 6，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a)：调高设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm± 2.5mm
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b)：调低设定值。
4.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 설정하고 Finisher, Staple HP 를 선택합니 6.테스트 카피를 합니다 .

다. 7.스테이플 위치가 기준치 이 내로 될 때까지 스텝 4 ～ 6 을 반복합니다 .
5.설정값을 조정합니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm± 2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 내입니다 .
4.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、

Staple HP を選択す 6.テストコピーを行う。
る。 7.ステープル位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 4 ∼ 6 を繰り返す。
5.設定値を調整する。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm± 2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7) DF-7120
DF-7120 / (1000-sheet finisher)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DF-7120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B
Color MFP Color Printer

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 60/55ppm Black & White MFP
35/35ppm,40/40ppm, 30ppm,32ppm,
50/50ppm,60/55ppm 35ppm,40ppm
Black & White MFP

40ppm,50ppm,60ppm
English
For installation with the MFP(A) / Printer, see Page 1 to Page 5,Page 14 to Page 15.
Français
1.
Français
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A) / Imprimante, voir Page 1 à Page 5,Page 14 à Page 15.
1.
Español
Para la instalación con un MFP(A) / Impresora, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 5,páginas de la 14 a la 15.
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) / Drucker siehe Seiten 1 bis 5,Seiten 14 bis 15.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A) / stampante, vedere le pagine da 1 a 5,pagine da 14 a 15.
简体中文
1.
安装到 MFP(A)/ 打印机上时，请参见 P1-P5,P14-P15。
1.한국어
MFP(A)/ 프린터에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~5 페이지 ,14 페이지 ~15 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
MFP(A)/ プリンターに設置する場合；1 ページ～ 5 ページ、14 ページ～ 15 ページ
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
A B
A B E
E F(M4x20)
F(M4x20)
D
D
AA
AA G
C(M4x8) G
C(M4x8)
AK-7100
AK-7100
Be sureàtoretirer
Veillez removeles any tape and/or
morceaux cushioning
de bande materials
adhésive from
et/ou les the parts
matériaux desupplied.
Veillez à retirer
rembourrage lespièces
des morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de
fournies.
rembourrage
Asegúrese dedes pièces
quitar fournies.
todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes
suministradas.
suministradas.
Stellen Sie Teilen
gelieferten sicher, entfernt
dass sämtliche
wurden.Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den
gelieferten
RimuovereTeilen entfernt
tutti i nastri wurden.
adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴኎૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖǃ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦˈ䈧࣑ᗵ᨝лǄ
ྲ᷌䱴኎૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖǃ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦˈ䈧࣑ᗵ᨝лǄ
While the illustrations in this installation guide are for the MFP models, contents of
While the illustrations
the installation in this
work are installation
common for theguide
MFP are
andfor the MFP
printer models, contents of
models. ձ
ձ
the
Lesinstallation
illustrationswork are
de ce common
guide for the MFP
d’ installation and printer
concernent lesmodels.
modèles MFP, mais les
Les illustrations
interventions d’ de ce guidesont
installation d’ installation
communesconcernent les MFP
aux modèles modèles MFP, mais les
et imprimantes.
interventions d’ installation
desont
estacommunes aux modèles MFP et imprimantes.
Aunque las ilustraciones
Aunque
MFP, el las ilustraciones
contenido de losde
guía de instalación
esta guía de instalación
procedimientos
hacen
hacen
de instalación
referencia
referencia
es el
a los modelos
a loslos
mismo para modelos
ߑ
MFP, el contenido
modelos MFP y dede los procedimientos de instalación es el mismo para los
impresora.
modelos MFP
Obwohl die y de impresora.
Abbildungen in dieser Installationsanleitung sich auf MFPs beziehen, ist
Obwohl die Abbildungen
die Vorgehensweise in dieser
für MFPs undInstallationsanleitung
Drucker die gleiche. sich auf MFPs beziehen, ist
die Vorgehensweise
Sebbene für contenute
le illustrazioni MFPs und in
Drucker
questadie gleiche.
guida di installazione siano relative a
Sebbene le illustrazioni
modelli MFP, i contenuticontenute in questa
della procedura guida di installazione
di installazione siano per
sono gli stessi relative
MFPae ߒ
modelli MFP, i contenuti della procedura di installazione sono gli stessi per MFP e
stampanti.
stampanti.
ᆹ㻵↕僔ѝⲴ㿶മᱟ 0)3 ᵪරˈн䗷 0)3 ઼ᢃঠᵪⲴᆹ㻵↕僔ᱟ⴨਼ⲴǄ
ᆹ㻵↕僔ѝⲴ㿶മᱟ 0)3 ᵪරˈн䗷 0)3 ઼ᢃঠᵪⲴᆹ㻵↕僔ᱟ⴨਼ⲴǄ

㢨G㉘㾌Gᴴ㢨☐⏈Gtmw⯜⒬㟝㢨㫴⬀SG㉘㾌G㣅㛹㡴Gtmw㝴G䘸⫤䉤Gḩ䋩㢹⏼␘U
㢨G㉘㾌Gᴴ㢨☐⏈Gtmw⯜⒬㟝㢨㫴⬀SG㉘㾌G㣅㛹㡴Gtmw㝴G䘸⫤䉤Gḩ䋩㢹⏼␘U
タ⨨ᡭ㡰᭩ෆࡢ࢖ࣛࢫࢺࡣࠊ0)3 ࡛ࡍࡀࠊタ⨨సᴗࡣ 0)3 ࣉࣜࣥࢱ࣮ඹ㏻࡛ࡍࠋ
タ⨨ᡭ㡰᭩ෆࡢ࢖ࣛࢫࢺࡣࠊ0)3 ࡛ࡍࡀࠊタ⨨సᴗࡣ 0)3 ࣉࣜࣥࢱ࣮ඹ㏻࡛ࡍࠋ
ղ
ղ
Ｂ
Ｂ
A
A
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ճ մ
AA
C(M4x8)
b a
15 7 7
a
b a b b
a
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
շ
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A ջ
ջ
cc
cc ==dd 14
14
dd
cc ＞
＞dd,, cc ＜
＜dd 12
12
ռ
ռ
ս
ս
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
վ
վ A
տ
տ
ր
ր
DD
ց
ց
ߑ
ON
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
AA B B C(M4x8) E F(M4x20) G
B
F(M4x20)
D
E
D
AA AA PF
-810
G PF
-7
91
C(M4x8)
AK-740 AK-740
ձ
ձ
Be
Besure
suretotoremove
removeany
anytape
tapeand/or
and/orcushioning
cushioningmaterials
materialsfrom
fromthe
theparts
partssupplied.
supplied.
Veillez
Veillezà àretirer
retirerles
lesmorceaux
morceauxdedebande
bandeadhésive
adhésiveet/ou
et/oules
lesmatériaux
matériauxdede ߑOFF
rembourrage
rembourragedes despièces
piècesfournies.
fournies.
Asegúrese
Asegúresededequitar
quitartodas
todaslas
lascintas
cintasy/o
y/omaterial
materialamortiguador
amortiguadordedelas
laspartes
partes
suministradas.
suministradas.
Stellen
StellenSie
Siesicher,
sicher,dass
dasssämtliche
sämtlicheKlebebänder
Klebebänderund/oder
und/oderPolstermaterial
Polstermaterialvon
vonden
den
gelieferten
geliefertenTeilen
Teilenentfernt
entferntwurden.
wurden. ߒ
Rimuovere
Rimuoveretutti
tuttii nastri
i nastriadesivi
adesivie/o
e/oi materiali
i materialididiprotezione
protezionedalle
dalleparti
partifornite.
fornite.
ղ
ղ BB AA
ճ
ճ
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
մ
B
ն
L
/
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ո
B
PF-791 PF-810
0
-81
PF 0
-81
PF
91
PF
-7
C(M4x8) -79
1 C(M4x8)
PF
PF-791 PF-810
0
-81
PF
1
-79
PF
AA AA
F(M4x20)
E
F(M4x20)
ջ
PF-810
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ռ
B
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ր
B
b a
25 17 17
a
b a b b
a
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
փ
B
c=d 24
d
c＞d, c＜d 22
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ध
B
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
फ
फ
B
DD
ब
ब
ߑ ON
ON
ߒ ON
13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
78.5mm±2.5mm
(157mm)
English
Adjusting the stapling position
1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center.If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm ± 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Français
Ajustement de la position d'agrafage
1.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procéder à une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vérifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en décalage. Si la position d'agrafage est décalée, la régler en procédant de la manière suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier
Español
Ajuste de la posición de grapado
1.Conecte el enchufe de la máquina al receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la máquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posición de grapado está descentrada. Si la posición de grapado está descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posición.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Deutsch
Justage der Heftposition
1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am Gauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prüfen Sie, ob die Heftposition außermittig ist. Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Italiano
Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura
1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere l’interruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalità di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro. Se la posizione di spillatura è fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
简体中文
调节装订位置
1.将机器上的电源插头插入电源插座中，打开主电源开关。
2.在装订模式（2 点固定）下进行测试复印。
3.确认装订位置的中心偏差。装订位置偏离中心时，按以下步骤进行调节。
＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm±2.5mm
한국어
스테이플 위치 조정
1.본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
2.스테이플 모드（2 곳）에서 시험복사를 합니다 .
3.스테이플 위치의 센터 어긋남을 확인합니다 . 스테이플 위치가 중심에서 벗어난 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm±2.5mm
日本語
ステープル位置の調整
1.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
2.ステープルモード（2 箇所止め）
でテストコピーを行う。
3.ステープル位置のセンターずれを確認する。ステープル位置が中心からずれていた場合、
次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm±2.5mm
14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(a) (b)
4.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Staple HP]. 6.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Adjust the values. 7.Perform a test copy.
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): <Reference value> 78.5 mm ± 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Decrease the setting value.
4.Passez en mode maintenance U246 et sélectionnez [Finisher] > [Sta- 6.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
ple HP]. 7.Effectuer une copie de test.
5.Régler les valeurs. 8.Recommencer les étapes 4 à 7 jusqu'à ce que la position d'agrafe soit
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- conforme à la valeur de référence.
menter la valeur de réglage. <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
de papier
la valeur de réglage.
4.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > 6.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
[Staple HP]. 7.Haga una copia de prueba.
5.Ajuste los valores. 8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
4.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > 6.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
[Staple HP]. 7.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
5.Die Werte einstellen. 8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert. <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
4.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, quindi selezionare [Fin- 6.Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
isher] > [Staple HP]. 7.Eseguire una copia di prova.
5.Regolare i valori. 8.Ripetere i passi 4 to 7 finché la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della mac- del valore di riferimento.
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della mac-
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
4.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher]>[Staple HP] 。 6.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
5.调整设定值。 7.进行测试复印。
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调高设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调低设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm±2.5mm
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.1mm
4.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Staple HP] 를 선택 6.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
합니다 . 7.시험복사를 합니다 .
5.설정치를 조정합니다 . 8.스테이플 위치가 기준치내가 될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 7 을 반복합니다 .
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 낮춥니다 .
4.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、[Finisher] > [Staple HP] を 6.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。

選択する。 7.テストコピーを行う。
5.設定値を調整する。 8.ステープル位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 4 ～ 7 を繰り返す。
ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm±2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.1mm
15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8) AK-740
AK-740 / (Bridge unit)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
AK-740 ATTACHMENT KIT
for Black & White MFP 30ppm,32ppm,35ppm,40ppm
1 2
Black & White MFP: ߑߒ
Color MFP 25/25ppm Color MFP: ߒ
ߑ
A B AA
C D
3 4 Black & White MFP 30ppm,32ppm,35ppm,40ppm
A B
Color MFP 25/25ppm
A B
5 6
Black & White MFP

30ppm,32ppm,
35ppm,40ppm
D
C
Color MFP
25/25ppm
2017.10
303PD5671002
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9) MT-730
MT-730 / (Mailbox)
Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
MT-730(B)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
English
When installing to a document finisher, see Page 1 to Page 6.
When installing to a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 12.
Français
Lors de l'installation sur un module finition de documents, voir Page 1 à Page 6.
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante, voir Page 7 à Page 12.
Español
Para la instalación con un finalizador de documentos, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalación con una impresora, consulte las páginas de la 7 a la 12.
Deutsch
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 12.
.
Italiano
Quando si installa un finisher documenti, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Quando si installa una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 12.
简体中文
安装到装订器时，请参见第 1 ～ 6 页。
安装到打印机时，请参见第 7 ～ 12 页。
한국어
문서 피니셔에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~6 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
프린터에 설치하는 경우 7 페이지 ~12 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
日本語
装着する対象によって、
取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、
以下のページに記載しています。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーに設置する場合；1 ページ～ 6 ページ
プリンターに設置する場合；7 ページ～ 12 ページ
[CONFIDENTIAL]
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는

F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合

F. トレイ名称シール（ユーザー用）.........1 は必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3
1
Procedure 1.Remove the front top cover (2) and rear top cover (3) at the top of the finisher (1) using a flat-
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the blade screwdriver or the like.
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
Procédure 1.Retirer le couvercle supérieur avant (2) et le couvercle supérieur arrière (3) situés en haut du
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de retoucheur (1) à l’aide d’un tournevis à tête plate ou d’un outil équivalent.
mettre la machine hors tension et de
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Procedimiento 1.Remueva la cubierta superior delantera (2) y la cubierta superior trasera (3) en la parte superior
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de del finalizador (1) utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación
de la toma de pared.
Verfahren 1.Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung (2) und die hintere obere Abdeckung (3) an der
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- Oberseite des Finishers (1) mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.
Procedura 1.Rimuovere il coperchio superiore anteriore (2) e il coperchio superiore posteriore (3) dalla parte
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la superiore del finitore (1) utilizzando un cacciavite a punta piatta, o un attrezzo simile.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
安装步骤 1.用一字形螺丝刀拆下装订器 (1) 上部的顶罩前盖板 (2) 和顶罩后盖板 (3)。

安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插
座拔下电源插头。
설치순서 1.피니셔 (1) 상부의 윗커버 앞 덮개 (2), 윗커버 뒤 덮개 (3) 를 마이너스 드라이버 등으로 제거합니
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 다.
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리
하십시오 .
取付手順 1.フィニッシャー (1) 上部の天カバー前フタ (2) 、

天カバー後フタ (3) をマイナスドライバーな
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、機どで取り外す。
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ
と。
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2.Fit the hooks (4) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches (5) located at the front and rear of the top of the finisher
(1) as shown in the illustration and attach the mailbox (A) to the finisher (1).
Note:
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between the mailbox (A) and the machine.
2.Insérer les crochets (4) se trouvant à l'avant et à l'arrière au fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les encoches (5) situées à l'avant et à l'arrière en haut
du retoucheur (1) comme illustré ici, puis fixer la boîte à lettres (A) au retoucheur (1).
Remarque:
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
2.Coloque los ganchos (4) ubicados en la parte inferior frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) en las muescas (5) ubicadas en la parte superior frontal
y trasera del finalizador (1), como se muestra en la ilustración, y coloque el buzón de correo (A) en el finalizador (1).
Nota:
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la
máquina.
2.Setzen Sie die Haken (4) an der Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) in die Öffnungen (5) vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers (1) ein,
wie in der Abbildung dargestellt, und bringen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Finisher (1) an.
Hinweis:
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
2.Inserire i ganci (4) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della parte di fondo della mailbox (A), negli incavi (5) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della
parte superiore del finitore (1) come mostrato nell’illustrazione, e fissare la mailbox (A) al finitore (1).
Nota:
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la
macchina.
2.如图所示，将位于邮箱 (A) 底部前后侧的卡扣 (4) 嵌入位于装订器 (1) 顶部前后侧的凹口 (5)，并将邮箱 (A) 安装至装订器 (1)。
注：
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
2.메일박스 (A) 하부의 앞뒤에 있는 후크 (4) 를 피니셔 (1) 상부의 앞뒤에 있는 파인 홈에 (5) 에 일러스트와 같이 삽입하고 메일박스 (A) 를 피니셔측에
장착합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합니다 .
2.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (4) をフィニッシャー(1) 上部の前後にある切り欠き部 (5) にイラストのように挿入し、メールボック

ス (A) をフィニッシャー(1) に取り付ける。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かないことを確認する。
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
A
E(M4x12)
A
6
8
3.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws 4.Remove the rear cover (6) of the mailbox 5.Plug the connector (7) of the mailbox (A) into
M4x12 (E). (A). the connector (8) of the machine body.
6.Reinstall the rear cover (6) of the mailbox
(A).
3.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis 4.Retirer le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte à 5.Brancher le connecteur (7) de la boîte à
M4x12 (E). lettres (A). lettres (A) dans le connecteur (8) du corps
de la machine.
6.Remonter le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte
à lettres (A).
3.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos 4.Quite la cubierta posterior (6) del buzón de 5.Enchufe el conector (7) del buzón de correo
M4x12 (E). correo (A). (A) al conector (8) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (6) del
buzón de correo (A).
3.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei 4.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (7) der Mailbox (A)
Schrauben M4x12 (E). Mailbox (A). in die Steckbuchse (8) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der
Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Fissare la mailbox (A) utilizzando le due viti 4.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (6) della 5.Collegare il connettore (7) della mailbox (A)
M4x12 (E). mailbox (A). al connettore (8) del corpo macchina.
6.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (6) della
mailbox (A).
3.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。 4.拆下邮箱 (A) 的后部盖板 (6)。 5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（7）插入机器的接插件

（8）。
6.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（6）。
3.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스 4.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 떼어냅니다 . 5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (7) 를 본체의 커넥터
(A) 를 고정합니다 . (8) 에 연결합니다
6.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 다시 장착합니
다.
3.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、

メールボックス (A) 4.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を取り 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(7) を機
を固定する。外す。械本体のコネクター (8) に接続する。
6.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を元通
りに取り付ける。
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 C
7.Insert the 2 hooks (9) on the front mounting 8.Install the rear mounting plate cover (C) on
plate cover (B) for the mailbox into the fin- the finisher in the same way.
isher to install the cover (B).
7.Insérer les 2 crochets (9) du couvercle de la 8.Installer le couvercle de la plaque de mon-

plaque de montage avant (B) de la boîte à tage arrière (C) sur le retoucheur en procé-
lettres dans le retourcheur pour installer ce dant de la même manière.
couvercle (B).
7.Para instalar la cubierta (B), inserte los 2 8.Instale de la misma manera la cubierta de la
ganchos (9) de la cubierta de la placa de placa de montaje trasera (C) en el finaliza-
montaje frontal (B) para el buzón de correo dor.
en el finalizador.
7.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (9) an der vorderen 8.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere
Abdeckung der Montageplatte (B) für die Abdeckung der Montageplatte (C) am Fin-
Mailbox in den Finisher ein, um die Abdeck- isher an.
ung (B) zu installieren.
7.Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci (9) posizionati 8.Installare il coperchio della piastra di mon-
sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio taggio posteriore (C) sul finitore nella stessa
anteriore (B) per la mailbox, per installare il maniera.
coperchio (B).
7.将邮箱的安装板前部盖板 (B) 的 2 个卡扣 8.按相同方法将安装板后部盖板 (C) 安装到装

(9) 插入到装订器中，以安装安装板前部盖板订器上。
(B)。
7.메일박스의 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 의 후크 (9) 2 8.같은 방식으로 부착판 커버 뒤 (C) 를 피니셔

곳을 피니셔에 삽입하고 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 에 장착합니다 .
을 장착합니다 .
7.メールボックスの取付板カバー前 (B) の 8.同様に取付板カバー後 (C) をフィニッ

フック (9)2 箇所をフィニッシャーに挿入シャーに取り付ける。
し、取付板カバー前 (B) を取り付ける。
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10 11
9.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 10.Insert the power plug from the machine into
the highest. the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front and verify the machine operates normally.
and rear pins (10) into the round holes (11) at the front and rear of the mailbox.
9.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 10.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (10) dans les trous ment.
ronds (11) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres.
9.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 10.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (10) en los orificios máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
redondos (11) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
9.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 10.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (10) in die Rundlöcher (11) Betrieb zu prüfen.
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.
9.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 10.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. accendere la macchina e controllare che
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- funzioni correttamente.
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (10) nei
fori rotondi (11) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
9.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 10.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电

按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (10) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (11) 源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
中来安装接纸盘。
9.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 10.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (10) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (11) 에 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
삽입합니다 . 니다 .
9. 排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 10.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し

排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (10) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (11) 込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
に挿入する。認する。
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1 B and C are not used.
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1 B et C ne sont pas utilisés.
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1 B y C no se utilizan.
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte..... 1 B und C werden nicht benötigt.
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1 B e C non sono utilizzati.
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1 不使用 B 和 C。
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는

F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1 B 와 C 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合

F. トレイ名称シール（ユーザー用）.........1 は、
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1 B,C は使用しない。
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Note Procedure
The Attachment Kit(AK-736) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the
before the mailbox is installed. power plug from the wall outlet.
Remarque Procédure
L'Attachment Kit (AK-736) doit être installé Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la
avant d'installer la boîte à lettres. fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
Nota Procedimiento
El Attachment Kit (AK-736) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y des-
antes de la instalación del buzón de correo. enchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
Hinweis Vorgehensweise
Das Attachment Kit (AK-736) muss vor der Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts aus-
Installation der Mailbox installiert werden. geschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Nota Procedura
Installare l'Attachment Kit (AK-736) prima di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
installare il vassoio mailbox.
注安装步骤
在安装邮箱前，请先安装连接组件（AK-736)。安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주 설치순서
메일박스를 설치하기 전에 부착 키트 (AK-736) 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십
를 설치해야 합니다 . 시오 .
注意取付手順
メールボックスを取付ける前にアタッチメント必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
キット (AK-736) の取付けをおこなうこと。
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A 1 A
E(M4x12)
1
2
E(M4x12)
1.Insert the hooks (1) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches 2.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws
(2) of the machine and attach the mailbox (A) to the machine. M4x12 (E).
Note
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between
the mailbox (A) and the machine.
1.Insérer les crochets (1) situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les enc- 2.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis
oches (2) de la machine et fixer la boîte aux lettres (A) à la machine. M4x12 (E).
Remarque
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice
entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
1.Inserte los enganches (1) que se encuentran en la parte frontal y trasera de la parte inferior del 2.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos
buzón de correo (A) en las hendiduras (2) de la máquina y acople el buzón de correo (A) a la M4x12 (E).
máquina.
Nota
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no
queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la máquina.
1.Führen Sie die Haken (1), die sich hinten und vorne an der Unterseite der Mailbox (A) befinden, 2.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei
in die Aufnahmen (2) des Geräts ein und befestigen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Gerät. Schrauben M4x12 (E).
Hinweis
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt
zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
1.Inserire i ganci (1) posti sul fronte e sul retro della sezione inferiore della mailbox (A) negli incavi 2.Fissare la mailbox(A) utilizzando le due viti
(2) presenti sulla macchina e fissare la mailbox (A) sulla macchina. M4x12 (E).
Nota
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi
che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la macchina.
1.将位于邮箱（A）底部前、后侧的挂钩（1）插入机器的凹槽（2），然后将邮箱（A）安装至机器。 2.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。

注
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
1.메일박스 (A) 의 전후면 하단에 있는 후크 (1) 를 본체의 노치 (2) 에 삽입하여 메일박스 (A) 를 본 2.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스
체에 부착합니다 . (A) 를 고정합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합
니다 .
1.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (1) を機械本体の切り欠き (2) に挿入し、メール 2.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、
メールボックス (A)
ボックス (A) を機械本体に取り付ける。を固定する。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かない
ことを確認する。
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 4
3.Remove the rear cover (3) of the mailbox 4.Remove the wire saddle (4).
(A). 5.Plug the connector (5) of the mailbox (A) into the connector (6) of the machine body.
6.Install the wire saddle (4) in the position as shown in the figure.
7.Reinstall the rear cover (3) of the mailbox (A).
3.Retirer le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à 4.Retirer le serre-câble (4).

lettres (A). 5.Brancher le connecteur (5) de la boîte à lettres (A) dans le connecteur (6) du corps de la
machine.
6.Installer le serre-câble (4) dans la position illustrée sur la figure.
7.Remonter le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à lettres (A).
3.Quite la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de 4.Retire la abrazadera del cable (4).
correo (A). 5.Enchufe el conector (5) del buzón de correo (A) al conector (6) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Instale la abrazadera del cable (4) en la posición que se muestra en la imagen.
7.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de correo (A).
3.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der 4.Entfernen Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4).
Mailbox (A). 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (5) der Mailbox (A) in die Steckbuchse (6) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Installieren Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4) an der im Bild gezeigten Position.
7.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (3) della 4.Rimuovere l'unità sella (4).

mailbox (A). 5.Collegare il connettore (5) della mailbox (A) al connettore (6) del corpo macchina.
6.Installare l'unità sella (4) nella posizione indicata in figura.
7.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (3) della mailbox (A).
3.拆下邮箱（A）的后部盖板 (3)。 4.取下束线夹（4）。

5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（5）插入机器的接插件 (6)。
6.把束线夹 (4) 安装到图示位置。
7.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（3）。
3.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 떼어냅니다 . 4.와이어 새들 (4) 을 분리합니다 .

5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (5) 를 본체의 커넥터 (6) 에 연결합니다 .
6.와이어 새들 (4) 을 그림에 표시된 위치에 설치합니다 .
7.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 다시 장착합니다 .
3.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を取り 4.ワイヤーサドル (4) を外す。

外す。 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(5) を機械本体のコネクター (6) に接続する。
6.ワイヤーサドル (4) を図の位置に取り付ける。
7.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を元通りに取り付ける。
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Z
Y
102
102
8.Install the left cover (Y) in place. 9.Using the two screws (102) removed in step 2 in the installation guide
for the AK-736, install the right cover (Z).
*While pressing the right cover(Z) downwards, fix the right cover(J).
8.Monter le couvercle gauche (Y) en position. 9.À l’aide des deux vis (102) retirées à l’étape 2 du guide d’installation
pour l’AK-736, installer le capot droit (Z).
*Fixer le capot droit (Z) en le maintenant enfoncé vers le bas.
8.Instale la cubierta izquierda (Y) en la ubicación prevista. 9.Con los dos tornillos (102) que quitó en el paso 2 de la guía de insta-
lación para AK-736, instale la cubierta derecha (Z).
*A la vez que ejerce presión sobre la cubierta derecha (Z), fije la cubi-
erta derecha (Z).
8.Installieren Sie die linke Abdeckung (Y). 9.Mit den zwei Schrauben (102), die Sie in Schritt 2 der Installationsan-
leitung für das AK-736 entfernt haben, bringen Sie die rechte Abdeck-
ung (Z) wieder an.
*Drücken Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) leicht nach unten, während Sie
diese befestigen.
8.Installare il coperchio di sinistra (Y) in posizione. 9.Utilizzando le due viti (102) rimosse al punto 2 della procedura
descritta nella guida di installazione del kit AK-736, installare il coper-
chio destro (Z).
*Premere verso il basso il coperchio destro (Z) per fissarlo in
posizione.
8.将左盖板（Y）安装到位。 9.请用 AK-736 安装手册步骤 2 中取下的 2 颗螺丝（102）来安装右盖板

（Z)。
* 把右盖板（Z) 边向下按，边固定。
8.좌측 커버 (Y) 를 제자리에 장착합니다 . 9.AK-736 설치 설명서의 2 단계에서 분리한 나사 (102) 두 개를 사용하
여 우측 커버 (Z) 를 장착합니다 .
* 우측 커버 (Z) 를 아래쪽으로 누르는 동시에 우측 커버 (Z) 를 고정하
십시오 .
8.左カバー(Y) を取り付ける。 9.AK-736 設置手順書の手順 2 で外したビス (102)2 本で、右カバー(Z) を

取付ける。
* 右カバー(Z) を下方向に押さえながら、固定する。
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 7
101
10.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 11.Close the paper conveying unit(101).
the highest. 12.Insert the power plug from the machine into
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and rear pins (7) into the round holes (8) at the front and rear of the mailbox. and verify the machine operates normally.
10.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 11.Fermer l'unité de transport du papier (101).
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. 12.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (7) dans les trous sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ronds (8) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres. ment.
10.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 11.Cierre la unidad de transporte de
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (7) en los orificios papel(101).
redondos (8) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. 12.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
10.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 11.Schließen Sie die Papierführung (101).
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. 12.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (7) in die Rundlöcher (8) Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen. Betrieb zu prüfen.
10.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 11.Chiudere l'unità trasporto carta (101).
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. 12.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- accendere la macchina e controllare che
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (7) nei funzioni correttamente.
fori rotondi (8) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
10.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 11.关闭纸张传输单元（101）。

按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (7) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (8) 中 12.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电
来安装接纸盘。源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
10.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 11.반송 유니트 (101) 를 닫습니다 .
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (7) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (8) 에 삽 12.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
입합니다 . 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
니다 .
10.排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 11.搬送ユニット (101) を閉じる。

排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (7) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (8) 12.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し
に挿入する。込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
認する。
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10) PH-7A/C/D
PH-7A/C/D / (Punch unit)

Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PH-7A/PH-7B/PH-7C/PH-7D
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C D E F
A
I K L
J M
H
E. Spring......................................................... 1 L. Large clamp (for DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110).. 1

English M. Ferrite core ................................................ 1
F. Punch PWB ............................................... 1
Supplied parts G. Waste hole punch box ............................... 1
A. Punch guide............................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
H. M3 × 8 tap Tight S screw ........................... 3
B. Hole punch unit.......................................... 1 I. Label sheet ................................................ 1 material from supplied parts.
C. Motor unit................................................... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) is not used.
J. Film (for DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 .......... 1
D. Stop ring .................................................... 1
K. Small clamp (for DF-770/DF-7120)............ 1
E. Ressort ...................................................... 1 L. Grand collier (pour DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) . 1
Français
F. PWB de la perforatrice............................... 1 M. Noyau de ferrite ......................................... 1
Pièces fournies G. Bac de récupération de la perforatrice....... 1
A. Guide de perforatrice................................. 1 H. Vis S taraudée M3 × 8 ............................... 3 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
B. Perforatrice ................................................ 1 I. Feuillet d’étiquettes.................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
C. Moteur ....................................................... 1 pièces fournies.
J. Film (pour DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 ........ 1
D. Bague d'arrêt ............................................. 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) n'est pas utilisé.
K. Petit collier (pour DF-770/DF-7120)........... 1
E. Resorte ...................................................... 1 L. Sujetador grande (para DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110)1
Español
F. PWB de perforación................................... 1 M. Núcleo de ferrita......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Caja para desechos de la perforación ....... 1
A. Guía de perforación................................... 1 H. Tornillo de ajuste M3 × 8........................... 3 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
B. Perforadora................................................ 1 I. Hoja con etiqueta ...................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
C. Unidad motriz ............................................ 1 das.
J. Película (para DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 ........ 1
D. Anillo de tope............................................. 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) no se utiliza.
K. Sujetador pequeño (para DF-770/DF-7120) .. 1
E. Feder ......................................................... 1 L. Große Klemme (für DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) 1
Deutsch
F. Locher-PWB .............................................. 1 M. Ferritkern ................................................... 1
Gelieferte Teile G. Lochungsabfallbehälter.............................. 1
A. Locherführung ........................................... 1 H. M3 × 8 Passstift-Verbundschrauben.......... 3 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs-
B. Lochereinheit ............................................. 1 I. Aufkleberbogen.......................................... 1 material vollständig von den mitgelieferten
C. Motoreinheit............................................... 1 Teilen.
J. Film(für DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 ............ 1
D. Anschlagring.............................................. 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) wird nicht benötigt.
K. Kleine Klemme (für DF-770/DF-7120) ...... 1
E. Molla .......................................................... 1 L. Morsetto grande (per DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110)1
Italiano
F. Scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione .... 1 M. Nucleo di ferrite.......................................... 1
Parti di fornitura G. Scarto perforazione ................................... 1
A. Guida perforazione .................................... 1 H. Viti con testa a croce S M3 × 8 .................. 3 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
B. Unità di perforazione ................................. 1 I. Foglio di etichette....................................... 1 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
C. Unità motore .............................................. 1
J. Pellicola(per DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 .... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J)non è utilizzato.
D. Anello di bloccaggio................................... 1
K. Morsetto piccolo (per DF-770/DF-7120) .... 1
E. 弹簧 .................................1 K. 固定夹小（DF-770/DF-7120 用 ) ........1

简体中文
F. 打孔单元电路板 .......................1 L. 固定夹大（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 用） .1
附属品 G. 打孔纸屑盒 ...........................1 M. 磁环 .................................1
A. 打孔导向板........................... 1 H. M3 X 8 攻丝紧固型 S 螺丝 ..............3
B. 打孔单元............................. 1 I. 标签纸 ...............................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
C. 电机单元............................. 1 下。
J. 胶片（DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 用 )*1 ......1
D. 止动环............................... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120: 不使用 (J)。
E. 스프링............................................... 1 K. 클램프 소（DF-770/DF-7120 용）.......... 1
한국어
F. 펀치기판............................................ 1 L. 클램프 대（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 용）.. 1
동봉품 G. 펀치폐기박스...................................... 1 M. 페라이트 코어..................................... 1
A. 펀치가이드......................................... 1 H. 나사 M3×8 탭타이트 S......................... 3 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
B. 펀치유니트......................................... 1 I. 라벨 시트........................................... 1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
C. 모터유니트......................................... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) 는 사용되지 않습니
J. 필름（DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 용）*1 .... 1
D. 스톱링............................................... 1 다.
日本語 E. バネ .................................1 L. クランプ大

（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 用）..1
F. パンチ基板 ...........................1 M. フェライトコア .......................1
同梱品 G. パンチくずボックス ...................1
A. パンチガイド......................... 1 H. ビス M3×8 タップタイト S .............3 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
B. パンチユニット....................... 1 I. ラベルシート .........................1 は必ず取り外すこと。
C. モーターユニット..................... 1 *1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) は使用しない。
J. フィルム（DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 用） ...1
D. ストップリング....................... 1
K. クランプ小（DF-770/DF-7120 用）.........1
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 4
1
3
Procedure Removing the cover (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Remove the 2 screws (3) and remove the
Before installing the hole punch unit, make sure If installing on the DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, upper rear cover (4).
the MFP's main power switch is turned off and proceed to step 1 on page 3.
that its power cord is unplugged from the power 1.Remove the screw (1) and remove the small
outlet. rear cover (2).
Install the document finisher first and then install
the hole punch unit.
Procédure Dépose du couvercle (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Déposer les 2 vis (3) et déposer le couvercle
Avant d’installer la perforatrice, s’assurer que Pour l'installation sur le modèle DF-790/DF-791/ supérieur arrière (4).
l’interrupteur d’alimentation principal du MFP est DF-7110, passer à l'étape 1 de la page 3.
hors tension et que le câble d’alimentation est 1.Déposer la vis (1) et déposer le petit couver-
débranché de la prise secteur. cle arrière (2).
Installer d’abord le finisseur de document, puis
installer la perforatrice.
Procedimiento Extracción de la cubierta (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Quite los 2 tornillos (3) y, después, quite la
Antes de instalar la perforadora, asegúrese de que Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790/DF-791/ cubierta trasera superior (4).
el interruptor principal de la alimentación DF-7110, vaya al paso 1 de la página 3.
del MFP esté desconectado y de que el cable de ali-
1.Quite el tornillo (1) y, después, quite la cubi-
mentación esté desenchufado de la toma de corri-
ente de la pared. erta trasera pequeña (2).
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y luego
instale la perforadora.
Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Die 2 Schrauben (3) entfernen und die obere
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit Zur Installation des DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 hintere Abdeckung (4) abnehmen.
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 3.
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und 1.Die Schraube (1) entfernen und die kleine
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. hintere Abdeckung (2) abnehmen.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Lochereinheit an.
Procedura Rimozione del coperchio (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (3) e quindi rimuovere il
Prima di installate l'unità di perforazione, assicu- Se si installa sull'unità DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, pannello superiore posteriore (4).
rarsi che l'interruttore principale dell'MFP sia procedere al passo 1 a pagina 3.
spento e che il cavo di alimentazione sia scolle- 1.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
gato dalla presa di corrente. pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
all’installazione dell’unità di perforazione.
安装步骤拆下盖板（DF-770/DF-7120 时） 2.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (3)，拆下后上部盖板 (4)。

安装打孔单元时，必须事先关闭 MFP 主机的主电安装到 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 上时，跳至 P3 的
源开关，并拔下电源插头后再进行作业。步骤 1。
首先安装装订器，然后安装打孔单元。 1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (1)，拆下后部小盖板 (2)。
설치순서 커버제거（DF-770/DF-7120 의 경우） 2.나사 (3) 2 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (4) 를

펀치유니트를 부착할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 에 장착하는 경우에 제거합니다 .
의 주 전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 는 P3 의 순서 1 로 진행합니다 .
뺀 다음 작업을 할 것 . 1.나사 (1) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (2) 를
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 펀치유니트를 설치 할 제거합니다 .
것.
取付手順カバーの取り外し（DF-770/DF-7120 の場合） 2.ビス (3)2 本を外し、後上カバー(4) を取り

パンチユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 に装着の場合は、P3 の外す。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、電源プラグを手順 1 へ進む。
抜いてから作業すること。 1.ビス (1)1 本を外し、後小カバー(2) を取り
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、パンチ外す。
ユニットを設置すること。
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10
7
5 7
7 9
Removing the cover (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Remove the 3 screws (7) and remove the Installing the hole punch unit
7110) upper rear cover (8). 3.Remove the screw (9) and pull the guide
1.Remove the screw (5) and remove the small (10) outwards.
rear cover (6).
Dépose du couvercle (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Déposer les 3 vis (7) et déposer le couvercle Installation de la perforatrice
7110) supérieur arrière (8). 3.Déposer la vis (9) et tirer le guide (10) vers
1.Déposer la vis (5) et déposer le petit couver- l'extérieur.
cle arrière (6).
Extracción de la cubierta (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y, después, quite la Instalación de la perforadora
7110) cubierta trasera superior (8). 3.Quite el tornillo (9) y tire de la guía (10)
1.Quite el tornillo (5) y, después, quite la cubi- hacia fuera.
erta trasera pequeña (6).
Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-790/DF-791/ 2.Die 3 Schrauben (7) entfernen und die obere Anbringen der Lochereinheit
DF-7110) hintere Abdeckung (8) abnehmen. 3.Die Schraube (9) entfernen und die Führung
1.Die Schraube (5) entfernen und die kleine (10) nach außen ziehen.
hintere Abdeckung (6) abnehmen.
Rimozione del coperchio (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7) e quindi rimuovere il Installare l’unità di perforazione
7110) pannello superiore posteriore (8). 3.Rimuovere la vite (9) ed estrarre la guida
1.Rimuovere la vite (5) e quindi rimuovere il (10) verso l'esterno.
pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
拆下盖板（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 时） 2.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下后上部盖板 (8)。安装打孔单元

1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (5)，拆下后部小盖板 (6)。 3.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (9)，将导向板 (10) 向外拉
出。
커버제거（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 의 경우） 2.나사 (7) 3 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (8) 를 펀치유니트 부착

1.나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (6) 를 제거합니다 . 3.나사 (9) 1 개를 제거하고 가이드 (10) 을 앞
제거합니다 . 으로 끌어 당깁니다 .
カバーの取り外し（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 の場 2.ビス (7)3 本を外し、後上カバー(8) を取りパンチユニットの取り付け

合）外す。 3.ビス (9)1 本を外し、ガイド (10) を手前に引
1.ビス (5)1 本を外し、後小カバー(6) を取りき出す。
外す。
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
38
J
4.After using alcohol to clean the shaded portion (38) of the motor shown for adhering the film (J), adhere the film. (DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 only)
4.Après avoir utilisé de l'alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée (38) sur laquelle le film (J) est apposé, coller ce film. (DF-770/DF-790/DF-791
uniquement)
4.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte sombreada (38) del motor mostrada en la ilustración para pegar la película (J), pegue la película.
(DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 solamente)
4.Den in der Abbildung grau dargestellten Teil (38) des Motors zum Anbringen des Films (J) mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Film anbringen. (nur DF-
770/DF-790/DF-791)
4.Dopo aver usato l’alcool per pulire la parte ombreggiata (38) del motore, illustrata per l’adesione della pellicola (J), far aderire la pellicola. (solo DF-
770/DF-790/DF-791)
4.用酒精清洁电机斜侧处（38）的粘贴位置后，粘贴胶片（J）。( 仅限 DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)
4.모터 사선부（38）의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 필름（J）을 부착합니다 . (DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 만）
4.モーター斜線部（38）の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、フィルム（J）
を貼り付ける。(DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 のみ )
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12
11
5.Install the punch guide (A) so that the leading edge of the guide (11) is below the document finisher frame (12).
5.Monter le guide de la perforatrice (A) de sorte que le bord d'attaque du guide (11) se trouve sous le bâti du retoucheur de document (12).
5.Instale la guía de perforación (A) de forma tal que el borde delantero de la guía (11) quede debajo de la carcasa del finalizador de documentos (12).
5.Die Locherführung (A) so einsetzen, dass die Vorderkante der Führung (11) unter dem Rahmen (12) des Dokument-Finishers liegt.
5.Installare la guida perforazione (A) in modo che il bordo principale della guida (11) sia sotto il telaio (12) della finitrice di documenti.
5.将打孔导向板 (A) 的前端 (11) 安装在装订器的框架 (12) 的下部。
5.펀치가이드 (A) 의 끝 (11) 이 문서 피니셔의 프레임 (12) 밑으로 되도록 장착합니다 .
5.パンチガイド (A) の先端 (11) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム (12) の下になるように取り付ける。
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6.Insert the hole punch unit (B) into the docu- Notes When Installing the Punch Unit
ment finisher. When installing the punch unit at the procedure 6 on page 6, please insert it while slightly holding
it up ( 1 , 2 )
Please note that the hook at the bottom (A) might be damaged if the punch unit is forcibly installed
while holding it down.
6.Insérer la perforatrice (B) dans le retoucheur Notes lors de l'installation de l'unité de perforation:
de document. Lors de l'installation de l'unité de perforation à la procédure 6 de la page 6, veuillez l'insérez en la
soulevant légèrement ( 1 , 2 ).
Veuillez noter que le crochet du bas (A) peut être endommagé si l'unité de perforation est installée
de force en la maintenant vers le bas.
6.Inserte la perforadora (B) en el finalizador de Nota al instalar el kit perforador

documentos. Al instalar el kit perforador según página 6 del procedimiento 6, introdúzcalo elevándolo
ligeramente ( 1 , 2 )
Tenga en cuenta que la pestaña de la parte inferior (A) se puede dañar si el kit de perforado se
fuerza en la instalación.
6.Die Lochereinheit (B) in den Dokument-Fin- Hinweis zur Installation der Locheinheit
isher einsetzen. Wenn Sie die Locheinheit wie in Schritt 6 auf Seite 6 beschrieben installieren, halten Sie die
Locheinheit beim Einsetzen ein wenig nach oben ( 1 , 2 ).
Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Haken (A) am Boden beschädigt werden kann, wenn die Locheinheit
bei der Installation nach unten gehalten wird, so dass zu viel Kraftaufwand erforderlich ist.
6.Inserire l'unità di perforazione (B) nella fini-

Note per l’installazione dell’unità di perforazione.
trice di documenti. Installare l'unità di perforazione, come da procedura 6 pagina 6, inserendola delicatamente e
tenendola sollevata ( 1 , 2 ).
Fare attenzione al gancio nella parte inferiore (A) che potrebbe venir danneggiato se si forza
verso il basso durante l’istallazione.
6.将打孔单元 (B) 插入到装订器中。

6.펀치유니트 (B) 를 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니

다. ] ]
6.パンチユニット (B) をドキュメントフィ

ニッシャーに挿入する。㻢㻢
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B
C
13 16
B
15
14
C
C
7.Raise the hole punch unit (B) slightly and fit the hook (13) on the motor unit (C) into the groove 8.Secure the motor unit (C) with the 2 screws
(14) in the document finisher. At the same time, insert the rod (15) on the motor unit (C) into the (H).
hole (16) in the hole punch unit (B).
7.Lever légèrement la perforatrice (B) et insérer le crochet (13) du moteur (C) dans la rainure (14) 8.Fixer le moteur (C) à l'aide de 2 vis (H).
du retoucheur de document. Insérer en même temps la tige (15) du moteur (C) dans le trou (16)
de la perforatrice (B).
7.Levante ligeramente la perforadora (B) y encaje el gancho (13) de la unidad motriz (C) en la 8.Asegure la unidad motriz (C) con los 2 tornil-
ranura (14) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte la varilla (15) de la unidad los (H).
motriz (C) en el orificio (16) de la perforadora (B).
7.Die Lochereinheit (B) leicht anheben und den Haken (13) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die Nut (14) 8.Die Motoreinheit (C) mit den 2 Schrauben
des Dokument-Finishers einsetzen. Dabei auch die Stange (15) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die (H) sichern.
Öffnung (16) der Lochereinheit (B) einstecken.
7.Sollevare leggermente l'unità di perforazione (B) ed inserire il gancio (13) sull'unità motore (C) 8.Fissare l'unità motore (C) con le 2 viti (H).
nella scanalatura (14) della finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire l'asta (15)
sull'unità motore (C) nel foro (16) dell'unità di perforazione (B).
7.稍稍抬起打孔单元 (B)，将电机单元 (C) 的卡扣 (13) 嵌入装订器的沟槽 (14) 内。与此同时，将电 8.使用 2 颗螺丝 (H) 来固定电机单元 (C)。
机单元 (C) 的轴 (15) 插入打孔单元 (B) 的孔 (16) 中。
7.펀치유니트 (B) 를 조금 들면서 모터유니트 (C) 후크 (13) 를 문서 피니셔의 구 (14) 에 꽂습니다 . 8.나사 (H) 2 개로 모터유니트 (C) 를 고정합니
이것과 동시에 모터유니트 (C) 의 축 (15) 을 펀치유니트 (B) 구멍 (16) 에 삽입합니다 . 다.
7.パンチユニット (B) を少し持ち上げながら、モーターユニット (C) のフック (13) をドキュメン 8.ビス (H)2 本で、
モーターユニット (C) を固
トフィニッシャーの溝 (14) にはめ込む。これと同時に、モーターユニット (C) の軸 (15) をパン定する。
チユニット (B) の穴 (16) に挿入する。
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17
15
E 18
9.Fit the stop ring (D) over the motor unit rod 10.Run the hole punch unit wire (17) through
(15) and fit the spring (E) between the hole the motor unit edging (18).
punch unit and motor unit.
9.Monter la bague d'arrêt (D) sur la tige du 10.Faire passer le câble de la perforatrice (17)
moteur (15) et insérer le ressort (E) entre la dans le passage de câbles du moteur (18).
perforatrice et le moteur.
9.Coloque el anillo de tope (D) sobre la varilla 10.Tienda el cable de la perforadora (17) a
de la unidad motriz (15) y coloque el resorte través de la pestaña de la unidad motriz
(E) entre la perforadora y la unidad motriz. (18).
9.Den Anschlagring (D) auf die Stange (15) 10.Das Kabel (17) der Lochereinheit durch den
der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder (E) Kantenschutz (18) der Motoreinheit führen.
zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit
einsetzen.
9.Inserire l'anello di bloccaggio (D) sull'asta 10.Far passare il cavo dell'unità di perforazione
(15) dell'unità motore ed inserire molla (E) (17) attraverso il bordo (18) dell'unità
tra l'unità di perforazione e l'unità motore. motore.
9.将止动环 (D) 嵌入到电机单元的轴 (15) 上， 10.将打孔单元的电线 (17) 穿过电机单元的包边

在打孔单元与电机单元之间安装弹簧 (E)。孔 (18)。
9.모터유니트 축 (15) 에 스톱링 (D) 을 꽂고 펀 10.펀치유니트의 전선 (17) 을 모터유니트의 에

치유니트와 모터유니트 사이에 스프링 (E) 징 (18) 에 지나가게 합니다 .
을설치합니다 .
9.モーターユニットの軸 (15) にストップリン 10.パンチユニットの電線 (17) をモーターユ

グ (D) をはめ、パンチユニットとモーターユニットのエッジング (18) に通す。
ニットの間にバネ (E) を取り付ける。
8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
25
23
21 25
24
F F
20
20
22 H
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-770/DF-7120) 13.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
If installing on the DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, proceed to step 11 on page 13. nectors (25) on the punch PWB (F).
11.Fit the 2 hooks (20) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (21) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (23) on the document finisher into the hole (22) in the punch PWB (F).
12.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (24) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-770/ 12.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (24)
DF-7120). à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une
Pour une installation sur le modèle DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, passer à l'étape 11 en page 13. vis (H).
11.Insérer les 2 crochets (20) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (21) du retoucheur 13.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (23) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (22) connecteurs (25) de la PWB de la perfora-
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F). trice (F).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-770/DF- 12.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable
7120) de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (24) y
Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, vaya al paso 11 de la página 13. el PWB de perforación (F).
11.Coloque los 2 ganchos (20) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (21) del finalizador de docu- 13.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (23) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (22) conectores (25) del PWB de perforación (F).
del PWB de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-770/DF-7120) 12.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (24)
Zur Installation des DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 weitergehen zu Schritt 11 auf Seite 13. der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F)
11.Die 2 Haken (20) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (21) am Dokument-Finisher einset- festziehen.
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (23) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (22) auf der Locher- 13.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
PWB (F) einsetzen. verbinder (25) der Locher-PWB (F)
anschließen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-770/ 13.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
DF-7120) nei connettori (25) sulla scheda a circuiti
Se si installa sull'unità DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, procedere al passo 11 a pagina 13. stampati di perforazione (F).
11.Inserire i 2 ganci (20) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (21) della
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (23) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (22) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
12.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (24) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-770/DF-7120 时） 13.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的
安装到 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 上时，跳至 P13 的步骤 11。接插件 (25) 相连接。
11.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (20) 挂在装订器的缺口 (21) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔
(22) 卡入装订器的突出部 (23)。
12.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (24) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-770/DF-7120 의 경우） 13.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥

DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 에 장착하는 경우에는 P13 의 순서 11 로 진행합니다 . 터 (25) 에 접속합니다 .
11.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (20) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (21) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍
(22) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (23) 에 넣습니다 .
12.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (24) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け（DF-770/DF-7120 の場合） 13.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板

DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 に装着の場合は、P13 の手順 11 へ進む。 (F) のコネクター(25) に接続する。
11.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (20)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (21) に引っ掛け
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (22) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (23) に入れる。
12.ビス (H)1 本で、パンチユニットのアース線 (24) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
M
27
39
26
14.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 15.Fasten two wires which were connected in 16.Install the small clamp (K) on the finisher,
nectors (27) on the DF main PWB (26). step 14 with the clamp (39). then pass and fasten the wires from the
motor unit and hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
14.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 15.Attacher les deux fils qui ont été connectés à 16.Monter le petit collier (K) sur le retoucheur
foratrice aux connecteurs (27) de la PWB l'étape 14 avec le collier (39). puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de
principale du DF (26). la perforatrice dans ce collier pour les fixer
en place.
17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
14.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 15.Apriete los dos cables que conectó en el 16.Instale el sujetador pequeño (K) en el final-
foración a los conectores (27) del PWB prin- paso 14 con la abrazadera (39). izador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de
cipal del DF (26). la unidad motriz y la perforadora.
17.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
14.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 15.Befestigen Sie die beiden Kabel, die in 16.Die kleine Klemme (K) am Finisher anbrin-
verbinder (27) der DF-Haupt-PWB (26) Schritt 14 verbunden wurden, mit der gen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit
anschließen. Schelle (39). und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und
befestigen.
17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
14.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 15.Fissare i due cavi collegati al punto 14 con il 16.Installare il morsetto piccolo (K) sul finitore, e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (27) morsetto (39). quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità
sulla scheda principale PWB (26) della DF. motore e dall’unità di perforazione.
17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
14.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 15.使用固定夹（39）来固定步骤 14 中连接的 2 16.把小固定夹（K）安装在装订器上，从电机单

(26) 的接插件 (27) 连接。根电线。元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固
定。
17.用磁环（M）套住导线。
14.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 15.순서 14 로 접속한 2 개의 전선을 클램프 16.클램프 소（K）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니

(26) 의 커넥터 (27) 에 접속합니다 . (39) 로 고정해 주십시오 . 트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키
고 고정합니다 .
17.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다
.
14.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 15.手順 14 で接続した 2 本の電線をクランプ 16.クランプ小（K）をフィニッシャーに取り付

(26) のコネクター(27) に接続する。 (39) で固定する。け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットから
の電線を通し、固定する。
17.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28
18.Replace the upper rear cover (4) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (28) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (2).
18.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (4) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (28) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (2).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (28) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(4) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (2).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (4) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (2) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (28) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(4) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
18.按原样安装后上部盖板 (4) 与后部小盖板 19.打开前上部盖板 (28)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。

(2)。
18.뒷 상커버 (4) 와 후 소커버 (2) 를 원래대로 19.앞 상커버 (28) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
18.後上カバー(4) と後小カバー(2) を元通り取 19.前上カバー(28) を開き、

パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J( B )
B C J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the 21.Close the upper front cover (28).
locations shown in the illustration: B, C.
20.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet 21.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (28).
d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration : B, C.
20.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las 21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (28).
etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración: B, C.
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber 21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28)
vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen: B, C. schließen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) 21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (28).
sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: B, C.
20.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：B、C。 21.关闭前上部盖板 (28)。
20.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：Ｂ，Ｃ . 21.앞 상커버 (28) 를 닫습니다 .
20.ラベルシート (J) 内の B、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。 21.前上カバー(28) を閉じる。
12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
32
33 34
31 34
30
29
F
F
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) 13.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
11.Fit the 2 hooks (29) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (30) in the document finisher. At the same nectors (34) on the punch PWB (F).
time, insert the projection (32) on the document finisher into the hole (31) in the punch PWB (F).
12.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (33) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-790/ 13.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
DF-791/DF-7110). connecteurs (34) de la PWB de la perfora-
11.Insérer les 2 crochets (29) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (30) du retoucheur trice (F).
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (32) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (31)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
12.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (33) à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-790/DF-791/ 13.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
DF-7110) conectores (34) del PWB de perforación (F).
11.Coloque los 2 ganchos (29) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (30) del finalizador de docu-
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (32) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (31)
del PWB de perforación (F).
12.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (33) y el PWB
de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) 13.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
11.Die 2 Haken (29) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (30) am Dokument-Finisher einset- verbinder (34) der Locher-PWB (F)
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (32) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (31) auf der Locher- anschließen.
PWB (F) einsetzen.
12.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (33) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-790/ 13.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
DF-791/DF-7110) nei connettori (34) sulla scheda a circuiti
11.Inserire i 2 ganci (29) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (30) della stampati di perforazione (F).
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (32) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (31) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
12.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (33) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 时） 13.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的

11.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (29) 挂在装订器的缺口 (30) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔接插件 (34) 相连接。
(31) 卡入装订器的突出部 (32)。
12.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (33) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 의 경우） 13.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥

11.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (29) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (30) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍 터 (34) 에 접속합니다 .
(31) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (32) 에 넣습니다 .
12.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (33) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 の場合） 13.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板

11.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (29)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (30) に引っ掛け (F) のコネクター(34) に接続する。
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (31) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (32) に入れる。
12.ビス (H)1 本で、
パンチユニットのアース線 (33) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
L
36
35
14.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 15.Install the small clamp (L) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (36) on the DF main PWB (35). hole punch unit.
16.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
14.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 15.Installer le grand collier (L) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de la perfo-
foratrice aux connecteurs (36) de la PWB ratrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place.
principale du DF (35). 16.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
14.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 15.Instale el sujetador grande (L) en el finalizador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foración a los conectores (36) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (35). 16.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
14.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 15.Die große Klemme (L) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (36) der DF-Haupt-PWB (35) Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen.
anschließen. 16.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
14.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 15.Installare il morsetto grante (L) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (36) dall’unità di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (35) della DF. 16.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
14.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 15.把大固定夹（L）安装在装订器上，从电机单元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固定。

(35) 的接插件 (36) 连接。 16.用磁环（M）套住导线。
14.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 15.클램프 대（L）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키고 고정합
(35) 의 커넥터 (36) 에 접속합니다 . 니다 .
16.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다 .
14.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 15.クランプ大（L）をフィニッシャーに取り付け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットからの電線を

(35) のコネクター(36) に接続する。通し、
固定する。
16.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
37
17.Replace the upper rear cover (8) and small 18.Open the upper front cover (37) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (6).
17.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (8) et 18.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (37) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (6).
17.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 18.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (37) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(8) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (6).
17.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (8) und die kle- 18.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (6) wieder einsetzen.
17.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 18.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (37) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(8) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
17.按原样安装后上部盖板 (8) 与后部小盖板 18.打开前上部盖板 (37)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。

(6)。
17.뒷 상커버 (8) 와 후 소커버 (6) 를 원래대로 18.앞 상커버 (37) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
17.後上カバー(8) と後小カバー(6) を元通り取 18.前上カバー(37) を開き、

パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A
C
J( A )
J( C )
19.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the locations shown in the illustration: A, C.
20.Close the upper front cover (37).
19.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration :
A, C.
20.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (37).
19.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican
en la ilustración: A, C.
20.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (37).
19.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung
angegebenen Stellen: A, C.
20.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) schließen.
19.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: A, C.
20.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (37).
19.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：A、C。
20.关闭前上部盖板 (37)。
19.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：A，Ｃ .

20.앞 상커버 (37) 를 닫습니다 .
19.ラベルシート (J) 内の A、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。
20.前上カバー(37) を閉じる。
16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a b
[Adjusting the hole punch position] Adjusting the hole punch entry registration
1.Connect the MFP power plug to the wall out- 1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Regist.
let and turn the MFP main power switch on. 2.Adjust the values.
2.Make a test copy in punch mode. When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
3.If any off-centering is observed, follow the When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
procedure below to adjust the hole position. 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
[Réglage de la position des perforations] Réglage de l'enregistrement de l'entrée des perforations

1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation du MFP dans la prise 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Regist.
murale et mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP 2.Régler les valeurs.
sous tension.
2. Effectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation. Si le papier est alimenté de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
3. Si les perforations sont décentrées, suivre la Si le papier est froissé exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
procédure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
perforation.
[Ajuste de la posición de perforación] Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforación

1. Conecte el enchufe del MFP en el receptáculo de 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Regist.
pared y encienda el interruptor principal del MFP. 2.Ajuste los valores.
2. Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de per- Cuando el papel alimentado está torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuración.
foración. Cuando el papel se dobló copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
3. Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
abajo para ajustar la posición del agujero.
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition] Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung

1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist.
Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Hauptschalter ein. Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
2. Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen. Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3. Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione] Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione
1. Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione 1.Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Regist.
dell’MFP alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e 2.Regolare i valori.
accendere l’interruttore principale di alimentazione.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore
2. Eseguire una copia di prova in modalità di perfora-
zione. dell'impostazione.
3. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
［打孔位置的调节］打孔装入定位调节
1.将 MFP 主机上的电源插头插入电源插座中， 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Regist。
打开主电源开关。 2.调整设定值。
2.在打孔模式下进行测试复印。纸张斜向搬运时的复印样本 (a)：调高设定值。
3.打孔位置有偏差时，按以下步骤进行调节。纸张作 Z 字折时的复印样本 (b)：调低设定值。
［펀치위치의 조정］ 펀치반입 레지스트 조정

1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Regist 를 선택합니다 .
전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
2.펀치모드에서 시험복사를 합니다 . 용지가 경사로 반송되는 경우의 복사샘플 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
3.펀치위치가 벗어난 경우에는 다음 순서로 조 용지가 Z 꺾임이 있는 경의 복사샘플 (b)：설정치를 내립니다 .
정합니다 . 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
［パンチ位置の調整］パンチ搬入レジスト調整
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Regist を選択する。
込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。 2.設定値を調整する。
2.パンチモードでテストコピーを行う。用紙が斜めに搬送される場合コピーサンプル (a)：設定値を上げる。
3.パンチ位置がずれていた場合、次の手順で調用紙が Z 折れする場合コピーサンプル (b)：設定値を下げる。
整を行う。 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Feed. <Reference value (c)>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: 13 mm; Inch specification: 9.5 mm
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
(c): Increase the setting value.
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Feed. <Valeur de référence (c)>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: 13 mm; Spécifications en pouces: 9,5 mm
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la alimentación de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Feed. <Valor de referencia (c)>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: 13 mm; en pulgadas: 9,5 mm
Si la posición de perforación está más cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuración.
Si la posición de perforación está más alejada del borde que el valor de referen-
cia (c): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed. <Bezugswert (c)>
2. Die Werte einstellen. Metrischer Abstand: 13 mm; Abstand in Zoll: 9,5 mm
Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Feed. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: 13 mm; Specificazione in pollici: 9,5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di mm
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置搬运调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。

1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Feed。＜基准值 (c) ＞
2.调整设定值。公制规格：13mm、英制规格：9.5mm
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 短时：调高设定值。
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 长时：调低设定值。
펀치위치 반송조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Feed 를 선택합 ＜기준치 (c) ＞
니다 . 센치사양：13mm, 인치사양：9.5mm
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 짧은 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 긴 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
パンチ位置搬送調整 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。

Punch Feed を選択す＜基準値 (c) ＞
る。センチ仕様：13mm、インチ仕様：9.5mm
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より短い場合：設定値を上げる。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より長い場合：設定値を下げる。
18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
e f
d
f
Centering the hole punch position 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Width. <Reference value>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: d = 80 mm ± 0.5, e = 40 mm ± 2
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Decrease the Inch specification: d = 2.75 inch ± 0.5, e = 1.375 inch ± 2,
setting value. f = 4.25 inch ± 0.5
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: Increase the
setting value.
Centrage de la position de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Width. <Valeur de référence>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Diminuez la valeur de Spécifications en pouces: d = 2,75 pouces ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pouces ± 2,
réglage. f = 4.25 pouces ± 0,5
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine: Augmentez la valeur
de réglage.
Centrado de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Width. <Valor de referencia>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: En pulgadas: d = 2,75 pulgada ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pulgada ± 2,
Reduzca el valor de configuración. f = 4.25 ± 0,5 pulgada
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
máquina: Aumente el valor de configuración.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch <Bezugswert>
Width. Metrischer Abstand: d = 80 mm ± 0,5; e = 40 mm ± 2
2. Die Werte einstellen. Abstand in Zoll: d = 2,75 Zoll ± 0,5, e = 1,375 Zoll ± 2,
Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert verringern. f = 4.25 Zoll ± 0,5
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert
erhöhen.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Width. <Valore di riferimento>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della Specificazione in pollici: d = 2,75 pollici ± 0.5, e = 1,375 pollici ± 2,
macchina: Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. f = 4.25 pollici ± 0.5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
macchina: Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置中心调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。

1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Width。＜基准值＞
2.调整设定值。公制规格：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
打孔位置向机器前部偏移时：调低设定值。英制规格：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
打孔位置向机器后部偏移时：调高设定值。
펀치위치 센터조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Width 를 선택합 ＜기준치＞
니다 . 센치 사양：d=80mm±0.5, e=40mm±2
2.설정치를 조정합니다 . 인치사양：d=2.75inch±0.5, e=1.375inch±2, f=4.25inch±0.5
펀치구멍이 기기 앞측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 뒷측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
パンチ位置センター調整 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。

Punch Width を選択す＜基準値＞
る。センチ仕様：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
2.設定値を調整する。インチ仕様：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
パンチ穴の位置が機械前側にずれている場合：設定値を下げる。
パンチ穴の位置が機械後側にずれている場合：設定値を上げる。
19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11) FAX System 12
FAX System 12
Installation Guide
[CONFIDENTIAL]
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
FAX System 12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B C
Color MFP
25/25ppm,32/32ppm, Color MFP
35/35ppm,40/40ppm, 70/65ppm,80/70ppm
50/50ppm,60/55ppm
Black & White MFP
Black & White MFP 30ppm,32ppm, Black & White MFP
40ppm,50ppm,60ppm 35ppm,40ppm 70ppm,80ppm
English
For installation with a MFP(A), see Page 1 to Page 4.
For installation with a MFP(C), see Page 9 to Page 12.
Français
1.
Français
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A), voir Page 1 à Page 4.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(C), voir Page 9 à Page 12.
1.
Español
Para la instalación con un MFP(A), consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 4.
Para la instalación con un MFP(C), consulte las páginas de la 9 a la 12.
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) siehe Seiten 1 bis 4.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(C) siehe Seiten 9 bis 12.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A), vedere le pagine da 1 a 4.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(C), vedere le pagine da 9 a 12.
简体中文
1.
安装到 MFP(A) 上时，请参见 P1-P4。
安装到 MFP(C) 上时，请参见 P9-P12。
1.한국어
MFP(A) 에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~4 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
MFP(C) 에 설치하는 경우 9 페이지 ~12 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
装着する対象によって、取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、
以下のページに記載しています。
MFP(A) に設置する場合；1 ページ～ 4 ページ
MFP(C) に設置する場合；9 ページ～ 12 ページ
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B C D 1
E
2
3 GH
4 PR I
PQ S AB
5 RS C
JK
L
TU
V DE
TU F
OP V MN
ER WX O
WX Y
YZ
F G H I J
100V 120V 230V 240V 110V 220V 220-240V

Japan North Europe Australia/ Taiwan China Asia/
America/ New Zea- Korea
Latin land
America
A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D - 1 1 1 1 1 1
E - - - 1 - - -
F - - - - - 1 -
G - - - - - 1 -
H - - - - - 1 -
I - - - - 1 - -
J - - - - - 1 -
1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 2
A
OPT1
4 (For New Zealand model)

B
(Modèle pour la Nouvelle-Zélande)
(Para el modelo Nuevo Zelandés)
(Für Neuseeland-Modell)
(Per il modello Nuova Zelanda)
ӵ䘲⭘Ҿᯠ㾯‫ޠ‬රਧ
OG⎨㫼⣐☐G㇠㛅⬀GP
ࢽ࣮ࣗࢪ࣮ࣛࣥࢻ௙ᵝࡢࡳ
C B
C
C
2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 A
D
ABC DEF
1 ABC DEF
2 GHI JKL MNO

GHI JKL MNO
3 PRS TUV WXY
4 PQRS TUV WXYZ

PRS TUV WXY
5 OPER
OPER
(Only when NK-7110/NK-7100 is installed) (Excluding 100 V models)

(Uniquement lors de l'installation de NK-7110/NK-7100) (Sauf sur les modèles 100 V)
(Solo si está instalada la unidad NK-7110/NK-7100) (A excepción de los modelos de 100 V)
(Nur wenn NK-7110/NK-7100 installiert ist) (Ausgenommen 100-V-Modelle)
(Solo quando è installato NK-7110/NK-7100) (Esclusi i modelli da 100 V)
ᖃ䇮㖞 1.1. ᰦ 9 㿴Ṭԕཆ
OGurT^XXWVurT^XWWG㢨G㉘㾌═Gᷱ㟤⬀GPGOXWW}㇠㛅G㢨㞬P
1.1.ࢆタ⨨ࡋ࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡢࡳ㸯㸮㸮㹔௙ᵝ௨እ
F I E
G
For Taiwan model For New Zealand model

For China model
7 (When installing the Multiport)

(En cas d'installation de la deuxième ligne de fax)
(Al instalar la segunda línea de fax)

(Wenn Sie eine zweite Fax-Karte installieren)
(Quando si installa la seconda linea Fax)

ᆹ㻵Ҷཊ࣏㜭ㄟਓ
OPT2
O⭴䐤䔠䏬⪰G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤P
A
࣐ࣝࢳ࣏࣮ࢺࢆタ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ
D E G I
1
2
G
3
H
I
P
4
A
S
B
P
5
C
Q
R
JK
S
L
T
U
D
V
E
T
F
U
M
V
N
O
O
P
E
W
R
F H J
X
Y
W
X
Y
Z
3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8
A
Initialize the FAX circuit board. Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.

1.If the FAX PWBs were installed simultaneously to OPT1 and OPT2 (all Fax 1.Se sono state installate simultaneamente le schede FAX PWB su OPT1 e
PWBs are initialized), perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini-tialize the OPT2 (tutte le schede FAX PWB sono inizializzate), eseguire il modo
FAX PWBs. manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB.
2.If the FAX circuit board has been added to OPT2 (to initialize the FAX ircuit 2.Se la scheda a circuiti è stata aggiunta all’OPT2 (per inzializzare la scheda a
board in OPT2) circuiti FAX nell’OPT2)
Initialize OPT2 by pressing [PORT2], and the [Start] key in this order in the Inizializzare OPT2 premendo [PORT2] e il tasto [Avvio] in questo ordine nel
maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode U600. If modo di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600.
[ALL] is selected in U698, both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized. Se viene selezionato [ALL] nel modo U698, entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono
For details, see the service manual. inizializzati. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX. Ֆⵕ⭫䐥ᶵⲺࡓခौ

1.Si les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax ont été installées en même temps que 1.ᖃᢺՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯ਼ᰦᆹ㻵ࡠ 237 ઼ 237 ᰦ˄‫ޘ‬䜘ⲴՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯࡍ࿻ॆ˅ˈᢗ
OPT1 et OPT2 (toutes les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax sont initialisées), 㹼㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈࡍ࿻ॆՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯǄ
exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser les cartes de circuit 2.൘ 237 к໎䇮ᰦ
imprimé du fax. 237 ⲴՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯࡍ࿻ॆ
2.Si la carte à circuits FAX a été ajoutée à l’OPT2 (pour initialiser la carte à ਚ䘋㹼 237 ࡍ࿻ॆᰦˈ൘㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8 ⣦ᘱлˈ᤹亪ᒿ᤹л>3257@ǃ
circuits FAX dans l’OPT2) >ᔰ࿻@䭞ˈᢗ㹼㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8Ǆ൘ 8 ⣦ᘱл䇮ᇊ > $//@ᰦˈՊ֯ 237
Initialiser l’OPT2 en appuyant sur [PORT2] et la touche [Départ] dans cet ઼ 237 ൷ࡍ࿻ॆǄᴹ‫ޣ‬䈖㓶ؑ᚟ˈ䈧৲㿱㔤‫؞‬᡻޼Ǆ
ordre en mode de maintenance U698, et exécuter le mode de maintenance
U600. Si [ALL] est sélectionné dans U698, l’OPT1 et l’OPT2de détails, se
reporter au manuel d’entretien.
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. mhGG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㢌GG㸼ὤ䞈

1.Si se instalaron FAX PWB simultáneamente a OPT1 y OPT2 (se ini-cializan 1.vw{X ḰGvw{Y 㜄GmhG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㡸G┍㐐㜄G㉘㾌䚐Gᷱ㟤 O ⯜☔GmhG
todos los FAX PWB), ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar 䟀⦐ὤ䑄㢨G㸼ὤ䞈╜ PSG⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|]WW 㡸G㍌䚽䚌㜠GmhG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㡸G
los FAX PWB. 㸼ὤ䞈䚝⏼␘ U
2.Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agregó a OPT2 (para inicializar la tarjeta 2.vw{Y 㜄G㫑㉘䚐Gᷱ㟤 Ovw{Y 㢌Gmh ὤ䑄㡸G㸼ὤ䞈 P
de circuitos de FAX en OPT2) ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘⯜☐G|]`_ 㜄㉐Gwvy{YSG㐐㣅䇘G㍐㡰⦐G⌸⪹⏼␘ UG
Inicialice el OPT2 presionando [PORT2] y la tecla de [Inicio] en ese orden en ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|]WW 㡸G㐘䚽䚌ḔGmhG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㡸G㸼ὤ䞈䚝⏼␘ U|]`_
el modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento 㜄㉐Ghss㡸G㉘㥉䚌⮨Gvw{X ḰGvw{YG㛅㯱㡸G㸼ὤ䞈䚌ὤG⚀ⱬ㜄G㨰㢌䚔Gᶷ U
U600. Si se selecciona [ALL] en U698, se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2. ㇵ㉬⏈G㉐⽸㏘G⬘⎨㛰㡸G㵬㦤䚔Gᶷ U
Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. )$;ᇶᯈࡢึᮇ໬

1.Falls die FAX-Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden (alle 237 ࡜ 237 ࡟ )$; ᇶᯈࢆྠ᫬࡟タ⨨ࡋࡓሙྜ ࡍ࡭࡚ࡢ )$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬
FAX-Karten werden initialisiert), führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ)$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࠋ
um die FAX-Karten zu initialisieren. 237 ࡟ቑタࡋࡓሙྜ 237 ࡢ )$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬
2.Wenn die FAX-Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist (um die ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࡛>3257@ࠊ>ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ@࣮࢟ࡢ㡰࡟ᢲࡍࠋ࣓ࣥࢸ
FAX-Leit-erplatte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren) ࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ)$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࠋ8 ࡛>$//@ࢆタᐃ
OPT2 initialisieren. Dazu [PORT2] und die [Start]-Taste im Wartungsmodus ࡍࡿ࡜ 237 ࡜ 237 ୧᪉ࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࡢ࡛ὀពࡍࡿࡇ࡜ࠋヲ⣽ࡣࢧ࣮ࣅࢫ࣐
U698 in dieser Reihenfolge drücken und den Wartungsmodus U600 ࢽࣗ࢔ࣝࢆཧ↷ࡢࡇ࡜ࠋ
ausführen. Wenn [ALL] in U698 gewählt wird, werden OPT1 und OPT2
initialisiert. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B
A B C D 1
E
2
3 GH
4 PR I
PQ S AB
5 RS C
JK
L
TU
V DE
TU F
OP V MN
ER WX O
WX Y
YZ
F G H I J
100V 120V 230V 240V 110V 220V 220-240V

Latin land
America
A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D - 1 1 1 1 1 1
E - - - 1 - - -
F - - - - - 1 -
G - - - - - 1 -
H - - - - - 1 -
I - - - - 1 - -
J - - - - - 1 -
5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 2
B ߑ
OPT1
ߒ

B
ӵ䘲⭘Ҿᯠ㾯‫ޠ‬රਧ
OG⎨㫼⣐☐G㇠㛅⬀GP C
ࢽ࣮ࣗࢪ࣮ࣛࣥࢻ௙ᵝࡢࡳ
C
B C
6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5
D
ABC DEF
1 ABC DEF
B
2 GHI JKL MNO
GHI JKL MNO
3 PRS TUV WXY
4 PQRS TUV WXYZ

PRS TUV WXY
5 OPER
OPER

6
F I E
G
H
For China model For Taiwan model For New Zealand model
7
(When installing the Multiport)

O⭴䐤䔠䏬⪰G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤P A
OPT2
࣐ࣝࢳ࣏࣮ࢺࢆタ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ
D E G I
1
2
G
3
H
I
P
4
A
S
B
P
5
C
Q
R
JK
S
L
T
U
D
V
E
T
F
U
M
V
N
O
O
P
E
W
R
F H J
X
Y
W
X
Y
Z
7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8
ߑ ON
ߒ ON




8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A B C D 1
E
2
C
3 GH
4 PR I
PQ S AB
5 RS C
JK
L
TU
V DE
TU F
OP V MN
ER WX O
WX Y
YZ
F G H I J
100V 120V 230V 240V 110V 220V 220-240V

Latin land
America
A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D - 1 1 1 1 1 1
E - - - 1 - - -
F - - - - - 1 -
G - - - - - 1 -
H - - - - - 1 -
I - - - - 1 - -
J - - - - - 1 -
9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 2
ߑ OFF
C
ߒ OFF
3 4
OPT1

B
ӵ䘲⭘Ҿᯠ㾯‫ޠ‬රਧ C
OG⎨㫼⣐☐G㇠㛅⬀GP
B ࢽ࣮ࣗࢪ࣮ࣛࣥࢻ௙ᵝࡢࡳ
C
C
10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D
6 1 ABC DEF
ABC DEF
2 GHI JKL MNO

GHI JKL MNO
3 PRS TUV WXY
4 PQRS TUV WXYZ

PRS TUV WXY
5 OPER
OPER
C

7
F I E
G
H
For China model For Taiwan model For New Zealand model
8 (When installing the Multiport)



O⭴䐤䔠䏬⪰G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤P OPT2
࣐ࣝࢳ࣏࣮ࢺࢆタ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ A
D E G I
1
2
G
3
H
I
P
4
A
S
B
P
5
C
Q
R
JK
S
L
T
U
D
V
J
E
T
F
U
M
V
N
O
O
P
E
W
R
F H
X
Y
W
X
Y
Z
11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 10
11




12

SM 3262i 4062i ENG Rev20 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM 3262i 4062i ENG Rev20 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM 3262i 4062i ENG Rev20 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

Notation of products in the manual

3262i : 32 ppm model

page 4-3 Correction: 302MV9406_ → 302V69411_

2 22/March/2018 page 4-3 Change: Parts No of primary paper feed unit

page 5-3 Correction: USB folder structure

Safety warnings and precautions

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

2. Precautions for Maintenance

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

1 Specifications ................................................................................................ 1-1

2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

3 - 3 Paper feed/conveying section................................................................................................................. 3-11

4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ..................................................................................... 4-63

5 Firmware ........................................................................................................ 5-1

6 Maintenance mode ........................................................................................ 6-1

7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 7-1

(3-9)Image is missing partly ................................................................................................................... 7-20

(6-17)Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 7-48

8 PWBs .............................................................................................................. 8-1

9 Appendixes .................................................................................................... 9-1

Light source White LED

*1: *1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

(2) Copy Functions

(3) Printer Functions

(4) Scanner Functions

Weight Approx. 9 kg /19.84 lb Approx. 7.3 kg /16.09 lb Approx. 14.5 kg /31.97 lb

(5-2)Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

(5-3)Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet × 2)

(5-6)Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher option)

(5-7)Mailbox (3,000-Sheet Finisher option)

(5-8)FAX System (FAX System 12)

Applicable line Subscriber telephone line

Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

Error Correction ECM

Network FAX functions

Interface 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T

(The specification is to change for efficiency improvement without notice.)

1 Cassette 7 Inner Tray

12 Toner waste box 19 Fuser unit

(2) The main unit (Rear side)

26 DP link connector cover 32 Option Interface Slot

(3) Operation Panel

(1) DP-7110 (1) DP-7100 (1) DP-7120

(1) PLATEN COVER

(6) PF-791 *1 (7) PF-810 *1

(9) Card Authentication kit (B)

(10) FAX System 12 (13) IB-35 *3 (15) DT-730(B)

(11) IB-50 (14) HD-12 *4

(17) Data Security Kit(E)

(20) Scan extension kit(A)

1: 1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

(6) PF-791 1 (7) PF-810 1

3: Except 120 V model, 4: Except 120 V in 32 ppm model